. *“* @ eee eee

4a - : '* ee & sewed

e+ @ wee ene

far

*#-e eve

Pe ee

ss €

. “<«

ve, ©

. ee “es w@ereet

C8466 4s 68 + 4 &

“~ *-*# @ «&

- “€¢tbtee ~*© se - @ @ ee

- 6s @s32@ © GOW SB 8

& “-.* © @ -—e.

- *feetee .

+ *¢e #@e eee ee

~~ *_es «© oe © © & &

« e#teoeotereaoeveseve eee .

a “=e wveeeteteveewe ees .

eel * 8. ©8 6866 eH 4 © -“*

“- - 7_e ee eee ee ee -

- ene Ceoeevwvpeeeweeeeese *- «

*» « eeseeceoeeseew#eéceesewptetveeouesneaeneeseees «

~ ‘© + ¢# @ eee eo meee e He .

oe eeepeoeoeseveeeeveaev ees *

”- sweetest @wre eb ewe ee . “we we

“a 6 ee GO @ t «= 9 2S SHC ECHR GHP Eee 18 © 8.8 6%

- ee @OvweaceaaeeGeoeeeevewmineesevneeeuvreseoeewss ..

-, © -—*. © fe wa wee ee rthlhrTChC COChlUchhlhhlUhe oe 2 * © * *# * +

* eee eseeeeseeee et stew e eee eo

a ¢ ee eeotteiewt ease estes e-«

- ee eee eeewee esse suevuese

as ewvreseweneoeoeeseeueenwweeeetwte eeetstewnveweesntd nw se

“ * Seo} © © et wo eee C41 mm © 6 & “ef + wo ~

“ sseeoetrees6é#teeseeenseevsve«# _ ee ee &

° ereeteeoterevweewetreneneegerenesese @ vr *+ © * ©&

- “eee ese wwrwewr ee wm eee ee “- fSevwe eoeoeeesa

’ . - / +--+ ee & © oe @e © se Sew eteee tee tiwvnse © * +6 or @

2 *Se8 ¢@eevwvnHtieqweetirees = twee it &ee ©?

“ Oe te eee ara de ae aa! tt Ff * St Oe Coe SeHKCEHCBSEoHC GEO SSEH DA OHH EGE DS OHO 6b S-B-8D>EbOD

- ‘ .

- . ’ * eee

- ‘ 0.6 #28 + ¢ 2H © @ € 6 @ 4 4 6 4 eof e+ Peeve “2 © et PF Hw &

* we eee eeewntieveeewentvuoecteeueveeevetétedeeé @weoeowsevtbeisgoeewes

em eeeeea eee dee sete se seo eees een *e © ee

= ~fesceteweanoereerteoetwvrvettvuvewe ef @ ws @ 6+ “© @ we ew tet woee eevee sttescteet vein tb

7 *wreewe wee se eee wes Cee He HO orweeeeeae

bed *“* « * 7s @eoeereweee H@eetuwneaeetret bt oee +

‘ t##eewsredeaettiuvetcnvneeventee _.- 8 *£ ¢ © @ © © © eo © © 6.6 ¢-.6 8

ad ee 8 Bee esceevrervre4seeeivnevnte sv ¢ we * “ee w#© @ & + @ @ @.

id oe cfm e@eeeeeewesee#eeteiewed ti twee inweteeew & oe * # @ #6 ©. 8

~ ses eee Vee Cases Geddes © € © & @

» oor eo wowerweeenrnenmhemhmUmh —]—Uh FC HCHO Ee ete €

« op ee weevwetereweveveetee

~— = ee onw ee? Peeevntieoes deeeovu_etteitstuvans €

‘= et tawes Ceewens es 2 €e eee 2 oe

ad ee wew#wd . * @© @ @ 8 @. @€ = & «6

ue *“* eevtepeeecmedeéwewesevuvneveuwe de

¥ eoeeoweoreeseowteeweserke7** # ¢© = # « * ‘.*

- . se eseeeweecgceteoeteev es whe

. oe fr ee @ we ££ fe Ge Be eeeet eS * @

aa eefeesveseeenwedeeeewreedt eee bs ew

‘ cr eer eee ewe eh hh Hh hc hh Oh HC

ag “+ ee ee ee we ewe es *-. .

ee ee ee ee ee © © 6 -@

ad * «= ‘7 ££ s+ et ae he “eee

ef ee es eH we ee ee ew we a s @'@

o:. o* 8 ee wee ees a “erenwwneeewewrte $66 0 6.96 6 8.0

id ~* @ +e ee eet & -—*-. » * . ever @¢£e ee Ce ee tatceeeceiane G@ewe#«wse#

* *.¢ ‘ ** @@ee “ * } . e@we #eetrt se # #€ we & “ese @ ©

ba eseneeeveewmereee eevee . " “eet wecte seeded ¢-F eb.

as eee oe eee ewe wr we ewwe ee ee |

* @ oweseeew#eeese#eés *e * @& eee ™te @ *"e «+e © © *# © @&

bad ses ee © eee ev eeeve - *--* -

7 ewe Se we eee we '_.s « “5 sw - ec @ eee wee ete

» "“_*, es © ® es we we we we wee ee “se eeee@weeeteeéeceteee

’ sevwveevenemneeeseeeaee *e# -* - © © Be ‘

oo “eee ee @ evra hwd ete ee fe e¢¢ ¢e4+46¢4

, ovr wee wee eseeewere ee toewe eevee

se © @Peweeeeseekted Hw e¢é ee @6¢ + 684 6 6

” 2 eo Be 6 & a. 4.4 6 1 @ . ee @¢e#6eetesieoes

+ ¢ 2 + 2 2 2 © 8 wey 6 ee a

ad “e @ @©¢ e © © Hw © ws we we -—*e “ee ee#weéeeseeteeeee

eee te tweeeneneese ee “© 8 © ee ween

“seer vrweeneeve « - S.¢:6. 5.6 4 e4' @ 3 4 ¢'@

ad se eweewe ea eeee te we we ee *_e res fe eee ee Owe

ees eee ew wee wee we - * « . . -« .

- 7 o“eceeneeeet#e te @ 686 @4@ & 6 66 + 4

“www e wee e- © - eset ee we @ « e+

ae “cs *@e eevee * . <= es © we wee ewaewe ew a

= = 2s we eee * . . ~« "ee estes

be -_ + #+ fe +, ee *— © — © -_ *- «€ *_eec ft + ee ©

“6 6 -«- @ © :@-@ 4:4: a 4 e- “2** @€8 « -«

ys .. eae ev @ + «€ & “-. “eo © @@ « s -_** «&

. -_ - * © «* . =r ¢ enw @eees

2 2 ee ee veoeenswewtne © PP wee - *_* es © © © . «+

“sen ver weese eee ~e¢s eewe “eee

> “re * © = © « * ¢@ “+ #®@e6 #7

+e . “-. - * es “+. e+ - © © 6 &

-“_«* _ 7. es fe © es © es Be « 4 ¢ @&@ © 408 © @ @ @«

“sa .

* fc ee we : . .

= _-- +

a e+ <> 7 - = : 7 P eo " *-4 © @ we we ee

h y.b 28 ilies . « + at b Shh epee @ ee OF 0-0 tr GO 9-* 4.8 6-H @S 6 6 4b Hts Kee ee ot hh le lt et Be a o's @ ) Se 6 e

2 = © e © we ew se . “weeeeweerne “7. = = s+ © © oe ©

: 2 ; j A ty on “a oo eee EN at at ot : <s

ree Be en! RE PCa EL I RN: ey po a, Pe a ag a in ee ee PN, Oe

‘9%. 8-8 5 : . alee 2d eee pts t-t

sie a

~ ewe =. ” z r lee = 2 3 2 oF

Lae all « Sie Min, ie ie ee ee 2% ~

i -

ee ‘ m .

ree otter By re - po PNG. TRE

—

Cintas on,

am ‘ : re. or ry J at oe Me oe +

ae * = S Ms oa a : es 2. E pm at ‘

pia

mes ee Ba

“hae Ss oe a

ring a at 2

——

— a

ro |

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

aS Pi en

VOL. LIII.

PART II. (NATURAL SCIENCE.)

(Nos. I to IV.—1884: with 14 plates.)

EDITED BY

JHE NatuRaL fiisTORY SECRETARY,

‘¢ Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science

in different parts of Asza will commit their observations to writing, and send them to

the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish, if such communications shall be long

intermitted ; and it will die away, if they shall entirely cease,” SIR WM. JoNEs.

CALCUTTA :

v*'.)

Sy. PRINTED BY J. W. THOMAS, AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PREgs,

ON : AND PUBLISHED BY THE

) J

XY : ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57 PARK STREET,

1884.

< N

eyraioga orale

“ita 10

SS ee Goma GBroriny: u mad ne

‘ ee my Gi BE iy LEGIT. VE OP Low) | "I 7 <

Galiat

ANIA HOLS ei kt JAAUTA HH aH]

. J

2 ;

coat

<¢ < a's,

a ped ; = i ary 5 y %

’ , " ng. 0% i Re i

s .

’ F 4

ary gen bev se

ob nsdh boot bra

S Gros, se Laer hob

eKO|, MV we

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

ogee

Arxinson, E. T. ;—Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No.1 .., ie

Brcuer, Dr. Epwarp ;—A new Species of Simulium from Assam.

(Communicated and translated by the Naturan History Sxrcre-

TARY) (Plate XIV) .. ae ove iz,

Buianrorp, H. F.;—The Theory of the Winter Rains of Northern

India (Plate I) eos ove ah

Exiot, Joun ;—Account of the South-West Monsoon. A ae of the

26th June to 4th July and of 10th to 15th November, 1883.

(Plates II~X) ove ove

Moors, FREDERIC ;— Descriptions of some new Ascatio Pian Veni

doptera ; chiefly from specimens contained in the Indian Museum,

Calcutta. (Communicated by the Naturat History Secretary)

;—Description of a new Lepidopterous Insect be-

longing to the Heterocerous Genus Trabala. (Communicated ©

the NaturAL History SECRETARY) av

;—List of the Lepidopterous Insects eallacied in

Cachar, by Mr. J. Woop-Mason, Part I,—Heterocera. (Commu-

nicated by the Natura History SECRETARY) sik

Opa, R. D.;—Some Rough Notes for the Construction of a Chap-

ter in the History of the Harth ...

Pearson, A. N.;—Variations of Rainfall in Recthees Tad ates

. the Sunspot Period. (Communicated by the Presiprnt) (Plate

>. ar bes ove aed

Welt son, J. oe epiinthelve. a remarkable Genus of gee a»

from the Oriental Region (Plate XIT) ove

;—fevised Synopsis of the Species of Ghesimicaiz:

a remarkable Genus of Mantodea common to India and ee

America (With 15 Woodcuts) as nee kus a

205

234

187

201

206

238

Date of issue of the different numbers of the Journal, Part IT, 1884,

No. I.—Containing pp. 1—52, was issued on June 30th, 1884.

No. II.—Containing pp. 53—186, with Plates I—X, was issued on

September 17th, 1884.

No. IlI.—Containing pp. 187—244, with Plates XI—XIV, and 15

Woodcuts, was issued on April 22nd, 1885.

No. IV.—Containing the Title-page, Index &c., was issued on

Feb. 3rd, 1887.

LIST OF PLATES.

———e

I.—Isobaric Charts of average pressure illustrative of Mr. Blanford’s

Theory of the Winter Rains of Northern India.

II—X.—Charts illustrative of Mr. Eliot’s Account of the Monsoon

Storms of June and November, 1883.

XI.—Diagram illustrative of Mr. Pearson’s article on the Variations

of Rainfall in Northern India during the Sunspot Period.

XII.—Genus Phyllothelys.

XITI.—Genus Hestias.*

XIV .—Simuliwm Indicum.

* The publication of the article for which this plate has been prepared, is

deferred in consequence of the acquisition of fresh material since it was written.

H. F, BLANFORD, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. XLIII,: Ft. II, 1884. Pl i:

NOVEMBER. (os DECEMBER.

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, August 1884,

ISOBARIC CHARTS OF AVERAGE PRESSURE.

r.)

nal

witht

ity

yap

wish

‘

abr

a"y)

: \ ’ 1 PA

Se a ae

t= =

‘

gt ae

Pa)

- Zee 2d

California Academy of Sciences

Presented by_ASiatic Society of _

Bengal.

og Sa Sn LV

eRe ye

i Eman.)

Asean,

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—f>-—

Part II.—NATURAL SCIENCE.

——~

No. J].—1884.

——eoe eee

I—The Theory of the Winter Rains of Northern India.—By Hunry

F. Buanrorp, F. R. S., President, Asiatic Society of Bengal, Meteo-

rological Reporter to the Government of India.

[Received and Read March 5th, 1884. |

(With Plate I.)

It has long been a commonplace of meteorological hand-books,

that the winter, or, as it is more frequently (but less accurately) termed,

the north-east monsoon, is due to a reversal of those conditions which,

in the summer season, set in movement a flow of air from equatorial

regions towards the plains of Southern and Eastern Asia. But, beyond

this general statement of fact, very little has been done towards working

out the physical characteristics of this familiar phenomenon of the

Indian winter ; and such vague conceptions as are implied in the popular

theory, leave entirely unexplained the well-known occurrence of rain,

about Christmas time, in Upper India; a region, which, according to

. that theory, should then be the seat of a barometric maximum, the fount

and source of the winter monsoon.

Since the establishment of a Meteorological Department under the

Government of India, has rendered it possible to study the weather of

India as a whole, from day to day, some insight has been gained into

2 H. F. Blanford—The Theory of the Winter [No. 1,

the phenomena which precede and accompany the cold-weather rainfall

of Northern India. In each of the annual reports on the Meteorology

of India, in recent years, two or three instances of this cold weather

rainfall have been described and illustrated at some length ; and at the

present time, although many important points still require further eluci-

dation, it is at least possible to set forth some generalizations on the

conditions which usher in the precipitation of the cold-weather rains,

and on the probable source of the vapour which feeds them.

The four charts on Plate I exhibit the average distribution of at-

mospheric pressure in the months of November, December, January, and

February. These charts, being based on the registers of duly verified

barometers during the last seven years, corrected to a common standard

and reduced to sea-level values from elevations, determined in all but

a few exceptional instances, by actual spirit-levelling to the mean sea-

surface, may be accepted as representing, with a near approximation to

truth, the relative differences of pressure which characterize the winter

months in India.* Certain characters common to all, may be regarded

as distinctive of the season. The seat of highest pressure is in the

neighbourhood of Peshawar. Whether this may be taken as indicating

that the pressure on the highlands of Cabul is also greater than at similar

elevations over the plains of India is, however, very doubtful. The

situation of Peshawar on a plain of moderate extent, girt around with

mountains, is such that the high pressure may be and very probably

is a local effect of the cooled air, draining on all sides from the sur-

rounding slopes and filling the basin from which its escape is much

obstructed. A similar high pressure is shewn by some other stations

near the foot of the N. W. Himalaya, of which Dehra is a notable

example. The conditions of pressure at higher elevations over the

Himalaya, will be noticed presently.

The next feature to be noticed is that, throughout the winter

months, the axis of average high pressure on the plains and plateaux

of India, occupies nearly the same situation as that of low pressure at

* Rigorously speaking any such representation must of course involve an

element of unreality, which is the greater, the greater the difference of land levels

in the area embraced in the chart ; and, where, as in the case of India, large portions

of the area differ by 2,000 feet and upwards, this element attains to some im-

portance. Although it may not seriously impair the value of the chart as an illus-

tration of the pressure-differences or potentials which maintain the system of wind-

currents, the fact that the lower strata of air, resting on low alluvial plains, have

no horizontal extension to the higher plateaux and cannot therefore be directly and

immediately influenced by the atmospheric pressure there existing, is one that must

be kept in view in discussing the relation of the winds to the pressure-distribution.

1884. ] Rains of Northern India. 3

‘the opposite season. It extends from Upper Sind across Rajputana and

the Central India plateau to Chutia Nagpur; the pressure along this

axis declining, more or less irregularly, from N. W. to 8. EH. To the

north of this ridge, a trough of relatively low pressure on the Gangetic

plain separates it from the higher pressure along the foot of the Hima-

laya, and, in most years, the pressure in the Punjab is somewhat lower

than that of Western Rajputana. On the other hand, to the south of

this axis, the pressure falls gradually down to Cape Comorin and Tra-

vancore ; being, however, considerably higher on the east than on the

west coast of the peninsula. In fact, the isobars run down the peninsula

almost parallel with the west coast. The low pressure area which runs

down the west coast of the peninsula is prolonged to the north, up the

Gulf of Cambay, producing a northward bend in the isobars of that

region very similar to that shewn by them in the summer monsoon,

but with reversed gradients.

Hence the cold weather distribution of pressure may be not inaptly

described as a reversal of that which characterizes the summer mon-

soon; but, in the first place, the barometric differences between the

extremes, and therefore the gradients effective in producing the monsoon

current, are less than half as great, and, in the second place, the axis

of high pressure across Northern India lies further south than its

opposite in the summer monsoon. It lies well across the middle of the

plateau to the south of the Ganges, instead of followimg the course of

the river, or, as not unfrequently happens in the case of the summer

trough of depression, somewhat to the north of it. Thus, both in

summer and winter, low pressure tends to prevail in some part or other

of the Gangetic valley and the Punjab; but in the summer the gradient

declines towards the N. W., in the winter, to the 8S. E.

There is reason to believe that this normal distribution of pressure

is restricted to the lower strata of the atmosphere, that is to say, to the

stratum less than 7,000 feet in vertical thickness, measured from the

sea-level. Thus, for instance, a row of stations on the plains of the

Punjab and Ganges, ranging from Peshawar down to Purneah, shews

a small, but decided, fall of pressure from N. W. to 8. E., when all the

mean readings are reduced to their equivalent values at the sea-level.

But if the mean pressures of the hill-stations, Murree, Chakrata, and

Darjeeling (all of which are between 6,000 and 7,000 feet, or a little

over the latter elevation), be reduced to a common level of 7,000 feet,

the gradient at that elevation is found to be slightly, but distinctly, re-

versed ; Darjeeling, the easternmost station, shewing the highest pressure.

4, H. F. Blanford—The Theory of the Winter [No. 1,

Sea-level Equivalents of Atmospheric Pressure on the Punjab and

Gangetic Plains.

November. December. January. February.

ins. ins. ins. ins.

Peshawar’ sdoicvsivtsivenis <a, a0 0908 30°174 30°161 30°115

Lahore. sterb. sas we pieerss a 023 ‘097 084 029

Delish Aes cisegeMialas) 1 ‘017 ‘O89 076 020

Ldeknow:. iis ns e.s ees oci 008 ‘078 ‘062 006

Petiiiivayigss sae. eae Dee hades ak; (eae DDO "066 060 001

PROGR s.cnid sevibevestae tee "966 028 036 29°977

Equivalents at 7,000 feet of Atmospheric Pressure at Stations on the outer

Himalaya.

November. December. January. February.

Ins. ins. ins. 1ns.

Darjeeling.......cc.csccccccee 20404 23°380 23°339 23°320

Chia leertiin is is5 ae tes *360 "340 305 281

Marre i... o\voe sanded keswsninas vive 356 7 Seba 302 268

It was shewn also in a paper on the winds of Northern India,* and

in the Indian Meteorologists’ Vade Mecwm,+ that, as between the

Himalaya and Ceylon, the plane of neutral pressure, in January and

February, is at a lower level than 7,000 feet; but not in the months

of November and December ; at least as an average condition. To this

point, which is important, I shall presently return.

These facts of the pressure-distribution prepare us then to expect

that which our wind-registers shew, viz., that the winter monsoon is a

much shallower, weaker, and more unsteady current than its correlative

of the summer season. On the plains, the air is very calm in the Pun-

jab; and, to the south and south-east, flows as a very gentle current,

chiefly a day wind, drifting from the N. W. down the Gangetic plain ;

from north or N. E., and somewhat stronger, across the Central Indian

plateau and the Satpuras; and from north or N. N. W. in Lower

Bengal; then turning to N. H. or H. in the northern part of the penin-

sula, while, down the Bay of Bengal, it is pretty steady as the well-

known N. E. monsoon. It turns, therefore, in an anticyclonic curve

around the seat of maximum pressure in North Western India. Its rate

of movement, its comparative steadiness, and its mean direction may be

estimated from the following tables :—

* Phil. Trans. vol. 164, p. 563.

+ Page 175.

1884. ] Rains of Northern India. 5

Percentage of Wind-directions and Mean Daily Movement of the Wind at

Stations in Northern India during the Winter Monsoon.

(November to February.)

Per cent. he

. pas

a - el le) ele ee

oO a o

mee | lal e| S aoe

& | Rawalpindi ......... I) ae TAS) Oy 21° 9 (26 + 13 | 26 43

Pe GBHOTO ....s0 veces SSA bc a tee Sal ek et OT 6 EOL 48

® g| Ludhiana ............ 128 Scr ek et ko | Gl AB. 80 33

Sy Pie ie tea ke Pom | RSE Bore g "3

14| Mooltan ..........0000 12} 8|21] 1/10} 4|14) 2/15] 25| 47

& | Jacobabad ............ pir ha OL oe} kee | ert re: tse 48

| Bickaneer ............ appear tee Sere |e Poe BP ey oe 68

Bie UL ROOTKEC is... <5 00526002 Pein) ce bie) 1S Bobs Gh & 26. k40 50

°S DMAPELULY = Road cr nce. 12 3 5} 4] 8 1 v1 te Loo 1G 68

By epi meknow .iss..20.02 De pba) Ge 2h) ae tae eb 27h ae hes 43

wa Q {Allahabad ............ ee eh Go) 28) eb 8) ee ee tat ap Lge

5) Gorakhpur............ 12 £ 2 Ay Gi a 7 | 29115 | 34 ?

me) Benares .:..../00...+-. 16 ae Gly OS Pete SLE ham bina h eae ae

3S OE ae eo ae 13 dt 5 7 3 3 8 | 35 | 16 | 19 44,

OPT ORD foc. c ac consine Me "dE al A I a a a 46

Hyderabad ......... a4 F Lo 2 20h Be eto 1) Re

f .| Kurrachee............ 21 9/18 | 16 4) 4|14)]18 9 8 229

Bee) Bajkot ......0....... As 25) ae Pe al eee Poel aoe

ee 22) 19 | 28)11|) 7| 3) 6] 9/14] 8] ao2

&! Pachbudra............ a) A SA ie to) 4 Ol APO Eb 90 ?

RERGMRD evar ccc ccvcod ces 4|}12/]17/|18 | 10 2/12] 14/11 + 132

= | Mount Abn ......... 5| 9/19/14] 8/10/18] 9| 7] 6| 4os

Bat) NOGIUGH 20.2. 0.0 eo) IV 12) 16 116 | t6 5, oF 12) Pe 153

a a RUIGOTGS Bodo 3ai.0 den cue 4/10] 15 | 28 8 8 4 | 12 5 | 10 59

spe) SRAMEB At .......-- 105-4. 10) 2) She 6 be Bor Be deh. 4 be Db) BY 51

@ | Nowgong ............ Avis OTS) £1 LE) 6. itt ie | aa | as

Sa3 GUNG. « Sdeses-s cancer f EL | 16; |.29' | 10 6 5 7) 11 | 14 2 54

0 5} 17/138 8 3 4 a) es SS 7 89

e% Jubbulpore............ tee iets) &l ie |e lose | S&T Se 55

+ &, Pachmarhi............ Petree ER eel Rao Oo Bray hg 68

Ps MEY de bei ds faleca due 11 2 | 40 5 | 16 BES Wiese 1) 16 2 68

4 Sige) A ae Ss ie te Pas | eb

Be es Hazaribagh ......... 14/10] 6| 4| 4] 4 | 6| 28); 40] 3) 118

Oy |

:, | Berhampore ......... 14) 24): 8] 8 a| a2) 81461 35 11s 41

i, PeeCaloutta sccscecr. coves FA Bh.) 2 | 6; 3] 9 | S) 16} 201% | 80

a A PMORBOTO feccecceecdeese 14 | SO.) 10°). 8-|, @) 4) 8} 8 ).268) a2 42

a iiabed...s8s.......... [14/17] 9 eine: /20) 16] 53

RL BES Senta 0 ES A

6 H. F. Blanford—The Theory of the Winter [ No. 1,

On comparing these tables with those for the summer monsoon,

at the same stations, the relative greater frequency of calms, more

especially in the Punjab and the Gangetic plains, the inferior steadiness

of the wind in the prevailing quarter, and the very low absolute rate

of its movement are strikingly apparent. The highest rates of move-

ment are in Western India, as are also those of ‘the summer winds, but

the former vary from less than half to less than two-thirds of the latter,

and the directions are much more variable.

It is further to be noticed that, while, at most stations, there is one

direction of decided maximum, with some oscillation on either side

(this being the local direction of the winter monsoon), at stations in the

Punjab and the adjacent parts of the Gangetic plain, and also at Jhansi,

Jubbulpore, Chikalda, Mount Abu, and Kurrachee, there is a distinct

secondary maximum from an opposite quarter; and, at Mount Abn,

Neemuch, and Bickaneer, a certain absolute preponderance of southerly

winds. These are the winds which interrupt the winter monsoon and

bring up the vapour that is condensed on the Himalaya as snow, and

on the plains of Northern India as the winter rains of that region.

In fact, not only is the barometric gradient which characterizes

the winter monsoon less highly inclined than that of the opposite season,

and the vertical height to which it prevails (the elevation of the neutral

plane) considerably less, but it is more frequently reversed, and espe-

cially soin January and February; and, as a temporary phenomenon,

barometric minima, with the usual vortical systems of winds, occasionally

appear in Northern India. On such occasions, rain almost invariably

follows, beginning generally over the mountains that hem in the Pun-

jab, and on the plains at their foot, and thence extending to the east

and south-east; while the barometric depression moves eastward, and

cold westerly winds, bringing fine weather and a wave of high baro-

metric pressure, follow up in the rear.

In the majority of cases the history of which has hitherto been

traced out, the barometric minimum first appeared, and was apparently

formed in some part of the great north-western plain, most frequently

in the Punjab or Upper Sind; but, in some cases, in Western Raj-

putana. Mr. F. Chambers has put forward the suggestion* that these

minima travel hither from regions further west, from the plateau of

Beloochistan or the still loftier mountain-tract of Afghanistan ; but this

seems to be a misapprehension. We have, indeed, no observatory in

Afghanistan, and it may be long before any systematic observation is

possible in that interesting, but turbulent, country. Butan observatory

has existed for some years past at Quetta, and, although its elevation is

* Nature, vol. xxii, p. 400.

1884.] Rains of Northern India. 7

not known with sufficient precision to admit of its barometric register

being reduced to terms comparable with those of the Sind and Punjab

stations, I have compared the oscillations of the Quetta barometer with

those in the valley of the Indus, when barometric minima have appeared

in Upper Sind, and find that, with two very doubtful exceptions, in

January and February 1880, any fall of pressure at. Quetta was either

simultaneous with the fall in Sind, or somewhat later. In one of these

exceptional instances, there was a slight fall at Quetta two days, and

in the other one day, before it took place at Jacobabad ; but on both

occasions, the great fall, when the minimum was established in Upper

Sind, was simultaneous at both stations. In such cases as that of the

25th January 1878 (when the minimum first appeared at Deesa) and

those of January, February, and March 1881 (when a barometric depres-

sion which had existed in Western Rajputana throughout the cold

season, was simply intensified immediately prior to the rainfall), there

could be no question of a depression travelling from the westward.

But it is not only in North-Western India even, that barometric

minima are occasionally formed in the winter months: in the case of

the rain of the 10th to 13th January 1878, it first appeared on the

western half of the Deccan plateau ; in that of the 10th February 1879,

a long trough-shaped depression ran through the heart of India from

Belgaum to Lucknow, and, in that of the 15th to 18th February 1880,

it was first established in the Central Provinces, whence it was trans-

- ferred to the Punjab; and the distribution of pressure, in Northern

India, became strikingly similar to that which characterizes the rainy

season.

There is, then, no reason to doubt that, notwithstanding that Nor-

thern India is in general and on an average an area of high pressure

in the winter season, relatively to lower latitudes, this condition is by

no means constant or lasting. The atmospheric pressure, in extra-

tropical India, more frequently than that of the peninsula, occasionally

falls below that prevailing over the seas to the south, causing vapour-

bearing currents to pour in from that direction; and these currents, in

ascending around the seat of minimum pressure, chiefly on the east and

north of the minimum, condense that vapour as rain (and on the hills

as snow). This is a more or less regularly recurrent feature of the

winter season.

Of the conditions which determine the formation of these barometric

minima, but little can be positively asserted in the present state of our

knowledge. That they do not originate in a local excess of temperature

in the lower atmospheric strata, is abundantly apparent; the rise of

temperature that, in general, precedes the rainfall, and is accompanied

8 H. F. Blanford—The Theory of the Winter [No. I,

with a rise in the relative and absolute humidity of the air, is simultane-

ous with the setting in of the southerly wind ; and this change of wind

implies a pre-existing reversal of the barometric gradient, which is the

phenomenon to be accounted for. The following considerations may,

however, be worthy of attention as tending to throw some light into the

prevailing obscurity. .

It has been shewn above, that, at the very moderate elevation of

7,000 feet over the outer Himalaya, the barometric gradient is on an

average slightly, but distinctly, reversed. At greater elevations, it is

most probable that the reversal is more decided, for I have shewn

elsewhere* that at Leh (11,500 feet) the pressure in February is at its

annual minimum, and the wind-registers of all our hill-stations establish

the fact that, throughout the winter months, the prevailing winds are

southerly. This preponderance is no doubt, in some measure, perhaps

mainly, due to th® fact that the observations are those of 10 a. Mm. and

4 p. mM. only; at which hours the diurnal up-draught of the mountain

winds, in an otherwise still atmosphere, is fully active. But I have

myself witnessed at Darjeeling, in December, the effects of a strong

steady current, sweeping overhead from the south-west, clothing the

snowpeaks with cloud-banners. This strong southerly wind is, however,

exceptional ; and is that which precedes rain; and although it is not

improbable that, at great elevations, there is a more or less steady flow

of air towards Central Asia, to feed the outflow, at low levels, from the

anticyclone which, as we know, normally exists in the winter over Nor-

thern and Central Asia, there is no reason to question that, up toa

considerable elevation over Northern India, the more usual condition is

one of comparative stillness or at most of light movement. And, in this

state of the atmosphere, even a feeble local action, tending to reduce

the density and therefore the pressure, may suflice to set up a centripetal

influx of air which may in a short time produce a well-developed baro-

metric minimum. How this may be brought about will be shewn

presently.

The southerly surface winds that are invariably the precursors of

precipitation, are not merely local; they prevail also far to the south,

indeed over a great part of India; and they arrive charged with vapour

gathered both from the sea and from the warmer land-surface of more

southerly regions.

It seems not improbable, then, that the ulterior conditions which

give rise to the winter rains, may have their seat in the more elevated

or middle region of the atmosphere ; and we must look to the formation

of cloud as the condition which, by disturbing the thermal equilibrium

* Indian Met. Memoirs, vol. i, p. 224.

1884. ] Rains of Northern India, 9

of the atmosphere, determines a convective current with a cyclonic cir-

culation, and a barometric minimum. The prevailing calmness of the

Punjab atmosphere, combined with a high degree of relative humidity

in the winter months, affords conditions not unfavourable to this action.

Before proceeding further with this discussion, it will be of advan-

tage to consider the distribution of the winter rainfall, its distribution

both in time and space,

For this purpose it will not be necessary to illustrate the subject

in great detail, and, instead of giving the means of individual stations,

I shall summarize the data in the form of the averages of large areas,

The following table gives the average amount of the fall in each of the

months from November to March.

Summary of the Winter Rainfall of Hxtra-tropical India.

INCHES OF RAINFALL.

H 4 .

nD 5 5) Ps

Bs q FI 4 a <i | Total.

‘3 o (0) B 4 (2)

3 > cS) dq 2 a

ari ° fed) 3 oO

wR A A = Fa =

Peshawar and Derajat............... 5 | 046] 0°51 | 0°65 | 1°06 | 1:29 | 3:97

Hazara and Patwar ...............-.. 4 | 1:06 {| 1:50 | 1°57 | 2°64) 2°66 | 9°48

PP ROMT. COBDS oo. .0 000 ansoeees ets 11 | 018 | 0°60 | 0°77; 115 | 1:14] 3°84

MOET PUNGAD... 0.05.0 .0eces eos segent It | 0°07 | 0°58 | O91 | 0°95 | O95 | 3°46

Kangra, Sirmoor and Kumaon ...| 11 0718 | 1:01 | 2:10 | 2°80 | 2°54] 863

N. W. P. & Oudh, Western half*...' 24 0:06 | 0°33 | 0°81 | 0°66 | 0°57 | 2°43

Ditto ditto, Eastern half ...{ 15 0°10 | 015 | O66 | 0°55 | 0°34] 1°80

North Behar and Bhagalpore...... 5 | 0°08 | 010 |] 0°58 | 053 | 0-45 | 1°74

Northern Bengal ..................+5 8 | 0°34) 012! 0°43 | 0°79} 1:18 4 2°86

Assam and Cachar ............,..06 13 | 0°95 | 0°36 | 0°64 | 1:35 |} 3°45 | 7:00

Upper Sind ...... ..| 8 | 0:08] 0-16] 0:23] 0:37 | 0-44 | 1:28

Lower Sind, Cutch and Gujarat... 18 | 0°08 | 0°07 | O11 | 0:16] 0-06 | 0-48

UMA MADONUN MI ov. vce hae dec peocppice ces 20 0°09 | 0°27 | O11 | 0°31 | 015 | 0°93

Prombral India, &...0. 2... ..e cece ees 24 0-16 | 0119 | 0°42 | 0°40 | 0°23 | 1°40

Mirzapore and Chutia Nagpur ...| 14 | 0:22 | 0°13 | 0°58 | 0°78 | 0°57 | 2-28

OE re te | 050) O17,| 0°48 | 1:07 | 160 |. 8:82

The above table includes the whole of extra-tropical India, and

it is only in a portion of this region that the cold weather rainfall can

be regarded as a well-marked and regularly recurrent phenomenon ;

having a distinct maximum, that is to say, in the winter or spring

months and equally defined minima before and after. The variations,

-shewn in the above table, are considerable, both as regards the total

amount and the epoch of the maximum. It is on the N. W. Himalaya

* The meridian of Lucknow is taken as the boundary.

10 H. F. Blanford—The Theory of the Winter [No. I,

and on the hills of the Northern Punjab that these rains are most copious,

and that the maximum falls latest; the precipitation frequently taking

the form of snow at all but the less elevated stations. In the extreme

north-west, they attain their maximum in March and April; for the

April rainfall (not shewn in the table) is about equal to that of March

at Peshawar and in the hills of Hazara, while that of May and June

is insignificant. But south of the Salt Range, and on the plains of the

Eastern Punjab, the rainfall of February and March exceeds that of

April. Still further to the south-east, throughout the greater part of

the Gangetic plain, the maximum occurs still earlier, wiz., in January ;

and this holds good as far as Behar and the confines of Northern Ben-

gal. This anticipation of the maximum is not due to the January

rainfall of the Gangetic plain being heavier than that of the Punjab.

On the contrary, it is rather less: but the decrease in a south and 8. H.

direction is much less rapid in January than in the subsequent months.

In Northern Bengal, even the January maximum has vanished; and

while the average rainfall of that month is only shghtly less than in

Behar and the eastern part of the N. W. Provinces, that of February

is higher, and that of March shews a further considerable increase. So

far, the course of the variation seems to resemble that of the N. W.

Punjab ; but the further steady increase of the fall in April, May, and

June shews that this resemblance is fallacious, and that we have here

to do with a phenomenon of a different order, viz., the storm precipita-

tion of the spring months, the characteristics of which are still more

pronounced in the more easterly province of Assam. As a well-marked

feature of the local meteorology, the cold weather rainfall does not

extend, in an easterly direction, beyond the province of Behar.

Turning now to the regions somewhat further south, but still, for

the most part, without the tropic, we see that in Upper Sind the total

fall of the five months is very small, notwithstanding that it represents

nearly one-third of that of the year; and also that, as in the Derajat,

it reaches its maximum in March. In Lower Sind, Cutch, and Gujarat,

the whole precipitation of the season is insignificant; but a maximum

is still faintly indicated in February, and the same is more strongly

marked in Rajputana, where the fall is about double as great. In

Rajputana, it would appear that the December rainfall is almost as

great as that of March ; but this is mainly due to an exceptionally heavy

rainfall in December 1877,* combined with the fact that the Rajputana

registers extend over a shorter period than those of most other parts

* On this occasion nearly five inches of rain were registered at Banswara,

between 3 and 4 inches at Jhalrapatam and Ulwar, and over'2 inches at Kotah,

Deoli, and Bhurtpore.

1884. ] Tains of Northern India. il

ef the country. Ido not think, therefore, that, on the average of a

long period of years, the November rainfall of Rajputana would be

found to follow a different law of distribution from that of other pro-

vinces around. In Central India, including those portions of the Central

Provinces and the N. W. Provinces that extend between the Jamna and.

the Satpura range, the total fall is again higher, with a maximum in

January and February; and, still further east, in Mirzapore, South

Behar, and Chutia Nagpur, it is again greater, with the maximum in

February ; but this apparent retardation of the maximum is evidently

due to the inclusion of the early spring storms which in Chutia Nagpur

become of relatively greater importance ; and this is rendered further

evident in the table for Lower Bengal.

The conditions which determine the storm precipitation of the

‘spring months will be noticed elsewhere. Meanwhile, it results from

the above analysis that the cold weather rainfall, as hete considered, is

that which takes place chiefly on the north and east of the barometric

depressions, which are occasionally formed, in the winter months, in

North-Western India. It is most copious where normally the winter

temperature is lowest, viz., on the N. W. Himalaya, It decreases rapidly

to the south, and less rapidly to the south-east, and, in this latter direc-

tion, it blends into and becomes with difficulty distinguishable from the

rainfall of the spring storms, which are, however, a phenomenon of a

different order.

Having thus defined the area and noticed the general characteristics

of the winter rainfall of North-Western India, I will return to the

question of the origin of those barometric depressions which have been

shewn to be the immediate precursors of the precipitation, or perhaps

rather of simultaneous formation. The area above defined as that of

the winter rains, is identical with that in which, as has long been

known, the relative humidity of the air, instead of diminishing towards

the interior of the country, increases with the increasing distance from

the sea-coast. On page 203 of the Indian Meteorologist’s Vade Mecum

(Part II, para. 109), I described this phenomenon as follows: ‘ In the

maritime provinces (of India) there are but one (annual) period of

maximum and one of minimum humidity; in the Punjab and in Central

India and the North-Western Provinces, there are two annual maxima

and two minima; and in the drier part of the first named province, the

winter is the dampest season of the year y x % x. Stations on the coast

line have, at all times of the year, a higher degree of relative humidity

than those on the plains of the interior. But the rate of increase is

very different at different seasons; and in consequence of the greater

cold of Upper and extra-tropical India, in the first three months of the

12 H. F. Blanford—The Theory of the Winter [No. 1,

year, the rule of increasing dryness with increasing distance from the

coast holds good inland, only as far as Behar ; and thence to the Punjab

the relative humidity of the atmosphere increases steadily. It appears

to be higher also through Central India, north of the Satpuras, but the

meteorological statistics of this tract have not yet been sufficiently

worked out to enable us to fix the limits of the area of higher winter

humidity.”

The above passage was written in 1876, only a year after the

meteorological data for the whole of India had been, for the first time,

concentrated in one central office, and when the system of observation

had been but recently extended to many stations in Rajputana and

Central India. It is, therefore, desirable to set forth, in a tabular form,

some excerpts from the further evidence which has since been put on

record ; and, to this end, I give, in the following tables, first, the absolute

humidity of the afr as represented by the proportion of vapour in 1,000

parts (volumes) of air, second, the relative humidity, and, third, the

cloud proportion (in thousandths of the sky-expanse*) in each of the

six months November to April for four series of stations, three passing

successively from east to west (or north-west) and representing re-

spectively the Himalaya, the alluvial plain, and the plateau which extends

between the latter and the Satpura range; and the fourth passing from

south to north, beginning with stations south of the Satpura range,

and terminating in the Punjab.

* The figures of the two latter tables are extracted from those of the average

values of the several meteorological elements given in the Report on the Meteo-

rology of India in 1881.

G8 | CEP | Shr | 88E | SOS | GEL | 68 | 9 | 89 | 49 | 49 | ZO] 9T] ST /6 | 8 | 6 | OL] 0&4 | Sg9'T| T Tpudyemey

Z9S ; SYP | SPP | FOP | GOES | FIZ | cP | 8S | Z9 | 89 | 89 | OG | FL | ST | OL | OL | OL] TL | ATZ | 628 | rrr ‘qoXTRIG

PIS | 98 | 68E | ES | 6FS | GST | OS | ZG | €9 | G9} GO| IG | SL | 22] 11,6 | 6 | OL} O69 | GIB J “eaermpnty

Zee | ¥9G | SSE | S8a | Ges | LB | 9E! GG | GO| G9} 9 | LG] SL | ST | OL | OL | OT | ZT | 069 | Z88 | Sooyt00y

LLT | bee.) OUG | Ive | ZZEy 29 PF 1 | 6919 | 79) FO | 69 | ST | PL | TL | OT | OT} ST | S98 4 BOG Lower etree ‘ATTLOIV

Géo | 16d | SEE | G8Z | CELT | 16 | LE | OF, SS | 6E | 8G} SS] ST!) FL | TL] OL | OL} ZL | oss | GOS [tt SMougomT

SPI | GST | 22e | S6T | SOL | 26 | 9 | 9F | 09 | 49 | 89 | 9] ST) SL | ZL | IL | SL | FT| OS | Zoe Jo “peqeyaery

PST | LTS | OFS | Sas | SOT | OZL | 9G | SF | 4G | €9 | F9 | ZO] SL | ST | IL | OT] OT; ST | 89E | 49S [oC ‘seredeg

€&6 | STS | SL4Z ' GHZ | L0G | OAT | GE | SP | SF | 09 | 09 | ZG] OL | HL | SL | SL | SL | ST | 408 | 64T Jo =a sree Seuqed

OST | OFT | SIT | 22T | LOL | $6 | 9S | SG | 6S | 99} 69 | OL] TZ | OT | SL | SL | FL | ZT | G6e | Set J “qeoumg

3s OGE | 162 | Z6T | SIZ | FET | LEZ | ZO | SS | SO | GO| TZ | G4] 3S | SL} PL | SL | FL | SL | 94T | 99 srreeeescess Qrodurey1e g

7S OEE | PLS | OAT | SST | SET | OTS | ZO | SE | SS | 09 | 9 | 89] 4a | Tz | OL | FT | OT | O@ | G6 €& 5 ted woo eka 2 ‘e10sse

= £96 | See | GET | LET | OGL | OZ | EL | 69 | 69 | OL | TL | FL] 8S | GS | ST | FL | ST | 0% | g9 8T asa Ot ce a ke

fa PLP | OSE | SST | OST | OST | SFZ] 08 | 84 | 44 | SL} &4 | FL] SE | 46 | S| ST | LAT | Gs] O 9 rreeeereee DUBIST LOSUVG

= OcS | G6 | IPS | OTS | SSP | STS] OS | TS | 49 | SF | 6F | SFIOT}S |9 1} 19 | 4 | OSh | HRE'Q] CC Cony

i S8é | SOF | GES | SIF | ISE | Sol] 4P | 8 | 8S} 19); 2 ,ss}or}s |4 19 |9 | 6 | OS oe aaa os eqeryey

SSE | SLE | 19M | HE | OLE | GZT | ZH | GS | O9 | GF | 9G | SF] IT} 0LT|8 ;}8 |8 | OT] 084 | 690°9[ ereeees QOu yey

> PID | TSS | G6S | 69S | Sev | GeV | 44 | 14184) 84 | 84) S4] SL] cL} 0L|6 | 6 | Bt | sae | stag Sureolreg

ee tk ae aly er ee | ee ta ts oe a

RS Fag ee bay |

Peete he te ie ele lets | sie) Si sie lye) 8 | B

Pig |e |e [8 |e dBlia/ Fle SlseleziziFi/elsie)] es) 2 .

- & = ) 5 5 ae oe ry) 5 B Rev| eee of ag bbe: | |g B m eo

: Sia |e | & "TRB la lol] & mele qiaole| 5

< : g ® ees | oe : : e | 8 § 5B *‘SNOILVLG

: ; s

‘009% yortodoad . 0 03 bye 8 g

y20do01d pno[g WOTJVINJeS JO osvyuod1Eg er ®

r,"

Ps ‘syquopy buady pun

~~ sayy 243 ur pypur UlaYyI4ON Ut pnojiQ fo uousodoug pun wp ay, fo hyypwungzy oaynjay puv aynposqgp wnapr

[ No. 1,

H. F. Blanford—The Theory of the Winter

‘uomenbe euosizod Sart e Aq poqyooze A[quqoad ore woryzodoad pnoyo jo sozvu14s0 OUT, yx

FOZ | 98S | 68S | SES | GFZ | SST] OG | ZG | €9 | $9 | GO| TS | ST | ZT | IT | 6 6 | OT | 069

692 | 662 | FEE , GOS | O4T | OS _| HE | SF | GG | SG} ES | OF} ST | ZT | OT | 6 6 LE, PSS

PPL | SLT | SIG | 491 ISl | ¥S 1o-1Oe or 1: oe ee) er Fel") TL |: 0F | 6 6 TL | OFS

*9F [x0b |xfL x99 [x88 [x62 Se ve er | Ae Pee! Ge ESL! TE | OL. 4 6 | OT } 06%

COZ | OFZ | SOE | GST | SST | 6 Tg | 48 | 8b | co | 9S | OF | TT | TT | OT | 6 OL j TE. 8x9

Zoe | 29a | 6a | OIZ | SOT | LET | Se | 62 | TP | LV SP | Gh] OT) 8 6/8 8 | OL | OS?

Liz | 9¥e | 882 | STI | LET | TAL | Ze | OF | 9 | Se | 9S | ZG] ST | ST | ST | TL | OL | ST | OP

ZI | LZI | 661 | GEL | OFT | FET | 22 | 82 | LE | PH | SP | OS | OT | TL | OL | OT | TT | &T | O46

cos | sez | PEL | SEZ | SEZ | 42 |} 8Z | SE | SH | 6H | OF | ZS} EL | IT | ZL | TL | ST | PT | OSE

60¢ | SOL | SIL | GET | ZZT | SOL | 9E | Ty | Tg | gS | 9g 09 GT | &L | PL | ST | ST | OT | O42

6h | O8e | ELZ | SHS cet TOL | 8& | Gh | OF | LH a ov 7 Sl | ci ;Ol | G@ 16 | tina

O&Z | FES | OLS | TST | GFL | 9 96 | OF | SE | SE | 8B | SE] IL] 6 8 Lik 6 | 0826

x9F |x0F |xS4 |x99 |x8S (x62 8¢ | PE | SV | LP | SP jot Sls) TLseOUL- he 6 | OT | 067

Zea | 29% | 6s | 9Tc | OT | ZEL | Sa | 62 | Ty | 4e | 8 | ce] OT|S | 6 | 8 | 8 | OT | OSF

29% | 8SZ | LIZ | 9E% | CGT | €02 | GE | 9E | HH | TG | GS | $9 | ZL | OL | OL | 6 | OT | Bt | $02

elelslelelzlelelziele)zlelelgielgelz| &

2, a = s 8 a etiam |e ae | cee deer Bat ae re |e ele ®

: i a = R B B Se a SS ag a = i 2 | Hs

ah ee eles Pla] ole San yaa ak ee

m ; 8 5 gies § | 8s eee gig g

-090t yorrodoad pno[g ‘UOIyeINyVS JO oSeyued10g ae os

# OOOT Ur mnodva jo oumNjoA

Z18

STZ

ecg

LSL

OFO'T

T¢s‘T

0&6

CZ0'T

096

TI9'T

689'T

ecg

OFO'T

O10‘

"qoo} UL WOTZVASTH

eee eeseesesseeseee ‘euBIypwyT

eee eee wen eee

apes"? Toor,

soeenese*> beer

see eenaee ‘Tsuvy er

‘++ “SUOS.MO NT

sev eerverees mpereress ‘euIng

ener eee eer nne

‘grodjnqque

eens ‘Bl O TV

axecer™=$ INCOSE

sere eeeeee ‘rndrey

reeeeesCozoutly

“+++ GyonuIee NT

perenne ‘Tsuey f

seen ‘euqng

‘ySVqriezey

‘SNOILVLG

‘(ponuyu0y) syjzuopg burudgy pun

LOIULA OY WL DYPUT ULaYyQUONT UL pnojID fo uoyLsodoug pup wp ay, fo hzvprunzT aayvpoy pup aynjosqy way

1884.) Rains of Northern India. 15

The above table confirms and justifies the description already quoted

from the Vade Mecum, and also the generalization just given, that the

area of the winter secondary rainfall maximum coincides with that in

which there is also a winter secondary maximum of relative humidity.

But it also brings into prominence some further facts, which assist in

throwing much light on the causes of the rainfall. In the first place,

it is to be noticed that the increase of the relative humidity of the later

months, as we proceed from Behar towards the Punjab, is due, solely,

to the fall of temperature ; the absolute humidity being almost constant ;

but the latter is decidedly lower on the high ground of Central India

and Rajputana, south of the Gangetic plain, than on the latter and in

the Punjab. These two facts, viz., the uniformity of the absolute humi-

dity over the riverain tract, and its decrease on the higher ground to

the south, indicate that it is mainly dependant on local evaporation ;

being, in fact, furnished by the rivers, the undried swamps left by the

autumnal floods, and, in no small degree, probably, by irrigation and

the rich vegetation of the green winter crops. In the second place, it

is to be observed that this riverain tract also coincides with the region

of lower normal pressure, to the north of the axis of maximum pressure,

shewn on the normal baric charts, on Plate Il. And lastly, the tendency

to cloud formation follows, on the whole, the same laws of distribution

as the relative humidity of the lower atmosphere, with, however, this

important exception; that, except in April and to a slight extent in

March, it is lower in the neighbourhood of the coast (in Lower Bengal),

notwithstanding the higher relative humidity of the lower atmosphere,

than in the Upper Provinces, where the rainfall generally originates.

Now putting together the several facts thus independently elicited

from the study of our registers, we arrive, I think, at the outlines of

a consistent theory of the production of the winter rainfall. We have,

in the first instance, steady evaporation over an extensive moderately

humid tract, at a comparatively low temperature, it is true, but in an

atmosphere, the stillness of which allows of steady diffusion of the

vapour to high levels, and the consequent formation of cloud. The

slight disturbance of the baric equilibrium which follows (since the

vertical decrease of temperature in a cloud-laden atmosphere is slower

than in a clear atmosphere), is succeeded by a gentle indraught of

warmer and more humid air from the south; for the Himalaya bars

access to northerly winds. A vortex is then rapidly formed, accompanied

with an increased cloud-formation, and speedily followed by precipita-

tion; which takes the form of snow on the hills, and of rain over the

river plains. The rainfall is invariably followed by a cool wind, and

a wave of high barometric pressure from the west, which I can only

16 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

attribute to a drainage of cool heavy air from the valleys of the

hills surrounding the Punjab and the high lands of Beloochistan and

Afghanistan ; air cooled by the precipitation on the mountains.

If the above view be true, the stillness of the atmosphere, combined

with the presence of a moderate evaporation, must be accepted as the

condition which primarily determines the formation of barometric minima

and the winter rains of Northern India. And this stillness is obviously

due to the existence of the lofty mountain ranges which surround Nor-

thern India, leaving free access to the plains open only to the south.

Were the Himalayan chain absent and replaced by an unbroken

plain, stretching up to the Gobi desert, it is probable that the winter

rains of Northern India would cease ; any local evaporation in the Punjab

and Gangetic valley would be swept away by strong dry N. EH. winds

blowing from the seat of high pressure, which, in the winter months,

les in Central Asia; and instead of the mild weather and gentle breezes

which now prevail at that season, on the Arabian Sea, it would be the

theatre of a boisterous and even stormy monsoon, such as is its local

equivalent of the China Seas. Other and even greater changes of

climate, that would supervene on the suppression of the Himalayan

range and the consequent alteration of the summer monsoon, its preci-

pitation, and the course of the land drainage thereby fed, it would be

beyond the province of my present subject to discuss.

II.—Descriptions of some new Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera ; chiefly from

specimens contained in the Indian Museum, Calcutta — By Freperic

Moors, F. Z.8., A. L. 8. Communicated by the Natura History

SECRETARY.

[ Received May 14th,—Read June 4th, 1884. |

Family NYMPHALIDA.

Subfamily Saryrina.

Genus Ypruima, Hiibner.

YPTHIMA MAHRATTA, n. Sp.

Male and female. Upperside brown; forewing with a subapical

bipupilled ocellus ; between which and the outer margin is a pale brown

curved fascia as in Y. newara: hindwing with a very small subanal

unipupilled ocellus.

Underside pale whitish-brown, very numerously covered with short

delicate pale brown strigee, which are uniformly disposed: forewing with

1884. ] Species of Asiatic Diwrnal Lepidoptera. 17

a brownish marginal fascia, which curves below the ocellus and extends

up the disc towards the costa: hindwing with a very small apical ocellus,

and two anal ocelli of the same size.

Expanse 1,3, to 1,4, inch.

Has. Deccan (Dr. Day). In coll. F. Moore.

Allied to Y. ariaspa, Y. rura, and to Y. norma. Nearest to Y.

norma, the type specimens of which are from China. Differs from the

last species, on the upperside, in having a smaller ocellus on the fore-

wing, and a single subanal ocellus on the hindwing. Underside with

shorter and more numerous strige; both the apical and the two anal

ocelli of hindwing are half the size of those in Y. norma.

The hindwing also has a comparatively longer costal margin, which

thus gives the apex and exterior margin less convexity.

YPTHIMA APICALIS, n. sp.

Male. Upperside pale brown: forewing with a small rounded bipu-

pilled apical ocellus, above which is a distinct broad whitish streak :

hindwing with two very small subanal ocelli, the upper one minute, the

anal and apical ocellus of the underside being slightly visible from

above ; across the middle of the lower discal area is a faint pale slight

fascia. Underside pale brownish-ochreous, with indistinct darker brown

uniformly disposed strigz : forewing with the apical ocellus and white

upper streak as above: hindwing with a small apical and three lower

ocelli, the anal one bipupilled ; an indistinct pale whitish fascia is trace-

able across the disc above the lower ocelli.

Expanse 12 inch.

Has. Deyra Dhoon (Godwin-Austen). In coll. F. Moore.

YPTHIMA KASMIRA, Nn. sp.

Male and female. Upperside dark brown: forewing with a mode-

rately small bipupilled apical ocellus: hindwing with two small subanal

ocelli in male and, in female, a third minute anal ocellus.

Underside purpurascent brownish-white, densely covered with uni-

formly disposed purplish-brown strige : forewing with prominent apical

ocellus : hindwing with prominent large apical and three lower ocelli, the

anal one tripupilled.

Expanse 6 12, 2 1% inch.

Has. Cashmere (Capt. Hellard). In coll. F. Moore.

YPTHIMA HOWRA, 0. sp.

Male and female. Upperside brown: forewing with a bipupilled

apical ocellus: hindwing with two small subanal ocelli, some specimens

18 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

of both sexes also having a smaller anal ocellus, all with a single pupil.

Underside yellowish ochrey-white : forewing with the ocellus as above :

hindwing with a very small apical ocellus and four lower ocelli, the two

anal being geminated and the smallest. Both wings are crossed by

ochreous-brown strige; with the three outer transverse fasciz on fore-

wing, and an angulated discal fascia, as well as a sinuous marginal fascia,

on the hindwing.

Expanse g 12, ? 12 inch.

Has. Calcutta. In coll. Ind. Mus., Calcutta, and F. Moore.

Nearest to Y. hiibneri. Distinguishable from typical specimens

(figured as Y. philomela, Hubner, Zutr. fig. 83-84), on the underside, by

the yellowish ochreous-white ground-colour, and the transverse fasciz on

the hindwing, as well as by the small size of the ocelli.

YPTHIMA HORSFIELDII, n. sp.

Male. Upperside dark olive-brown; discal area dusky ; subapical

ocellus oval, bipupilled: hindwing with two medial and a minute anal

ocellus.

Female. Upperside: forewing with a large rounded ocellus: hind-

wing with two larger medial, a small anal, and a medium-sized apical

ocellus. Underside of male and female ochreous-white : forewing almost

covered with dark vinous-brown confluent strige : hindwing very sparse-

ly covered with slender brown strigze very similarly disposed to those

in the typical Javan Y. pandocus: ocellus of forewing as above : hind-

wing with two small apical, two larger medial, and two smaller anal

ocelli.

Expanse @ 1,45, 2 1,% inch.

Has. Java. In coll. F. Moore.

Subfamily NyMpHatin«.

Genus Kurnaria, Hiibner.

KUTHALIA ANDERSONII, n. sp.

Male and female. Upperside dark umber-brown, palest in the female ;

both wings with a marginal bluish-grey band, which extends very nar-

rowly from the apex of forewing and widens across the hindwing to

broadly above anal angle. Within and beneath the cells the black

streaks are most distinct in the female; across the discal area are two

indistinct dusky sinuous fascize widening from the costa of forewing, at

which end the interspace is slightly paler in the male and distinctly peer

in the female. Cilia white.

- 1884] Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 19

Underside ochreous-brown in male and yellowish ochreous in female ;

the outer borders broadly suffused with purplish lilacine-white ; cell-

‘marks distinct ; across the disc of both wings are too dusky lunular fascise

-with pale interspace, most distinct in the female, the fasciz being dis-

posed across the middle of the disc.

Expanse & 2+, ? 22 inches.

Has. Mergui; Tavoy. In coll. Ind. Mus., Calcutta, and F. Moore.

Nearest allied to H. cocytus, Fab. ; also to H. lepidea, Butler, and to

EH. macnairit, Distant,

Genus CrrrHocuroa, Doubleday. |

CIRRHOCHROA ABNORMIS, 0. sp.

Male. Upperside ferruginous-yellow : forewing with a medial discal

transverse black lunular waved band, which is broadest at the costal end,

a narrower submarginal sinuous band, and a nearly straight marginal

line, the interspace from the submarginal band and edge of the wing be-

ing suffused with black towards the apex ; an indistinct dusky streak at

end of the cell: hindwing with a medial discal transverse angulated black

lunular band, which is broadest at the costal end; a submarginal lunular

line, and a slender nearly straight marginal line ; a row of minute black

discal dots. Underside brownish-ochreous ; a transverse medial slightly

purpurascent band, with waved suffused dusky lunular inner border and

slender almost straight outer border, the band being quite narrow where

it crosses from fore to hindwing and broadly dilated at the costal end on

forewing and at anal end on the hindwing; contiguous to the inner bor-

der of the band is a similar dusky suffused lunular fascia, the interspace

being of a slightly pale yellowish colour; at end of each cell is a dusky

double lunular mark, a similar double lunular waved line also extends

from middle of the cell on forewing to below the cell on the hindwing ;

outer border of both wings traversed by faint traces of a yellowish sub-

marginal lunular band; on the forewing is a conspicuous and whitish

apical patch, and on the hindwing is a row of very small blackish trans-

verse discal dots.

Expanse 23 inches.

Has. Darjiling. In coll. F. Moore.

Genus Ereaouis, Boisd.

ERGOLIS TAPESTRINA, N. sp.

Male and female. Comparatively smaller than [. merione ; outline

of forewing more irregular. Upperside paler; with similar transverse

sinuous lines on both wings, the two medial lines being somewhat nearer

20 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

together, the discal cordate marks having their outline of a uniform

width, and being somewhat narrower transversely, thus leaving a slightly

but perceptibly wider space between the contiguous lines ; the interspaces

between the basal lines, the subbasal and medial lines, the discal cordi-

form marks, and the marginal line and outer margin, are of a more dusky

colour, and thus give the wings the appearance of being marked with

alternately pale and dusky transverse bands. Underside also paler than in

Hi. merione, with more regularly alternate pale and dark transverse bands.

Expanse 1£ to 2§ inches.

Has. N. W. India (Manpuri; Deyra Doon). In coll. F. Moore.

ERGOLIS INDICA, 0. sp.

Differs from typical Javanese specimens of Z. ariadne in its smaller

size. Upperside of a duller colour, the markings more obscure and com-

paratively less sinuous. Underside with paler interspaces between the

bands, the apical border of forewing and the marginal border of hindwing

ereyer, and comparatively broader.

Expanse 13 to 14 inch.

Has. Madras; Nilgiris; Bombay; Calcutta. In coll. F. Moore.

Family LYCAANIDA.

Genus ParapitHecops, Distant.

PARAPITHECOPS GAURA, 2. Sp.

Male and female. Upperside brown: forewing with a large white

medial longitudinally oval spot, occupying the centre of the wing from

middle of the disc to near the base ; a small brown dentate spot at upper

end of the cell: hindwing with the apical and upper discal area broadly

white and traversed by pale brown veins; a slender brown submarginal

line enclosing a marginal row of brown spots. Cilia of forewing whitish

posteriorly, of hindwing entirely white. Underside greyish white: fore-

wing with a submarginal line composed of slender waved brown lunules,

and a marginal line enclosing a row of small linear spots ; a slender indis-

tinct brown streak at end of the cell, and three or four dots along the costal

edge: hindwing with an irregular submarginal row of brown lunules, a

marginal line enclosing a row of darker spots; a black spot at upper end

of submarginal line, and a subbasal row of three smaller more or less dis-

tinct black spots; a slender brown streak at end of the cell. Antennze

black, ringed with white ; pale white beneath, third joint and tip of second

black ; legs white, banded with black.

Hxpanse ¢ 55, ¢ 1,4; inch.

Has. Calcutta. Assam. In coll. Ind. Mus., Calcutta, and F. Moore.

1884.) Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 21

Genus Meraispa, Moore.

MEGISBA SIKKIMA, Nn. sp.

Male. Differs from M. thwaitesii, on the upperside, in being of

a darker violet-brown, and in the absence of the short oblique pos-

terior white band on the forewing. Underside similarly marked to

M. thwaitesu, except that on the forewing the black spot in middle of

the cell is very minute, and there is a spot below the end of tho cell be-

tween the middle and lower median veins in addition to the two dots,

which are here placed beneath the lower median vein, whereas in M.

thwaitesit the two latter dots, when present, are situated between the

middle and lower medians. On the hindwing the three transverse sub-

basal black spots are comparatively larger, the upper one with two con-

tiguous black dots in front; the cell-spot is prolonged upward to the

costal vein and also has some black dots below it, the apical black spot

is of an elongated form, and the discal macular band is composed of

broader quadrate spots.

Expanse ~ inch.

Has. Sikkim. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

PATHALIA, 0. g.

Closely allied to Megisba: forewing comparatively longer, and less

regularly triangular in form: hindwing somewhat narrower, and with a

slender tail at end of lower median vein. Venation similar. Second

joint of palpi shorter, the third joint longer and more slender.

Type, P. albidisca.

PATHALIA ALBIDISCA, 0. sp.

Male and female. Upperside dark violet-brown: forewing with a

broad medial conical white patch, which extends obliquely from middle

of the disc to posterior margin : hindwing with a broad white band cross-

ing from the costal edge to near middle of the abdominal margin; an

indistinct marginal row of pale-bordered brown spots. Underside grey-

ish-white : forewing with some black spots along the costal edge, a

brown streak at end of the cell, a discal transverse row of short oblique

slender interrupted lunules, a submarginal sinuous line enclosing a mar-

ginal row of indistinct spots: hindwing with a similar brown cell-streak,

a discal zigzag series of broader lIunules, a sinuous submarginal line

enclosing the marginal row of spots, of which the penultimate is

large and black ; three equidistant subbasal black spots, a black spot on

the abdominal margin above the lower subbasal, and a larger black spot

at the apex ; tail in both sexes black, tipped with white. Cilia edged with

22 F.. Moore—Descriptions of some new Generr and [No. },

white. Body above black, antenne black annulated with white; palpi

white, tip black ; legs white with black bands.

Expanse # 14, ? 1,4, inches.

Has. Chittagong; Kurdah, Orissa; N. W. Himalaya (Capt.

Beckett). In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta, and F. Moore.

PATHALIA MALAYA.

Lycena malaya, Horsfield, Catal. Lep Mus. E. I. C. p. 70 (1828), 9.

Has. Java. (Horsfield collection.)

Genus Logania, Distant.

LOGANIA SUBSTRIGOSA, 0. sp.

Upperside dark violet-brown. Cilia white between the veins. Cos-

tal edge of forewing with a minute white dot at end of the veins.

Underside purplish white, crossed by a few ochreous-brown short strige,

and with a thicker streak across middle and end of the cell, and in a

zigzag submarginal series; also a marginal series of black spots on the

forewing, and a lunular streak on hindwing ; a black costal spot also on the

hindwing ; and the outer marginal border of both wings is ochreous-

brown. Body, antenne, and legs above brown ; palpi, legs, and abdomen

beneath white.

Expanse 5% inch.

Has. Mergui. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

LOGANIA MARMORATA, 0. sp.

Upperside pale purplish violet-brown : forewing with the basal half,

curving obliquely from middle of the costa to posterior margin near the

angle, violaceous-white : hindwing with the lower basal and discal area

also violaceous-white : the traversing veins on both wings being pale

violet-brown. Cilia violet-brown. Underside densely mottled with pur-

plish violet-brown and violet-white, interspersed with black speckles,

which are most prominent in a lunular marginal fascia ; a white spot at

end of the cells. Body, antenne, and legs violet-brown.

Expanse ;8, inch.

Has. Mergui. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

LOGANIA ANDERSONII, n. sp.

Female. Upperside pale violet-brown: forewing with a broad lon-

gitudinal medial lilacine-grey band of a somewhat triangular form, dis-

posed below the cell, the exterior border of the band being scalloped :

hindwing with a narrow medial discal sSimilar-coloured band. Cilia

1884.) _ Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 23

alternated with white. Underside purplish lilacine-white ; both wings

with a blackish zigzag cell streak, a transverse discal zigzag duplex

line, and two narrow similar submarginal lines, a slender marginal line,

and a waved interciliary line.

Expanse 1,1, inch.

Has. Mergui. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Genus Lyca#nestHes, Moore.

LYCHNESTHES ORISSICA, N. Sp.

Male. Smaller than ZL. lycenina and L. lycambes. Upperside of

a similar purpurascent blue. Underside pale purpurascent greyish-

brown. Both wings with similar, but more regularly disposed, markings.

On the hindwing the subbasal costal black spot is prominent, but the

subbasal black spot—so conspicuous in the above species—is absent, the

entire exterior margin being uniformly marked.

Expanse 5% inch.

Has. Orissa. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta, and F. Moore.

LYCHENESTHES MERGUIANA, 0. sp.

Male. Upperside violet-blue: hindwing with two indistinct small

anal blackish spots and a larger subanal spot. Underside dull greyish-

brown ; forewing with a transverse antemedial pale-bordered band, a

short band at end of the cell, and a broken discal band, two submarginal

pale lunular lines: hindwing with a pale-bordered subbasal band, one

at end of the cell, and a broken curved discal band ; two submarginal pale

sinuous lines enclosing a small anal and a large oval subanal black spot,

both surmounted by a yellow lunule and speckled with a few metallic-

blue scales.

Expanse 5% inch.

Has. Mergui. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta, and F. Moore.

A much smaller species than L. bengalensis. Distinguished from it,

on the underside, in the forewing having the antemedial pale-bordered

band; and in the hindwing in the more irregular and zigzag pale bands,

and the large subanal spot. It is also distinct from L. lyceena.

Genus Lycmna, Fabr.

LyC@HNA CHAMANICA, N. Sp.

Female. Upperside lavender-blue; extreme outer margin of fore-

wing pale dusky-brown: hindwing with pale dusky-brown costal and

24 F..Moore—Deseriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

marginal border, the latter traversed by an outer row of whitish lunules.

Cilia dusky-brown, edged with white. Underside lilacine ochreous-grey :

forewing with a large white-bordered black lunule at end of the cell, a

discal transverse row of six spots, and a marginal row of white-bordered

dark brown spots, the transverse interspace between the discal and

marginal spots also dark brown: hindwing with three straightly dis-

posed transverse subbasal white-bordered black spots, a lunule at end

of the cell, and a curved discal interrupted row of eight spots ; a mar-

ginal row of rounded dark brown spots bordered by an inner dark brown

lunular line; the anal and penultimate spot is black, speckled with

metallic-blue scales, and surmounted by orange-yellow.

Expanse 1 inch.

Has. Chaman, S. Beluchistan (April). In coll. Ind. Mus., Calcutta.

This species is quite distinct from L. bracteala, Butler.

LiyCHNA NADIRA, 0. Sp.

Female. Upperside dark olivaceous violet-brown : hindwing with a

very faint trace of paler marginal lunules. Cilia brown, edged with

white. Underside pale olivaceous-ochreous : forewing with an olivaceous

white-bordered large black linear spot at end of the cell, and a recurved

transverse discal row of six spots, a submarginal row of small blackish

dentate spots, and a marginal row of linear spots: hindwing with three

subbasal olivaceous white-bordered black spots, a lunule at end of the

cell, a curved discal row of eight spots, a submarginal row of small black-

ish dentate spots, and a marginal row of short linear spots.

Expanse 1 inch.

Has. Kabul. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Quite distinct from L. fugitiva, Butler.

LYCHNA BILUCHA, n. sp.

Male. Upperside brilliant, glossy, opalised, lilacine cobalt-blue, the

exterior margin with a very slender black border. Cilia brown, with

a broad white edge. Underside pale lilacine ochreous-grey, the base of

both wings slightly metallic-green: forewing with a small round white-

bordered black spot in middle of the cell, a prominent streak at end of

the cell, a transverse discal row of seven spots, and a marginal double

row of pale brown white-bordered lunules: hindwing with a prominent

white-bordered black spot in middle of the cell, one above it, a less dis-

tinct spot below it, and a narrow spot on abdominal margin, a streak at

end of the cell, anda discal curved interrupted row of eight spots; a

; 1884. ] Species of ease Diurnal Lepidoptera. » 25

i | ‘marginal row of white-bordered narrow black spots, each surmounted by

a black-lined reddish lunule.

} Expanse 1,2, inch.

Has. Chaman, 8. Beluchistan (April). In coll. Ind. Mus., Calcutta.

Genus CurysopHaNus, Hubner.

CHRYSOPHANUS BARALACHA, 0. sp.

Female. Differs from specimens of same sex of C. phlewas (vars

stygianus) taken in the neighbouring country of Lahoul. Upperside :

forewing golden-yellow, with a blackish quadrate spot in the middle of

_ the cell, a larger spot at its end, three oblique subapical spots, and three

lower discal spots, the lowest spot being the longest and curved ; from

the three subapical spots some black speckles proceed to the discocellular

spot ; the costal edge is very narrowly bordered with brown, and the

. exterior margin has a narrow macular brown border of half the width of

that of the above-mentioned species: hindwing golden greyish-brown,

_ with a broad pale red outer marginal band, which is very slightly inden-

ted with black at end of the veins on its outer border, and on the inner

_ border by a row of indistinct blackish spots surmounted by blue-grey

_ scales, above which is a discal row of five or six smaller black spots and

also a black lunule at end of the cell. Underside of similar colour to that

of above species: forewing with the spots as on upperside, but pale-

bordered, and also a spot at base of the cell, two small spots on the costa

above the discal series, and three linear spots on exterior margin above

the angle, these latter spots being near the margin: hindwing with less

defined red-streaked marginal band, the discal and other spots also com-

paratively larger.

Expanse 12 inch.

Has. Baralacha Pass (16060 feet), Ladak. Taken in July 1879 by

Mr. L. de Nicéville. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Genus Apunazvs, Hiibner.

APHNAUS TIGRINUS, n. sp.

Differs from typical A. vulcanus on the upperside of the forewing in

the more prominent red bands, which, in the female, are conspicuously

broader; there is also a slender marginal band, more or less indistinct in

the male, but very distinct ih the female ; on the hindwing is a red mar-

ginal band extending from above the anal lobe partly up the exterior

margin, this band in the female being curved and reaching the subcostal

26 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

vein. On the underside the bands are similar, but of a brighter red and

with more clearly defined black borders.

Expanse 1 to 12 inch.

Has. Lower Bengal, Calcutta, Maunbhoom, Orissa. In coll. F.

Moore and Indian Museum, Calcutta.

APHNAUS PEGUANUS, 0. sp.

Male. Comparatively larger than A. lohita. Upperside similarly

coloured, anal area dull red, the large black lobe-spot replaced by a

few interciliary black and silver scales. Underside very pale reddish-

ochreous ; the bands dark red, somewhat narrower than in A. lohita:

forewing with the streak at base longitudinal, narrow, and not extending

above the costal vein; the short transverse broad end crossing the

cellin A. lohita is here absent, the band crossing the middle of the cell is

also shorter, the oblique discal and submarginal bands quite confluent at

their posterior end, the inner costal band beyond the cell is short, and

the next band is the longest, both being widely separated—whereas in

A. lohita the inner band is the longest and the two are joined externally

in the middle, the submarginal band is narrower, and the marginal band

very slender: hindwing with the subbasal band composed of three well

separated portions; anal lobe red, with a small interciliary black-speck-

led streak ; the submarginal and marginal band narrower, the latter

being interrupted in crossing the veins.

Expanse 1-3, to 1,4, inch.

Has. Magaree, Pegu. In coll. F. Moore.

APHNEUS HIMALAYANUS, N. sp.

Allied to A. lohita. Male and female much larger than typical

Javanese specimens. Upperside similarly coloured ; anal area duller red.

Underside pale creamy-yellow ; the bands similar, but of a darker purple-

red, all comparatively broader, the marginal band conspicuously broader.

Expanse ¢ 1,3, ? 1 3 to 1,5 inch.

Has. Nepal (Ramsay), Darjiling (Hlliot.) In coll. F. Moore.

APHN®US KHURDANUS, n. Sp.

Male. Upperside dark brown; base of forewing, and hindwing

dark slaty-blue ; anal lobe red, spots black. Underside dull pale pur-

plish brownish-ochreous ; markings very similar to those on underside of

same sex of A. trifurcatus, but comparatively narrower and more regular

in outline.

Expanse | to 13, inch. |

Has. Khurda, Orissa; Calcutta. In coll. Ind. Museum, Calcutta.

4 1884. ] Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 27

This species belongs to the lohita-group of Aphneus. On the

underside the markings are extremely like those in A. trifurcatus, but

the upperside of the forewings has no red patch, as in A. trifurcatus. The

colour of the upperside is also of a much darker tint ; and the outline of

the forewing is comparatively more triangular.

APHNEUS ORISSANUS, 0. sp.

Male. Forewing broader and less regularly triangular than in A.

khurdanus ; hindwing also less produced anally, and the exterior mar-

gin convex. Upperside dark brown; base of forewing, and hindwing,

slaty-blue; anal lobe red, spots black. Underside pale ochreous-yellow ;

bands purple-red, similar to those in A. peqguanus, with the marginal black

black-streaked.

Expanse 1,3, inch.

Has. Sonakhala and Bhatpara, Orissa. In coll. Ind. Mus., Calcutta.

APHNEUS CONCANUS, 2. sp.

Male and female. Nearest to the Ceylonese A. lazularius. Upper-

side similar. Underside pale reddish-ochreous; the bands dark purple-

red, those on the forewing similar: hindwing with the subbasal band com-

posed of three portions, the medial discal and submarginal bands disposed.

nearer together at their costal end, the submarginal straighter, and the

three more or less confluent at their anal end.

Expanse 12 to 14 inch.

Has. Bombay (Dr. Leith) ; Canara (Ward) ; Nilgiris (Lindsay).

In coll. F. Moore.

APHNAUS NIPALICUS, n. Sp.

Male. Upperside dusky violet-brown, the lower basal and discal

areas dark slaty-blue; anal lobe red, the black spots speckled with

silvery-white scales. Underside dull sulphur-yellow, the bands of a

slightly darker somewhat purpurascent yellow ; forewing with an oblique

oval black ring near base of the cell, a black-lined bar across middle of

the cell from the costal edge, an oblique discal band from the costal edge,

broken, but not disconnected, at lower end of the cell, a short upper

discal bar, and two shorter subapical bars beyond, a submarginal band

and a slender broken lunular marginal line ; all but the last traversed by

an extremely slight silvery line ; beneath the cell isa dusky brown fascia,

and a dusky streak also is at end of the submarginal band: hindwing

with a small spot at base of the cell, three transverse,subbasal oval black

rings, a transverse medial band, broken at lower end, then bent upward

to abdominal, margin, and ending in a small ring-spot, and outer discal

28 F. Moore—Diseriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

upper band, a narrower submarginal band broken above anal angle and

bent upward, all traversed by an extremely slight silvery line; anal lobe-

spots large, black, surmounted by bright scarlet.

Female. Upperside paler dusky olive-brown: forewing with sub-

apical darker spot bordered on each side by red; basal area below the

cell slaty-grey : hindwing with the lower basa] area slaty-grey ; anal lobe-

asin male. Underside as in male.

Expanse @ 13, ? 1% inch.

Has. Nepal (Ramsay). Sikkim. In coll. British Museum, and

Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Nearest allied to A. lunulifer.

APHN#US ZEBRINUS, Nn. sp.

Male. Upperside dark brown, base of wings dark brownish violet-

blue ; anal black spot large, broadly bordered with red. Female. Up-

perside darker violet-brown, base of wings dark slaty violet-blue.

Underside very pale ochreous, posterior border of forewing whitish.

All the bands purplish-black, as in A. zoilus ; forewing with the extreme

costal edge black, the bands also extending from the costal edge; basal

streak long and joined to the black costal border, with a cross bar from

its upper end, and a band crossing the middle of the cell (both of which

jom the streak below the base of the cell), the oblique discal band and the

transverse submarginal band are joined together at their lower end, and

the two short upper discal bars are also joined together, the marginal

band is broad with a very narrow interline between it and the submar-

ginal band; hindwing with the upper basal streak slender, the subbasal

band entire and continued to the angle of the discal band above the

bright red anal area, black lobe-spots large, the discal and outer bands

broad.

Expanse 6 13, 2 12 inch.

Has. Ceylon. In coll. British Museum.

Nearest allied to the Andamanese species, A. zoilus. Distinguish-

able from it by its smaller size, by the bands on the forewing all starting

from the extreme costal edge, by the oblique discal band and the submar-

ginal band being broadly joined at their base, and by the marginal band

being broader on both wings.

APHNHUS LILACINUS, n. sp.

Male. Upperside brown: forewing with the basal and discal area,

including the cell, pale lilacine-blue ; a blackish spot at end of the cell :

hindwing with the basal and medial area pale lilacine-blue ; anal lobe

1884.) Species of ‘Asatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 29

ochreous, with a very small silver-speckled black spot. Underside pale

brownish-ochreous : forewing with two black rings in the cell, a band at

end of the cell dilated beneath and extending obliquely to the sub-

median, a ringlet spot beyond end of the cell, an upper discal inwardly

oblique double ringlet spot and a submarginal broad chain-like band, the

lower ends dusky, and each traversed by a black silvery streak : hind-

wing with very indistinct traces of darker-coloured transverse subbasal,

discal, and submarginal bands, which are traversed by silvery black

streaks; anal spots minute, silver-speckled. The silvery streak tra-

verses the middle of the markings, except on the submarginal band of

both wings, where it extends along the outer border.

Expanse, 1,5, inch.

Has. ? Incoll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

HKUASPA, n. g.

Forewing short, broad, costa arched from the base, exterior margin

erect, convex, posterior margin long, straight ; first subcostal emitted at

two-sixths and second at one-sixth before end of the cell, second bifid

at two-thirds from its base, fourth and fifth from end of the cell; disco-

cellular very slender, erect, waved ; radial from its middle; cell broad,

extending to half length of the wing ; middle median from near end of

the cell, lower at one-third before the end, submedian straight : hind-

wing short, very broad, exterior margin convex and slightly sinuous, with

a single slender tail from end of lower median; costal and subcostal

veins joined together at their base, costal much arched from the junc-

ture; cell broad, extending to half length of the wing; first subcostal

emitted at one-fifth before end of the cell; discocellular very slender,

erect ; radial from near its middle; two upper medians from end of the

cell, lower at one-third before the end; submedian curved, internal

short, recurved. Body short; palpi porrect, second joint long, extend-

ing half beyond front of the head, pilose beneath, third joint slender,

one-fifth as long as the second; legs slender ; antennez thickened at the

end, tip blunt.

EUASPA MILIONIA.

Myrima milionia, Hewitson, [lust. D. Lep. p. 5, pl. 3, fig. 90, 80 (1869).

Has. Nepal. Kangra.

Genus HypoLyoana.

Felder, Wien. Ent. Monats. vi, p. 293 (1862).

Male. Wings short, broad: forewing arched at the base, posterior

margin nearly as long as the costal. Upperside with a large glandular

30 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

patch of scales extending broadly across end of the cell; four subcostal

branches, the first emitted at two-fifths, second at one-fourth, and third

from close before end of the cell; discocellular slender, straight ; radial

from its middle; cell extending to more than half length of the wing ;

lower median emitted at nearly one-third and middle median from near

end of the cell; submedian straight: hindwing short, somewhat pro-

duced hindward, anal lobe prominent ; with a slender tail from end of

lower median and another from the submedian; costal vein much arched

at the base ; first subcostal emitted at one-third before end of the cell;

the cell broad and extending to half length of the wing; discocellular

recurved ; radial from its middle; lower median emitted at nearly one

half and middle median from near end of the cell; submedian straight ;

internal recurved. Palpi porrect, second joint stout, third joint very

long, of nearly the same length as the second; legs slender; antennz

with a gradually thickened club.

Type, H. tmolus.

HYPOLYCENA TMOLUS.

Hypolycena tmolus, Felder, Wien. Ent. Monats. vi, p. 293 (1862). Hewits.,

il. D. Lep. p. 49, pl. 21, figs. 3, 6.

Has. Philippines.

HYPOLYCEANA SIPYLUS.

Hypolycena sipylus, Feld., Reise Novara, Lep. ii, p. 242, pl. 30, figs. 15, 16.

Hewits., Ill. D. Lep. pl. 22, figs. 13, 14.

Myrina sipylus, Feld., Sitzb. Ak. Wiss. Wien, 1860, p. 451.

Has. Amboina.

HyPoLyc@NA THARRYTAS.

Hypolycena tharrytas, Feld., Wien. Ent. Monats. vi, p. 294 (1862).

Hyp. sisyphus, Hewits., 1. c. pl. 22, fig. 11, 12.

Has. Luzon.

HyPoLycRNA ERYLUS,

Polyommatus erylus, Godt., Enc. Meth. ix, p. 633, (1828).

Amblypodia erylus, Horsf., Catal. Lep. Mus. H. I. C. p. 111 (1829).

Hypolycena erylus, Hewits., Ill. D. Lep. p. 49, pl. 21, figs. 1, 2, 4.

Has. N. E. Bengal, Sikkim, Khasia Hills, Cherra Punji, Burmah,

Malacca, Singapore.

1884.) . Species of Asiatic Diwrnal Lepidoptera. 31

HYPOLYCENA ANDAMANA.

Hypolycena andamana, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1877, p. 589.

Has. Andamans.

HYPOLYCHNA THECLOIDES.

Myrina thecloides, Feld., Wien, Ent. Monats. iv, p. 395 (1860).

Has. Malacca, Singapore.

HYPoOLYCENA ASTYLA.

Hypolycena astyla, Feld., Wien.,Ent. Monats. vi, p. 294 (1862) ; Reise Novara

Lep. ii, p. 248, pl. 30, figs. 17, 18,

Has. Philippines.

DRvUPADIA, n. g.

Differs from typical Hypolycena in the more triangular form of

forewing, the costa being longer and more regularly convex, the exterior

margin more oblique, and the posterior margin shorter and convex to-

wards the base: hindwing somewhat shorter, the costa being very con-

vex in the middle, the exterior margin truncated from the middle me-

dian, the male on the upperside with a prominent glandular patch of

scales between the costal and subcostal veins, and with three tails, the

middle one being long the others short. Second joint of palpi much

longer and the third shorter and stouter.

Type, D. ravindra (Myrina ravindra, Horst.).

DRUPADIA BOISDUVALII, n. sp.

Myrina lisias, Boisd., Spec. Gen. Lep. Pap. pl. 22, fig. 2 g (nec Fabr.).

Male. Upperside: forewing purplish violet-brown, with a broad

oblique transverse discal almost quadrate red band : hindwing cobalt-blue,

darkest and purplish-violaceous anteriorly ; costal border and abdominal

margin violet-brown ; cilia and tails edged with white.

Female. Upperside: forewing somewhat paler brown, the réd band

of the same width and quadrangular form asin male: hindwing pale

violet-brown, the discal area somewhat red-streaked ; above the tails are

four black spots surmounted by lilac scales.

Underside : forewing ochreous-red, with a brighter red pale-bordered

streak at base of the cell, a band across middle of the cell, another at its

end, and a similar discal band which has a slightly dusky lunulated bor-

der at the upper outer end, a submarginal slender black slightly sinuous

line : hindwing white, the costal border and apex being slightly red, with

the basal and subbasal spots entirely black, a duplex slender black streak

at end of the cell, a similar one above it, a discal zigzag duplex line, and

32 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

a single black submarginal line; a large anal and a subanal black spot

surmounted by metallic-blue scales, which also traverse the intervening

subanal space.

Expanse ¢ 12, ¢ 1% inch.

Has. Moulmein; Mergui. In coll. F. Moore and Indian Museum,

Calcutta.

Drupadia lisias (Pap. lisias, Fabr.) badly figured in Donovan’s Ins.

of India, pl. 40, fig. 1,—is distinct from the above. Both sexes of the

type of D. lisias are in the British Museum Collection.

DRUPADIA FABRICII, n. sp.

Female. Upperside: forewing violet-brown, with a slightly broader

and more irregular-shaped oblique medial red band than in female of

typical D. lisias, the band also having its outer border scalloped :

hindwing paler brown, with grey-bordered anal marginal spots. Under-

side also differs from D. lisias in the apical area of forewing being

suffused with a dusky tint; at the base of the cell is a small round pale-

bordered spot, not an elongated triangular mark as in D. lisias, the

short band crossing the middle of the cell is black, the streak at end of

the cell is more distinct, the transverse discal band black-lined and black-

ish internally at upper end, the submarginal line also being broader and

more prominent: hindwing with the markings less prominent than in

D. lisias, the basal bar shorter, the outer costal narrow streak further

from the second, the first bar between the subcostals being midway be-

low the two outer costals, the three subbasal spots are small and widely

separated, the bar at end of the cell and the spot beneath it are pale-

centred, the zigzag discal interrupted band is composed of duplex streaks,

which are wide apart with the interspace white.

Expanse 2 1,2, inch.

Has. Mergui. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

CHLIARIA, 0. g.

Male. Wings small: forewing triangular; costa gently arched ;

exterior margin oblique, posterior margin straight; four subcostal

branches, first emitted at one-third before end of the cell and slightly

touching the costal vein near its end; second and third branches at

equal distances apart ; cell extending to nearly half length of the wing;

discocellular extremely slender; one radial from near its middle; the

middle median from near end of the cell, lower at one-third before the

end; submedian nearly straight : hindwing short ; apex convex, exterior

margin oblique and waved; cell short, broad; costa arched from near

1884. ] Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 33

the base; first subcostal from near end of the cell; discocellular ex-

tremely slender, oblique; radial from its middle; two upper medians

from end of the cell, lower at nearly one-half before the end; submedian

straight ; internal recurved ; a slender tail from end of lower median and

another from the submedian. Palpi porrect, second joint stout, third

joint very slender; antennz with a short spatular club.

Type, C. othona.

CHLIARIA OTHONA.

Hypolycena othona, Hewits., Illust. D. Lep. p. 50, pl. 22, fig. 17, 18 (1865).

Has. Darjiling. Khasia Hills.

CHLIARIA ELTOLA.

Hypolycena eltola, Hewits., Illust. D. Lep. Suppl. p. 14, pl. 5, fig. 37, 38 (1869).

Has. Andamans.

CHLIARIA KINA.

Hypolycena kina, Hewits., Illust. D. Lep. Suppl. p. 18, pl. 5, fig. 32, 34 (1869).

Has. Sikkim. Nepal.

CHLIARIA CHANDRANA.

Hypolycena chandrana, Moore, P. Z. 8, 1882, p. 249, pl. xi, fig. 2, 2a.

Has. Lahul, N. W. Himalaya.

CHLIARIA CACHARA.

Hypolycena cachara, Moore, P. Z. 8S. 1883, p. 527, pl. xlix. fig. 6.

Has. Cachar.

CHLIARIA NILGIRICA.

Hypolycena nilgirica, Moore, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 527, pl. xlix, fig. 8.

Has. Nilgiris.

SINTHUSA, n. g.

Male. Wings small: forewing somewhat broad, costa arched at the

base, apex pointed, exterior margin slightly oblique and convex, posterior

margin convex near the base; subcostal vein five-branched, first branch

emitted at nearly one-half, second at one-fourth, and third from near the

end of the cell, third bifid near its end; cell extending to half length of

34 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. I,

the wing; discocellular slender; radial from its middle; lower median

at more than one-third and middle median from near end of the cell ;

submedian straight : hindwing short, broad, costa arched in the middle,

exterior margin with a single slender tail from end of lower median ;

cell broad, triangular, extending half the wing; first subcostal at one-

half before end of the cell; discocellular oblique, slender ; radial from

its middle; lower median at nearly one-half and middle median from

near end of the cell; submedian and internal veins recurved. Palpi

porrect, second joint long, third joint short, slender, pointed ; antennz

with a large thick pointed club.

Type, S. nasaka.

SINTHUSA NASAKA.

Thecla nasaka, Horsfield, Catal. Lep. Mus. BE. I. C. p. 91 (1829).

Deudoria nasaka, Hewits., Illust. D. Lep. pl. 5, fig. 45, 46.

Has. Java.

SINTHUSA MALIKA.

Thecla malika, Horsfield, Catal. Lep. Mus. EH. I. C. p. 90 (1829).

Dipsas malika, Moore, Catal. Lep. Mus. E. 1. C. I. pl. 1 a., fig. 5 (1857).

Myrina malika, Hewits., Ilust. D.-Lep. pl. 15, fig. 41—43.

Has. Java. Sumatra.

SINTHUSA GROTEI.

Hypolycena grotei, Moore, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 527, pl. 49, fig. 5.

Has. N. H. Bengal (Grote).

Genus Ioxatvs.

Hiibner, Verz. bek. Schmett. p. 81 (1816-18).

Male. Forewing short, broad; costa very much arched from the

base, apex acute, exterior margin very slightly oblique, posterior margin

long, slightly convex in middle, the convex edge being fringed with long

hairs ; on the underside of the wing is a glandular patch of scales situat-

ed immediately above the submedian vein; cell broad, extending in

length to half the wing; costal vein short ; subcostal arched from the

base, first branch emitted at one-half, second at one-fourth, and third

immediately before end of the cell, third trifid at three-fourths from its

base, fifth from end of the cell; discocellulars erect, upper shortest ;

radial from near their middle ; the middle median emitted from near end

of the cell, lower at one-fourth before the end; submedian straight:

1884.) Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 35

hindwing short, lengthened hindward; costa very convex, apex almost

angular, exterior margin very oblique and sinuous, lobate at anal angle,

furnished with two short slender tails; on the upperside is a subcostal

glandular patch of scales ; costal and subcostal veins joined together for

ashort distance at their base, widely separated beyond, costal much

arched from the basal juncture; cell broad, triangular ; two subcostal

branches, first emitted at one-third before end of the cell; discocellulars

very oblique ; radial from near their middle ; two upper medians from end

of the cell, lower at one-third before the end; median straight ; internal

short. Body moderate; palpi ascending, second joint long, ascending

above level of the eyes, third joint half its length, slender; legs slender ;

antenne slender, gradually thickened to end, tip pointed.

Type, I. helius (helius, Fabr.; Hewits., Ill. D. L. Suppl. pl. 4, f. 31.)

The typical species of Iolaws are African. The characters of the

genus are here given for comparison with its Asiatic allies.

CopHANTA, n. g.

Forewing broad, costa arched, exterior margin slightly convex,

posterior margin nearly straight ; cell broad, extending to half length

of the wing, costal vein extending to half the margin; first subcos-

tal emitted at two-fifths and second at one-fourth before end of the cell,

third bifid at nearly two-thirds from the base; discocellular slender,

slightly bent outward in the middle; the radial from its angle; lower

median at one-third and middle median from close before end of the

cell; submedian straight: hindwing broad, costa abruptly arched at

the base, apex convex, exterior margin oblique and sinuous from middle

median, anal angle lobed, with a slender tail from lower median and

another from submedian ; costal and subcostal joined together for a

short distance at the base, the costal much arched from above the junc-

ture, and extending to the apex; first subcostal emitted at one-fifth be-

fore end of the cell; discocellular outwardly oblique and bent outward at

the middle ; the radial from its angle; cell broad, extending to nearly

half the wing ; lower median at one-third and middle median from im-

mediately before end of the cell; submedian straight ; internal recurved.

Body short, thick ; palpi porrect, second joint long, extending half length

beyond the eyes, third joint slender, slightly fusiform, nearly half length

of the second ; antennez short, stout, with a gradually thickened club ;

legs short.

Type, C. illurgis.

36 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Clenera and [No. 1,

CoPHANTA ILLURGIS.

Iolaus illurgis, Hewitson, Illust. D. Lep. Suppl. p. 10, pl. 4, fig. 37, 38 (1869).

Has. Darjiling.

CoPHANTA MACULATA.

Iolaus maculatus, Hewits., Illust. D. Lep. p. 47, pl. 21, fig. 29, 30 (1865).

Has. Silhet. Darjeeling.

DACALANA, n. g.

Male. Forewing comparatively more triangular than in typical

Tolaus (I. helius), the exterior margin being somewhat oblique, and the

posterior margin shorter; venation similar; on the upperside of the

typical species, between the median and submedian veins, is a tuft of fine

hairs covering a small glandular-scaled spot, and on the underside there

is also a tuft of hairs on the middle of the posterior margin: hindwing

comparatively broader, being less produced hindward, the apex more

convex, and the glandular subcostal spot less prominent.

Type, D. vidura (Amblyp. vidura).

DACALANA VIDURA.

Amblypodia vidura, Horsf., Catal. Lep. Mus. E. I. C. p. 113, pl. 1, fig. 6, 6a. g;

(1829).

Harn. Java. Borneo.

DACALANA BURMANA, 0. Sp.

From typical Javan D. vidura, this differs in the darker blue of the

upperside. The colour of the underside is also brighter and of an

ochreous-brown tint, the transverse white band is somewhat broader, the

submarginal black line composed of short curved portions between the

veins, and the whole series forms a more curved line in crossing each

wing ; the black subanal and lobe-spot is slightly smaller, and the former

is but very slightly surmounted with red.

Expanse ¢ 1; inch.

Has. Moulmein. In coll. British Museum.

DACALANA COTYs.

Iolaus cotys, Hewitson, Ilust. D. Lep. p. 48, pl. 19, fig. 19, 20 (1865).

Has. Nepal. Darjiling.

(1884.4 Species of Asiatic Diwrnal Lepidoptera. 37

Genus Pratapa, Moore.

PRATAPA BHOTEA, 0. sp.

Female. Upperside purpurascent greyish-blue: forewing with the

anterior margin from the costal vein, the apex broadly, and the exterior

margin violet-brown ; cilia grey: hindwing with a marginal row of nar-

row violet-black spots ending in a red anal lobe-spot; a slender black

marginal line; cilia greyish-white; the two tails black with white

cilia.

Underside glossy purpurascent greyish-white: forewing with an

indistinct darker bluish-grey streak at end of the cell, and two slender

lunular fasciz along exterior margin ; a transverse discal slender promi-

nent black broken sinuous line: hindwing with a similar cell streak and

outer marginal fascie, the latter darkest at anal end; a jet black anal

lobe-spot, on which are a few scarlet scales and some turquoise-blue

scales along its inner border; a transverse discal zigzag slender black

broken line ending upward above the anal lobe.

Expanse 13 inch.

Has. Sikkim. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

REMELANA, 0. g.

Male. Forewing less triangular than in Tajuria (T. longinus, Fabr.),

the costal margin more abruptly arched at the base, exterior margin

slightly convex, posterior angle rounded: hindwing broader and _ less

produced hindward ; costa less arched at the base, very convex external-

ly, with a slender tail from end of lower median and another from the

submedian, abdominal margin short. Palpi shorter, second joint stouter,

and third joint longer; antenne shorter, tip shorter and more regularly

clavate. Venation similar.

Type, ft. jangala.

REMELANA JANGALA.

Amblypodia jangala, Horsfield, Catal. Lep. Mus. E. 1.0. p. 113 (1829), 9; Moore,

ibid. p. 40, pl. la, f. 11, ¢.

Has. Java. N. H. Bengal.

REMELANA TRAVANA.

Myrina travana, Hewitson, Ilust. D. Lep. p. 38, pl. 17, f. 59-60 (1865) 3.

Has. Sumatra. Singapore. Borneo.

38 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1, .

APPORASA, 0. g.

From Thaduka this differs in the forewing having the exterior

margin biangulated and produced outward below the apex. In the

hindwing the costa is longer, arched at the base, and produced to an

upward angle at the apex; the exterior margin is deeply scalloped ; it

also has three shorter tails. Palpi long, porrect, second joint extending

two-thirds beyond the eyes, third joint also long and slender, being half

the length of second ; antennze stouter and blunt at tip.

APPORASA ATKINSONI.

Amblypodia atkimsom, Hewits., Catal. Lyc, Brit. Mus. p. 3. pl. 8, fig. 92, 93

(1862).

Has. Moulmein.

SATADRA, n. g.

Forewing comparatively longer and narrower than in typical Pan-

chala, the costa abruptly arched at the base, exterior margin oblique :

hindwing slightly but regularly arched along the costa, apex very con-

vex, exterior margin oblique, with a slender tail at end of lower median

vein and a point at end of both the middle median and submedian.

Venation similar to that of Panchala.

Type, S. atraz.

SATADRA ALBA.

Amblypodia alea, Hewits., Catal. Lyc. B. M. p. 12, pl. 7, fig. 79, 81 (1862).

Has. India.

SATADRA SELTA.

Amblypodia selta, Hewits., Ill. D. Lep. p. 14. pl. 8a, £. 36, 37 (1869).

Has. Moulmein.

SATADRA AGABA,

Amblypodia agaba, Hewits., Catal. Lyc. B. M. p. 8, pl. 4, f. 39, 40 (1862).

Has. India.

In the Hewitson Cabinet this species is placed under S. alea.

SATADRA BUPOLA.

Amblypodia bupola, Hewits., Ill. D. Lep. ii. Suppl. p. 21, pl. 8, fig. 44, 45 (1878).

Has. Nepal. Daryjiling.

iv ‘ f

1884.) | Species of Astatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 39

SATADRA BAZALUS.

Amblypodia bazalus, Hewits., Catal. Lyc. B. M. pl. 4, fig. 37, 38 (1862) g.

Has. Nepal.

SATADRA ATRAX.

Amblypodia atrar, Hewits., Catal. Lyc. B. M. p. 13, pl. 7, fig. 80, 82 (1862).

Has. Nepal.

SATADRA ANTHELUS.

Amblypodia anthelus, Doubleday and Hewits., Gen. D. L. pl. 74, f. 6 (1852).

Hewits., Catal. Lyc. B. M. pl. 3, f. 23. 24.

Has. Moulmein.

SATADRA CANARAICA, 0. sp.

Allied to S. alea (Amblypodia alea, Hewits). Male and female.

Upperside of a more purplish violet-blue than in SV. alea, the marginal

black border comparatively narrower in the male. Underside of a darker

purplish violet-brown: forewing with the basal spots darker, the two

cell-spots very small and round, the discocellular spot and the two below

the cell narrower, the transverse discal band regular and not broken on

the upper median vein, the submarginal and marginal lunules obsoles-

cent: hindwing with the basal and subbasal spots darker and very small,

the discal zigzag band narrower and less distinct, the submarginal and

marginal lunules obsolescent; anal angle less speckled with metallic-

green scales, the anal black spot only present.

Expanse ¢ 13, ? 14 inch.

Has. Canara, S. India (Ward). In coll. F. Moore.

In S. alea the underside is uniformly purplish-brown, the markings

all of a regular colour and distinctly lined with pale purplish-white.

SATADRA CHOLA, N. sp.

Closely allied to S. areste (Amblypodia areste, Hewits.). Male.

Upperside of a comparatively darker purplish blue, the marginal black

borders being one half less the width. Female. Upperside also with the

blue area extending comparatively more over the disc. Underside : fore-

wing more dusky olive-brown in colour, with much narrower whitish

cell-streak, quadrate spot beneath it, and transverse discal band, the

outer band being more defined: hindwing with similarly disposed

markings except that the subbasal band is very broad and entire (not

40 F. Moore—Descriptiohs of some new Genera and [No. 1,

macular as in 8. areste), and the markings are all of a dark somewhat

aenescent-brown, with pale pinkish-white borders and the interspaces

pale pinkish violet colour (not grey as in S. areste) ; at the anal angle is

a marginal black spot and another between the middle and lower median

veins, both spots and the intervening marginal space speckled with me-

tallic-green scales.

Expanse $ @ 1,8; inch.

Has. Sikkim. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta, and F. Moore.

SATADRA LAZULA, 0. sp.

Male. Upperside of both wings entirely ultramarine-blue ; the ex-

treme costal edge of forewing, the costal and abdominal borders of hind-

wing, and the cilia being black.

Female. Dark violet-brown, the forewing with ultramarine-blue

within the cell and obliquely below on the disc, and narrowly on middle

of the hindwing from base of the cell. Underside dark purple-brown :

forewing with similarly disposed but broader markings than those in

S. chola, the two outer bands purplish-violet: hindwing dark purple-

brown, with similar markings to those in 8. chola, the discal bands con-

tinuous, the interspaces brighter pink, the anal marginal spots small and

more numerously green-speckled.

Expanse 1,8, inch.

Has. Sikkim. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta, and F. Moore.

SATADRA PATUNA, 0. sp.

Female. Smaller than §. lazula. Upperside dark violet-brown,

the basal and discal areas purplish-blue, paler than in S. lazula, but

disposed as in female of that species. Underside purplish-brown : fore-

wing with similarly disposed cell, streak, discal band, and lower quadrate

patches, but of a pale ochreous colour: hindwing with the basal area

broadly and entirely dark bright purple-brown (more like that of typi-

cal S. apidanus), which merges into a transverse broad pale purplish-

ochreous inner discal fascia, and again into a dark purplish-brown outer

discal fascia, the outer border of the wing being broadly pale purplish-

brown; across the disc are traced two series of indistinct brown-lined.

marks, which are similarly disposed to, but are less continuous than, those

in 8. lazula; an indistinct brown marginal lunular line, but no metallic

speckles at anal angle.

Expanse 1} inch.

Has. Nepal (General Ramsay). In coll. F. Moore.

——-1884.] Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera.

SATADRA CHCA.

Amblypodia ceca, Hewits., Ill. D. Lep. p. 14, pl. 4, fig. 28 (1863).

Has. Borneo (Sarawak).

SATADRA ARESTE.

Amblypodia areste, Hewits. Catal. Lyc. B. M. pl. 5. f£. 48, 44 (1862).

Has. Darjiling.

SATADRA FULGIDA.

Amblypodia fulgida, Hewits., Ill. D. Lep. p. 11, pl. 5, fig. 31 (1863).

Has. [? Philippines]. N. India.

SATADRA CHINENSIS.

Arhopala chinensis, Feld., Reise Novara Lep. ii, p. 231, pl. 29, f. 10 (1865).

Has. China.

SATADRA DIARDI.

Amblypodia diardi, Hewits., Catal. Lyc. B. M. p. 9, pl. 5, f. 41, 42, (1862).

Has. Penang. Singapore.

SATADRA APIDANUS.

Papilio apidanus, Cram., Pap. Exot. ii. pl. 187. f. F. G. (1779).

Amblypodia apidanus, Horsf., Catal. Lep. Mus. H. I. C. p. 100 (1829).

Has. Java. Sumatra. Borneo.

SATADRA ABSENS.

Amblypodia absens, Hewits., Catal. Lyc. B. M. p. 9, pl. 5, f. 51, 52 (1862).

Has. Daryjiling.

SATADRA ZETA.

Amblypodia zeta, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1877, p. 590, pl. 58, f. 6.

Has. Andamans.

ACESINA, n. g.

Forewing with the costa less arched than in Panchala, apex less

Type, A. paraganesa.

pointed, exterior margin more oblique, and waved ; fourth subcostal vein

emitted further from end of the third: hindwing not so broad or quadrate

in shape, the costa but slightly arched from the base, exterior margin

more oblique and regularly convex, with a slender tail one-fourth of an

an inch long from end of lower median vein ; abdominal margin shorter.

Antennal club somewhat shorter.

42 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. I,

ACESINA PARAGANESA.

Amblypodia paraganesa, De Nicéville, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1882, p. 63.

Panchala paraganesa, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 530.

Amblypodia ganesa, Hewits., Catal. Lyc. B. M. pl. 7, f. 72 (1862).

Has. Nepal.

DaRASANa, n. g.

Forewing short, broad, triangular ; apex acute, exterior margin very

slightly oblique, posterior angle somewhat rounded: hindwing short,

broad ; costa arched towards the base, exterior margin very convex; no

tail. Antenne slender.

Type, D. perimuta.

DARASANA PERIMUTA.

Amblypodia perimuta, Moore, Catal. Lep. Mus. E. I. C. 1, p. 42 (1857). Hewits.

Catal. Lyc. B. M. p. 12, pl. 6, fig. 65, 66.

Has. Khasia Hills. Magaree, Pegu.

DARASANA NEWARA, 0. sp.

Upperside violet-brown: forewing with the basal and discal area

purplish violet-blue, which extends also above the cell to near the costal

edge, the outer brown border being about one-tenth of an inch in width:

hindwing with the basal area purplish violet-blue, the outer border being

two-tenths of an inch in width. Underside pale-brown ; with faint traces

of pale-bordered marks within and beneath the cell, at its end, and a

more distinct narrow macular discal and submarginal lunular band:

hindwing with four indistinct pale-bordered darker brown basal spots,

a similar subbasal series, a discal broken band, and marginal double

lunular band.

Expanse 1,2; inch.

Has. Nepal (Genl. Ramsay). In Coll. F. Moore.

Genus Naratuura, Moore.

NARATHURA ROONA, 0. sp.

Closely allied to, but smaller than N. aroa (Amblypodia aroa, Hewit-

son, Ill. D. Lep. p. 13, pl. 2, f. 12), from Sumatra. Female. Upperside

dark violet-brown, costal edge and cilia paler: forewing with the basal

and discal area, and the hindwing with the basal and medial discal area,

violet-blue. Underside of a similar tint of brown to that in N. aroa, mark-

ings also similarly disposed, but with darker centres; on the forewing

1884. | Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 4.3

the cell-spots are smaller and oval in shape, and the discal band broader ;

on the hindwing the basal spots are more rounded, the discal band more

conspicuous and less zigzag in shape, and the submarginal and marginal

lunular line more distinctly formed ; at the anal angle is a black spot and

another between the median veins, the spots and intervening space being

speckled with metallic-green scales.

Expanse 1,8; inch.

Has. Andaman Isles. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta, and British

Museum (Hewitson Cabinet).

Genus AmsBiypopiA, Horsfield.

AMBLYPODIA ANDERSONII, n. sp.

Male. Smaller than A. taooana. Upperside of a similar tint of

ultramarine-blue ; both wings with a much narrower black marginal

border. Underside much darker-coloured, but similarly marked.

Expanse 14 inch.

Has. Sampu, Mergui (Dr. Anderson). In coll. Ind. Mus., Calcutta.

Family PAPILIONIDAL.

Subfamily Pisrina.

Genus CatropHaca, Hiibner.

CATOPHAGA WARDII, n. sp.

Allied to the South Indian and Ceylonese C. neombo. Male and

female of much larger size. |

Male. Upperside olivaceous-white: forewing with a broad black

apical band extending from middle of the costa to near the posterior

angle, the band traversed by a curved subapical row of five small white

spots, the inner border of the band excavated below the costa to below

the second upper spot, then bulged inward to the disc in front of the two

lower spots, concave below the middle median to lower median, below

which the end of the band is imperfect and terminates on the submedian ;

base of wing broadly grey and sparsely speckled with minute black

scales on base of the costa: hindwing with a marginal series of broad

black confluent dentate spots, which decrease in width from the costa.

Underside : forewing olivaceous-white, apex pale yellow, with a curved

black subapical band similar to the inner portion on the upperside : hind-

wing pale yellow throughout.

Female. Upperside of a darker tint of olivaceous-white than in

male; forewing with a broader black apical band, which is traversed by

Ad F. Moore—Deseriptions of some new Genera and [No. I,

three subapical white spots, the inner border of the band being less exca-

vated below the costa, the excavated space being shorter and angular on

the middle median, more deeply concave beneath it, and the end entirely

black to the submedian vein: hindwing with a broader continuous black

band, the inner border of which is acutely dentated. Underside: fore-

wing with the basal area tinged with yellow, the discal area olivaceous-

white, and the apex glossy olivaceous-white ; a broad curved subapical

black band corresponding to the inner portion on the upperside : hind-

wing entirely pale glossy olivaceous-white.

Expanse ¢, ? 22 inches.

Has. Coonoor, Nilgiris, S. India (Ward and Lindsay). In coll.

Indian Museum, Calcutta, and F’. Moore.

CATOPHAGA ROEPSTORFFII, 0. sp.

Male. Upperside white: forewing slightly grey and sparsely black-

scaled along base of costal border ; a black-speckled spot between upper

and middle median veins. Hindwing immaculate. Underside: fore-

wing white, apex very pale yellow; the black-speckled spot as above:

hindwing very pale yellow.

Expanse 22 inches.

Has. Nicobar Isles. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Near to C. paulina. Male. Differs from the same sex of that spe-

cies in the entire absence of the blackish apical margin on the forewing,

and in the presence of the discal spot.

Genus Ix1as, Hiibner.

IXIAS GANDUCA, n. sp.

Male and female. Upperside deep sulphur-yellow: male: forewing

with the apex brownish black traversed by a moderately broad orange-

red subapical band, the inner border of the band being very slightly

edged with black: hindwing with a very slender black-speckled marginal

band.

Female : forewing with a narrower and more irregular-bordered sub-

apical band, which is slightly tinged with orange-yellow, the inner border

of the band is broadly black across end of the cell, and from the upper

median to the indentation of the lower portion of the band the border

consists of a very slender black-speckled line, the lower portion of the

band is indented with black, the next upper interspace has a medial black

spot, and the third upper interspace is broken by a large black spot :

hindwing with a broader dentate-bordered black marginal band. Under-

1884. ] Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. Ad

side of both sexes ochreous-yellow, palest on base of the forewing ; both

wings with sparsely disposed slender brown strigew: forewing with a

blackish spot at end of the cell, a transverse discal row of purple-brown-

speckled spots with white centres; hindwing with a similar white-centred

purple-brown-speckled costal spot and row of discal spots, the second and

third upper spots being the largest : a brown dot also at end of the cell.

Expanse ¢ 2, 2 24 inches.

Has. Calcutta (February). In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Nearest to, but distinct from, I. moulmeinensis. The male differs

from it above in the comparatively narrower orange-red band and its less

black inner border. The female also is quite different from the same

sex of that species. ©

Genus Ipmais, Boisd.

IDMAIS SURYA, 0. sp.

Nearest to I. ortens. Male larger, upperside much brighter-colour-

ed, the black apical band broader, and is traversed by three spots only,

which are comparatively shorter ; the marginal spots are more prominent,

the black inner border terminating on the upper median as in I. oriens ;

below the three subapical spots are two black spots. Cell-spot on fore-

wing three times the size of that in JI. ortens on both the upper and

underside : hindwing with six marginal black spots, larger than in JI.

oriens. Underside much brighter-coloured than in I. oriens; base of

both wings deep yellow, the outer borders broadly suffused with orange-

red, the discal macular band similar but much less prominent on the

hindwing.

Expanse 1¢ inch.

Has. Sonakhala, Orissa. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Genus Mancipium, Hiibner.

MANCIPIUM NAGANUM, n. sp.

Male. Upperside pale yellowish-white ; forewing with the base of

the costal border sparsely black-speckled ; a black band at the apex, the

inner border of the band being curved, slightly irregular, and termina-

ting at the middle median vein; a small black discal spot between the

upper and middle medians, and a slight black-speckled spot at lower end

of the cell. Underside: forewing white, with the apex pale yellow, the

discal and discocellular spot as on upperside : hindwing yellow.

Expanse 2 inches.

Has. Naga Hills, Assam. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

46 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. },

Genus Appras, Hiibner.

APPIAS AMBOIDES, n. sp.

Male. Upperside white: forewing with a narrow apical black band.

Underside : forewing white, the costal border, and apex corresponding to

tle band on upperside, pale brownish-ochreous: hindwing entirely pale

brownish-ochreous, with a slight indistinct dusky fascia extending from

the base along the subcostal and median vein.

Expanse 12 inch.

Has. Silhet. Dihung, Assam. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta,

and F. Moore.

Genus Hiposcritia, Hiibner.

HIPOSCRITIA IMBECILIS, n. sp.

Male. Upperside white : forewing with a black-speckled apical band,

which is traversed by four subapical white spots. Underside: forewing

white, with the apex ochreous-white and slightly speckled with ochreous-

brown scales: hindwing ochreous-white, sparsely speckled with ochreous-

brown scales with slight traces of their clustering on the anterior margin

near end of the costal and subcostal veins and across the disc in an indis-

tinct zigzag fascia ; a small blackish spot at end of the cell.

Expanse 12 to 2 inches.

Has. Silhet; Assam. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta, and

F. Moore.

Allied both to H. indra and to H. mahana. Distinguished from

the latter by its smaller size. Forewing with paler and less defined black-

ish apical band. No subapical curved black fascia on the underside.

Subfamily PapiLionina.

Genus Papinio, Linn.

PAPILIO LADAKENSIS, n. sp.

Male. Distinguished from the N. W. Himalayan P. asiaticus by

the absence of the elongated tail on the hindwing, which in this form is

reduced to a short point but little more acute than the anal angle. The

forewing 18 comparatively narrower, and the hindwing is less convex and

with less acutely sinuous exterior margin. On the upperside the yellow

is also of a paler tint: forewing numerously covered with yellow scales

between all the markings, the cell bands are shorter transversely and

broader, and the inner cell-band is regularly quadrate ; the discal bands

1884. ] Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. AT

also comparatively narrower and with more slender intervening black

veins ; the marginal row of spots is broader, and the intervening trans-

verse discal area is narrower: hindwing with the outer border of the

yellow basal area excavated between the veins, the marginal spots shorter

and somewhat broader, the anal lobe-spot also smaller and broader®

Expanse 3} inches.

Has. Tarhsam, Ladak. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

PAPILIO SIKKIMENSIS, n. sp.

Differs from N. W. Himalayan and Nepalese specimens of P. asiati-

cus in the very much darker black colour of the upperside ; and in the

forewing having the yellow cell-bands quadrate in form, the discal band

composed of smaller and shorter portions, and the area intervening be-

tween the band and the marginal spots broader. On the hindwing, the

veins are broadly black-lined, the abdominal border also black and leay-

ing but a small subanal lunule; the discal margin of the yellow area

has a more regularly scalloped edge, and there is also a broader discal

area intervening between it and the marginal spots; the crimson anal

lobe-spot is smaller, narrower, and has a lower retort-like black spot.

Expanse 2¢ to 33 inches.

Has. Sikkim (Hlwes).

Family HESPERIIDZ.

CUPITHA, n. g.

Male. Forewing elongated, triangular, costa arched at the base,

exterior margin oblique, posterior margin convex towards the base ; first

subcostal emitted at nearly one-half before end of the cell, the branches

at equal distance apart; cell extending to nearly two-thirds length of

the wing; discocellular almost erect, slightly bent close to upper end

and below the middle ; upper radial from the angle near subcostal, lower

radial from the angle below the middle ; the middle median at one-sixth,

and lower median at four-sixths before end of the cell, submedian undu-

lated ; on the underside of the forewing is a short, broad, nacreous patch

on the middle of posterior margin, across which the submedian is lined

with rough scales, and from near the base of the margin projects a broad.

pencil of long rigid hairs: hindwing short, costa very much arched from

the base, apex rounded ; costal vein extending to near apex, forked at

its base ; subcostal bent upward and slightly joined to costal close to the

base, subcostal two-branched, first branch from close to end of the cell ;

discocellular very slender, slightly oblique and concave ; cell extending

48 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

to nearly half the wing, of equal width throughout; middle median from

near end of the cell, lower at more than one-half before the end, the

portion from the middle median to lower median distorted and extending

beneath a drum-like glandular sac, which extends upward in a circular

form within the cell from base of lower median, the sac, or drum, as seen

from the upperside, is flat, with a well-defined circular rim, and on the

underside, it stands out from the surface in a corrugated circular form ;

no radial present ; submedian straight ; internal vein curved.

Thorax stout; antennz with a slender club.

Type, O. tympanifera.

CUPITHA PURREEA.

Pamphila Purreea, Moore, P. Z. S. 1877, p. 564, pl. 58, fig. 10, 9. Wood-

Mason, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1881, p. 261.

Has. South Andaman.

CUPITHA TYMPANIFERA, 0. sp.

Male. Upperside dark violet-brown ; forewing witha broad gam-

boge-yellow basal costal band, and an oblique discal sinuous-bordered

band extending upward from near base of the posterior margin to near

the apex: hindwing with a broad transverse discal yellow band extend-

ing from near the abdominal margin to near the apex and thence upward

along the costal border. Cilia yellow. Body brown; abdomen with

yellow bands. Underside deep gamboge-yellow: forewing with a short

ochreous-brown streak extending longitudinally from the base to end of

the cell, and a broad patch at the posterior angle: hindwing with a

similarly coloured speckled patch near anal angle ascending upward from

end of submedian vein. Palpi and legs yellow, antenne annulated with

yellow.

Expanse ¢ 12.

Has. Magaree, Pegu. In coll. F. Moore.

This is a comparatively larger insect than C. purreea; the bands on

the forewing are broader and with more irregular borders, the bands on

the hindwing are also broader.

Genus PiesionneuRA, Felder.

PLESIONEURA MUNDA, 0. Sp.

Male and female. Upperside olive-brown: forewing with an ob-

lique transverse discal semidiaphanous white band, similar to, but more

compact than that in P. leucocera, the apex-spot starting from above the

costal vein, the two lower large spots, the small one beneath, as well as

that outwardly between them, are not separated from each other, the

1884.) “Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 49

second lower spot between the median and submedian only being apart

from the rest; three subapical conjoined white spots and two minute

lower dots; cilia very faintly alternated brownish-white: hindwing

uniformly olive-brown: cilia deeply alternated with white. Underside

paler than above: forewing marked the same: hindwing numerously

speckled with olive-green scales towards abdominal margin; an olive-

green-speckled lunule at end of the cell.

Expanse 1? inch.

Has. Simla (Lang). In coll. F. Moore.

Genus Svuastus, Moore.

SUASTUS ADITUS, n. sp. —

Male. Upperside dark violet-brown: forewing with two small qua-

drate yellow spots at end of the cell, a larger spot immediately beneath

end of the cell between the middle and lower medians, and a small spot

between the base of upper and middle medians; between the lower

median and submedian is a very slight trace of an opaque yellowish

streak ; cilia edged with grey. Underside paler brown: forewing with

the spots as above, and a whitish discal patch below them: hindwing

speckled with olive-grey scales, which are most thickly disposed along

the abdominal border and form a distinct line along the submedian vein ;

two dark brown discal spots, one being situated between the middle and

lower medians, the other between the latter and submedian. Body, pal-

pi, and legs beneath olivaceous-grey.

Expanse 1,2, inch.

Has. Andaman Isles. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Allied to S. sala (Hesperia sala, Hewits.).

SUASTUS MOLLERII, n. sp.

Male. Upperside very dark olive-brown: forewing with three small

narrow white semidiaphanous subapical spots, a larger narrow spot at

lower end of the cell, a still larger spot below end of the cell, and a small

very slender spot between base of upper and middle medians; a small

yellowish opaque spot also above middle of the submedian: hindwing

with the abdominal border broadly paler olive-brown, Cilia cinereous-

white. Underside: forewing dusky-black, the costal border and apical

area pale olive-brown ; spotted as above: hindwing very pale olive-brown,

with the interspace between submedian and internal veins white. Palpi

beneath, and legs, and abdomen beneath, white.

Expanse 13 inch.

Has. Sikkim (Otto Moller). In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta,

50 F. Moore—Descriptions of some new Genera and [No. 1,

Genus Satarupa, Moore.

SATARUPA PHISARA 0. sp.

Male. Upperside dark vinous-brown : forewing with two, sometimes

three or four, minute semidiaphanous yellowish white subapical spots,

a small spot at lower end of the eell, a large quadrate spot below end of

the cell, and a small spot also between the base of upper and middle

medians ; a very indistinct greyish-brown-speckled submarginal lunular

fascia and a similar short fascia below the quadrate discal spot: hind-

wing with a transverse subbasal pale yellowish band, and a curved sub-

marginal indistinct greyish-brown-speckled lunular fascia, which gives

the discal area a macular appearance. Female: forewing marked as in

male, the short fascia below the discal spot more distinct: hindwing

with the transverse band somewhat broader, the discal area between it

and the submarginal lunular fascia more distinctly macular, being tra-

versed by pale veins. Underside as above, the markings more promi-

nent. Abdomen with slender white narrow bands; front of head and

base of palpi, and pectus, orange-yellow, tip-of palpi black.

Expanse ¢& 1,5, 2 1,8 inch.

Has. Khasia Hills. In coll. Indian’ Museum, Calcutta, and F.

Moore.

Alhed to S. bhagava and to 8. sambara.

SATARUPA NARADA, 0. sp.

Upperside purpurascent violet-brown : forewing with three small

upper and two lower subapical semidiaphanous white spots, a small erect

oval spot at lower end of the cell, a slightly larger quadrate spot on the

disc between upper and middle medians, and a broad band formed of three

quadrate spots increasing in width from end of cell to posterior margin :

hindwing with a broad white transverse medial band, the outer border

with an ill-defined upper spot. Cilia edged with white. Underside

marked as above; the hindwing with the band showing a more defined

macular outer border and a well separated upper spot.

Expanse 1,4, inch.

Has. Darjiling, Sikkim. In coll. Indian Museum, Calcutta, and F.

Moore.

Nearest allied to S. bhagava, but quite distinct.

1884.) Species of Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera. 51

Genus TaciapEs, Hubner.

TAGIADES KHASIANA, 0. Sp.

Male. Nearest to 7. ravi. Of larger size: forewing comparatively

more pointed at the apex: hindwing also broader, and with a more an-

gular apex. Upperside of a paler olivaceous-brown, the dusky markings

less distinct on both wings, the apical and discal spots smaller. Female

upperside also paler than in 7. ravi, the apical spots on forewing some-

what smaller, the cell spots similar, the two discal spots somewhat

larger.

Underside : forewing with the spots as above: hindwing more

intensely whitish grey, the discal black spots much smaller and less de-

fined.

Expanse & 2, 9 2,1, inches. :

Has. Khasia Hills; Shillong; Assam. In coll. Indian Museum,

Calcutta, and F. Moore.

LOBOCLA, n. g.

Male. Forewing triangular, the edge of the costal margin slightly

folded over on to the upperside from near the base toend of the costal

vein ;* the costal vein extending to three-fifths the margin ; subcostal

five-branched, first branch emitted at one-third before end of cell, second

and third at equal distances from the first, fourth and fifth from end of

_ the cell: discocellular bent outward near upper end and inwardly ob-

lique hindward ; upper radial from the angle near subcostal, lower radial

from the middle; cell long, extending beyond two-thirds the wing;

three medians, lower at three-fourths and middle median at about one-

fourth before end of the cell; submedian straight: hindwing short,

broad, apex rounded, exterior margin slightly produced and angular at

end of submedian vein; costal vein extending to the apex ; subcostal

touching the costal close to the base, two-branched, first branch at one-

fourth before end of the cell; discocellular very slender, almost erect ;

the radial from its middle ; cell broad, extending to half the wing; two

upper medians from end of the cell, lower at about one-third before the

end; submedian and internal vein nearly straight. Body short, stout,

thorax hairy; palpi broad, thickly clothed, apical joint short, thick ;

antenne with a long slender-pointed tip ; femora and tibie short, stout,

slightly pilose, middle tibis with two and hind with four spurs, tarsi

long.

Type, L. liliana.

* The species of Erynnis ((H. alcee, etc.) have a similar fold on the costal mar-

gin of the forewing.

52 F. Moore—Deseriptions of some new Genera, &c. [No. 1, 1884.]

LOBOCLA LILIANA.

Plesioneura liliana, Atkinson, P. Z. 8. 1871, p. 216, pl. xxii, fig. 2.

Has. Yunan.

LOBOCLA CASYAPA, 0. sp.

Differs from L. liana in its smaller size. Upperside somewhat

paler and of an olive-brown tint, sparsely speckled with olive-grey scales:

forewing with the transverse semidiaphanous yellow band one-third less

in width, the portions being distinctly defined by the traversing brown

veins, the subapical spots also much smaller. Underside much paler :

forewing numerously speckled with greyish-ochreous scales at the apex,

the band and apical spots as above: hindwing with similarly disposed

markings, but all composed of more numerous greyish-ochreous scales,

these scales being whitish m L. liliana.

Expanse 1,8 inch.

Haz. Masuri (Zang). Cashmere (Reed). In coll. Indian Museum,

Calcutta, and F. Moore.

Plate II.

257TH JUNE 1888.

—

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, September 1884.

a Si aoane ee

nl tn ar a ey i oO I i“

ee en apie 7 eae ey ee :

Shi HAUL wees.)

‘

sts. bet

J. ELIOT. Jour As. Soc, Bengal, 1884, Vol. LIII, Pt. II. Plate III.

27TH JUNE 1883.

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, September 1884.

J. ELIOT, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, 1884, Vol. LIII, Pt. IT. Plate IV.

29TH JUNE 1883.

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, September 1884,

ae 5 fe

ee er og Se

i, se

RE RNR Ay

ne a ag Sl eA mem

—- i"

ee.

sree

eet i - n aan rere: * pat

Sai

ete es

6 a oe

asl Hey 5

os - a

“BeBe AUUL

f .

- .

> ie i. ~—e= = - _ — ~ a

x - 0 r rn , «

Z d af-aoe . mal Soy > Pe I. a

* Dd ©, eg f a > . 4 .a%

a I an ioe St any SR : ET AB a vo

on) war ha Peo * <

Cle nl FP ye 4 ~ Ce

“<a ae "4. - >:

i a ° -

ae es

Tis wy y.

‘ oe

° ,

}

oe ke

J. ELIOT, Jour. As. Soc, Bengal, 1884, Vol. LIII, Pt. II. Plate V.

Ist JULY 1888.

2ND JULY 1883.

iu ee eM a i ee

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, Septernber 1884,

ka aoe

; Siskel He

or = * Tey > ahs ne

reaek, AUT wet al,

J. ELIOT, Joup. As. Soc. Bengal, 1884, Vol. LIII, Pt. II. Plate VI.

3rD JULY 1883.

Lithogravhed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, September 1884,

, ts a ee me) ‘ o> i ie r TS er ]

LO'SA teal Ar Ye cue ; Ra : aN A Pak ia

ahve! aya ml a the eae Sees * or; aes eae’ *, OG Tee

a ‘ — = Vy 7 ; ; a |

ard sv?

+ hy » ye Ay

i=) A ee 4 a>

¢ : Ce

fe ats

‘ ¥

5 . ‘al

oe . i

4 ;

| | ‘y . ; ; 4 ' , = “e ¥ a :

‘ave ¥ a ‘ ae y sa ‘ aed , oF - i" v it Se Pere Len is ry ; bs sei Mh, ‘i

% ‘| ns 7 q re 7 x J y NYA ree —s Rig a X ne inh : p hap os Mens teeta ts “

: »

. 1 ao ee a a q

ise. Th re « ] =f . ‘7 y 4 - i ip :

1a ' : j en: Pie eed Ve) ky ’ ae Can 4 Pe aie

1 ee . av. a ee Be ERY a oe ila

“ ~ ,

® ee* 7. >, 2 “ a

t ; tt; , ’ . 3

‘

rales,

“eee Vdut ab

ey.

were -

ie Se 2

? ‘:

ee ee

yf ies <

vee

te gee!

J. ELIOT, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, 1884, Vol. LIII, Pt. II. Plate VII.

Tra NOV. 1888.

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, September 1884.

RBM Saree es ae.”

poe ep Sater a:

1 Av

Piate VIII.

9ta NOV. 1888.

a ak es eek eee ae oe

}

“ a

10ta NOV. 1883.

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, September 1984,

Plate: IX.

J. ELIOT, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, 1884, Vol. LIII, Pt. II.

llth NOV. 1883.

12tTe NOV. 1883.

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, September 1884.

oie es

ele

’ , Be

J. ELIOT, Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, 1884, Vol. LIII, Pt. II. Plate X.

18TH NOY. 1888.

bie

Miss

- on

— | :

Yi \ LNG

ae. Yo. 7”

\ Shag ogy

ees VAX

ees fs oe

\ —— —

Ss, eh PSN

Lithographed at the Survey of India Offices, Calcutta, September 1884.

J te ay

‘

» (di eRe a 2esnrida apeaued zo. Diipatncaetes

{

= 4

;

% >

tee "wea

i Nan

ies

r fe

+: ti. af

;* ;

y fi

‘

‘wea! VOW wit

eee NL AC

110) Ee

Me” 4 AP ‘4

a ifs f ana “os iy “i te

inge

a Lg aad rT

io Ia PN Ay ei

| way wae it

A; Dyer. ;.'

TS nile

i aon Neem

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—_—-)>—

Part II.—NATURAL SCIENCE.

No. ]I.~1884,

— eee

IlI.—Accownt of the South-West Monsoon Storms of the 26th June to

Ath July and of 10th to 1ith November 1883.—By Joun Exiot,

M. A., Meteorological Reporter to the Government of Bengal.

[Received June 4th ;—Read July 2nd, 1884. ]

(With Plates II—X.)

ad ' CHAPTER I.

INTRODUCTION.

: It is proposed in the following paper to give an account of the

ngal during the year 1883. The first storm was generated during

> last week of June near ‘the Head of the Bay and gave very stormy

ather off the Bengal and Orjssa coasts, and was the only occasion on

it was necessary to hoist the storm signals at the Saugor Island

station near the entrance to the Hooghly. The second storm was formed

in the Gulf of Martaban durig the second week of November, almost at

the end of the south-west monsoon, and pursued a very unusual course.

It crossed into the Bay of Bengal through the channel between Cape

Negrais and the Andaman Islands. It then slightly recurved and moved

in a general northward direction, approaching the Arracan coast near

Akyab, where it was broken up by the action of the Arracan Hills.

54 J. Eliot—The Suoth-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

The following is a list of all the cyclonic storms in the Bay of ©

Bengal during the south-west monsoon period of the year 1883. They

were all of comparatively small extent and intensity, or ordinary south-

west monsoon storms accompanied with winds of force 8 to 10 at and

near the centre.

1. Storm of June 13th to 20th at the commencement of the south-

west monsoon, which gave thesfirst heavy burst of rainfall to Behar. It

formed near the Balasore coast on the 13th, and advanced into Behar,

where it broke up on the 20th.

2. Storm of June 26th to 4th July. This was generated slowly

near the Sandheads on the 26th and 27th, was of considerable intensity,

and remained nearly stationary until the 29th. It crossed the Balasore

coast early on the morning of the 30th.

3. Storm of July 6th to 8th. This was formed at or near the

Sandheads under similar conditions to the preceding, but was of small

intensity. It crossed the Balasore coast on the afternoon of the 7th.

4. Storm of the 12th to 14th July. This began to form on the

morning of the 12th off the South Orissa coast, across which (between

False Point and Gopalpore) the centre advanced on the evening of the

13th, or early on the morning of the 14th, into the Central Provinces.

It was of slight intensity.

5. Storm of the 16th to 18th Abed: This was formed in the

north-west angle of the Bay, and crossed the North Orissa coast near

Balasore. This storm was very small, of very slight intensity, and of no

importance.

6. Storm of the 23rd to the 26th of August. This was generated

further to the south than the preceding storm, and crossed the Ganjam

coast between Gopalpore and Vizagapatam on the evening of the 25th.

It was of slight intensity.

7. Storm of the 30th August to the 3rd of September. This

depression crossed the coast near Balasore on the afternoon of the 2nd

of September, and was of moderate intensity.

8. Storm of the 6th and 7th of September. This was formed im-

mediately after the preceding, and followed along nearly the same track,

crossing the Orissa coast to the south of Balasore on the morning of the

7th. It was of small intensity.

9. Storm of the 11th to the 15th of November. This was genera-

ted in the Martaban Gulf, and advanced in a north-westerly direction as

far as Lat. 16° N. Long. 93° E. to the west of Diamond Island, when

it recurved and moved northwards parallel to the coast, breaking up

in the neighbourhood of Akyab during the afternoon of the 14th. This

was the most severe and intense storm of the year in the Bay, but was

1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 55

of very limited extent, and hence did not affect the weather in the north-

west angle of the Bay.

10. Storm of the 2nd to the 4th of December, which gave heavy

rain at a very unusual time of the year to Bengal.

Two of these were remarkable for the length of time that elapsed

before they broke up after they had crossed the Bengal or Orissa coast,

and also for the very heavy rainfall and floods which accompanied their

existence on land. The first of these was the storm of June 13th to

20th which was formed in the immediate neighbourhood of the Balasore

coast. It drifted through Chutia Nagpur and South Behar into North

Behar and gave excessively heavy rain to a narrow area in Behar

stretching from Gya to Motihari and Durbhunga. This storm was

of little importance at sea.

The second storm of the series was similar in its general character.

It was generated near the Head of the Bay, crossed the North Orissa

coast, and advanced over the Orissa Hills into the Central Provinces.

Instead of breaking up as do three out of four storms or cyclonic

circulations which pass from the Bay into the Central Provinces, it

acquired fresh energy and drew large supplies of vapour from the Bom-

bay monsoon current. It advanced across the head of the Peninsula

almost parallel to the valleys of the Nerbudda and Tapti. The heavy

rain accompanying it caused excessive floods in these two rivers which in-

flicted much damage on the town of Surat, and others in the lower

portion of the valleys of these two rivers. This cyclonic circulation

apparently broke up in the Arabian Sea in the immediate neighbourhood

of the Guzerat and Sind coasts.

The meteorology of India for the year 1883 was remarkable in

several respects. One or two of the more important features had a direct

bearing on the number and character of the cyclones.

During the cold weather months several storms of unusual character

and magnitude passed over Northern India and the Himalayas from west to

east. They gave excessive snowfall over the higher Himalayas and affec-

ted the weather certainly for many weeks and probably more or less per-

manently for the year. The accumulation of snow reduced temperature

for some time and gave a strong northerly element to the air motion

or wind circulation over Northern India. The south-west monsoon

set in about the normal period on the Burmah and Bengal coasts, but it

never obtained its usual hold in Northern India. The rains were irregular

in occurrence and distribution, and much below the average over the

whole of Northern India. The deficiency was quite as marked in North

Bengal as in North Behar or Rohilkhand or in the Western districts

of the Punjab. The monsoon was in ordinary language very weak, and

56 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

its weakness was more especially shown in Bengal by the early and

complete termination of the rains in the last week of September.

The only theory which on the whole explains the phenomena of

cyclonic generation and motion, viz., the condensation theory, indicates

that small cyclonic storms should be of frequent occurrence during

the south-west monsoon, and that they should be most frequent when

the monsoon is weak on land, or in other words, when the rainfall

occurs to a smaller extent over the land and therefore usually to a

ereater extent over the sea area in the neighbourhood of the land. The

rainfall in the Bay near the Burmah, Arracan, and Bengal coasts during

the south-west monsoon of 1883 was, according to the various accounts

received in the Meteorological Office, noticeably larger in amount than

usual. The large number of cyclonic storms which formed during the

period the south-west monsoon prevailed in Northern India in the year

1883 confirms this inference from theory.

After the south-west monsoon current finally retreated from Nor-

thern India in the last week of September, it recurved as usual over

the Bay. The moisture brought up by it was, however, at once dis-

charged on the Madras coast districts. The condensation theory indi-

cates that there is a marked tendency during the transition period of

October and November to the commencement and continuance of heavy

rainfall over the centre of the Bay, and therefore to the generation of

severe cyclonic storms at that period. If, however, the aqueous vapour —

or moisture is not discharged as rain over the Bay, but is carried west-

wards by the north-east monsoon winds and deposited on and near the

Madras coast, the conditions for the formation of a cyclonic storm

are not present in the Bay. In other words, if heavy general rain sets

in and continues over the Madras coast at the change of this monsoon,

the Bay will be free from severe and extensive storms. This rule was

strikingly illustrated by the weather of the Bay and the Madras coast

in October and November 1883.

The paper will deal with the subject under the following heads :—

1. History of the Storm of June 26th to July 4th.

2. Discussion of the more important features of the Storm of

26th June to 4th July.

3. History of the Storm of 10th to 15th November.

4. Discussion of the more important features and peculiarities of the

Storm of 10th to 15th November.

5. General remarks on the generation of cyclones.

1884.] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 57

CHAPTER II.

HIstory OF THE StoRM OF JUNE 26TH TO JULY 4TH.

The south-west monsoon set in slightly earlier than usual on the

Bengal coast in 1883, but with no great strength. Moderate rain fell over

the whole of the Province of Bengal during the first fortnight. On the 12th

there began to form, in the north-west angle of the Bay, between False-

point and Saugor Island, and over the adjacent portion of south-west

Bengal, a small barometric depression ; and on the morning of the 13th,

the winds in South-west Bengal and North Orissa indicated cyclonic

convergence to it. The depression intensified on the 14th, and its centre

was then to the north of and in the neighbourhood of Balasore. It

advanced northwards through Chutia Nagpore and South Behar across

the Ganges into the central districts of North Behar, and gave excessive

rain over a narrow area stretching from Gya through Behar and Patna

to Mozufferpore and Durbhunga. Amongst the remarkable rainfalls

were the following :—

ESE ee ee |

15th 16th 17th 18th 19th

LL | | | | en

Gya 101 9:04 Q:21 0-01 nil

Behar ae: een Die? 6°05 10°95 0°58 0:09

a 0s: iste «5 aa vi dke ae Be.ne 1:23 6°35 a hs nil. 0:05

Mozufferpore ............ 0:08 2°85 12°49 0°42 nil.

SPOPIEEMCT Ss ....0400..-0.-- | 0°86 Ar51 9°39 nil. 0-14

Purbhunge .i............ 0:53 1:02 502 8:52 0:24

The disturbance broke up in North Behar and finally disappeared

on the 20th. During the next five days there was a partial break in

the rains. The air was drier, sky less clouded, and rain showers local

rather than general in character. The winds more especially diminished

in strength, but continued to indicate the same general atmospheric

motion over the Gangetic delta and valley as before. Southerly winds

blew across the Bengal coast. In Northern Bengal and Behar the

current was deflected up the Gangetic valley and hence gave winds

blowing from directions varying generally between N. H. and §S. HE.

In Chutia Nagpore. and in Western Orissa the effects of the Bombay

branch of the monsoon current were beginning to be shown by the

prevalence of moist 8.8. W. winds at Hazarabagh and of W.N. W.

58 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

winds at Cuttack. The Bombay branch of the monsoon current, it

may be added, was late in being established on the Bombay coast, and

was very feeble before the 20th of the month, when it rapidly in-

creased in force, as measured by the strength of the winds.

The heavy rainfall attending the disturbance of the third week

of the month had drained the southerly monsoon winds advancing into

Bengal from the Bay of a very large portion of their moisture, and

weakened them for some days. This is shown by the diminution in

the amount of the rainfall and by the decreased velocity of the winds in

Bengal.

The following table gives the average amount of the rainfall day

by day between the 13th and the 26th in the various divisions in

Bengal, and illustrates fully the general diminution in the rainfall

of every part of the Province after the 20th :—

Table of Average Rainfall recorded in Bengal, June 13th to 26th 1883.

PROVINCE. |%H

So] ee Ss ee ee ee ee

ft A Vi Pe) fc SO dea

Orissa......... 16| 0°64) 1-30] 0°23] 004) 0°25] 0°16] 0°30} 0-09) Nil. | 0°37) 0°10) 0:48 é. 0°41

S. W. Bengal |46/ 0°31] 0°78] 0°42) 0°26] 0°27] 0°26] 1:02) 0-31) 0:66) 0°26) 0:45] 0°10 a 0:07

Kast Bengal |26/ 0°18) 0°51) 1°62/ 1°11| 0°86) 1°00) 1°48) 0°46) 0°82) 0°33) 0°17; 0°18) 0°16 0°11

0°33) 0°72| 1°09; 0°98, 0°96

0°42) 0°30) 0:07| 1:98 0°89

0°09| 0°38, Nil. | 0°38 0°77

North Bengal}27/ 0°09) 0°21) 0°91) 1°79} 1°71) 0°4'7/ 1:23, 2°25) 0°97

North Behar |16) 0°04) 0°12) 0°52) 1°86) 3°69) 1°36) 1°13) 1°21] 0°42

South Behar |17| 0°29) 0°08] 1°40) 3°37| 1°99] 0°92) 0°35; 0-11) 0:04

0°63! 0:97] 0:15! 0°37

Chutia Nae-

pore &Son- ¢ |16] 0°39} 0°50} 2°04; 0°48) 0°21) 0°56

thal Perg.

0°13, Nil. a 0°35

The following table gives the daily amounts of wind for the same

period at.the chief Meteorological Stations in Orissa, Bengal, and Behar.

in re at « pial a, Sg

of the Bay of Bengal in 1888. 59

Table of Daily Amount of Wind at eight Stations in Bengal.

June 13th to 25th, 1883.

Average Daily

Amount, June.

244) P | 285) 238

Pod

False Point ... | 261) 207

/ 151] 122) 72) 104 162

211| 181) 142) 155) 186

120) 120) 144; 120] ?

Purneah ...... 76| 100} 170) 111} 126; 114 24, 26) 21) 47; 29) 98

74, 127| 57) 59} 116) 134) 137

121} 138} 55) 111) 107| 127) P

EID, os see +e 117) 148) 206) 251, 114) 58

153] 239} 136) 211) 182) 178) 214

Hazaribagh ... ” 134, 191) 286 ee 182) 206

The rainfall table shews a very marked diminution in the amount

of rain after the 20th. An examination of the complete rainfall returns

of the Province of Bengal indicates that it occurred as isolated and local

showers, which were occasionally heavy and gave large amounts at single

stations. No general rain, however, fell over any considerable portion of

the Province between the 20th and 25th. Similarly, an examination of

the second table giving wind amounts indicates that, although strong

winds generally prevailed between the 13th and 20th, winds were

unusually light after the 20th and below their normal strength. This

feature of weakness of its air motion was most markedly shown by the

stations most distant from the sea, as, for example, Purneah.

The meteorological observations taken in Bengal thus show that

what may be termed a strong monsoon prevailed at the Head of the Bay

and in Bengal from the 1st to the 20th of the month, and.that for some

days afterwards, or between the 20th and the 25th, it was much feebler.

Also, as will be seen from the following observations and from the history

of the storm, the south-west monsoon winds increased in force to the west

of the Andamans on the 23rd, advanced northwards as a strong atmos-

pheric current along the coasts of Burmah and Arracan, and fed the

cyclonic vortex which formed on the 26th and 27th with large supplies

of aqueous vapour.

60 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

Table of Daily Amount of Wind at seven Stations to the east of the Bay.

July 22nd to 28th, 1883.

Average! gond.| 23rd. | 24th. | 26th. | 26th. | 27th. | 28th,

Nancowry ....cecsecseseeees 263°5 | 115°0{ 98°8| 97:3 | 1242 | 252-7 | 354'5{ 289°8

Port Blair 5).¥sc.cch. si. 257°6 | 128°7| 212°9/ 386-0 | 283'8 | 305-4 | 315°6| 323-0

Diamond Island............ 2030 | 1229] 118°5/118-7 | 240-7 |310°4 | 346°6| 336-5

pin a OR al ened 93°6 | 427] 48:9] 55:4 | 83°6 |100°9 | 153°8] 234-4

Chittagong .........ccccc 168°3 | 162°6| 113°5| 72:9 | 71:9 | 501 | 117-7] 212°2

Sangor Island ........060 332'4 | 362°7| 312°4| 284-7 | 235-2 |1445 | 1387-1] 357-4

THESES be SR ae le a 183°7 | 211-1] 181°1|142°8 |155°0 | 688 | 668} 181-1

The preceding table shows that on the 22nd and 23rd the winds

were barely half their normal strength over the east of the Bay. A

rapid increase took place on the 24th at Port Blair, which extended to

Diamond Island on the 25th and to Akyab and Chittagong on the 26th

and 27th.

These figures suggest what is also indicated by the whole of the

Bengal observations, viz., that the weather in the Bay between the 20th

and 28rd of June was that which usually accompanies the commence-

ment of a partial break in the rains in Bengal or Northern India. Winds

were light and unsteady over the whole of the north and centre of the

Bay. The logs of vessels show that occasional rain-squalls local in

character occurred, more especially in the south of the Bay. The

observations at Port Blair, Nancowry, Diamond Island, and Akyab and

of the ships traversing the Bay at the time, however, prove conclusively

that south-westerly winds prevailed over the whole of the Bay ; and the

Bengal observations establish that they were continued in Bengal and

Behar as southerly and easterly winds. They also indicate that on the

24th a change occurred in the character of the winds to the west of the

Andamans which lasted for some days. A very considerable increase

occurred in the south-west winds of that part of the Bay which rapidly

and steadily extended northwards.

Hence prior to the morning of the 25th the gradients were normal

in direction, although smaller in amount than the average for the season,

over the Bay ; the winds blew from the usual quarter and gave rise to the

normal atmospheric current up the Gangetic valley. The only indica-

tion afforded at this time by the land observations of the subsequent

stormy weather was the occurrence of a partial break in the rains, which,

as has been ascertained by previous experience, establishes conditions

which are favourable to the development of a cyclonic disturbance if an

adequate motive power or disturbance act on the atmosphere.

1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 61

The account of the storm of the last week of June hence begins

with the 25th of June, the day before which there were any indications of

the actual formation of an atmospheric whirl at the Head of the Bay.

25th of June.—The atmosphere was in a slightly disturbed state

over nearly the whole of India. The barometer was rising in the

North-Western Provinces, Bengal, and the south of the Peninsula, but

elsewhere it was falling. A large depression accompanying the establish-

ment of the south-west monsoon in Western India was advancing along

the west coast of India and causing the barometer to fall quickly. Winds

had backed to south-east on the 24th at Bombay. On the 25th,

winds were southerly along the Bombay coast and easterly in Cutch.

There were strong indications that gales of considerable force were

blowing on and near the Bombay coast. The weather was cloudy every-

where, except in the Punjab; and rain in small or moderate amounts

was falling in every part of India, except the Punjab, Behar, Sind, and

parts of the Madras Presidency. The rainfall was very small in amount

and local in its distribution over the North-Western Provinces, Bengal,

Rajputana, and the North Bombay districts.

The following table gives the more important observations taken at

the Coast Stations on the Bay of Bengal on the 25th June, 1883 :—

SO om * * ° bB

. o 5 z = Wind direction. 5: 3 & ° E 3 see Rainfall

STATIONS ife Oo eax aiSgé BS of

; 233 bp = Paadge = previous

ee See (deh | dew (Seeles °| 124 boars.

Ey | o8 SSEOE

om oF

Nancow’y...... 29941 | +°047 |S.8.W.|S.S.W.} 5 45 8 0°14

Part Blair .:.... 29911 | + -060)|): S. W.. |. 8. W. 14 | 127 10 1°05

Diamond Island} 29°847 | + °024/ S.W. |W.S.W.| 8 | 100 9 0°24

MEVED ......... 29°792 | + 019 | H.S. E. Ss. 4 | 100 9 1°35

Chittagong ...| 29°802 | + 027: S.E..| 8S. W. 3 43 10-4" "O16

Dacca ......... 29°752 | + ‘024 S. S. E. 7 88 10

Jessore ......... 29°745 | +°040| calm. |S.S.W.; 7 | 140 8

Calcutta (Ali-| 29°719 | + -025 s. S.S. W. 5 83 9 0°05

pore) +/........

Saugor Island | 29°775 | + ‘053 8 S.S.E.} 381 | 221 3 0°21

Balasore ...... 29°715 | +010] S. W. P 5 P

62 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2

3 : rn

re 2 9 Wind direction. |, & = g Seer

3 SS) a= x mos o.ae 3 | Rainfall

STATIONS 43$ at Sage oa| Bo of

- | a88) be Pg alaks <6 | previous

mgs ie 10h. 16h Tee pg 8 ret (24 hours.

ao) | i) S Dla a

ates) Apes a

Cuttack......... 29°695 | + °015 |W.8.W.) ° S. 3 75 9 1-01

False Point ... | 29°722 | + :°005 | Calm. K. 11 110 8 0°03

Vizagapatam | 29°672|—-‘027| W. |W.byS8. 6 | 150 8

Pressure had increased rather rapidly over the province of Bengal

during the previous 24 hours. The general result of the changes of

pressure since the dispersion of the disturbance of the third week of the

month had been to give a high barometer, which culminated on the morn-

ing of the 25th in excessively high readings. The barometric readings

at 10 a. m. of that day in Bengal were above the average by amounts

which varied from ‘19’ at Saugor Island to -09" at Durbhunga. Winds

were, however, generally normal in direction, blowing from south in

South-West Bengal, south-east in Hast Bengal, east in North and Cen-

tral Behar, and south-west in Chutia Nagpore.

The unusual weakness of the wind is shown by the following com-

parison table :—

Wind amount} Average Percentage

of 24 hours | daily wind | of actual to

preceding |amount June.| average wind

10 A. M. amount.

Samcor Island: ..cLiseceseeenmeenee oss ne 256°9 332°4 77°3

Caleniita «°c. eslis,bca tenner eee see he 104-0 152°3 68°3

Berhampore... :..as>sorarreeeree eects 132°6 132°3 100°2

TACOS: 5 « .ccenn aerate karo ueenet ees ekeLen 16271 183°7 88°3

PERSOLE | 0's acinancins nin tpaey pemaran soba vere 118°3 118°3 100°0

SORA D ONS |... .dvs.c.ceteteesmneee -ivceeee 715 168°3 42°5

PS AEWAIN ile isecie sn'nce Socidye eee» ohelee 110-7 1242 89°1

OCI 33... a Letts wale a peweseeeees chine 40-0 96°3 ALS

Balse Poms +. ga tet ace ae 263°3 24:7°2 106°5

The average rainfall in each of the seven meteorological divisions

of Bengal for the 24 hours preceding 6 Pp. m. of the 25th June is

given in page 58.

The following table gives the meteorological information for the

25th extracted from the logs of vessels :—

1884.} >

Vessel.

- Bancoora

Himalaya

Roma......

Hour.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883.

REMARKS.

| a, og

S 26 -

3 é es rs Wind

a a

= "Bp gcd oO

8 8 S g 8! pir. [Force

| A

29'899|8.S.W.| 3

80°988} N. E. 2

N. E.

5° 58’ | 80° 58’ °963|) W.S. W. 3

by D. R.

29-889} S. W.

901} S..W. 3

°889| S. W. 3

s. 4

29°750| N. W. 3

ef KE.

15° 10’ | 83° 14’ “730, W. 3

W..

730) W. 4,

"730| WW. 3

29°712/S. S. W.

N. E. 7WA7\W.S. W.

15 49" 82° 207) “737 S. W. 3

-731|\W.S. W.

734) S. W.

757| S.W.

Ss. W. 5

17 15") 85° 17’ lee 0 to 3

8 A.M. Light breeze

and hazy.

11 4.mM. Heavy rain

squall.

Noon. Moderate

breeze and fine.

Midnight. Moderate

breeze and clear.

Moderate breeze

with passing

squalls.

Breeze moderating

and fine.

Moderate breeze

and fine.

Moderate fresh

wind; cloudy with

showers.

Fresh breeze and

overcast.

Threatening toN.W.

with lightning.

Moderate breeze

and overcast.

Fresh breeze and

moderate sea.

Moderate variable

wind with very

heavy rain squalls

and dark overcast

sky.

Rain squalls.

Lightning, similar

weather and high

S. S. W. sea.

Overcast sky.

64 J. Ehot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2

nner nnn r erence nr

oO oO oe.: :

ig Ef 2 2 8 Wind.

Vessel. Hour.| # ‘h 128 8 é REMARKS.

S a ae

° eo) Pan re)

: is re get a ee Fe

Saint Magnus |4 A. M. 29°690 |W. S. W.| 4

8a.m.| N. K. ‘700| 8. W. 4.

Noon |18° 31/86 29'| -710| W. 1

4 Pp. M. “680 S. 1 | Calms and rain.

8 Pp. M. 2i00\ 8.7 5 | Cloudy, lightning to

S.W.&8.E

Star of Albion |4 A. M. 29°730

8 a.m} N. EK, “740 Easterly current.

Squally.

Noon |18° 46/86° 40 °740| W. |4to5| Cloudy weather.

4 P.M. “710

8 P.M. "720

Scottish Chief- |8 A. m. 29°680 0 | Very light airs and dark

tain NN, EK. cloudy weather.

Noon |18° 58/86° 34’, ‘690|S. by W.| 1

4 P.M. S. W. | 2 | Strong westerly current.

8 Pp. M. “660|N.N.W.| 3

British Princess |4 A. M. S. by W.| 5 | Cloudy sky and 8. W.

swell.

8 a.m] S. W. | 4] Variable winds.

N. EK.

Noon | 19° 9 /85° 15429°700) ‘EE. 2 | Fine clear weather.

4 P.M. E.S.H.| 4 | Squally with rain.

8 P.M. S. 3 | Cloudy sky.

Midnt. W.S.W. 4 |S. W. swell moderating.

S. 8. E. Midnight.

Prince Amadeo |4 A, M. S. W. 4.{ a.m. Weather clearing,,

wind moderate. 4 A.M.

Gentle wind, fine wea-

ther. Noon. Closesultry

N. E. weather. Sea smooth.

Noon |19°% 23//85° 56129°700 s. 4

4 P.M. EK.S.E.| 3/4 p.m. Weather fine

_ Sea very smooth.

Comumilla ...... |8 A.M. Variable} 2 | Showery.

N. BR.

Noon [207 13492° 28 S. E. 8 |Clear weather and

smooth sea.

4P. M. 29°611| 8.8. E.| 3 | Fine weather.

8 P. M. 683; 5S. HE. 4 | Fine weather and light-

ning to eastward.

Midnt. ‘671; H. 8S. E.| 41|]Clear weather and

smooth sea.

1884.) of the Bay. of Bengal in 1883. 65

The logs of the vessels received in the Meteorological office give an

imperfect view of the weather in the Bay, as they were chiefly those of

_ steamers passing up to Calcutta along the west coast of the Bay.

The Bancoora rounding Ceylon had light to moderate south-west

breezes (force 1 to 3) during the day. The India and Himalaya were a few

miles apart off the coast to the south-east of Coconada. The former

was in Lat. 15e 10’ N. and Long. 83° 14’ E. at noon and the latter in Lat.

15° 13’ N. and Long. 82° 29’ HE. Both had moderate breezes and overcast

skies. The winds were of force 3 and from directions between W. and

S.W. The Roma, in Lat. 17° 15’ N. and Long. 85° 17’ E. at noon, had

moderate variable winds with calms and very heavy rain squalls. The

Star of Albion, Scottish Chieftain, and Saint Magnus were all near each

other off the Gopalpore coast. The winds were very light and unsteady,

but were generally from directions between west and south-west. The

- Scottish Chieftain had calms at 8 A. M., and the Saint Magnus calms and

rain at 4 p. m. The British Princess and Prince Amadeo were a little

further to the north. The former, in Lat. 19° 9' N. and Long. 85° 15’ H.

at noon, had variable winds during the day varying in force between 2

and 5. The latter, in Lat. 19° 23’ N. and Long. 86° 56’ E., had gentle

south-west winds, sultry weather, and a smooth sea. There were hence

no indications on this day of the existence of an atmospheric whirl in

the Bay. 3

26th June—During the previous 24 hours the barometer had risen

rapidly at the Bombay stations, and the depression off that coast was

much less marked than on the 25th at Bombay and the adjacent coast

stations. South-westerly gales were blowing, but the rainfall brought

up by them was as yet moderate in amount. In parts of Southern and

Central India the barometer had also risen, but over the whole of

Northern India a considerable fall had taken place. Along the foot of

the hills, from Assam to the Punjab, the wind was generally easterly or

north-easterly, and in the Central Provinces and Central India it was

westerly. The weather was dull and sky overcast over the whole

country except the Punjab, and rain was falling except in North-Western

and Central India, but the amounts registered were in the great majority

of cases small. The rainfall returns, as compared with the average rainfall

between June Ist and 26th, shew that there was a deficiency of from 1 to

3 inches over the plains of the Punjab, the western half of the North-

Western Provinces, Central India, and Rajputana, and of 7 inches in

Bombay.

The following are the more important observations taken at 10

A. M. of the 26th at the selected stations near the Head of the Bay :—

66 J. Kliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

4,38 a Average a n

e222 jo Wind. wind 0 le il 5 2

Gao Shae: velocity | 3B 5 See

STATIONS. HSy 5(S-8 4 of ES Sol san

-O0 or Qs; = =) Ry

4go |O <“/ 10h 16h. [previous a ae a=

ay = 24 hours. Ra ~

Nancowry ......... 29°915 |— 026) S. W. | S. W. 11 100 | 7

Port Blair: >. :..<;. 29°886 |—°025) S. W. S. W. 11 100 | 10 0°32

Diamond Island...) 29°801 |—‘046] §. a. W. 10 125 | 8 1°26

PVR es aki ae vorvas 29°711 |— 081) S.E. |S. 8S. E. 4. 100 | 9 1:98

Chittagong......... 29660 |—142) s.H. | &. 2 29| 5}. Ol

Dacca ...........4+..| 29°682 |—°070|_—S. Se 6 75 | -O-/ D6T

JOSSOTO. ..ccccsense 29°673 |—°072| 8. Ss. 6 120 | 10| 0°04

Calcutta (Alipore)| 29°646 |—‘073) E. S. E.| E. by 8. 3 50 | 8&1 Ove

Saugor Island ...| 29°647 —-‘128] S.E. |E.S. E. 7 50 | 2; 0-08

Balasore .....5<....- 29°636 |—‘079| N.N. E. P 2 p 6

Cuttack ............| 29°626 |—‘O69/S.S. W.| Calm. 1 2b 19 0°12

False Point. ......| 29°621 |—°101|} N. E. K. 8 80 | 4

Vizagapatam ...... 29°668 |—°004| W. W: 5 125 |, 6.) O80

Pressure, it will be seen from the above, had given way, and the fall

was greatest at Saugor Island and Chittagong. This was due, as shewn

by the wind directions, to the formation of an area of cyclonic distur-

bance and barometric depression near the Head of the Bay. The winds

at Saugor Island had shifted to south-east, at False Point to north-east,

and at Gopalpore to north-west. From the information extracted from

the logs, it will be seen that light north-east winds were established

over a considerable portion of the north-west of the Bay. Hence, the

cyclonic circulation was just beginning to affect the direction of air mo-

tion at Saugor Island and was causing it to back. It was, however, not

yet participating directly in the cyclonic indraught. The sky was more

or less clouded in all parts of the province of Bengal, the air very damp

(especially in Behar, after the floods of the previous week), and winds

unusually light and somewhat unsteady.

The following table gives the average rainfall in the seven divisions

of the province of Bengal for the 24 hours preceding 6 P. M. :—

1884. ] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 67

Table of Average Rainfall in Bengal on the 26th June 1883.

+ Name of Province. Average Rain.

Origa ick Faselives te vidas: (0 et

South West Regal: ard suns ONL

MREN SSOMEIENT Cac ctden ssn see dona ceurdsoy UL

North eis Mishingaayaa cea bedteaice ay ae

North Behar... ae. ae cidaavay OES

South Behar... seve dove tO" Fe

Sonthal Pengannabs a ere emer a 0-35

Chutia Nagpore .. BAasuids

The following extracts from the logs of vessels give information

respecting the Bay on the 26th :—

a aaa aaa)

‘S 3 Probable Wind

Vessel. Hour. z % scien 3 a

5 & | meter. Dir E

Bancoora | 4A. M. 29°876 |SW.byS.| 2 |44.M. Light breeze and

fine.

8 A.M 883 |SW.byS.| 2|8 4. mM. Light follow-

W: EK. ing wind and clear.

Noon | 8° 35’ |82° 35 ‘863 |S.W.byS.| 2

4 P.M. ‘780 |W S. W.| 2

oP Ww. *856 |S. S.W.| 2

Midnt. 816 |S. 8. W.| 3 | Evening. Moderate

breeze and fine.

N. K.

Pemba ...| Noon {16° 46’96° 12’ 104. mM. At Rangoon.

4 P.M. S. W. 5 Unmoored and pro-

ceeded towards Cal-

cutta.

Midnt. 29°750 =. 5 | Midnight. Fresh to mo-

derate breezes and

frequent rain squalls.

Himalaya | 44. M. 29°657 Ww.

8 A. M. 635 W.

iN. E.

Noon |17° 32’84° 38) 615 Ww Moderate breeze and

overcast.

4 P.M. 506 | S. W.

8 P. M. "086 |W.S. W. Moderate breeze and

Midnt. 539 |W. S W. fine.

Star of Al-| 8a.m. | N. EK. 29°700 Principally light. un-

bion Noon {19° 21’\86° 20° *630 |W.toSW|4to2|) steady winds, finer at

& N. W. night than in the day

4 P.M. *620 time.

68 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

: = f 3 2 Wind.

Vessel. 5 2 h |28 ap

x 3 8 x ae Dir Force

British Prin-|4 A. M. W.S. W. 4

cess 8 A. M. W.N. W. 3

Noon |19° 30‘ 87° ‘3 29°600|) N. N. E. 4,

4 P.M. E.N. HE. 3

8 P. M. EK. 0 to 3

Midnt. W.N. W. 5

Ch ae 4A. M. W. 4,

8 A. M. 29°610| N. by E. 3

N. E.

No on|19° 367/869 33’, “630 nt 3

4 P.M. °630) N. BH.

8 P. M. *590| Calm.

Midnt. *580| N. EH. 3

Saint Mag-|4 A. Mm. 29°610; W 4

nus Sar as N. EK. "610 N. 2

Noon |19° 47487° 18% °600) N. E. it

4 P.M. °530 E. KE

8 P.M. *590| N. W. 1

Midnt. *550| N. W. 5

Prince Ama-|4 A. M. N. Light

deo N.

Noon |19° 52’'87° 9’ 29°600|N.to NE.| Light.

W. to

8 P. M. W.N. W.| Gentle.

Scottis h4 A.M. 29°640|S. 8. W. 0

Chieftain.|8 a.m.| N. E. S. H. 1

Noon |20° 04’ 86° 58’, ‘600| HE. 2

4 P.M. E.S. EH. 3

8 Pp. M. E.N. E. 4,

Midnt. *580| S. H. 4,

REMARKS.

Dark cloudy sky.

Light green sky.

Weather fine and clear

with 8S. W. swell.

High southerly swell

and cloudy, the stars

showing through with

great brilliancy.

Strong winds & squally

with clouds.

Moderating breezes and

cloudy weather.

Moderate breeze and

cloudy.

Moderate breeze, fine.

Calm and clear.

Moderate breeze with

passing clouds.

Cloudy weather. ¥ ;

Faint airs and calms.

Faint airs, calms, heavy

southerly sea.

Cloudy with lightning.

Cloudy.

4 A.M. Heavy cloudy

and unsettled looking

weather. Much light-

ning and southerly

swell. Noon, simi-

lar looking weather,

light variable airs; —

unsettled looking all

round, high souther-

ly swell.

8 P. M. same weather,

much lightning.

A strong current set-

ting about W. Winds

very unsteady in

force and direction.

oe". ae

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 69

¢ | legs

fc?)

: = ot @oR REMARKS.

= 3 a S 5 Dir Force.

W. 4 A. M. swell from

S.S. W. overcast sky

and rain.

North 3 |8A4.M. Gentle breeze,

sky clearing at inter-

N. E. vals.

Noon |20° 19/86° 50’ N. 8 | Noon, similar weather

with southerly swell,

light breeze, sky clear-

ing at intervals.

4P.M N. E. 1

midnt N. E. 1 | 10 p.m. light showers.

Commilla ...|4 a. M. 29°635] EH. N. E. 3 | Light cloudy weather.

8 A.M 642) HK. N. EH. 3

N. EK.

Noon ,22° 21491950’) °607| E.N. E. 4.

4p. M. Kast 4| Threatening appear-

ance to §. EH. Squally

with very heavy rain.

8 P. M. 543) 8. 8. HE. 4 | Continuous heavy rain.

The Nancowry and Port Blair observations prove that strong steady

south-westerly winds continued to blow in that part of the Bay. These

winds were also extending to Diamond Island. The average wind

velocity during the past 24 hours at that station was 10 miles, and for

the previous day had been 8 miles per hour. The sea was also reported

to be rising. Hence it is certain that the vigorous current indicated by

the strong winds at Port Blair on the 25th was steadily advancing up the

east of the Bay, and that its front was off the West Burmese coast on the

morning of the 26th. The Pemba, which left Rangoon at 10 a. m., had

south-westerly winds of force 5 with frequent rain squalls, as she ad-

vanced westwards in the Martaban Gulf to the south of the Burmese coast.

It is almost certain that this strong current was giving heavy rain

over a portion of the north-east of the Bay in the neighbourhood of the

Burmese and Arracan coasts. The direct evidence of this does not appear

in the extracts from the logs of the vessels given above, but it will

appear in those for the 27th. It is, however, indicated by the large rain-

fall at Diamond Island and other stations in South Burmah and in

Arracan.

For the present we shall accept it as almost certain that in the front

70 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

of this advancing strong moisture current, where the resistance to its

advance was greatest, and where therefore ascensional motion was neces-

sarily occurring to a large extent, rainfall of a more or less concentrated

character was going on. The current was being deflected to the west

by the coast and the Burmese and Arracan hills, and was moving more

rapidly in its eastern than in its western portion. Hence probably also

arose a strong tendency to an eddying motion in front and towards the west.

The various actions going on were thus such as might set up vorticose

motion. That such a result was taking place was indicated by the wind

observations of all the vessels near the Head of the Bay. The Himalaya,

in Lat. 17° 32’ N. and Long. 84° 75’ E., had moderate westerly winds. The

India, British Princess, Star of Albion, Scottish Chieftain, Saint Mag-

nus, Roma, and Prince Amadeo, which were all between Lat. 19° 20’ N.

and 20° 19’ N. and between Long. 86° 20’ E. and 87° 18’ Kast, experienced

light unsteady north-easterly winds. The weather was fine and sky clear

during the greater part of the day, but became more clouded during the

evening. There was a heavy swell from the south during the day. This

was evidently due to the strong winds and high sea prevalent in the

centre and south-east of the Bay. The only log which gives any in-

dication of the subsequent weather is that of the Prince Amadeo, in

which the Captain notes that, although light variable airs were blowing,

the appearance of the sky was unsettled in all directions. Probably the

light green sky to the east noted by the Captain of the British Princess

was another sign of the large amount of moisture brought up by the

southerly winds in the Hast of the Bay.

The various observations of the 26th hence indicate that cyclonic

motion on a considerable scale commenced on the afternoon of the 25th

over a portion of the Head of the Bay. The atmospheric whirl was fed and

maintained by a very strong south-westerly air current moving north-

wards up the Bay near the Burmah and Arracan coast. It was appa-

rently formed in the front of this air-current, and was causing winds

to draw round over the north-west of the Bay. The indraught from

that quarter was, however, feeble and unimportant, except as an indicator

of bad weather to the south-east.

27th June.—The decrease of pressure which commenced on the 26th

had now extended over the whole country. The change was still greatest

in the north. Onthe northern frontier of the Punjab, in Eastern and Lower

Bengal, and at Akyab the decrease exceeded one-tenth of aninch. It was

smallest in parts of Bombay and Madras, where it only amounted to two

or three-hundreths of an inch. A considerable depression lay over the

Punjab. This, however, is a frequent feature of the hot weather months

of June and July in that province. A smaller depression was, however,

;

“ ;

‘

‘&

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 71

forming at the Head of the Bay to the south of Saugor Island. Pressure

ranged from 29°9 inches in Ceylon to 29°28 inches at Peshawar.

The wind was from directions between south-west and west over

the Peninsula. In the neighbourhood of the two depressions, cyclonic

circulations were established. Up the Gangetic valley the wind had

a general easterly direction. The weather was cloudy and gloomy

in all parts of the country except in the upper districts of the Punjab.

Rain in small amounts had fallen during the preceding 24 hours, except

in the Punjab, Sind, and West Madras. The rainfall was heavier on the

Bombay coast than it had been hitherto, and strong monsoon winds were

blowing there.

The following table gives the observations at the selected stations

on and over the coast of the Bay on the 27th :—

, 884 b Wind ee] &1..(¢e8

S252! So8 ee ee|o8 | Ao la 8B

(G92) Fes Oo] Aa | oB SEO

Srarrons. as 8&8al das Pele S| S8 fe on

s@s3/0 8] 10h. |] 16h, [48 Alm? \a ox

fo 2 b is Q, an

Mth DIGIT .w.......09. 29°853 | —:033 | S. W. Ss. W. | 13 LIB. 10

Diamond Island ...| 29°763 | —-038 | S.S.W.|S.S. W.| 14 175 8 1°79

Nancowry ............ 29°912 — 003; S.W. |8.S.W.|; 15 | 136 8

RE 29°606 ; —'105 |}8.S.H./8.8S.H.) 6] 150; 10 0°57

Chittagong ......... 29°578 | —'082 |E.N.E.| S.E. | 3 43 4 | 1:02

BOI asc cc sen sts cee 29°566 | —°116 K. K. 3 38 8 1°16

Ee 29°604 | — ‘069 | E. N. E. E 6 120 | 10 0°04:

Dalcatta (Alipore) | 29°529 | —°117 | E. 8. B. K. 5 83 9 | 020

Sangor Island ...... 29°5382 | —‘115 |N.N.E.|] N.E. | 35 | 250 7 | 009

Balasore ............ 29°537 | — ‘099 N. P 1 ? 8 0°40

: EON 0 ste sessesene 29°565 | —‘061 | N. W. |N.N.W.! 3 75 | 10 101

False Point ......... 29°544 | — ‘077 We Ws BeW. eZ 70} 10 0°26

Vizagapatam ...... 29°634 | —-034 | Ww. |W.S.W.| 7]| 175] 10 | 1:70

}

The preceding observations show that pressure had decreased rapid-

ly over the north of the Bay and the adjacent coasts during the prece-

ding 24 hours. The fall was greatest in South-West Bengal and more

especially at Saugor Island. The distribution of pressure, taken in con-

nection with the wind directions at the Bengal and Orissa stations, in-

72 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

dicates that there was now a well-defined atmospheric whirl at the

Head of the Bay, the centre of which was at a little distance to the

S. 8. E. of Saugor Island. Pressure was below the normal for the day

over the province of Bengal by amounts varying from ‘1” at Chittagong

to zero at Patna. Winds were very light over the whole province.

Northerly winds had fully set in over South-West Bengal and Orissa,

whilst winds more or less easterly prevailed over Hast and North Bengal,

Behar, and Chutia Nagpore.

Ths weakness of the winds is shown by the following observations :—

Amount of

veal Aver age Percentage

during wind of nied a

24 hours amount. to average.

preceding June.

10 A. M.

patente) eens Ee a: Veep 152°3 91:3

PROMI POLE | 25-47. 5. - snes <veae wep top <n 94:7 132°3 716

CPP Rs a ee Co Rees | |, SRR Ta 63:1 183°7 34°3

MARGIN. ~ 1 5. ot heen aiuc a Rs aoe SERRA nek dow 24°0 94.4, 25°3

Tip mVOR ED IE. ncns. shad eteeeo ncn «=. 130°5 214-9 60°9

The slight indraught to the cyclonic disturbance from the north

and east had already diminished the humidity of the air and the amount

of cloud in North Bengal and Behar. The sky was overcast in Orissa

and South-West Bengal and the southern districts of East Bengal. The

rainfall in the province was small in amount and localized in its distri-

bution, except in Orissa and the southern districts of South-West Bengal,

where moderate rain had already began to fall in connection with the

cyclonic disturbance.

The weather in Orissa at this time is described as unsettled.

Winds were light and variable and gave occasional showers of rain.

The following table gives the average rainfall in each of the divisions

of Bengal for the 24 hours preceding 6 P. mM. :—

Rainfall Table of the 27th June 1883.

Number of | Average

stations Mere a1]..of Heaviest fall

Province. reported in

i h di

division. | 24 hours, | 24 hours.

Orissa......... EEC ee 16 0:17 2325

South-West Bengal . See ee 46 0°28 2°20

Kast Bengal .. Be Be HATS Met i 26 0°49 2°50

North ae aN os AY am te DMS 27 0:09 0°57

North Behar .. lado oe een eee 16 0°13 0°67

South Behar .. May. Nass Ly 0°16 0°69

Sonthal Pergunnahs ond ; ek

Chutia Nagpore wai” 16 ae i

1884. |

Vessel.

Bancoora

Pemba

Himalaya

Star of Al-

bion.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883.

o EO Es z Wind

— = ee

£ B= Lot ©

ae] a0 a D co) oO

3 8 om Bl Dir =

BH ids ,

29°751| S. W.

‘796|SW.byS.

84° 8’ 30”

dh.

"796, S. W. | 4

-706| 8S. W, | 4

816) S. W.

29°690| S. W. | 5

‘720|S. 8. W.| 6

93° 30’ | -720|S.S8.W.| 7

. (by D.R)|(by D.R)| °690| 8.8. W.| 9

-660| S.S. W.| 9

-640|S.S. W.| 9

29°514| N. W.

E. -549|N. N. W.

86° 32’| 484} N. E.

404] ON,

447) ON,

*359|N. N. W.

87° 28° |29°500/ Ww. | 4

NW. | 4

The meteorological extracts from logs of the vessels relating to the

27th of June are tabulated below for reference.

REMARKS.

Brisk breeze, fine.

Fresh following wind

and fine.

Current S. 23 W. 17

miles.

Fresh following wind

and fine.

Strong breeze and

overcast.

Less wind with occa-

sional rain.

A. M. Fresh breeze

with moderate sea

and occasional

rain squalls.

6-15 A. M. Passed Al-

guada.

Noon. Strong breeze

with rising sea.

Afternoon. Wind ra-

pidly increased to a

strong gale with

furious squalls

blowing away sails

and awnings.

Moderate breeze and

fine.

Overcast with rain.

Squally, with rain

distant thunder

to Northward

and heavy looking

clouds.

Clearer to 8. E.

74 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

E 6 |o6

ls te AA

Vessel. Hour. = a = ~ S = REMARKS. i

S gs |oo¢g ©

te | @ 128 Dir.

4 a Le} fy 5

British Princess} 4 A. M. N.W. | 5 | Cloudy sky, souther-

ly swell.

8 A. M. N.W. | 5 | Heavy squall with

rain,overcast, pass-

N K ing showers.

Noon | 20° 38’ | 88° 2’|29°500) N. W.| 5 | Heavy rain at in-

tervals, sky over-

cast and weather

finer.

4 Pp. M. N. W. | 5 | Sky looking very un-

settled patches of

green colour.

a2: mM. N. W.| 6 |11P.m. Heavy bank

of clouds in the

Midnt. NeW bay. N. W. with vivid

lightning, distant

thunder, and

rain.

Scottish Chief-| 4 a. m. W.S. W.| 1 | The whole of this

tain. day, the weather

has been very un-

steady. — Strong

westerly current.

8 A. M. 29°520| S.W. | 2

N. KE.

Noon | 20° 40’ [87° 50’| °480) S. W. | 3

4 P.M. 460) N. W. | 4

Midnt. 450| N. W. | 5

Saint Magnus| 4. . 29°500/W. N. W. Cloudy, rainy,

squally weather.

8 A. M. 540} North | 5 | Thick rainy wea-

N. K. ther.

Noon | 20° 44’ |87° 54’, °450/} N. W.| 5 | Cloudy and passing

showers.

4 p.M. |(by D.R) *400} N. W. | 2 | Squally, rainy wea-

ther.

8 P.M. ‘4A60|IN. N. W.| 4

Hour.

Prince Amadeo

india ae

Commilla

8 P. M.

Midnt.

of the Bay.of Bengal in 1883.

20° 46’ | 87° 357

(by D. R)|(by D. B)

29°530

"520

N. E.

20° 39’ | 88° 5’ "520

N. EH.

29°523| S. S. E.

N. E.

27 2 1) 91" oO ‘499| S. 8. EB.

*396| South

‘411| §. 8. E.

°379|S.S. W.

. oo :

3 ms |H® Wind.

ue) = Oo

5 2 1 Me

aI bp avo

5 3 og

4 a

N E

REMARKS.

Midnight—Mode-

rate W. to W.

N. W. winds

unsettled look-

ing weather.

4 A.M. Squally

with heavy rain.

Noon, squally

winds from

N. W. toN. E.,

much rain high

B:. to 8. 8. 4H,

swell. 8 P.M.

Moderate N. W.

winds, weather

same.

Moderate and

overcast.

A.M. Light showers

34.M. Anchored

atSaugor. 9 A.M.

proceeded up

the river, wea-

ther showery.

Cloudy and

threatening to

S. E.

Heavy unsettled

appearance’ to

S. HE.

Squally unsettled

appearance to

S. HE.

Hard squalls and

threatening ap-

pearance with

light rain at

times. High

sea getting up

from 8.

Wild squally wea-

ther. High sea

from 8. 8. W.

Rain at times.

76 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

The strong south-west monsoon winds which the meteorology of the

26th shewed to be advancing northwards up the eastern part of the Bay,

were on the morning of the 27th not far from the Head of the Bay and —

were certainly in the parallel of Akyab. The wind velocity was very

considerable at Port Blair and Nancowry. Strong winds were also

blowing at Diamond Island, where the sea was now rough. The wind

velocity at Akyab had increased from a rate of 4 miles per hour to 6 miles

per hour, the average force of the wind in June at that station being ©

4 miles. The remarks in the log of the Pemba are very valuable. She

passed round Cape Negrais into the Bay to the west of Burma in the

morning. The wind increased very rapidly to a strong gale and blew in

furious squalls. The wind was steady at S.S. W. andof average force

9. On the other hand, the winds at the stations in South Bengal and

Orissa, and also those observed at the Light Vessels and the vessels near

the Head of the Bay, were very feeble. The only conclusion warranted by

the evidence is that these strong winds on the Burmah and Arracan coast

were feeders to an ascending current to the northward; and that the

ascensional movement was hence near the Head of the Bay, and was

partly maintained by the rainfall accompanying the ascensional motion,

and by the various resistances to the motion of the strong current ad-

vancing northwards. The south-west winds, it has already been remark~

ed, were much stronger than those from any other direction. It is, so far

as can be judged, probable, if not certain, that the whirl was not at this

time a fully developed cyclonic disturbance with a well-defined centre.

The centre of the barometric depression at the Head of the Bay can only

be roughly approximated from the observations. Its most probable

position at noon was in Lat. 205° N. and Long. 892° EH. and almost

identical with its position at 10 a. m. Assuming this position of the

centre of depression, the relative positions of the Light Vessels at 10 a. m.

and of the ships at Noon are given in the following table :—

SS Seen eae

Position. ; jdta .

H C100 &

o , {8s 3 O75

¢ | S Veeeiee foams aloo ©

Time.| 3 g 8 * 19 915 20| Weather.

Bia) ) se |) eel) 2 aimee ere

6 a0 oS ® 2 Axle i |

3 5 a HB 6 |.2° & .

= eS = = A ars

Miles.

Saugor Island s ‘

Light House... |104.m.|21° 39’) 88° 5’ | 29°505,N.N.E. S.E.| 120 |Cloudy.

Upper Gasper N E |

Light Vessel ... 21° 31’ 88° 3’ 29°484N. EB.) 4 een 120 |Squally.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 77

: in Hy S-4 6

, |_Wina_|s [Bes

a fa eee ae ae a TE Th |

° a)

Time.| 'g + : ‘3 | % 3/3 S.,| Weather, &.

’ 3

} 22 | 8 A ® 8 S 5/8 =

Gs} a A= | ° ae

| a 3 me A |aiA 6 Bs

} —

‘

SS | O—Ooo———————- eee ee

‘Intermediate

Light Vessel... | Noon. |21° 15’\88° 11’

29°472,E.N.E.| 3 [ESE Showery.

Eastern Channel

Light Vessel...| ... | 21°1’ |88° 12’ 29°478/N.N.E.| 5 |ESE| 105 | High Sea.

Balasore ......... ... (21° 30’|86° 50" 29°479| N. ESE| 205 | Gloomy.

False Point ....... ... [20° 20'186° 47’ 29°522| S. W. E. | 195 | Gloomy.

Saint Magnus..:..| ... |20° 44’/87° 54/ sebrei . W.} 5 120 | Squally.

Scottish Chieftain] ... |20° 40’|87° 50’ Pte) S.W.|} 3 | HE. | 120 | Unsettled.

Star of Albion... | ... |20° 10'|87° 28’) 29°570 W.toS.| 4 |HENH/ 150 | Squally.

&N.W.

British Princess| ... ,20°38'| 88° 2’|'29°500)N. W.| 5 | H. | 110 | Unsettled.

Prince Amadeo ...| ... |20° 46/|87° 35’| 29°500|N W. to EH. | 145 | Squally.

N. EK.

Himalaya ......... ... {19° 58’ 86°32’| 29°484| N. EH. ENE} 210 | Fine.

eee .» {16° 18//98° 30’| 29°720/S.S.W.| 7 | N. | 380 | Strong in-

W. creasing

breeze.

The position of the centre at 4 P. Mm. was probably almost identical

with its position at noon. The following observations taken at 4 Pp. M.

indicate that it was at that hour in Lat. 20° 35’ N. and Long. 89° 35’ E.

rie : SH '

Position. : Wind. fs) Bat

3 oR

S 3 J * as |" oa

oO .

42 3 q Ae oe BS |8:s S | Weather, &c.

fal en a gf | ©§ |g 8%

re on 3 ro) () Ho |S =

= q faa] 4 4 al a Ore

os [o) 2 + =) m- Bg

4 A 2 ey 8

Saugor Island miles

Light House... |21° 39’| 88° 5’ | 29°407) N. H.| Light. | S.E. | 125 | Cloudy.

Upper Gasper

Light Vessel... |21° 31’| 88° 3/ | 29°375/ Calm. 0 (|E.S.E.) 120

Intermediate

Light Vessel... |21° 15’/88° 11’| 29°355|N.N.E. 1 |K.S.E.| 102 | Sea rough.

Eastern Channel

Light Vessel... | 21° 1’|88° 12’) 29°377| N. E. 24 | S.E. 95 | Stormy.

False Point ...... 20° 20’|86° 47’| 29°406,WS.W.|moderate FE. 175 | Gloomy.

78 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

The Bancoora was in Lat. 11° 42’ N. and Long. 84° 8’ E. at noon.

She had strong steady south-west winds of force 4 during the day, with

overcast skies and occasional rain. :

The Pemba was in the north of the Gulf of Martaban early in the ©

morning, when she experienced fresh breezes with moderate sea and

occasional rain-squalls. She doubled Cape Negrais and passed into the

Bay of Bengal about midday. The wind began to increase rapidly, and

during the afternoon and evening it blew a gale with furious squalls, —

which carried away her sails and awnings. The wind blew steadily from

the 8. 8S. W. during the afternoon with average force 9.

The remaining vessels were all in the north-west angle of the Bay.

They were the India, Himalaya, Star of Albion, Scottish Chieftain, Saint

Magnus, British Princess, and Prince Amadeo, and were at noon between

Lat. 19° 58’ and Lat. 20° 46’ N. and between Long. 86° 32’ and 88° 5’ H.

Their observations enable the storm-centre to be approximately identi-

fied, as in the majority of these vessels the usual midday observations were

taken ; so that the positions of the vessels are known in nearly all cases

with approximate exactness at noon of this day.

The Saint Magnus and British Princess were very near each other.

The former was in Lat. 20° 40’ N. and Long. 87° 50’ H. and the latter in

Lat. 20° 38’ N. and Long. 88° EH. . Both experienced strong currents

during the day. These two vessels were probably nearest the centre, but

in the westerly quadrant. They had squally weather with thick rain and

north-westerly winds of average force 5.

The Scottish Chieftain, which was about 10 miles to the west of the

previous vessels, had very variable winds during the day, which increased

in force from 1 to 5. They shifted from W. 8. W. to S. W., and then

hauled to N. W. She experienced a strong westerly current.

The Prince Amadeo, about 15 miles further to the west, in Lat.

20° 46’ N. and Long. 87° 35’ E., had unsettled weather with light varia-

ble winds and heavy rain. She experienced a strong southerly current.

The Himalaya, which was considerably further to the west and near

the Orissa coast, had moderate north-easterly breezes and fine weather.

28th June.—The barometer rose quickly in the Punjab, during the

previous 24 hours, and was standing at its normal height at 10 4. m.

Pressure continued to give way over the rest of India. The fall was

not large in amount, except in and near the depression at the Head of

the Bay. The barometer had fallen at Saugor Island from 29°53” at

10 a. M. on the 27th to 29°37" at the same hour of the 28th.

The wind had backed to south-west and south over the Central

Provinces, Central India, and Rajputana. This was evidently due to the

continuance of strong westerly winds on the Bombay coast and their

1884. ] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 79

extension eastwards over the centre and north of the Peninsula. Light

easterly winds were blowing, as on the 27th, up the Gangetic plain, indi-

_ cating that the circulation was as yet unaffected in direction by the

atmospheric whirl in the north of the Bay. To the north of the centre

of depression, or in South Bengal, the circulation was increasing, but

was still very weak. The weather was generally cloudy, and rain had

fallen in moderate amounts over the same areas as on the 27th.

; The observations at the selected stations in Bengal are given below :

ial o > n

; : HE tava E 5 E ® Rainfall

gia, (Es 8| 28 |) a /eca| go ocak | BE

a qo] 8s oo a| 9 24 hours.

aogia™| = 3. \ee.e|

| SU Rohe ee evetes! ol Rise hy Sit ae atl See

Nancowry ......... 29°913)+ 001) S. W. Ss. W. 13 118 6 nil.

Port Bidir......... 29°856;+ °003; S. W. | S. W. 12 109 6 013

Diamond Island | 29°807/+ -044 § S.S. W. 29 363 9 0°25

a 29°639) + 033 s S.c6 Wh Ae 300 10 6°84:

Chittagong ...... 29°571|\— 007 S.E. |E. S. E 9 129 9 381k

MEE cc cece cescns 29°526\— 040} E H 6 75 10 0°85

JOSSOFe ............ 29°445\—°159) _-E. |E. S. E.| 6 120 10 0°10

Calcutta (Alipore)| 29°392'\— 137 K. KH. by N. 9 150 10 0°22

Saugor Island ... | 29°374/—*158IN. N. E.|N. N. E. 8 57 10 0°91

Balasore ......... 29°423|\— 114) N. ry 2 ? 10 0°32

Cuttack............ | 29°507'\— 058] calm. | N. W. | 4, 100 10 0°62

False Point ...... 29°452\— :092;W. S. W.|W.S.W.| 10 100 10 4°84;

Vizagapatam ... | 29°614—-020| W. w. OS a 0:20

Pressure had given way over the whole of the Province of Bengal,

and was below the normal of the day by amounts varying between ‘05”

at Patna and ‘25” at Saugor Island. The air-motion over the whole of

Bengal was now largely dependent on the cyclonic vortex. In Kast and

South-West Bengal winds ranged between east and north-east. Norther-

ly winds prevailed at Balasore, and south-west winds at Gopalpore and

False Point. The air was calm at 10 a. m. at Cuttack. Over North Bengal,

80 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

Behar, and Chutia Nagpore light easterly winds were blowing. The

indraught to the vortex had diminished the humidity and cloud-amount

considerably in North Bengal and Behar during the previous 24 hours,

as shown by the following results :—

10 A. M. Average

Average Humidity. Cloud Amount.

27th 28th. 27th. 28th

North Bengal ............ 81 73 6:0 40

North Behar .......0: 00.50 79 72 4°8 3:2

South Behar ....,...00s008 80°5 70°4: 6°8 Ara,

The rainfall returns for the 24 hours previous to 6 P. M. indicate

that moderate general rain had fallen over the whole of Hast and South-

West Bengal, and that very heavy rain had been received in Orissa.

The following table gives the whole of the Orissa rainfall returns

for the day :—

District. Station. Rainfall.

OOO. 5'can s seicen!s PAliop calles pnp alpuait SURE 0°59

MAGI hts a scvenan tone ttadeesorek 0°60

PGDTOG 4, sos Bsicnacesnc nish neste oe TOTO tea relist eaten na <erica>bdikantaeeaes nil.

M alse: POMS pardanre tian arse ascedeones 8°04

PML OORALOUS, | ..qxtoiionryouctii er cscndeaa veer 3°68

APPATEIBEGOTO: ..5..00ckeee sve ocreadwe sae 7°50

Pi soins esnsset crus dedoviiee 0°35

CotitaokS)....i.<.:--se> sgugaee eee CO reat nea c evince vennes 1°79

Ue@eatehg?) i) SN, 2°70

J RUPEE oon reat eI Bla caso 5 «cine one 2°80

Chand bait’... ccsupesmeecanncrteet ss. stiles 3°25

Bhuddruck ..... ns Cael s. 2 AR PN 1:78

SON, 5: ants vcs eater eeads <r0obitees 1:50

Balasore... ...-<serseeseecseesevne ses TIGIEBOLED™ "5 i5-. sn nee as an = vag saa 0°94,

Del ASOLG! ys. da sabe ewe des tas. beeebivo Ae 3°40

Baripodai nics, eek tae ie ihiodiscn as reins 112

The weather on the Orissa coast is thus described by an observer :

“Thick heavy weather with heavy rain and overcast skies prevailed

4 1884. | of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. SL

during the day. At 4 pv. m. it was blowing hard. Heavy rain fell all

night with variable winds.”

A few light showers fell in North Bengal and Chutia Nagpore, but

rain had almost entirely ceased in Behar.

The following table gives the average rainfall throughout the Pro-

vince of Bengal, and indicates clearly its distribution :—

Dennen aaa aaa aacaacacaaamcacammmmamaamaaaal

Average f

District rainfall of Heaviest

previous |. sree

24 hours. |" caaales

Orissa......... ny AREER Py & Aaa oe 2°50 8°04

South West Bengal . Beats tp Wan Te tee irk eeuates 0-15 0°76

East Bengal .. Wie rida techn dotesels dels <nteuaiensinalin se 0°65 6°46

North Bengal ee cad gncientateciedcgmmeeag seaanns oe 0-17 1:25

North Behar.. the BSE Sih Ce Oe ae Perea Oe 0:03 0-30

South Behar .. Peed eniciot Angintetten fuse tare 0-01 0:10

Chutia Nagpur i

Sonthal Pergunnahs Bah eA Pen pine Re Cal 0-13 0-70

The information respecting the weather in the Bay on the 28th

June, extracted from the logs of the vessels, is given in the following

statement :—

Noon |18° 84’\90° 59’) +540

4 P.M.| Rangloonto-| *460

8 Pp. M.jwards| Sand| °500

Midnt.|Heads. *520

squalls. Noon. A heavy

sea smashed in the port

bulwark rail forward of

bridge. Midnight. Very

high sea running.

3 52 Wind

o aS) dO

ee ae

Vessel. | Hour. 2 ‘we 2 © REMARKS.

5 8 38 Dir. | Force

H OD

Bancoora |4 A. M. 29°653| S. W 3 | Moderate breeze and puffy.

8 A. M. ‘716| S. W. 3 | Overcast at times.

Noon |15° 08'85° 33’, 683) S. W. 3 | Moderate following wind

and overcast.

4 P.M 801; S. W 3 | Moderate breeze and over-

cast.

8 P.M “716, S. W 3 | Moderate following wind

and fair.

Midnt ‘671; S. W 4 | Fresh breeze and cloudy.

Pemba ... |4 A. M. S.S.W.| 9 | a. m. Strong gale with

8 A. M. 29°540| 9 high sea and _ heavy

82 J. Ehot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

. 3s | 58 Wind.

ee an

Vessel. |Hour.| 2% Eel 2 2 REMARKS.

a =

moja. | 4s

| fe, | sf a

Star of Al-|8 A. M. 29°500 Wind freshening, weather

bion cloudy and threatening.

Noon |20° 14//88° 23’) -450.N. by W.|5 to 8| Continued lightning.

Slight sea.

4p. M. ‘440/W. N. W. Latter part, strong gale

8 P. M. “490 with thick driving rain,

Midnt. *470| West. and westerly sea.

4a. ™M. Heavy rain, vivid

British 4A. M. N. W. 7

Princess |8 A. M. ec 7 lightning with thunder.

8 High confused sea. 8 A. M.

9 Heavy squall with tor-

10 rents of rain. Moderate

_ 10 gale, high confused sea.

it Noon. Fresh gale, high

id confusedsea. 4P.M. Fresh

gale, high sea, and heavy

rain. 8 P.M. Heavy squalls,

torrents of rain, high sea.

Midnight. Furious squalls,

torrents of rain, and high

sea.

Noon. Weather very un-

steady, much rain, thun-

der and lightning. Very

strong westerly current.

Sky presenting a very wild

appearance.

Noon |20° 46’| 88° 7’ | 29-420'W. N. W.

4 P.M. West

8 P.M. Ss. W.

Midnt.

Scottish 4A. M. 29°400

Chieftain|8 A. mM. *B00|N. N. W.

Noon |20° 50’/88° 10} °250 va

4p. M. *220| N. W.

Midnt. °200; W.

or) OO ® Ww bo ee

Saint Mag-/4 A. M. 29°330| N. W.

Mus...

8 A. M. *330

Noon |20° 52’| 88° 3’| °290| N. W.

Heavy gusts and heavy

continued rain.

Strong winds and high sea.

4 | Winds and sea more mo-

derate.

6 | Terrific squalls. Tremen- ©

dous sea at times.

4P. M. *260|W. S. W.

8 P. M. °320;\W.S. W.| . 2. | Heavy sea, dense darkness.

Midnt. °300) S. W. 10 | Furious gale, high squalls,

heavy sea.

Prince 4A.M N. W. |Strong) Midnight. Boisterous squal-

Amadeo N. W. ly weather with much

Noon | Pilot} Brig |29°330| and heavy rain. 4 A. M.

bearin'g N.E. We. Nw Squally weather, high

6 P. M.| about |5 miles Variable southerly sea. Noon.

Squally unsettled wea-

ther. 4 Pp. M. Weather

more moderate. 6 P. M.

Weather having a wild un-

settled appearance. 8 P.M.

Heavy squalls from W. 8.

W. to 8. S. W. much rain.

Vessel. | Hour.

8 A. M.

Commilla | Noon

4 P.M.

6 P. M.

8 P.M.

Midnt.

4 A.M.

8 A. M.

Himalaya | Noon

4 P.M.

8 P.M.

Midnt.

4 A.M.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 83

Latitude

Longitude.

EK.

21° 04/\89° 31’

22° 32/\88° 20’

29°354:

264

"354

449

‘4.27

Force.

— | SS —ee———_ |

REMARKS.

7|4 4. M. Very high sea

South

8.8. W. |7 to 4

8.8. W. 6

S. W. 8

Var 6

Ss. W. |9to 10

5. W. 11

Variable

from South and §. W.

Breeze very variable in

force with very hard

squalls from §. S. W. and

rain. 8 A. M. A very

high sea running from

S. S. W. Noon. Hard

squalls from §. 8. W. and

very high sea from S. W.

4 p. M. Hard squalls

from 8. 8. W. and very

high sea from S. S. W.

6 Pp. M. Breeze very

unsettled and hauling to

N. W. at times. 6-30

Pp. M. Very heavy rain,

tremendous sea from

S.S.W.andS.W. 7 p.m.

Eased down and stood 8.

by E. 7-30 p.m. Terrific

sea carried away star-

board cutter. 8p.m. Ter-

Tific squalls from §S. W.

and very high sea. New

jib and stay sail split.

Fresh breeze and cloudy,

with frequent rain squalls.

The position of the centre of the barometric depression can be

determined with approximate accuracy on the 28th. The obser-

vations at the Light Vessels show that it was in the immediate neigh -

bourhood of the Sandheads at 10 a. m.

It was hence very approximately

in Lat. 21° 0’ N. and in Long. 88° 45’ E. The following table gives the

barometric and wind observations taken at the Light Vessels and nearest

84 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

land stations, as well as the distance and direction of the centre (assuming

this to be in the position assigned to it above) from each :—

Position. H Wind 10 a. M. ug - @ g

e pe 12"| g eg Eg

S co a < AS . S = ¢ = | Weather, &.

#7 | Beil Bo 3) a a2 /a 8°

a Beara 1a 2 | 8° |Rog

aE A eA ean

Saugor Island miles

Light House... 21° 39’|88° 5’ | 29°349/N.N.E.) Strong.| S. E.| 63 | Gloomy.

Upper Gasper

Light Vessel... [21° 31’|88° 3’ | 29°327| N. E. 5 S.E.| 57 | Threatening

heavy sea.

Intermediate

Light Vessel... 21° 14/\88° 11’| 29°241|N.N.E. 4 H.S.E.| 40 | Threatening.

Eastern Channel

LightVessel ... 21° 0’ |88° 12’| 29:209|N.N.B. 6 E. 35 | High sea.

Balasore ......... 21 30 |86° 58’| 29°364, N. | Light. |E.S.E.| 130 | Threatening.

False Point ...... 20° 20'|86° 47’| 29:431|W.S.W|Moderate|E.N.E.| 135 | Gloomy.

The centre at this time was only at a distance of about 35 miles

from two of the Light Vessels ; yet these were experiencing comparatively

feeble winds, as compared with the strong gales blowing, as the log of

the Pemba proves, at distances of 200 and 300 miles from the centre

in the south-easterly quadrant.

The ships’ logs do not give 10 A. M. observations. Their positions

are given for noon, together with barometric readings and wind directions

and force. When these are charted, they indicate the existence of a centre

of depression in about Lat. 21° 3’ N. and Long. 88° 40° EH. The following

table gives the positions of the ships at noon, and the distance and

direction of the centre (assuming the position of this to be in Lat. 21° 3’

N. and Long. 88° 40’ EH.) in each case.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 85

75 =e

eave en Wind (Noon). | « BS g

° a+

Baro- ei vole Z,

at cS} we 85 |a20 eather.

0 ag 5 bm | 88 leak

N E Noon 9 5 HS lee

e/ se] Ae

a R ft ey

2.6

|S | | TT

Sanugor Island 21° 39’| 88° 5’ | 29°311| N. N. E.| Light.| S. E. 56 | Overcast.

Light House

Commillah ... |21°04’ 89° 31’| 29:277/8.S. W.| 6 W. 54 | Hard squalls.

Very high

g sea.

Scottish Chief- |20° 50’ 88°10’ | 29°250|N.N. W.| 3 JE.N.E.| 35 | Unsettled.

tain

Saint Magnus |20° 52’| 88° 3’| 29°290) N. W. 4 |E.N. E.| 42 | Strong wind.

' High sea.

Prince Amadeo |20° 52’ 88° 5’ ?| 29°330) N. W. | ... |B. N. E.| 40 | Squally. High

. sea.

British Princess|20° 46’ wl 7’ ?| 29°420) N. W. 8 |E.N. E.| 43 | Heavysqualls

: High sea.

Star of Albion |20°14’?,88°23’?| 29°450|N. by W.| 656 |N.N. EJ) ? | Threatening

weather.

: Slight sea.

memba ......... 18° 34’190° 59| ... |S.S.W.| 9 | N.W. | 225 |Strong gale.

: Heavy sea.

False Point ... |20° 20’ |86° 47’ | 29°309|W. S. W./Mode- |E. N. E.| 125 | Overcast.

rate.

In examining the above, it should be remembered that the positions

assigned to the Commillah, Scottish Chieftain, Saint Magnus, and Star

of Albion were determined by observation at noon, and hence are assumed

to be approximately correct. The position of the Prince Amadeo is

stated to have been a few miles to the S. W. of the Pilot Brig. The

position given has been determined from that statement on the assump-

‘tion that the station for the Pilot Vessels during the S. W. monsoon,

Sat a distance of from 7 to 10 miles to the south or south-west of the

Eastern Channel Light Vessel (vide Elson’s Sandheads Sailing Directory,

page 156) ; and is probably correct within five or six miles. The position

of the British Princess at noon was ascertained by dead reckoning, and

is certainly not correct, as all the vessels had drifted considerably with the

currents now set up at the Head of the Bay. The noon observations of

the barometer and wind direction indicate that she was probably in about

Lat. 20° 55’ and Long. 87° 45’.

| The preceding table confirms much of the information given by the

Light Vessels. The winds in the western quadrant, at distances of 30 to

50 miles from the centre, were very light and unsteady in force, as com-

pared with those in the eastern quadrant. The barometric observations,

86 _ J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

when charted, shew that the depression, as defined by the isobar of 29°3”,

was an elliptical shaped area at the centre of which the pressure probab-

ly did not exceed 29°2”. The larger axis of this stretched EH. N. E. —

and W.8. W., and was probably at least twice as long as the axis at right

angles to it.

The observations taken on board the Light Vessels at 4 p. m. also

enable the centre to be approximately determined at that hour. When —

charted, they indicate that the centre was in about Lat. 21° 10’ N. and

Long. 88° 30’ KE.

The following table shows that this gives consistent results for the

direction and distance of the centre from each position :—

Position. Wind. 6 E 3

5 ro)

Baro z id F & of.

Lat Long. aaa Me ‘tp 8 |§.3 £| Weather,

i 5 o° |sSaq &e.

N E. c= Fa ba 280

4 aa 2

A A = ce Go

A | | | | | a | |

Saugor Island

Light House} 21° 89’ |88° 5’ |29.270N. N. BE. |Mode-| 8. E. 43 | Overcast.

rate.

Upper Gasper

Light Vessel} 21° 31’ | 88° 3’ |29°215| N. E. 5 | S.E. | 388 | Heavy

Intermediate sea.

Light Vessel | 21°15’ | 88°11 297155) N. 4 |H.S.H.| 21 Threa-

tening

Kastern Chan- weather.

nel Light

Vessel ...... 21° 1’ (88° 12’ 29:142) N. W. |5to8|E.N.E.| 23 | High sea

from

False Point S. W.

Light House} 20° 20’ |86° 47’| 29°301| W.S. W.|strong.|E. N. E.| 125 | Overcast.

These observations also show the weakness of the winds in the

western quadrant. The Intermediate Light Vessel, although only 21

miles distant from the centre, experienced winds of force 4 at this time,

whilst the Pemba, about 200 miles to the south-east, had winds of

force 9 to 10.

Hence, the path of the centre during the day is determined by the

positions given in the following table :— |

Hour. Latitude. Longitude.

LQ. A. Me. ....cn000e>pjepis Se aigMabh Pend only Guise ci pt nie inde mM a, NY ole

OOM. ... 00.00 dae adenmenesinuingsdepeiuapan abet caine tneamnn:. <b JN ean

BP. Me oe. caene sso seaming sy sagindsinatelseae ae mog anss | EL ok) ohh. ceenn

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883.. 87

_ The character of the weather is fully shown by the reports .given in

the logs. Two vessels, the Commillah and Pemba, were in the east and

_ south-east quadrants, in which alone the winds were violent. The

_ Pemba was.in Lat. 18° 14’ N. and Long. 90° 59’ E. by account at noon.

_ She experienced strong 8.8. W. gales during the whole day, with a high

sea, and heavy rain squalls. A heavy sea smashed in her port bulwark

rails early in the morning, after which the Captain eased the engines, and

laid to, with the ship’s head to 8. S. E.; during the greater part of the

afternoon. The Commilla, which was proceeding from Chittagong to Cal-

~ eutta, did not feel the full weight of the south-westerly winds until the

_ afternoon, when she was between the Mutlah station and the Sandheads.

_ She experienced, early in the morning, winds varying very considerably

q in force, with occasional hard squalls:'from 8.8. W., and much rain. Dur-

. ing the whole of the afternoon, she had very hard squalls with heavy rain,

_ anda tremendous sea. At 7-20 p.m. a terrific sea carried away the

_ starboard cutter. This was followed by very violent squalls of force

_ 11 from the south-west.

| The position of the British Princess was not ascertained by observa-

tion during the day,.and it is almost certain that she must have drifted

- considerably with the strong currents set up at this time in the Head

_ of the Bay. She was in the south-western quadrant in the morning,

- and had heavy rain with a high confused sea. The rainfall increased

_ early in the morning, and during the greater part of the day she had

| “torrents of rain.”” The squalls also became heavier as the day advanced,

and at midnight furious squalls (force 11) from the south-west passed

_ over the vessel.

‘ The Saint Magnus was in the western quadrant in the morning,

when she had north-westerly winds of force 4 to 6. Heavy gusts of:

wind passed over the vessel, and continuous rain fell during the whole

morning. In the evening, she was in the southerly quadrant, where she

_ began to experience terrific squalls witha tremendous.sea. At midnight,

_ it was blowing a furious gale (force 10) from the south-west.

| Hence, over a large area to the east and south-east of the central

depression, violent south-westerly winds of foree 9. to 11 were blowing at

_ this time, producing a very high and dangerous sea near the Head of

the Bay.

Further south, as shewn by the log of the Bancoora, the winds in the

centre of the Bay (Lat. 15° N., Long. 83° E.) were of moderate force and

gave very faint indications of the action and disturbance to the northward.

The Star of Albion, Roma, Prince Amadeo, and Scottish Chieftain

were to the west of the centre of the whirl during the greater part of the

day. The Scottish Chieftain was probably nearest to it at noon.

88 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

The position of the Star of Albion is doubtful. The weather was

threatening in the morning, and the winds shifted from north through

north-west to west in the evening, increasing in force during the day.

In the afternoon and evening, as the wind backed to west, a strong gale

set in with thick driving rain.

The Scottish Chieftain was in Lat. 20° 50’ N. and Long. 88° 10’ BH.

at noon. The winds were light during the morning; much rain fell,

but it was not until midnight, when the wind hauled to west, that she

began to have strong winds and rain squalls.

The Prince Amadeo was near the Pilot Station and to the west of the

centre. Boisterous squalls with heavy rain and a high sea were ex-

perienced during the morning. In the evening, the weather had a very

wild appearance. The wind shifted round to the south-west, and heavy

squalls passed over the vessel, bringing up much rain.

The Light Vessels were all in the western quadrant during the day..

The Captain of the Meteor (Intermediate station) states that the

winds were changeable between north and west, and that frequent heavy

showers occurred during the day.

The Captain of the Comet (Upper Gasper Station) notes that the

weather appeared very wild. Squalls with rain passed over the vessel,

and a very heavy sea came up from the south-east.

29th Jwne.—The changes of the barometer over India during the

preceding 24: hours were partly due to the further development of the

depression and cyclonic disturbance off the coast of the Sunderbands, and

partly to the appearance of a depression off the west coast.

The barometer at Saugor Island had fallen two tenths of an inch

since 10 a. M. of the 28th, and by considerable amounts at all the Lower

Bengal stations. It had risen in the surrounding districts, so that the —

differences of pressure had become considerably greater and the depres- ~

sion very marked. The disturbance was now giving strong easterly winds,

with overcast skies and moderate rain, to Hast and South Bengal, and

strong northerly and westerly winds and incessant rain to Orissa.

The barometer had also fallen considerably at Kurrachee, where — |

very strong N. H. winds were blowing. The wind had backed from

west to south-west along the Bombay coast, thus almost certainly indi-

cating the appearance or formation of a depression off the west coast.

Over the Gangetic plain and the western Himalayas, variable winds

obtained, with cloudy weather and light rain.

The following table gives the observations at the selected stations in |

the neighbourhood of the Bengal depression :—

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883.

; 4 ro wn. oo °

2 ae y : 2 E A 3

oar ‘am ee E a :

HT S a © | Rainfall

5 oO od Oo re} OH = Oo

«STATIONS. aa: OF oe oe moo] fp ; of

+ f2S | we | loh. | 16h. | ES) F 2 | previous

A oe iB bon| & < | 24 hours.

2 Oo £ cS 42a a Oo

ae = ~ Beta |

29°914 Ss. W. S. W. 2°21

29°875 Ss. W. Ss. W. 0°20

29°835 S.S. W./S. S. W. 0°40

eae 29°695 S.S. E.| 8.8. E. 1°43

29°608 E. 2°31

ae 29°580 E. 0:26

Jessore ......... 29°445 E. 078

Calcutta (Ali-

Ns ne 29°322 E. 0°64

Saugor Island! 29°173 E. S. W.

Balasore ...... 29°355 N.N. W. P 1:22

Cuttack ......... 29°463 N.W. |W.N. W. 3°83

False Point ... | 29°440 W.S. W.|W.S. W. 8°22

Vizagapatam...| 29°613 | —-001 | §.W. |W. byN 6 | 150] 10

The meteorological returns of the Bengal stations show that a large

_ fall of the barometer had occurred in South-West Bengal and Orissa,whilst,

over the remainder of the province, a considerable recovery of pressure

was taking place. The depression off Saugor Island was now unusually

large in amount, and such as is rarely observed in the rainy season.

Pressure was below the normal of the day at all stations, by amounts

varying between ‘01" at Durbhunga and °45” at Saugor Island. The

atmospheric circulation in Bengal was now directly dependent on the

_ eyclonic vortex off the coast of the Sunderbands, and winds were very

7 strong in the neighbourhood of the vortex in South-West Bengal,

Orissa, and Chutia Nagpore. The winds in Chutia Nagpore and South

Behar at 10 a. u. were from directions between B.N.E.and N.N.E. In

North Bengal and Behar the winds were from the east, the normal direc-

tion during the south-west monsoon.

The air was now almost saturated in Hast and South-West Bengal

— and Orissa, Humidity had also increased very considerably over the

90 J. Ehot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

remainder of the Province, more especially in South Behar and Chutia

Nagpore. The skies were overcast, or densely clouded, in all parts of

the Province, except North Bengal and Behar.

Orissa again received very heavy rain. The following table gives

the amounts recorded at all the reporting stations during the 24 hours

preceding 6 p. M. of this day :—

District. Stations. | Rainfall.

SF +4: 0 sane hence We bate aa DN Retna ees puto $3 see | 9°44

Khnurdah . Dy ieee Pin baietnaiton 7°96

Pooree... 251 1 gee AD ERA Pe a 3°46

4) False Point .. ite srk eee 5°39

Hookitola.. ire Were eriacee ss os 4°48

a Jagatsingpore . suena ee aake 4°90

[5 CRS SOR SF i me OPE 6°40

Cuttack . LB) eR SS Ea ect en ue 561

St Sig chee suites ua weonee Bee 3°60

(| Jajpore ... is deca heey eee 1°98

(| Chandbali... er re Ar 15

| Bhuddruck . Weve Use autos tae 0°93

"ae eae "aa Sora . PR PPE aco PIS Ba A 1°60

| Balasore _ Day Ripe ance Tae ees 2°65

Sia. LABS apse atin eae SSE 5°00

(| Baripoda .. Ja gated, ss Megara 1-60

General rain, moderate to heavy in amount, fell in East Bengal,

South-West Bengal, and Chutia Nagpore, and local showers in North

Bengal. No rain of any importance fell in Behar.

The following table gives the average rainfall for the preceding

94, hours in the various divisions of the Province of Bengal, and indicates

the distribution at this time :-—

Rainfall Table of the 29th June, 1883.

Number of

: 3 Average

stations 1n

Heaviest fall

Division. each pro- rainfall of in 24 hours.

vince.

Orissa.. BAS A a 16 4°32 9°44,

South- West Bengal. denon ae a 4.6 0°65 3°76

East Bengal . Sas ais 26 1:59 5°50

North Bengal es AE. 2 PA | 0:24 2°97

North Behar. Seen eae 16 0°03 0:25

South eben ls eas 17 a8 0-02

Sonthal Per gannahs ‘and 16 0-25 154

Chutia Nagpore ........+++

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 91

¥ gs |FRE Wind.

a a 3 2

3 = . he cee See

Vessel. | Hour. eZ SA |So8 ek 3 REMARKS.

Mi 3 Poe oe. |B

iy 7 al eel aaa Ma

Bancoora |4 A.M. 29°597 | Ss. W. 5 | Strong increasing

3 . breeze and puffy.

8 A.M. *666' S. W. 5 | Lightning in N. W.

Noon | 18° 40’ | 86° 58’ | *666| S. W. 5 | Strong unsteady wind

and squally.

4P,M. 517) S. W. 6 | Strong breeze and

squally.

8 P.M. ‘BLT |. S. W. 4 | Fresh following wind

and overcast.

Midnt. 495! 8. W. 5 | Strong breeze with

hard squalls through-

out.

Pemba ... |44.M. 29°420| 8. W. 10 | A.M. Fierce gale with

; high irregular sea and

4 8 A.M. ‘470 |W. S.W.| 10] hard squalls blowing

with hurricane vio-

Noon | 19° 16’ | 89° 56’ | °500| S. W. 9} lence. 1a.m. Kept

away course again

4~.M.| Rangoon] towards| 450 9} CN=SEW.). 6: 4. .m.

Calcutta. Lay toagain. 9A.M.

8 P.M. BOOT ys ass 9| Kept away course

| again, sea breaking

7 | over the ship fore

and aft. 9-15 a. M.

Laid to. 0°30 P. M.

Course again. 3P.M.

Hauled to the wind

again. 5 P.M. Kept

away course again.

10-20 Pp. M. Sea be-

coming confused ;

weather inclined to

moderate, sky clear-

Midnt. 530

. ing.

Starof Al-|8 a.m. 29°520 |W. S. W. Hard gale and heavy

4 bion. Noon | 19° 43’ | 88° 37’ | °530| S. W. |9t010) sea, thick continued

' 4P.M. *520 rain. A

8 P.M. 570 9 to 10

Midnt. °550| S. W. Weather, more mo-

derate and less rain.

Saint Mag-|4 4. M. 29°230|W.S. W.| 10 | Heavy gale with terri-

: nus. fic gusts, heavy sea,

ug 8 A.M. °300|W.S. W., 10] and continued heavy

e: rain.

Noon | 19° 58’ | 88° 28’ | -370/W.S.W.| 10) Heavy squalls, rain,

Ne and high sea.

. 4P.M. °380|S. 8. W.

Fe Dirty appearance and

| 8 P.M. °430}5. 58. W. 8 | heavy gusts.

Midnt. °340/8. 8. W. 8

rr sss sleet ee inant

a J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

ee ial

ET Seas

Vessel. |Hour.| 27, Pa a ale, 2 : REMARKS.

8 = £33| 38 2

= = =

W. to

Prince 4A.M. 8. 8. W. 8 | Morning. Strong gale,

Amadeo, furious squalls.

Ss. W. to Sharp vivid light-

ning, wild unsettled

Ss. W. 10 appearance. Noon.

Strong gale, heavy

squalls, sea high and

very confused. Even-

ing. Similar wind

and weather.

Noon | 20° 00’ | 88° 55’ |29°320

Midnt.

S. W. 11 |4a.m. Terrific storm,

continual rain, and

S. W. 11 furious squalls. 8A.M.

Squalls of hurricane

S. W. 11 force. Mountainous

sea. Noon. Very high

S. W. 10 and dangerous sea

running; both an-

S. W. 10 chors lifted out of

catchhooks, breaking

S. W. 10 one stock. 4 P. M.

Wind = and sea

slightly moderating.

Violent squalls from

S.i.W. 8) 2. a Bey

overhead _ clearing

at times; very dark

wild squally wea-

ther. Very heavy

rain in the squalls.

Commilla |4A.M. 29°190

8 A.M. "247

Noon | 20° 18’ | 88° 40’ | *252

4 P.M. 232

8 P.M. ‘237

Midnt. 234

S.W.byS.| 11 | Torrents of rain.

British 4 A.M.

10 | High confused sea.

Princess | 8 A.M.

Noon | 20° 24’ | 88° 42’ |29°340 10 | Westerly gale.

4.P.M. 10

8 P.M. 5. WW: 9 | Sea very high.

Midnt. : 9

Scottish j|4A.M. W.S.W.| 10 | Lost fore topsail, laid

Chieftain] 8 A. M. 29°250 ae a4 ship to under close

Noon | 20° 40’ | 88° 10’ | -300 10 reefed main topsail.

4P.M. *350 8

8 P.M. 6 | Heavy rain and con-

fused sea. Very

Midnt. 400} S. W. 6 strong westerly cur-

rent.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 93

. The various observations enable the centre of the barometric de-

_ pression to be determined very approximately at 10 a. m. and at noon of

sh ‘the 29th. The wind directions at 10 a. m. observed on board the Light

_ Vessels at the Upper Gasper and Intermediate stations were wouttoaies

_ and west, and hence the centre was between these vessels. Its position

as determined by charting the wind directions and barometric heights

was Lat. 21° 30’ N. and Long. 87° 55’ E

The following table gives the chief observations taken at the light

vessels and neighbouring land stations at 10 a. M., and the distance and

_ bearing of the centre from each of them.

Position. Winds. 8 Ba s

ra ra 5

3 Blt ag Bg

j- oO jo)

Latitude. a g ae bp a] S Bs

ude. 5 5) P| SB = Se

N. E. 3 ee aan eel ee:

i hin Bg: Wade ane

Sangor Island Light| 21° 39’ | 88°5' | 29°146 EH. |Mode-| S. W. 14,

House. rate.

Upper Gasper Light} 21°31’ | 88°3’ | 29140] S.E. 5 W. 8

Vessel. .

Intermediate Light | 21°15’ | 88°11’ | 29°164 W. 6| N. W. 24

Vessel.

Eastern Channel} 21° 1’ | 88°12’ | 29°199 |[W.S.W.)8to9 ; N. W. 38

Light Vessel.

’ Balasore ............| 21°30’ | 86° 58’ | 29°296 'N. N.W. 8| &. 60

False Point ......... 20° 20’ | 86° 47’ | 29:419 |W.S.W./Strong] N.E.| 110

The nearest light-vessels were between 5 and 25 miles from the

centre in the eastern quadrant, and yet experienced very moderate

winds of force 5 to 6, whilst the Pemba and Commillah, at much greater

distances in the same quadrant, had winds of force 9 to 11.

The unusual weakness of the winds in all quadrants near the centre,

as compared with those in the south-eastern quadrant at considerable

distances from the centre, isa remarkable fact, and one that is opposed

__ to the general experience of cyclonic motion.

The noon barometric readings and wind directions of the ships,

' when charted, indicate that the centre was at that hour probably in

Lat. 21° 30’ N. and Long. 87° 50’ E. It had moved about five miles to the

west during the previous two hours.

The following table gives the distance and bearing of the centre

from each of the vessels at that hour :—

: 13

94 J. Khliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

Position. Wind. 3 oF 8

3 | Bs

3 8 dq si = Ba a. .

Latitude. Longi- 3 2 5 a S02

tude. S| 5 a rs a cS | =

i. E. E £ £ | 2S | #88

aa) A 72) =) =)

Saugor Island Light| 21° 39’ | 88° 5’ | 29-146 E. Mode-| S. W. 19

House. rate.

Commiullah -........5 20° 18’ 88° 40’ | 29°252 Ss. W. 11|/N. W. 100

Scottish Chieftain | 20° 40’ | 88°10’ | 29:300 | W.S.W. 10IN.N.W| 60

Saint Magnus ...... 19° 58’ | 88° 28’ | 29:370 | W.S.W. 10IN.N.W} 115

British Princess... 20° 24/ 88° 42’ | 29°340 |S. W. byS. 10| N. W. 95

Prince Amadeo...... 20° 00’ | 88° 55’ | 29°320 |W.toS.S.W] 8tol0|N. W.| 125

Star of Albion ...... 19° 43’ | 88° 37’ | 29°53 S. W. |9tolOIN.N.W| 145

Pefitha: f..00cs2eans f OW? 16 89° 56’ | 29°50 Ss. W. 9|N. W.| 200

The preceding table shows that the vessels were all in the south

eastern quadrant. They were experiencing violent west to south-west

winds with frequent squalls of hurricane force. The majority of them

were for the first time feeling the full strength of the storm.

The storm continued to pass to the westward during the day. The

eentre was probably in Lat. 21° 35’ N. and Long. 87° 30’ H. at 4 P. m.

The observations taken at the light-vessels and the neighbouring

land stations, with the probable distance and bearing of the centre from

each, are given below :—

Position. Wind. 5

¥ iS)

c B + : q

Latitude. Longi- a 8 3 a

tude. = ee ae te

a E. a £ ae:

ea) A mM A

Calcutta (Alipore)-| 22° 32’ | 88° 20’ | 29°214 EB. Strong|S.S.W.| 85

BUrG wan. © ..c..cssvs0 23° 14’ | 87° 54’ | 29:°245 | N.E. !Light| S.W.| 115

False Point.......... 20° 20’ | 86° 47’ | 29°361 | W.S.W. |Strong|N.N.E.| 98

Outtack <.0.60..0tesites 20° 29° 85° 54’ | 29°285 | W.N.W. | Light} N.E. 130

Saugor Island Light} 21°39’ | 88° 5’ | 29°112] S.W. Very| W. 38

House. strong

Upper Gasper Light} 21°31’ | 88° 3’, 29:108| S.W 9 W. 36

Vessel.

Intermediate Light | 21°15’ | 88°11’ | 29-199 B: We 9: | Wa 50

Vessel.

Eastern Channel| 21°1’ | 88°12’ | 29°:287 |S. W.by W.| 8to9 |W. N.| 60

Light Vessel. W.

1884. ] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 95

; The preceding observations show that the light-vessels were now

_ experiencing very strong south-westerly winds, and that frequent severe

squalls passed over them.

The remarkable difference between the force of the south-westerly

winds at distances of more than 30 miles from the centre and the winds

from other directions and also the winds near the centre, is shown very

conclusively by the Saugor Island observations. The greatest amount

of wind, as registered by the anemometer at that station in any interval

of two hours between 1 p. M. of the 28th and 3 p. m. of the 29th, was

23 miles. The amount recorded between 1 Pp. M. and 3 p. M. of the 29th,

when very variable unsteady winds were blowing, was only 5 miles.

Between 3 p.m. and 5 Pp. M., during which hours south-west winds pre-

vailed, 78 miles of wind were recorded, and between 5 Pp. M. and 7 P. M.,

46 miles. During this period, a severe gale of wind blew from the south,

and gave rise to a tremendous sea.

The position of the centre has been deduced from the various ob-

servations. It moved during the day almost due westwards, parallel to

- the coast of the Sunderbunds. The vessels bound for Calcutta, which

_ were approaching the entrance to the Hooghly, were almost without ex-

ception in the eastern quadrant during the day. Their logs describe

the force of the south-westerly winds in this part of the whirl in very

similar language.

The Commillah, in Lat. 20° 18’ N. Long. 88° 40’ E. at noon, had

terrific gales, with continual rain and furious squalls, in the morning.

Squalls of hurricane force passed over the steamer. A tremendous

and dangerous sea was running. South-westerly winds of average force

11 obtained during the morning. The wind and weather slightly mo-

derated during the afternoon, but violent squalls continued to come up

from the south-west, bringing very heavy rain.

The Pemba, 100 miles to the 8. HE. of the Commillah, experienced

a fierce gale with hard squalls blowing with hurricane violence. No im-

provement occurred in the weather until late in the evening, when the

sky began to clear and the sea to moderate a little.

The Star of Albion and the Scottish Chieftain experienced similar

weather. The log of the Saint Magnus (in Lat. 19° 58’ N. Long. 88° 28’ E.

at noon) describes the weather in the morning as a heavy gale with terrific

gusts and continued heavy rain. The Captain of the British Princess

(in Lat. 20° 24’ N. and Long. 88° 42’ E. at noon) notes that the wind de-

creased from force 11 in the morning to force 9 in the evening, and that

torrents of rain fell during the morning. The wind blew steadily from

the south-west quarter, and brought up a very high sea.

96 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2, ©

The Captain of the Comet speaks as follows of the weather on the —

29th: ‘‘ Weather was very threatening. A heavy sea came up from the

south-east ; the wind was very variable, shifting all round the compass. —

Rain squalls frequently came up. At midnight it was blowing a furious ~

gale.” :

The Captain of the Meteor remarks of the weather he experienced

during the day: “The sea was very rough and a high squall from q

south-west came up at 8 a.m. Frequent heavy rain-squalls passed over ~

the vessel. The wind shifted to south-west at 10°30 a.m. The barometer

began to rise at 2 p.m. During the evening a strong south-west gale blew,

and frequent terrific rain-squalls passed over the vessel. At 11 Pp. m. the

wind began to decrease in force and the squalls were less frequent.”

30th June—The depression off the mouth of the Hooghly on the ~

29th had travelled in a westerly direction, crossed the coast near Bala-

sore, and passed westward to the north of Cuttack.

The depression was apparently smaller than on the previous day, the

lowest recorded reading of the barometer at 10 a. m. being 29°35". It

was, however, a well-marked depression of about a quarter of an inch

at the centre. The westward motion of the disturbance caused the baro-

meter to fall briskly at Cuttack and in the adjacent districts of Chutia

Nagpore and the Central Provinces, whilst, over the whole of Bengal, a

very rapid recovery of pressure occurred. The wind directions in North-

Eastern India indicated the continuance of cyclonic circulation in Bengal,

Orissa, the Central Provinces, and Chutia Nagpore. Winds were from

west in Orissa, south to east in Bengal, north in Chutia Nagpore, and

north-west in the Central Provinces.

In other parts of India, the barometer rose generally during the

preceding 24 hours. The changes over the greater part of the North

Western Provinces and Bombay slightly exceeded a tenth of an inch, but

the relative distribution of pressure was unaltered, except in Bengal and

Orissa. The wind on the Bombay Coast had veered again to south-west,

and was moderating. Very cloudy skies prevailed over the whole of

Northern India. Heavy rain showers had fallen in the North-Western

Provinces, aud diminished the temperature over a large portion of Upper

India from 10° to 15°. |

Heavy rain continued to fall in connection with the cyclonic vortex

in Orissa and the western districts of the Central Provinces.

The preceding remarks are illustrated by the following obser-

vations :—

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 97

oO on Sas -_ =

eh Nhe 2 be |. [ae

39 oF 49] E | 3 jo w

nod | EE B28on| 2) 4 (oa

SraTIONs. Soe. gars] #| 5 ley

oa ® ip «2 Pnosr| | a en

Ess to = 295] Blo l@oe

a % a. Sa8n/ 9] 8 la m6

Rah | S< Aaa a | 6 ew g

3 aa! >) mel 3 tH

ea S) = A | |e °

- Nancowry ............ .W. {Ss.8. 10 8

Mart Blair ........... ye S. 12 4

Diamond Island ... 8.0.1 8, RIE RS ERT aan

BT occas nsc<es-0s S.S. E. s. et ieee | MR J

Chittagong ......... EK. EK. 9 | 129) 10 | 2°25

LD sips ninin'a c's aviv at s. 12 150} 10 | 0°24

noah 50 vein <0 a) fe: 21 10 | 0:29

Calcutta (Alipore) <B. 10: }2-17

Saugor Island ...... a S. E. 361 10 | 036

MeMIBBOTO ...........- : ; : Uy hey f

Eline atdedaie e : 2 MW 10 | 4°08

False Point ......... ‘ ’ 9) 1:47

Vizagapatam......... bE

7 The following observations taken at stations in and near the area of

cyclonic disturbance on the morning (10 4. m.) of 30th June give data

_ for the determination of the storm centre at that hour :—

; os oO @ = oO ®w

ak tae el Wind par te Gt

| BED ns as | + 3

ata ae cme are ber Sie

; STATION. eel Baie Ba [oSoek da laa

f q28) Oe, | S4 [Pe Bgsl oa | asa

I 2 : Oo | - & 2 es] Cons © 3 B Sos

" g<+ gat | Ag o5.9 pa ew aN

: jaa) oO A i Se) 4

hid —"

4 Saugor Island .................. 29.517 | + °344 0°36

Be Calontta.......... eee eeeeeeee 29°556 | + °233 1:17

7 a eee 29°546 | + °121 0°88

| Hazaribagh «0.0.0.0... 29°518 | —-027 0°38

Seedubbulpore ..................... 29-686 | + -042 0-45

aid. Seed Qi vegas ceusivsiace 29°665 | + °002 0°45

a ee 29°674 | + 017

MOONS 6 Fs cnc con ececsecensesses 29°512 | — 087 1°28

Sambalpore ................00668 29°353 | —°111 4°74

SSN EIS 75 seo ces on one voy eee 29°382 | —°086 408

eee FONG ....... Me, sccSters. 29°444 | + °004 1°47

98 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

The observations indicate that the cyclonic area extended over

Orissa and the north-eastern districts of the Central Provinces, and that

the centre was in the neighbourhood of Sambalpore and to the north-west.

The probable position of the centre at 10 a. mM. was Lat. 21° 45’ N. and

Long. 83° 50’ H.; and the barometric height there was almost certainly

not lower than 29°3”. It had consequently crossed over the Northern

Orissa Hills (in the Hill States of Morbhanj, Keunjhar, and Pal Lahara),

the average height of which appear to be about 2000 ft., and the highest

points of which slightly exceed 3,500 ft. This area is described in the

following language by Dr. Hunter in his Statistical Account of the Orissa

States :—“ From the north bank of the Mahanadi, the ranges tower into |

a fine watershed, from 2000 to 2500 feet high, running north-west and

south-east, and forming the boundary of the States of Nursingpore and —

Baramba. On the other side, they slope down upon the States of Hindol

and Dhenkanal supplying countless little feeders to the Brahmani,

which occupies the second of the three valleys. From the north bank of

this river, the hills again roll back into magnificent ranges, running in the

same general direction as before, but more confused and wilder, till they

rise into the Keunjhar watershed, with peaks from 2500 to 3500 feet

high, culminating in Malayagiri, 3,895 feet high, in the State of Pal

Lahara. This watershed, in turn, slopes down into the third valley, —

that of the Baitarani, from whose eastern or left bank rise the hitherto

almost unexplored mountains of Morbhanj, heaped upon each other in

noble masses of rock, from 3,000 to nearly 4,000 feet high, sending

countless tributaries to the Baitarani on the south, and pouring down the

Burabalang, with the feeders of the Subarnarekha, on the north. The

peaks are densely wooded to the summit, and, except at the regular

passes, are inaccessible to beasts of burden. The intermediate valleys

yield rich crops in return for negligent cultivation ; and a vast quantity

of land might be reclaimed on their outskirts and lower slopes.”

Hence, during the interval between 4 Pp. m. of the 29th and 10 a.m.

of the 30th, the centre of the storm had crossed the Balasore coast,

been transferred across the very broken and elevated ground of the North

Orissa Hills, and was at 10 A. m. of the 30th in the direct line of its advance ~

previous to crossing the hills. What actions occurred during its passage

across this hilly country are unknown, but it is certain that they pro-

duced no appreciable resultant effect on the line of motion of the vortex,

and only a very moderate one on the depression at the centre. This was

29°3” at 10 a. M. of the 30th, as compared with 29°14” at 10 a. m. of

the 29th. There can be little doubt that the effect of the irregular

character of the country would be to break up and disintegrate the

cyclonic or rotatory motion in the lower atmospheric strata, or to dimi-

1884.] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 99

nish as a whole the intensity and amount of the cyclonic motion, and,

therefore, also of the depression at the centre, which roughly measures

the intensity of the disturbance.

The observations taken at 4 p. m. in the neighbourhood of the centre

are given in the following table :—

#0 42 =

4 bas o 5 Wind. a

& oO ©."

HS 3 rg

’ Pe on 84 |Amountin| 8%

Station. q H 2 So si : es SS miles per s) +

ae eae £+ [hour since 5

Bee Bop ee ot) are 10 A. M. F

. ES Re oer ore 29°508 | + ‘3871 | 8S. HE. 20°0 10

ESS facia. 2. Seg stnea Wane s$dcct vas <> 516 | +°172 | S. EH. 12°0 9

’

EE icaionh <sencu sisiecaces voapachis "446 | —:001 KE. 22°9 10

te os ces ga deahsc 533 | +-013 |E.N. EB] 245 6

MEE osc nchaceces chivecideotendoedss 538 | — ‘033 | N. W. 248 10

; eo cidiesi08 binoteisce bar vas wacusiigee *543:| —'038 |W.N.W.| 244 5

Se ene ee 546 | +-007| N.W. | 12:2 10

SS oe "415 | — 084 W. 60°0 10

BMPPGINDAIPOTS ............ sec eee ese senseeses ‘215 | —°122/ S. W. 15 10

SS a ee 395 | +029 |W.N.W.| 65-0 10

;

, In comparing these observations with the preceding 10 a. m. obser-

hk vations, it should be remembered that the fall of the barometer between

10 4. m. and 4 p. m., due to the diurnal oscillation, is -11" during the

months of June ant July in the Central Provinces. Hence, making

- allowance for this, it will be seen that the barometric changes due to the

| storm were of the following character. Pressure had increased about ‘08” at

_ Cuttack and ‘11” at Hazaribagh, and had fallen 03” at Sambalpore. It

had, consequently, risen during the previous six hours at all stations in

the immediate neighbourhood of its centre, except Sambalpore, the near-

est station. These facts appear to establish in this case that which [

believe, from an examination of other similar cyclonic disturbances, to

be a general result of the advance of a storm over a hilly country, viz.,

that the storm tends to break up, the cyclonic motion becoming more

irregular, and the barometric depression smaller in amount over the

greater part, if not the whole, of the area of cyclonic circulation, but fre-

100 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

quently extending over a larger area. In other words, the cyclonic ac-

tion becomes less intense and more diffuse, which is probably the first

step in the disintegration of cyclonic disturbances. On the other hand,

if, after its passage across hills, it receives increased energy and again —

intensifies, this is usually indicated by a contraction of the storm area, —

and by an increase of the depression near the centre.

The position of the centre at 4 P. M. was apparently almost identical

with that in which it had been at 10 a. m., and was, so far as canbe

inferred from the observations, in Lat. 21° 50’ N. and Long. 83° 30’ E., or

about 20 miles to the west of its position at 10 a. m. |

The rainfall during the previous 24 hours in Orissa and Chutia Nag-

pur is given in the following table :—

Average rain-| Highest

Division. Districts. fall of dis- | rainfall in

trict. district.

1°83 3°88

2°07 3°21

3°02 5°64

IPOOMEE: wi, sMicnecters Sache

(OULGHITOE cas newiensiveniens ab

Orissa eeeeeoesn . eeece e

BalABOPe.... avishce accobe

0°51 2°54

t7 408

1:30 2°03

BuaSMOre «0.00.00 00000

Sambalpore ............

Chhattisgarh ......

Raipore

Wardha : 1:82 2°71

eee Bhundara............... 2°71 Ar 54

of Slane cepaeana BPS o <<< OL eer 0-03 0-10

Nagpur nil. nil.

Jubbulpore ..........< 0:54, 0°65

Seoni a 4 0°73 2°09

Jubbulpore ........- MEDROID ug cis eas Sete. 0°26 18h

Damioh, .... .qpanene sae 0°26 0°90

SATLLOL, ..0i nngineeea eee 0:03 0-11

( ry ta ovine aieh 0°88 3°00

Chhindwara ..........+. 1:03 4-09

Nerbudda .......ss j Betul... spa dee 0°43 2°83

L Hoshangabad Lee 0-01 0:05

TOATOGT \: scsi vcadadeaees nil. nil.

The meteorological information extracted from the logs of vessels

at the Head of the Bay on the 30th is given to show the improvement

in the weather, and the establishment of southerly winds over the Head

of the Bay.

a a ew

Ce ee ee ee

aE to aT ki nt Mey

pra \

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 101

30th June 1883.

. E 3 Fs z Wind.

Be: ; By tO

Vessel. | Hour. Ee ‘SM loa # REMARKS.

q 8 a sos ;

a 3 Ss | Dir. |Force.

Ho §

Bancoora ..| 4 A. M. 29°552| 8S. W. 5 | Strong wind and over-

‘e cast.

8 A.M. "639 5. W. 3 | Moderate breeze and

fine throughout.

Noon | 20° 01’ | 88° 25’ | ‘542; S. W. 3 | Do. * “do. do.

4P.M. 638 Ss. 3 |Current 80 miles ad-

verse.

8P.M. 539 8. 3 | Moderate breeze and

fine.

Midnt. 552 Ss. 3 | Moderate and fine at

| Saugor.

Star of Al- |4 a.m. 29°540 Gale moderating, wea-

| bion .., |8a.mM. ‘570 ther finer and less

4 Noon {{20° 15’ | 87° 28’ | °610/8.S.W. | 6to4| sea.

. 4.P.M. 620 S.

8 P.M. 670 Latter part much finer.

Midnt. ‘670

Saint Mag-/44.M. 29°440|S.S.W.| 8 | Squally rainy weather,

¥ heavy sea.

4 490) 8:5. Wo) e 7 (Do, do: do.

20° 32’ | 87° 56’ | -470|S.S.W.| 6 | Strong breeze, cloudy

hazy weather.

490 8. 5 | Cloudy rainy weather,

nasty sea.

°570| ~=S. 4 | Moderate and fine.

29°450|} S. W. 5 | Weather having a

much finer look, and

20° 50’ "500 4 barometer rising, are

proofs that the strong

20° 32’ | ‘87° 34’ | +430 3 winds are now over.

*580 1 A very strong wester-

620 1 ly current.

*680

29°490| 8S. W. 6 |A. M. Strong breeze,

sea going down.

F, 8 A.M 540 ve 6

Noon | 20° 83’ | 88° 81’ | *540 i 5 | Noon. Moderate breeze

and clear.

P 4P.M 520 5 | 3-45 p. mM. Passed EK.

Channel Light Vessel,

? 8P.M “580 ee 5 |8 p.m. Anchored in

Saugor Roads.

Midnt ‘600 ss | 5 )

102 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

oo .

3 & He Wind.

Soke [ge

Vessel. | Hour.| 6% lero & é REMARKS.

3 5 B38 : Dir

° 8

Hi Es & AS

British 4 .M. 9 | Squally with rain.

Princess | 8 A. M. 9 | Sea very high.

Noon | 20° 33’ | 88° 19’ 8 | Sea very high.

4P.M 8

8 P.M 6 | Sea very high.

Midnt 5 | High confused sea.

Prince 4A.M. S.8.W.| 10 | Midnight. Gale break-

Amadeo | Noon | 20° 39’ | 88° 20’ |29°530|_ iS... 8 ing.

8P.M 5 |4 a.m. Strong S. S.

Midnt 5 W., occasional heavy

squalls.

Noon. Strong wind §S.,

weather finer.

Commillah | 4 a.m. 29°349| S. W 9 | a. M. Hard squalls and

8 A.M. "423 |8. 8. W. 8 heavy rain and high

Noon °434| 8.8. W. sy sea, stood to south-

4P.M. 401) 8. W. 5 ward. A very high

8 P.M. 464) Var. 4 sea running from

Midnt. 569 | E. 8. E. 3 S. W. 54.m. Stood

up to Northward.

Weather clearing at

times for observa-

tions. 8 A.M. Hard

squalls from 8. W.

and high sea. Noon.

Overcast, weather

hazy. 4p. M. Fine

weather.

The preceding observations call for little remark. They show that

south-westerly winds were fully established over the whole of the north

of the Bay, but that they were diminishing rapidly in force. Before

sunset, moderate breezes and finer weather had set in. Heavy squalls —

came up during the early part of the day, but the only vessel which re-

ports rain during the afternoon was the Saint Magnus. In her case,

however, it is stated that the weather improved rapidly and was fine,

with moderate winds, at 8 p.m. Hence, the stormy weather in the Bay

ceased about noon of the 30th. A heavy swell continued to run for some

little time afterwards, and strong westerly winds prevailed for the next

24 hours.

July 1st.—The following table gives the observations taken at a few

of the most important stations, and indicates the general character of the

weather over India on the morning of the lst :—

zo)

‘

. Bengal.

_ over Bombay and the south of the Peninsula. Strong west winds pre-

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 103

o°o oO 2 2 ;

iy ties Wind. 4.25

a 9 o 6 gq |e

oe: 2 ey Amount in/o . eit 4

BSP | o miles per = = 29 e Weather.

g j= = sy, | Direction. hour since | <|= 848

3.8 | S49 | 104. uw. 10 a.M.pre-|§ 3.8 & 2

Ate oO viousday.|O |

Ass GE, EY Cee lela

29°676 | + ‘121 S. E. 7 8 | 0°29 | Fine.

566 | —‘070 | E. N. E. 8 10) ... | Strong wind.

701 | + °212 N. 3 8 | 0°77 | Dark, gloomy.

642 | + 057 | W. 8S. W 17 9 | O17 | Sultry.

765 | —:010 W. 17 10 | 0°21 | Showery.

678 | + °032 N. 5 7 | 0°74 | Showery.

471 | —°203 W. 11 10 | 4°08 | Continuous

rain,

775 | —:‘038 W. 8 Cpe... || Hine.

803 | — ‘042 BW. tH Bepiciv. 1 Mime:

The observations of the lst indicate that the barometric depression

moved during that day in the same direction as hitherto and at a rate of

about 15 miles per hour. The westward motion of the depression had caused.

a fall of nearly two-tenths of an inch in the barometer over the greater

part of the Central Provinces, and a general, although a slight, decrease

over the whole of the Peninsula and Bombay. In Bengal, the rapid recovery

in progress on the 30th continued. A rapid rise had also occurred over

the Punjab and the western districts of the North Western Provinces, due

to some other and independent action. A very distinct circulation of the

air was shown round the centre of depression. In the mid-Gangetic

valley, the winds had drawn round to north-east, and, over the western

portions of the Central Provinces, they were blowing from north-west.

Moderately strong winds continued at the Head of the Bay and in South

No change of importance had occurred in the wind directions

vailed along the Bombay coast, where, however, little or no rain was

falling. Local winds obtained in the Punjab. The sky was less clouded,

the weather finer, and rainfall less in amount over the Gangetic delta

and valley. The depression was, however, giving very heavy rain to the

Central Provinces, where the sky was overcast. Over the remainder of

the country, the weather was of the usual monsoon character.

The storm had advanced through the Chhatisgarh division of the

Central Provinces (which includes the Sambalpore, Bilaspore, and Raipore

districts), and was now passing through the Jubbulpore and Nagpur

divisions.

The following table gives the 10 A. m. observations at the stations

in the neighbourhood of the centre at that hour :—

104 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

oo Oo nm ,_» ©-.!

pod ve ae Wind. 2 ("By

rns a >) E B are

g i oe. fe 4 Amount in| 2 @ 9 Weath

TATION, + 2°9 me a= miles per | 2 2 oe eather.

Fo | Ss ‘< hour since |~ 4/8 3°

a=s | Sia Het |l0a.M.pre-|6 5 )-4 4.8

Adals Ag |viousday. |O |e

————— 7 oe

Sambalpore ... | 29°526 | + °173 a. Wis 1°4; 6 | 1°84

Raipore:..c. ive. 535 | + °024 S. W. 20°0 10 | ... | Overcast.

Hazaribagh ... “627 | +109 | E.S. E. 20°0 8 | 0°34 | Gale of wind.

WRB ws Sccvas vase "5384 | —*090 EK. 21°0 10 | 0°08 Ditto.

PROGMI io. nalvd@ade "463 | —°202 | N. N. W. 150 10 | 4°60 | Continuous

rain.

Jubbulpore ... "483 | —‘204| N.N.E. | 80 10 | 1°82 | Moist & mug-

gy.

Nagpur ...... *A71 | — ‘203 W. 110 10 | 4°08

The number of observatories in Chutia Nagpore and the north-

eastern districts of the Central Provinces is very small for their extent.

Hence, it is not possible to state with approximate exactness the position

of the centre of the depression at this time.

The observations, however, indicate that the centre was to the east

of Seoni, and that it was at nearly equal distances from Jubbulpore,

Seoni, and Nagpore, and hence almost certainly in Lat. 22° N. and

Long. 81° E. |

The following table gives the observations at 4 Pp. m. for the deter-

mination of the position of the centre at that hour :—

sg | 75 5

2 Oo H °

STATION. q ae i | a a a i. 38 ais te Weather.

ae rea le See: |

e.s(s..| Se | 68,5 [Ba

Ba? Onmbp + 45 g'd BS loa

a a0 As Shen 1D

RPE none aes 29°355 | —-191 We 11°7 | 10 | Overcast.

FiRIpOFE’?. 2 s.. ek. >e ‘415|}— 0 Ss. W 64°1 | 10 | Overcast.

Bare. t or eines 323 | — ‘220 EK. 972 | 10 | Overcast, raining.

PNB. ois nc eee 435 | —-°098 E. 30°0 7

Jubbulpore ...... 375 | —'163 | H.N.E. 142 | 10 | Gloomy.

BBMAOT. .:. ocReal ‘412 | —‘178| N.W. 2°3 8

Hoshangabad ... *420 | —°153 | W.S. W. 2°8 | 10 | Overcast.

Khandwa ......... "478 | —‘132 | W.N. W. 20°71 | 10 | Raining.

BOL Ae i wes hands. 509 | — ‘091 | W. N. W. 21:0 | 10 | Overcast.

Dito. satan 533 | —°073 | W.N. W. 15°0 | 10 | Overcast.

a el

1884.)

Allowing for the amount of the fall of the barometer between 10

a. M. and 4 p. M. due to the diurnal oscillation, the barometer had risen at

Sambalpore ‘11’, and had also risen at Akola ‘02”. The only portion of

the area in which it had fallen was that represented by the station of

- Seoni, where it had fallen -03”.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 105

The wind directions at Seoni and Nagpore were east and west

respectively, and indicate that the centre was between these two stations,

and probably some little distance to the east of the line joining them.

_ Its probable position was hence in Lat. 22° N. and Long. 79° 4.5’ E.

The following table gives the average rainfall during the previous

_ 24 hours in every district of Orissa and the Central Provinces :—

| : Average : ,

Division. District. rainfall of ee ae

district. uaa

PGORBO: hil cdeeb toeuna tie 0.01 0.05

MEMATISED oss ccecscccsasescecee Siri 0 spyereeneennty Me Re nil. nil.

y Balasore: lac sss <o0ese ses 0:09 0:20

Chattisgarh ee Heat POres.. os. Gareuen ee 1:60 4°25

_ Dildeporey. 0... ee. 0°56 2°92

| and hara ec deesee ces 2°97 4°36

- | Balaghat- x... css0en0s BAT Po OO

_ Nagpore or INGORE iss wiucsane cogs 3°88 480

a WWamdlies Pottnss dctecica 191 4°18

Jubbulpore ............ 0°66 1:62

[ 2 ee ape ei ed 2°76 5°65

EMMI POT. 50rreser ee) | Manda c..cse.cecceseeene 0:02 0°15

| Uc Siial ee coer ree mec 0:27 0:80

LOPS OF pabtaignia's Satevae onal 0:28 0:48

Nursinghpore ......... 0°53 1:25

Chhindwara ........00+ 4°16 4°90

Nerbudda Pent Botalot 50. 2200 Ae 3°91 6°13

L Hoshangabad ......... 2°90 5°99

DUAN, «sachin ahd vised <p: 0°64: 101

This table indicates that rain had practically ceased to fall in Orissa,

and that moderate rain had fallen in Chattisgarh. Heavy rain had been

received in all districts of the Central Provinces through which the cyclone

passed during the day, namely, the Seoni, Chhindwara, and Hoshang-

106 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2, .

abad districts, and also in the districts to the south of the line of

motion ; whilst in the districts to the north the rainfall was light.

The following table shews that the amount of rain in Bengal was

very small :—

Average rain-| Highest in

spake hip fall of district.| district.

Orissa .. | go RRR Res 0.04 0°20

South West Bengal .. Sree TAR 0°12 0°96

Kast Bengal . sala OEY s OSTA YS IR. 0-09 0°50

North Bengal s puih« Licker MER) wpa beings gamma 0:08 1:37

PREC oi cis see a aye tus a Suyee Shwe nil. (07

BIGeEEI TIGA ccSian anans haeeeeeasas doen esecacea rss 0.05 (080

Chigiia: Nam pomen asi! t las. Rema: y ss. ss'eeveeteovess O-1l 0°46

2nd July.—The following table gives the 10 A. M. observations of

this day at the nine most important observatories in India.

Se) ob aS oO.

ge mg Wind. A "3 os

3 8 e 3 3 ul3 25

Fa | 3.9 A t i ag

Hr mount Nig .

STATIONS. £ 2 5 i B Direction. | miles per 4/6 eo Weather.

ei bp A hour since gales

242 |) Se 10h, |LO4-M-pre-|2 3° 4.8

ea oo vious day. |O |

Caloutta.:......4... 29°673 | — 003 Ss. W. 4 8 | 0°03 | Fine.

Allahabad......... 613 | + °047 H. 8 2 | 0°04 |Strong wind.

TBHGkO. cy 6.0. .sh os 590 | —°1l11 W. 2 5 Fine.

Kurrachee......... *556 | — ‘086 WW 18 2 Fine.

Bombay: «.<-.-sb-. "708 | —‘057 | W.S. W. 20 10 | 0-15 Showery.

Jeypore "541 | —-187 | EH. S. E 7 6.) * ape aes

Nagpore’......04... *621 | +150 Ss. W 18 10 | 3°22 |Strong wind.

Madras "795 | + °020 W 6 7 | 1:83 | Thunder

storm.

Bangalore ......... "794. | —‘009 | W.S. W. 10 6 Fine.

The observations taken throughout India shew that the barometric

depression had continued to travel westward in the same general direction

as during the previous two days, and with the same velocity approxi-

mately as during the afternoon of the lst. A rapid recovery of pressure

had occurred over the greater part of the Central Provinces, amounting

at several stations to ‘15’. The barometer had on the other hand fallen

over the districts towards which the centre was advancing. The fall

was greatest at Indore, where it slightly exceeded °25” since 10 A. m.

of the lst. Pressure had decreased over the whole of the Punjab, the

North-Western Provinces, Bombay, and the greater part of Bengal and

Burmah. This fall was due to general actions unconnected with the

continuance of the depression in Western India.

er SC

of the Bay of Bengal in 1888. 107

The general character of the air motion remained the same, except

in the neighbourhood of the moving area of depression. Southerly winds

now prevailed in the Central Provinces. The westerly winds on the

Bombay coast were slightly stronger than they had been on the previous

_ day. The easterly winds prevalent over the area to the north and

_ north-east of the storm centre were comparatively dry, and little or no

rain fell in that part of the depression where they were blowing. The

_ rainfall was heavy in the southern quadrant of the disturbance.

Little or no rain was falling at the time in Assam, North Bengal,

Behar, the North-Western Provinces, the Punjab, and over the greater

part of Bombay.

During the interval between 4 Pp. M. of the lst and 10 a. m. of the

2nd, the centre continued to advance in a general westerly direction

through the Narbadda Division of the Central Provinces.

The following are the observations taken at the meteorological

stations in the area of depression at 10 a. m. of the 2nd.

18)

os 2 2 |O &

“gq | ag Wind. ae

8 S 2 3 eye 3

B a a= ; sia 0°

Srations. | § ® bles E, dade ee aa: Weather

one WY 4G Ss

gs | fs Direction four singe |= a oa

a.s a °. @ jat1Oa. M. =] qa

ea ©. | Wha 104.M. pre-|}O 8/2 . =

faa) 2) vious day. |O |p

Saugor 29°488 | — ‘056 N.E 11:0 8 | 0°38 | Showery.

TINIE o's scic conse’ 577 | —°061 W. 220 10 | 7°43 | Continuous

rain.

Amraoti......... 553 | — ‘050 | W.S. W. 42°0 9 | 635 | Ditto.

Neemuch ...... *509 | —°154 | EH. N. E. 20°0 10 | 0.86 | Showery.

Tndore ......-0 °410 | —°259 N. E. 13°0 10 | 1°58 | Showery.

Jeypore ......... "541 | —°137 | E.S. H. 70 oa Dia Fine.

Ajmere ......... 546 | —*140 N. E. 5°0 4 | 0°43 | Thunder.

Khandwa ...... ‘494 | —‘141 | W.S. W. 13°0 10 | 2°64 | Continuous

rain.

Mount Abu ... | 25°692 | —°169 N. 9°0 9 | 3:34] Ditto.

a 29°588 | — ‘138 Ss. W. 17:0 10 | 0°33 | Showery.

-Malagaon ...... 670 | — ‘073 ay 18:0 10 | 2°83 | Continuous

rain.

Nagpore ...... °621 | + °150 8. W. 180 10 | 3°22 | Strong wind.

ae Se ‘603 | + °140 S. 12°0 8 | 1°20 | Continuous

rain,

Jubbulpore ... ‘599 | + 116 8. 120 9 | 0°05 | Strong wind.

108 J. Ehiot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

The barometer was lowest at Indore. The barometric heights and

wind directions, when charted, indicate that the centre of the depression

was at noon very near Indore and to the east of it, and hence in

Lat. 22’5° N. and Long. 76° E. Strong winds and very heavy rain

characterized the western and southern quadrants. In the northern

quadrant, winds were much more moderate, and rain fell only near the

centre of the depression.

The following are the 4 Pp. m. observations, which enable the position

of the depression and its centre to be determined at that hour :—

: E : Wind. :

STATION, & 3 3 ct Amount in : ;

fii} bes ies mas get

Fag | e483 5 =

E: rs S 10 a. M. S :

EUBOR ccs. orseaves 29°473 | + ‘061 Ss. 14:0 8 | Cloudy.

Akola....c...ceemiesoae, 1 a7020) W.-8. W. 21°7 10 | Strong wind.

ATHYAOUT.....6 503.00 565 | + 136, S. W. 23°3 10 | Strong wind.

Neemuch ......... 368 | — ‘148 E 17 9

BRUNER... cones ‘414 | —°119| S.W. 8:7 10 | Overcast.

JCYPOLO .....0.0000 “398 — 125 E. 10°9 7 | Strong wind.

AGMOTO) i055 5-505es 399 — 183 H 12°4 5

Khandwa ......... 444 — *034 17°6 10

SAB og scinihdi os Bee "495 — ‘135 | W.S. W. 33°0 10 | Overcast.

Malegaon ......... "557 =| — °050 W. 19°8 10 | Strong wind.

DICOBR os potion Seen es °370 =| — ‘166 ae 18°0 10 | Overcast.

Bajkoh: .i2600 tsa *458 — ‘131 W. 20°3 10 | Strong wind.

PRIA ophh actos eines "422 | — ‘151 W. 15'8 '8 | Strong wind.

Hyderabad ....., "422 | —°175| S. W. 5°0 9 | Overcast.

Allowing for the amount of the diurnal oscillation between 10 a. mM.

and 4 p. M., it will be seen that the barometer had fallen during the pre-

ceding six hours at Neemuch, Ajmere, and Deesa, whilst it had risen rapidly

in the Central Provinces. The centre was between Neemuch and Deesa,

where the barometric heights were practically the same, and winds were

in opposite directions. It was approximately in Lat. 23° 30’ N. and

Long. 74° 30’ EK.

884. ] : of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 109

The following table gives the rainfall in each district of the Central

Provinces during the 24 hours preceding 6 p. mM. of the 2nd.

Average

Rainfall of

district.

Highest in

district.

Division. District.

- 0:09 0°45

Sambalpore ............

Chattisgarh gab PURDUE Gees io vajee danny v2 nil. nil.

BARONS. dex iiisoe vee ds 0°05 0°20

PONG OTR cccag ted vests os 0°25 0°70

. Balashay ee ive. 0°71 1:90

.. 8P Nagpur wife 2°25 3°86

i. Wardha oe nil. . nil,

(| Jubbulpore ............ 0-02 0-05

% AGM tas dete th ease es 0:06 O17 —

_ Jubbulpore...............4 | Mandla sence. nil. nil.

7 L Paar inttes cee tee, 0:07 0:20

aE OIA. a. Sy tuah dowres 0°10 0-41 ©

(| Narsinghpore ......... 0-19 0°75

_ | | Chhindwara ..:......... 0:06 0°19 ©

IE Ties os) cvisences SP EPObIEL 1... ius daw ate ceees 0-91 2°45

L Hoshangabad ......... 0:96 , 2BBdia

PRAT” Viele se paetgae 5°62 8°20

The rainfall of the previous 24 hours was small in amount. The

Nagpur district received local heavy rainfall. The only district where

the rainfall due to the cyclonic disturbance was large in amount was the

_ Nimar district. It was in the southern quadrant of the storm area during

_ the greater part of the day, and received an average of 5°62 inches.

__ 3rd July.—The following table gives the observations for the 3rd

July at the chief meteorological stations in India :—

P (=e: on 3 +H

. gay 1 ue Wind. fai eae

O Bia. | cae A ios

gy St |e Amount in S .j» Weather

oO ay | ®

ERTATION. = ae : f Direction. | miles per E a be See

fe | Pe hour since 'g “|. 6.8

e4a| S843) ion, 04M pre Sa\26 4

a) Oo vious day. OD |g

oalcutta .......:. 29°685 | +012 | E.S. E. 3 9} nil.-| Fine,

Allahabad......... “ig | + “099 N. 4 4} nil. | Fine.

IO, nos os cc neee 613 | + °023 K. 1 5 | nil Fine.

Kurrachee......... 446 | —°110 | N.N. W. 18 9 | 0°05 | Gloomy.

MOmMbAaY............ 732 | +024) S.S. W. 25 10 | 0°21 | Gale of

wind.

Jeypore............ 664 | +°123 | S.S. W. 12 Si nl | Strong

wind.

Meepur ......... ‘760 | + °189 | S'S. W. 6 5 | 0°04 | Showery.

Ye "845 | + ‘050 5. W. 6 5 | O11 | Showery.

Bangalore wee | "854 | + 060 | _ S. W. 8 5 | nil. | Fine.

110 J. Ehot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

The depression was now in the immediate neighbourhood of the

Arabian Sea, between Kurrachee and Rajkot. The barometer during

the previous 24 hours had fallen between ‘1” and °15” in Sind, Cutch,

Guzerat, and the adjacent districts of Rajputana. In the rear of the dis-

turbance, over the Central Provinces, the Berars, and Central India, a

recovery of pressure, varying in amount between ‘15” and °25”, had

occurred. Over the remainder of India, pressure had increased briskly.

The depression in Cutch and Guzerat had consequently been emphasized

by these changes, and the baric gradients over the area of depression

were large. South-westerly gales were now blowing on the west coast,

from Bombay northwards, and were giving very heavy rain over the

southern and eastern portions of the depression. Over Northern India,

the winds varied considerably in direction and were light and unsteady.

The weather was cloudy, and light and partial rain was falling, over the

greater part of Northern India, except the Punjab and parts of the

North-Western Provinces.

The centre of the depression at 4 P. mM. on the 2nd was to the west

of Neemuch in the Indore State, and was advancing westwards into Guze-

rat. The following table gives the 10 a. mM. observations of the 3rd at the

stations in the area of cyclonic disturbance :—

oO =) =

ea he - Wind. = luz

nes lua Gen /2 lee

STATIONS. 8% B at Ee phi Es = Bs .| Weather.

o O : i i , a

oe ie ee nen hour since |g <|@ 9 |

E 42/§ aS "*|10 4. M.pre- 6a 5 ag

a] S) vious day. |O |g

Kurrachee...... 29°446 | —‘110 | N.N. W. 18:0 9 | 0°05 | Gloomy.

Rajkote ......... 29:435 | —171 | 8. W. 33:0 | 10| 9:85 | Dust storm

with rain.

Mais es apsens 29°467 | — ‘076 S. BE. 170 -| 10 | 0°48 | Threatening

weather. =

Ajmere ......... 29°636 | + °090 8. E. 11°0 9 | 0°10 | Strong wind.

SGOT. 2... <0 29°676 | + °266 S. E. 70 6 | 0°10 | Gloomy.

Neemuch ...... 29°639 | +°130| 8.8. W. 22°0 | 10 | 0°21 | Thunder and

lightning at

distance.

cers) Sanne or 29°326 | —-207 | N.N. W. 30 | 10] 0°76 | Fine.

Hyderabad ... | 29°420 | —-187 N. 50 | 8 | 0:26 | Strong wind. —

- |

The barometer had risen rapidly at Indore and Neemuch, whilst it —

had fallen somewhat less rapidly at Bhuj, Rajkote, Deesa, Hyderabad, 7 |

and Kurrachee. The preceding observations indicate that the centre

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. lll

was between the three stations of Bhuj, Rajkote, and Deesa, and proba-.

jy not far from the first-named station, in Lat. 231° N. and Long.

692° E., and hence nearly in the centre of the district of Cutch. The

observations show that winds were unusually light in the north-western

quadrant. The average wind velocity at Bhuj during the previous 24

hours was only 3 miles, and at Hyderabad 5 miles. The westerly and

south-westerly winds at Rajkote and other stations in the easterly and

southerly quadrants contrast strikingly with the feeble winds to the

north of the centre of the depression.

. The following are the 4 P.M. observations taken at the stations

_ within the storm area :—

3 S38 S

ro qo Wind.

a 2 ‘ab #

23 Ps 5

STATIONS. eS a © - Directjon Amount in F c Weather.

eon, eM tA miles per s

a20 |} 5 . . | P.M. | hour since aT

Rag | Om 10a.m. | o*

4 & aU S)

‘Kurrachee...... 29°304 | —-182 | N.N. W 16°8.| 10 | Strong wind.

‘Rajkote......... 29°454 | —-004 | 8. 8. W. 32°3 | 10 | Strong wind.

"Mount Abu ...| 25°598| +-042| 8. 138 | 10 | Gloomy.

Ajmere ......... 29°565 | + “166 W. 12°2 5 | Gloomy.

MOTO ......... 29°627 | + °213 Ss. 67 10 | Gloomy.

{ Neemuch ...... 29°587 | + °219 | S.S. W. 11:2 10 | Gloomy.

ED 0.00 0sunes 29°215 | —°207 Ss. 25°7 10 | Thunderstorm.

rena .. | 29°317 | —-105 | E. N. E. 588 | 6 | Strong wind.

_ Jacobabad...... 29°382 | — ‘066 K. 17°2 6 | Strong wind.

Multan ......... 29°481 | + °021 N. E. 3°0 4 | Fine.

i" When the observations are charted, they indicate that the centre

was between Bhuj and Kurrachee, where the barometric readings were

‘lowest, and winds were from S. and N. N. W.; and at a short distance

to the W.N. W. of the former station. Its probable position was in

Lat. 232° N. and Long. 68%° EH. If allowance be made for the diurnal

oscillation, it will be seen that the barometer had altered little at Bhuj,

and was rising quickly at Rajkote, but continued to fall rather rapidly

at Kurrachee.

The following table gives the average rainfall in the divisions of

Bengal :—

112 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

Average rainfall Hi ghost rainfall

” Bir, wll 24 hours.

Orissa... Toca ae, Ae 0:03 0°30

South West Bengal .. Ss eis a 0-04 0°52

East Bengal .. iy. oh Niall abt 0°12 1:40

North Bengal | cing: a ih aie es 0-04 0°56

North Tr eae eae 2) aa nil. nil.

OME cack Sivek Geeeab we mu dinn.s veins 0:03 0-40

CIT SESE oh ae era | anes 0-06 0°50

The above return shews that, with the exception of a few local.

showers, rain had ceased in the Province of Bengal.

As daily returns of rainfall in Central India and the Bombay Pre-

sidency are not at my disposal, it is not possible to give full details’ of

this element of observation for the previous 24 hours. The returns of

Bhuj, Rajkote, Kurrachee, &c., however, indicate clearly that the rainfall

was heavy over the southern half of the cyclonic area and light over the

northern.

Ath July.—The Ellouiear are observations taken at 10 a. u. of the Ath,

and illustrate the more important changes that had occurred during the

previous 24 hours in the meteorology of India. |

: = ae

S 2 SS é. Wind. Z = é

Bee gee amount) 2 aio

23 | 4 san in miles q a

Srations. |$3 5/28 S| 8d lperhour| o8 | - Weather.

Sp Oe Bro | ° g ° o0

Sree Pcs g sien since a a

Hagia" | Bg" jloam| as | 4%

=e aay ran previous} 8 8

eq oO day. S) m8.

Calcutta ... |29°643 |— °042) N. W. 5 10 2°12 | Gloomy.

Allahabad ... |29°669 |— ‘043|_N. W. 2 5 Fine.

Lahore ...... 29°652|+ °039) Calm. 5 6 0°89 | Fine.

Kurrachee... |29°380 |— ‘066} HE. 33 10 0°83 |Duststorm with rain. —

Bombay.....- 29°867|+ °135) S. 28 10 0°23 | Gale of wind:

Jeypore ...... |29°751|+ ‘O87|W.N.W.| 7 8 Fine.

Nagpore...... 29°811}+ °051| W. t 7 Fine.

Madras ...... 29°864|+ °019|W. S. W. a t Fine.

Bangalore ... |29°901|+ °047| W. 7 A Fine.

1884.) — of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. . 113.

ane

The observations taken at the observing stations in Sind and >

Guzerat at 10 a. M. are given below. They shew that the whirl was still

quite distinctly marked, that it continued to advance to the westward,

and that it was now near the Head of the Arabian Sea, to the 8. W.

of Kurrachee. A rapid rise of the barometer had occurred over upper

Sind and Guzerat. Kurrachee was the only station where pressure was

lower than on the morning of the 3rd. South-westerly winds prevailed

in Cutch and Guzerat. The wind had shifted round to east at Kurrachee,

and was blowing with considerable force. It brought up a dust-storm

_ from the Rajputana desert followed by rain.

The centre of the depression had crossed the Sind coast during the

_ previous evening. It is not possible to follow its motion further, as no

observations are available for this portion of its path. It is, however,

| j probable that it speedily broke up.

The following 10 A. Mm. observations taken at stations in Western

India nearest the area of cyclonic disturbance illustrate the previous

remarks.

: | : Wind. | . :

3 8 Ns, = ae

are qe a 46

o°O os 7 + ond

= a oS na dh @oLlA ms

SratTIon ba =a S 7 aries So ee Weath

7 od ap q > or Rg g BS op a er.

| $6 8_: o & on fa, .| 2.5

¢ Bo OO SA |6.9 24 big S| 2S

Wb ds ‘evga | Ho) ne} [<D)

SOD © Ce - oo Sipe Bite. do

Rae a Bt gS Aan 8/39

} Hi

2 ea) e) a <q eS) a= roY

Kurrachee... | 29°380 | —:066 Hest 33°0 10 | 0°83 | Duststorm with:

rain.

Mount Abu | 25°890 | + °221 |8.S. W. 17:0 10 | 2°36 | Passing showers.

Deesa......... 29°725 | + °258 8. p 10 | 0°39 | Strong wind.

Rajkote ...... 29°695 | + 260 |S.S.W.| 240 | 10] 058 Clouds low, moving

‘ . rapidly withscuds.

aa 29°583 | + °257 |S.S. W. 11:0 10 | 4°24 | Continuous rain.

Hyderabad .| 29°626 | +°206| S. W. 240 10 | 0°05 | Gale of wind.

Jacobabad... | 29°614 | + °132 E. 90 3 | .. | Fine weather with

mF passing clouds.

' Mooltan...... 29°648 | + 073 | S. W. 30 O| .., | Fine weather with

passing clouds.

The following 4 Pp. m. observations shew that the barometer was

rising rapidly at Kurrachee, as well as at the neighbouring stations, and

that the wind at that station was slowly shifting round to its normal

direction (S. W.) inJuly. They indicate clearly the continued existence

of the whirl at the head of the Arabian Sea.

114 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

a | 3

hy Pe Wind -

a3 “gs =

ea QS - os oO é

STATIONS. nS £3 os 2 oe 8 Weather.

3 eS Ct | Sn eal Oe

go aS 5 S e F . 3

Bee ane at on oe Lae Soto dee

aa oe

Kurrachee...... 29°490 | + "186 | B.S. E. 38°7 10 Strong wind.

Mount Abu ...| 25°856 | + °258 |S. 8S. W. 18°5 10 Gloomy.

Deesa...,......3. 29°667 | + ‘163 jE. N. E. P 10 Strong wind.

Rajkote......... 29°653 | +199 | S. W. 28°7 8 Strong wind.

BOG W ters sicviigs yo 29°581 | + °366 |S. S. W. 23°0 10 Strong wind.

The history of the cyclone ends with the evening of the 4th, as

the observations of the 5th and subsequent days shew that normal winds

were established in Sind, and no further evidence of the existence of

the cyclonic whirl is furnished by the land observations.

CHAPTER III.

DISCUSSION OF THE MORE IMPORTANT FEATURES OF THE STORM OF THE

26TH JUNE TO THE 4TH JuLy, 1883.

The cyclonic storm of the last week of June and the first week of

July is interesting in several respects. It occurred after the rains had

fully set in over Bengal, and was of unusual intensity in the Bay for

a storm of the rains. After it passed into the Central Provinces, it ac-

quired fresh energy, and advanced slowly across the Head of the Penin-

sula into Guzerat. During this part of its motion, it gave excessive

rain, and presented in a marked degree the phenomena of a south-west

monsoon storm on land. It was thus one of the most complete storms

of the rains that has occurred in recent years, and as such is deserving

of careful study. Before discussing its more important features in detail,

it appears desirable to give a brief connected history of the antecedents,

the formation, the progress, and the dissolution of the storm.

The south-west monsoon proper of 1883 commenced a few days.

earlier than usual at the Head of the Bay and im Bengal. The Bombay

branch of the monsoon current was first felt in force on the Bombay coast

on the 24th and 25th of June, when strong winds, almost approaching to

a gale, were blowing, and general rain began and extended to the Central

Provinces. Very shortly after the commencement of the south-west

: 1884. ] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 115

monsoon proper in Bengal, an atmospheric eddy, or cyclonic vortex,

formed in the north-west angle of the Bay. It passed through North

Orissa, Chutia Nagpore, and South Behar into North Behar, where it

broke up on the 20th of June. This disturbance drew large supplies

-of vapour from the southerly current advancing into Bengal from the

Bay, which it discharged as rain in unusually large amounts over a

considerable portion of Central and North Behar, and thus occasioned

very heavy floods in the Gya, Behar, Patna, Durbhanga, and Mozufferpore

districts.

The disappearance of this eddy or whirl was followed by a partial

break in the rains. The winds, although they continued to blow from

the norma! directions over Bengal and in the south and centre of the Bay,

fell off in strength. The sky was less densely clouded, more especially in

Central Bengal and Behar. The air also was drier, and the rainfall much

smaller in amount and confined to local showers, which fell chiefly in the

neighbourhood of the hills in North and. Hast Bengal. Whilst this partial

break in the rains (which commenced on the 20th) held in Bengal, the

winds diminished in strength pari passu over the north of the Bay. They

were light to moderate, and rarely exceeded force 3. The weather was

comparatively fine, and the sea almost smooth.

The wind observations taken at Nancowry and Port Blair show that

the south-westerly winds of the centre and south of the Bay, which had

been very feeble from the 15th, began to increase in force on the 23rd, and

blew strongly during the remainder of the month. This apparently

indicated the commencement of another burst of the monsoon.

It appears to be a general rule that each strong advance of south-

west monsoon winds and consequent influx of aqueous vapour into Bengal

commences in the south of the Bay. The winds first strengthen for some

days in that part of the Bay, as is proved by the wind observations at the

Ceylon stations and at Nancowry in the Nicobars. The area of strong winds

then extends northwards. When the advancing strong winds approach the

Burmah and Bengal coasts, there is a strong tendency to eddying motion

at and near the front. This incipient vorticose motion may, under

favourable conditions, develop into a large cyclonic circulation and storm.

The strong current, in the present instance, advanced northwards along

the Burmese and Arrakan coasts, and increased the strength of the winds

at Diamond Island from the 25th, and at Akyab from the 26th. These may,

therefore, be assumed as the dates of the arrival of the front of the advanc-

ing mass of air in the latitudes of these two stations. The log of the Pemba

proves that, on the 27th, the force of the winds off the west Burmese coast

was very considerable and averaged 9. At the same time that these strong

winds were blowing off the Burmese coast, the winds at the Head of the Bay

116 J. Ehot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

were very light and variable, and of average force not exceeding 2. The

strong advancing south-westerly current was opposed by the line of the

Arrakan hills, by the resistances due to friction between itself and the

earth’s surface, and by the slower moving air currents to the west. The

actual effect of the various resistances was to produce a deflection of the

current to the west in the neighbourhood of the Burmese and Arrakan

coasts, and a large amount of eddying or rotatory motion in the front of

the current, and, therefore, also of ascensional motion and its concomitant

action (in the case of a very humid current), rainfall. The energy or latent

heat given out in the process of condensation, or rain formation, in its turn

increased the ascensional motion, and the various actions and reactions

gave rise to an extensive whirl near the Head of the Bay. The existence

of this was plainly indicated on the morning of the 27th, when winds

shifted round to north-east over the north-west of the Bay. Very

heavy rain (“‘torrents of rain’’) were then falling over a comparatively

small area near the Head of the Bay, which became an area of increasing

barometric depression and of cyclonic air motion. The disturbance

increased in intensity on the 28th and moved slowly westwards near

the parallel of 21° N. At1l0 a. m. of the 29th, the centre of the

depression was between the Light Vessels at the Intermediate and

Upper Gasper stations. It was then travelling with an average velocity

of about 3 miles an hour. Its rate of motion apparently increased as it

approached the Balasore coast.

The storm advanced in a general W.N. W. direction during the

afternoon of the Z9th, and crossed the Balasore coast a few miles

to the north of the station of Balasore a little before midnight. It

then apparently marched without change of direction across the North

Orissa hills, as, next morning at 10 a. M., the centre of the barometric de=

pression was near to Sambalpore and in the continuation of its line of

its advance on the 29th. The disturbance apparently diminished for

some time, but began to draw supplies of vapour from the Bombay

branch of the monsoon current, which had been blowing strongly for some

days previous. In consequence of the increased energy thus given to it,

it again intensified slightly and moved almost due westward across the

Head of the Peninsula at an average rate of about fifteen miles per hour.

On the morning of the lst, the centre was near Seoni, on the morning

of the 2nd near Indore, and on the morning of the 3rd near Bhuj,

whence it passed westwards across the coast into the Arabian Sea,

and was a little to the south of Kurrachee on the evening of the 3rd. The

wind directions at Kurrachee and the neighbouring stations indicated

cyclonic indraught to a centre, to the south-west of Kurrachee on the

morning of the 4th, after which they give no further indications of

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 117

8 e xistence. In the absence of observations, it is impossible to state

yhether it broke up immediately, or passed over the whole breadth of the

Arabian Sea. ; |

_ The following table gives the positions of the centre at the hours

stated, from the 27th of June to the date of its disappearance beyond

th e limits of India in the Arabian Sea :—

Position of centre. | 5 ie: ' q

Date. Hour. 2 ‘0 5 5 ) §

Latitude. Longitude. gee s+; 27

N. BEE Bat hoes

e Noon. | 20° 30'| [89° 48!

June 27th ... { 4 P.M. 20° 35! 89° 3B! 12 3

7 10 A. M. Bhee O ter ee Aer 62 32

June 28th .,.3| Noon. SES SS ae 2 3t

) 4 P.M. et AO A BBP BO! 13 32

; Ring ie BE BO) be B22. | BEE Ai 22

June 29th .., Noon. eh We | ein 4 25

4 4p. M. a hoo Os OU 22 55

4s 10 A. M. BPP AOS B4P oBt al 230) 13

; une 30th ees { AP. M. 99° 0! 83° 30! 32 52

{ 10 A. M. gee Oat sek: we Onl ake 9

The atmospheric whirl was fully developed on the 27th and con-

tinued intact for at least seven days. During the latter part of its

existence, it drifted across from the coast of Orissa to the coast of Cutch

Por Sind, and disappeared and probably broke up in the Arabian Sea. —

pi The following table gives the lowest reading of the barometer at

104. M., the average barometric height at the same station, and the amount

of the greatest known barometric depression at 10 A. M. on each day :—

% 16

118 J. Kliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

Lowest Mrz

10 A. M. b trio} Tiemeaiall

Havoukennio are ric pression,

, eight.

reading. July 1st.

June 29th..| Bay (Sandheads) ...... 29°140 29°602 ‘4.62

June 30th..) Sambalpore ............... | 29°353 29°589 "236

Ly USGS. OORT Gc . acedays s-sseceevseeld. too 29°624 ‘161

July ‘Zod...| Indore scot cnsnts suse Volo 29°662 "252,

Pilly BEC...) DM] ncn sceebesass tecnra sss ao aaO 29°616 290

July 4th .,.) Kurrachee ..,.......+.... | 29°380 29°589 "209

Hence the barometric depression at the Head of the Bay was very

nearly half an inch. During its progress overland, the depression ob-

served nowhere exceeded °29”, and, as two of the stations named in the

preceding table (Indore and Bhuj) were ata very short distance from

the centre, it is almost certain that the barometric depression on land,

after crossing the Orissa hills, never exceeded three-tenths of an inch. ©

The decrease in the amount of the depression was evidently due to the —

ereater frictional resistance encountered by the cyclonic disturbance on

land than at sea. |

An interesting feature of the storm was that its centre moved in a

path which was approximately straight. The general direction of its path

was N. 83° W. or almost due west.

The steady march in an almost constant direction across the Con-_

tinent is very striking, when the varying character of the surface over

which it passed is taken into consideration. During the first part of its

existence, it passed slowly over the water surface at the Head of the ©

Bay, where the resistance to its motion was a minimum. After cross-

ing the Balasore coast, it advanced intact over the North Orissa hills, a

very broken and irregular country, the highest points of which are from

3000 to 4000 ft. high. It then crossed the highlands of Sambalpore

(where the hills which rise out from the plateau attain an elevation vary-

ing from 1,500 to 2,500 feet) and passed over the comparatively low plain

of Chattisgarh, the average height of which is less than 1000 feet. Thence

it advanced through the Balaghat, Seoni, Chhindwara, and Betul districts |

of the Central Provinces, which cover the extensive highlands known as _

a |

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. — 119

the Satpura plateau, and have an average height of 2000 fect. It thence

passed across the valleys of the Taptee and Nerbudda and the Vindhya

Hills into Indore and Malwa. The average elevation of the Vindhyas in

that portion over which the cyclonic storm advanced is 2,500 feet. From

Malwa, it passed westwards over the low plains of Guzerat and Cutch,

_ the highest points of which do not exceed 800 or 900 feet in height, and

crossed the coast of Sind between Bhuj and Kurrachee into the Arabian

Sea, where its existence for at least twelve to eighteen hours afterwards is

proved by the direction of the winds at Kurrachee and the neighbouring

stations.

The above briefly indicates the varied character of the surface over

which it advanced. During a considerable portion of its course on land,

_ the average elevation of the country over which it travelled exceeded

2000 feet. Much of the ground was very broken and irregular

country, the higher points of which exceeded 3000 feet in elevation. The

only inference that can reasonably be drawn is that the cyclonic circula-

tion extended to a height very considerably greater than 2000 or 3000

feet. Hence it was a cyclone of high elevation, and the cyclonic circu:

lation near the earth’s surface was of comparatively little importance, and

not necessarily an index or measure of the intensity of the cyclone.

The chief features of the motion of the storm centre have already

been indicated in the history of the cyclone. Its very slow motion

_ during and for some time after its formation, or from noon of the 27th to

noon of the 29th, is remarkable. During this intérval of 48 hours, its

rate of motion apparently never exceeded 5 miles per hour, and during

the greater part of the period it varied between 2 and 4 miles. After

noon of the 29th, it rapidly increased its speed, and, during the greater

part of the next 24 hours, moved with a velocity varying between 10 and

15 miles. When the centre approached the high hills and broken ground

of North Orissa, it experienced a very considerable retardation. As already

stated (vide page 99), it lost energy and shewed signs of disintegration.

The rainfall decreased in amount, the barometric depression was much

i smaller, and the disturbance was diffused over a larger area, although

it was less regular and weaker in character. This was, however, followed

; by an increase of its energy due to its drawing supplies of vapour from the

Bombay coast. The preceding changes were reversed. During this inter-

val, the average rate of its motion was about 8 miles per hour. Its velo-

city increased on the lst of July, and, during the remaining three days

of its existence on land, it moved with a fairly uniform velocity of

about 15 miles per hour.

Another important feature was the amount and distribution of the

rainfall during the cyclonic storm. At the Head of the Bay, the rainfall

aa ©

120 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

was torrential in character, more especially in the eastern and southern ~

quadrants. The British Princess had “torrents of rain,” the Saint Magnus

‘“‘ heavy continuous rain, ” the Star of Albion “thick continued rain,” the

Commillah “ very heavy rain,” and the Scottish Chieftain “ heavy rain.”

The following table gives the daily rainfalls during the period—

June 28th to July 4th—at the meteorological stations situated in the area

covered by the cyclonic storm during its existence on land :—

June 1883.

Stations. laa kL A ae Se et das dels

28th. 29th. 30th.

POOTECE ........626000 0°59 9°44, 2°25

Saugor Island...... a 017 0°36

Balasore ......cceees 0°94 2°65 5°64

False Point ........ 8°04 5°39 1:10

Gatiack. ...¢ jae 1:79 5°61 3°21

Sambalpore.......-+ 0°05 2°47 " 00

Raipore ..ccsseeeeee sie Ol 2°03

Nagpur 0°17 5

Seond ....csseeeeeees 1°22 0°45

Jubbulpore .......+. 0°12 0°12 0°65

Pachmarhi...... 1:29 ah 0°02

AmMraoti .....c.c000 0°85

Bald: «cc. sce nan accee 0°42 ee F

Tndbre.. ee 0°07 Se

Neemuch........eses 0°04 i 47

oat. da ties cpeinnten 3°64 3°51 0°52

Ahmedabad......... 0:18 0°05

Rajkote ...cesseee 0°46 0°40

Bhuj... eriecterweace 0°90 0°54: 0°02 156

Hyderabad ......... 0°42 012

Kurrachee .....+.6 0°37 1:65

PGGHR. os descsdeceaens 1°23 0°08 0°03 0°74

Mount Abn ........ 0°45 0°18 0°14

i oiled

_ Nerbudda

of the Bay of Bengal wm 1883.

121

| As the rainfall was especially heavy in Orissa and the Central Pro-

_yinces, I give the following table shewing the average district rainfall for

each day of the period (June 27th to July 3rd) in these two divisions of

the Empire, and illustrating more fully than the previous statement the

distribution of the rainfall in a portion of the area covered by the dis-

turbance. As daily returns of rainfall in Central India and the Bombay

Presidency are not at my disposal, I am not able to give the corresponding

data for the western portion of the course of the cyclone.

Division. District.

Sambalpore ...

Chittasgarh ...4 | Raipore ........

Bilaspore........

Seoni

Mars ais i Ssiecsy ss

ISSUE Cafes veicts

Chhindwara.....

Nursinghpore ...

The chief peculiarity in the distribution of the rain

Hoshangabad ...

No. of

Stations.

_ OOOO OO OOO I I

2°58) 6°15} 1°83} 0°01) nil.

5 | 0:06) 3°03) 4°50} 2°07) nil. | nil.

6 | 0°71) 2°00} 2°66) 3°02) 0:09] 0:09

5 | 0°32) 0°31) 0°74) 1°17] 1:05] 0°09

4 | 1°74) nil | 0°73) 1:30! 1°60} nil.

7 | 0°11) 0°51) 0°35) 0°51) 0°56] 0°05

5 | 1:06) 1°48) 0°19} nil. | 3°88} 2°25

3 | 2°81) 0°57| 0°04) 2°71) 2°99] 0°25

4 | 1:29] 0°01} nil. | 1°82} 1°91] nil.

4, | 1:21) 0:08} 0°23} 0°03} 2°47! 0-71

3 | 0°59] 0°13) 1°44) 0°54) 0°66) 0°02

4: | 0°46] 0°26} nil. | 0°03} 0°28} 0°10

5 | 0°41| 0°04) nil. | 0°26) 0°27! 0°07

3 | 0°83) 0°68} 0°38) 0°73) 2°76] 0°06

7 | 0°02] 0°20) 0:04, 0°26) 0°02) nil.

7 | 0°55] 0°19] 0:12) 0°43) 3°91! 0°91

3 | 1:15) 0°37] nil. | 1:03) 4°16) 0°06

5 | 1°01} 0°72) 0°01} 0:01) 2°90) 0°96

4 | 0°05) 0°68) 0:15) 0°88! 0°53) 0°19

3 | 0°06) 0°44) 0°14) nil. | 0°64) 5°62

0°06 | 10°86

nil,

013

0°01

0°05

0°01

0°06

0°02

nil.

0°03

nil.

0°04

nil,

0°07

nil,

0°38

fall was the con-

9°66

8°70

3°69

5°38

2°05

8°87

9°42

5°04

4°79

3°40

1:13

1:05

5°47

0°54

6°15

6°77

5°68

2°48

7°28

trast between the large amounts registered at stations to the south of the

122 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2;

line of advance? and those received at stations situated to the north of

the path of the centre.

The following tables give the average district rainfall in the dis-

tricts immediately to the south of the centre and those to the north of it

for the same periods in the Central Provinces, Orissa, and the adjacent

districts of South-west Bengal :—

Total average Total average

Districts to north of rainfall Districts in Orissa to rainfall -

centre. June 27th to south of centre. of the same

July Ist. period.

24-Pergunnahs ...... 2°50 ASAADAOTC go sinca ps ipaises 8°47

Midnaporé ........000 3°58 Onttack:..¢.5 #203 9°66

POOneR js: ies aces 10°80

gr SE ES

Districts of theCentral

Total district

Districts intheCen- |Total district || Provinces through

tral Provinces to north} rainfall which the centre! rainfall

of the path of the | June 30th to}; passed, or which lay) June 30th to

centre. July 2nd. to the south of the; July 2nd.

path of the centre.

Bilagpore .. : ...icsinesaee 112 Sambalpore ......... 2°31

ERAN. So ieldie sieeajois’s as 0°28 TURING Sci occcn hos 2°90

Jobbulpore save ais. 1°22 Balaghat,......0..0003. o2t

Narsinghpore ......... 1:80 RIGOR sis. 5 cee eden ct 3°53 |

amok... 4 gaeg, 0:60 Chind-wara:............ 5°25

DBD LOP .y5:.0ccennas anwiens 0-41 Hoshangabad......... 3°87

PGP ie ss ..scn gins 6°13

Bhandara. ..\.icsesn:. pe

a) oe io

Betas. citi... 5°24

INSTAR is 5 5 ane 6°26

The centre, it should be remembered, passed westwards near the

northern boundaries of Sambalpore and Raipore and thence across the

centre of the Balaghat, Seoni, Chindwara, and Hoshangabad districts. It

will thus be seen that the rainfall was distinctly heaviest at some distance

to the south of the path of the centre, and that the rainfall in the

northern half of the cyclonic area was barely twenty-five per cent. of the

amount received in the southern half.

1884.) ’ of the Bay of Bengal iy 1883. 123

It is not possible to give similar details for Central India and the

northern districts of the Bombay Presidency. The following table gives

the rainfall at the nearest meteorological observatories to the north and

_ south of the path of the centre, and a glance will show that there was the

same marked contrast between the rainfall in the northern and southern

_ portions of the storm area during the latter part of its course, when it

was approaching the Arabian Sea.

Meteorological sta- Meteorological sta- |Total rainfall

tions north of path SN Gygeaeac fe tions south of path | July Ist to

July lstto4th.

of centre. of centre. Ath.

re ... .ccssiess tet: 1:92 Sarat: ORY 4 5:80

BPCEMUCH .., 5.406000. 040 1:16 Ahmedabad ......... 5°43

NG asics cadens cas ob 2°61 Malegaon |... ....<:).0 Av17

is nesh dass 0°53 Bonapay ats. ees £09

Hyderabad ..,......... 0°38 A KOU Wacqueress «cctane 10°58

Murrachee ..........9 2°00 BUY See eave cee cia 5°82

The previous peculiarities to a certain extent explain the striking

contrast between the force of the wind in different quadrants, more espe-

cially when the storm was advancing over the sea or low ground. This

has already been briefly referred to in the account of the meteorology

of the present storm on the 28th and 29th (vide pages 86 and 93). It

was there shown that the Pemba, at a distance of at least 200 miles to

the south-east of the centre, had strong south-westerly winds of average

force 9, which were frequently interrupted by excessively violent squalls ;

and that the ships and light-vessels, so long as they were in the wes-

tern and northern quadrants, had winds from directions between N. W.

and N. HK. varying in force from 1 to 5, but that, when they passed in

to the opposite quadrants, they experienced very violent westerly or

south-westerly winds of force varying from 9 to 11.

This feature is shewn most strikingly by the anemometric observa-

tions taken at Saugor Island during the storm, which have been referred

to in page 95, but are now given in full in illustration of this feature :—

)

124 J. Kliot—The South-West Monsoon Storm [No. 2,

Steg bo

Date. q ae) 5 2p Weather and Sea.

os) x a

— A Ro

June 28th..| 13 | 29°332/N. N. E. Sea rough. Threatening.

15 | ‘389| N.E. Dark gloomy weather.

17 | :287|N. N. E. Thunder and lightning at

distance.

‘289| N. N. E.

327; ON. Raining.

286) N. W. Strong wind.

June 29th.. 204 W. Raining.

126) N. N. E.

176). a

183) ON. Sea very rough.

271) \gk, Dark gloomy weather.

166; — iE.

"126| N. N. E.

129) W.

"162 4 Sea tremendous.

Severe gale of wind.

Hence a prominent feature of this, as of many of the storms of

the rains in the Bay, was excessively violent westerly and south-westerly

winds in the southern and eastern quadrants and comparatively feeble

winds in the northern and western quadrants. The great inequality

of the winds in different quadrants in the majority of storms of the rains

has caused them to be considered as mere westerly gales by seamen.

It is, however, now proved beyond doubt that they are cyclonic distur-

bances in which the winds are rarely violent and dangerous except

in the south and east quadrants, where westerly and south-westerly winds

of force 8 to 10 may be experienced, interrupted by squalls as violent in

character, so far as can be judged from the accounts of sailors, as are felt

in the largest and most intense cyclones of the Bay.

The following additional illustrations are given of the difference of

the force of the wind in the different quadrants of the cyclonic disturbance.

It should, however, be remembered that it is difficult to explain many of

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 125

differences in the amount of wind recorded at different stations

apparently similarly situated with regard to the storm. They can only

be ascribed either to erroneous reading of the anemometers by the

observers at the stations under consideration, or to slight but influential

differences in the geographical or topographical features of the districts

_or stations in which the meteorological observatories are situated. The

latter appears to be the more probable explanation.

Average Average

di wind d wind

ES velocity Ao) velocity

Stations. 8 during Stations. 9 during

4 previous H previous

= 24 hours. 7 24 hours.

28th...) Saugor Island ...|N.N.E 80 | False Point ......... Wis. Weir lO

29th...) Saugor Island ...} EH. 16°O | False Point ......... W.8.W.) 23:0

Ue eee pe Paar elias cee W. 20°8

ys | -N.W. ; OUGERONE.. 5 io wbie « aasba W. 10°0

scaas veh ra ; Saugor Island ......| S.E 19°0

HIGIGROEOL Sok ences

Pes iacen cae ack PRAM. 2055 dese caacdu gh Pan 20°0

af it _N.E. ; ING UES Pcie l cen cece et W. 11:0

bevadousinne : Sambalpore .........| 8S. W. 1'4

CMG iain out ea aes W. 70

Jey MOPS ORO oo cadvevenacweuse tl OSovwe 17:0

Say ane nsee ie 109) a W. 22°0

RAC: are AITO 65.0 casisesinca sac: | Weise Wel Seo

ee obo KANG WG): 6. dee ranscn: | he ta Wako eo

AN BRO B ce sigs Aah ae S. W. 18°0

F Kurrachee......... ees Wo ESO Nt Ratpwe V0.0). ous causes S. W. 33°0

8rd oo eee BN. OW. 30. Noomuehs«ivenavet S.S.W.| 22:0

N. BO OBB a cais caerstea set S. E. 170

: Hyderabad ......

The contrast between the winds in different quarters is also evi-

denced by the amounts of wind received at the same station from

different directions. Thus, at Saugor Island, the amount of wind regis-

_ tered for the 24 hours preceding 4 Pp. M. of the 28th was 192 miles,

and for the same period prior to 4 P.M. of the 29th it was 524 miles.

The wind during these intervals was from N. H. During the next 24

hours, when southerly winds chiefly prevailed, 776 miles were recorded.

Similarly, at Balasore, 240 miles were registered for the 48 hours pre-

—

126 J. Ehot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

ceding 10 a. M. of the 29th, and 576 miles during the succeeding 48 hours

(with southerly winds). At Rajkot, the amount of north-westerly

winds during the 24 hours preceding 4 p. mM. of the 2nd was 272 miles,

and at Bhuj 390 miles. During the next 24 hours, when south-westerly

winds blew at these stations, 391 and 760 miles respectively were re-

gistered. The amount of wind (mainly from N. W.) recorded at Kur-

rachee for the 24 hours preceding 4 P. M. on the 3rd was 406 miles. For

the succeeding 24 hours, when easterly winds prevailed, 933 miles were

registered.

There are other and less important features, to which it will be

sufficient to refer briefly. One of these was the comparative smallness

of the storm area proper. If we estimate it by the area in which strong

winds prevailed and heavy rain fell, it almost certainly did not exceed —

250 miles in length by 100 to 150 miles in breadth, at any time during ~

its passage across the continent. The smallness of the storm area and

the slight barometric depression in all storms of the rains are cognate

features due probably to the peculiar conditions of their formation, as

cyclones of high elevation. Another feature was the very great irre-

cularity of the winds. This was shown (at Saugor Island, for instance)

by intervals of comparatively feeble winds during the middle of the ©

storm, and also by the apparent occurrence of much feebler winds at

stations nearer to the centre than at those at a greater distance. As,

however, anemometric observations are confessedly not intercomparable,

it is not possible to establish the fact of this irregularity on such

evidence.

APPENDIX I.

—<p— -

Extract from the Log of the F. L. V. Comet, giving observations during

Storm of June 27th to 30th.

Wind

5 H q 2 3

=e = a Weather. REMARKS.

Aj) 8 |$| 89

# |8| ge

A |e | ®

a Commences with dirty threatening

co weather. Lightning all round the

P horizon. Along heavy swellfrom —

= KE. 8. E. 3 a. mM. Squally with ~

i passing showers, ugly appearance

° of weather. fi

=a | 8 N. 4 | 29°321 Thunder. | 8A.m. Weather the same. Alarge

EY circle round the sun.

‘ pad

28th of June 1883.

29th of June 1883.

eee Tse

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 127

Wind

tol

; es

q z 29d

a= g; #8 Weather. REMARKS.

tS) y ao}

Se ae

N.N.E.| 4{| 29°327

N. E. 4 | 29°327 Raining.

... |8tod} 29-308

. — |4t06] 29°277 Thunder. Noon, Every appearance of a cy-

clone. Heavy confused sea, with

13 29°266 squally weather, and passing

showers and thunder.

14 .» |6t05} 29°252 Thunder.

15 29°241

16 5 | 29°215 Squally. 4, p.m. Wind and weather the same.

Observed the sky of dark red

17 29°220 appearance to the southward and

eastward.

18 N. 5 | 29°226 Squally.

19 29°230

20 : 5 | 29°253 Thunder. |8 Pp. M. Wind and weather the

same.

21 29°260

22 IN. N. W.| 5 | 29°236 Thunder.

23 29°197

24; N. W..} > 6.| 297195 Thunder. Midnight. Wind and weather the

same. Barometer still falling,

every appearance of heavy wea-

ther. Thunder and lightning all

round the horizon.

1 |W.N.W.| 6 | 29°148 Commences with dirty and very

threatening weather. Lightning

2|N.N. EJ 6 | 29°070 Raining. all round the horizon. A very

heavy sea running from 8. E.

3 se 6 | 29°094 Winds variable.

L 5 | 29°074 Thunder.

5 IN. N. W.|5to6) 29°112

6 bes 6 | 29°126 Squally.

7 6

29'138

128 [No. 2,

Wind.

g\4 F ge

@ | 6 2 a6 Weather. REMARKS.

Al 2 o = 5

Renee | ae

° mH

Bide.

8 W. 6 | 29°120 Squally 8 A. M. Wind and weather the

same, but sea increasing. Wind

9 29°122 shifting all round the compass,

from west through south and

10 |S.8.E.| 3 | 29°140 Squally. east, accompanied with terrific

rain squalls.

11 29°086

. | 12 |E.N.E.| 7 | 28-998 Raining. Noon. Blowing a furious gale with

oD :

2 terrific heavy squalls. Sea still

mi increasing and barometer falling.

@ | 13 IN. N.W.| 8 | 28'989 Raining.

ety a W. 8 | 29°068 Raining.

Pe eo ee 8 | 29°088 Raining.

tee?) Bae | 8) 20 Tie Raining. 4 Pp. M. Wind and weather the

i same.

17 |8.8.W.| 9] 29°184 Raining.

18 | S. W. 9 | 29°184 Raining.

19 |S.S.W.| 9 | 29°164 Raining.

20 a 9 | 29°247 Raining. 8 p. mM. Wind and weather the

same.

21 |S.S. W.| 9 | 29°288 Raining.

22 ie 9 | 29°306 Raining.

23 = 9 | 29°320 Raining.

24, ea 9 | 29°326 Raining. Midnight. Weather more moderate,

less wind and sea.

1|S.8.W.| 7 | 29°324 Raining. Commences with moderate gale and

high sea but better appearance in

the weather.

shi x 7 | 29°336 Raining.

2 | 3 ‘ 7 | 29°346 Raining.

r| 4 “5 7 | 29°353 Raining.

s 5 on 7 | 29°356 Raining.

eat. O ys 7 | 29°361 Overcast.

Ss 7 8. 8 | 29°365 Overcast.

ee 8 > 8 | 29°415 Raining. 8 a. M. Observed a large circle

s round the sun.

oc) 9 * 8 | 29°440 Raining.

10 aS 8 | 29°474 Overcast.

Lk re 6 | 29°486 Overcast.

12 3 6 | 29°464 Raining. Noon. Strong breezes with blind-

J. Kliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms

ing rain squalls.

Pp. M. Weather fine.

Heavy swell

from southward.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 129

CHAPTER IV.

Tur History or THE Storm or tHE 10TH to 15tH Novemper, 1883.

The present storm was generated in the Gulf of Martaban, after the

' north-east monsoon had been established for more than a month over

the north and centre of the Bay. The rains of the south-west mon-

soon terminated prematurely in Bengal in the last week of September.

It is a well-known fact that the commencement of the north-east

~ monsoon on the Coromandel coast is due to the recurvature of the south-

| west monsoon winds over the south and centre of the Bay. The lower

| atmospheric current, which is from south-west in the extreme south,

| at that period changes, through south-east and east in the centre of the

J Bay, to north-east on the Madras coast. The south-west monsoon current

| of the year 1883 was unusually weak, and, when it retreated from Bengal,

it recurved immediately, and north-east winds were established on the

Madras coast in the first week of October. Hence the north-east mon-

' soon rains set in over the Madras Presidency a week or ten days earlier

than usual. They gave general, and unusually heavy, rainfall, as is

shown by the following table of rainfall at eight of the more important

stations in that Presidency.

Rainfall at eight stations of the Madras Presidency, October 1883.

3. LO ee af 18 bea ee | 1G y 27

Ee | ee ee

1°62} 2°35) 0°10} 0°23) 1°50

0°75) 2°44) ... | 1°47) 0°31

0°10} 0°26} 0°46} 0°63) ...

Aver-

"Stations.| 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | Total.| age.

ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee

_ Cocona-

maa... | 0°66) ... 0°90} 0°25] 5°70} 18°31} 8°60

- Masuli-

patam 0°28) ... |0°21/ 0°05} 0°01) ... | 0°24) 0°03) ... 0°03} 1°25] 0°70) 4°95) 18°35] 8°58

Madras | 0°16 0°10) 0°12 0°37) ...

~ Salem... Poi... Ost «0s

0°02) 0°16) 2°89} 2°12) 1°54) ...

0°40] 0°35] ... 0-96| 12°44! 7-22

A nd ee Look. Punk | cee | coe | vee [OUR] 3. | 2°55} 8°20] 3°00) 24°40} 9°84

Madura 0°41) .., |O°O7| ... | 0°50) ... | 1°35) ... | 0°25) 0°12) ... | ... |0°20| 8:98) 888

_ Trichi-

| nopoly| ... | 2°47) ... |0°46) ... | . fell dee pase | OO OeE: he} 0°69} 7°94) 7°86

"Tanjore | 0°08] 0:06) 1°70) ... | ... |... J.» | ... | 0°20] 0°60] ... | 0°05] ... |0°20| 6°86] 5°60

130 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,9

Rainfall at eight stations of the Madras Presidency, November 1883.

Stations.| 1 ay S44 68) 6) 7) 8) 910) Tie ie ae

SS | |) | Ss | | | S| | | | | |

Cocona-

da.... A ae ee | ee RI cana cect cow tll seca d ede: Longe de utel teers

Masuli-

parate GE BO 12.20 | de |) ae eee [yy dope ew a eee cadet Vo mes lf ear tines 1h con), helen

Madras 1°87 |2°46 |2°12 |1°15 (0°27 |0°12 |0°14. |0°41 |0°02

Salem...| 0°73 |0°94|0°27 |1°16 0°16 ... [0°02 /0°O1 0°75 (0°06) ... |... | ccc | cee | ve

Nellore 10D) 1:60 0°45 \0°COM OR IO-OB Fed oh ccas Plea! Pl eee h leay 1 cea

Madura | 1°95 /1°80|1°08 |3'00] ... |0°20 0°04 0.03] ... [0°33 |2°00] ... |... |... | cee

Trichi-

nopoly | ... [0°06 |0°25|1°96] ... | ... [144] ... (0°10

Tanjore | ... |0°27 |0°08 1°78 |1:02 [0°06] ... |0°85

Stations.| 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 125 l26/27I28129!30) Total. | Aer"

age.

Cocana-

da aed tae | w., |. etic sdets 9°97| 3°59

Masuli-

patam Ric etcls. | “ge dae peers thas ...| 1485) 411

Madras |... | ... |0°30/4°75 |1°31 re NR os Ai at es Le .| 14°92} 13°40

Salem...| ... | ... (0°25 0°01 Pe wees... eee 4°36| 2°65

Nellore |... | ... 1\0°DS'O°7O =. b... ) er cl Tees|..e|s0e{.] SOO? tee

Madura]... |... 0°20) ..., | eeemiO°S5) cond 0 tees .| 10°98] 5°37

Trichi-

nopoly | ... {1°26} ... {0°08 0°07 ea ae eee oe 5'22| 5:28

Tanjore | ... |)... |e@@/\@O2Zi017 0'48)'*.. teas 2g Oe be) cel Ba fi 7°63| 5°54

The preceding table shews that rain fell more or less continuously

during the whole of October and until the 4th of November, after which

a few showers fell until the 9th and 10th, when rain entirely ceased for

several days. After the 4th, the north-cast monsoon current decreased

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 131

November

average: 4th. | Sth. | 6th. | 7th.

ee — eC eeces=SOOOO eee eee ee

9|SE | 9| ENE | GENE| 9/ENE| 7} NE | 8INNE! 7

6°8;WSW| 5) SE/| 6 SE | 7INNE| 5) N/| 5) N {6 E

56| SW |?|SW| OWNW!/?| NE | ?/|NNE/ 2} NE | 4NNE 6

| ||

The preceding observations shew that the north-east winds on the

Madras coast were diminishing in force. It is, therefore, probable

that the south-west monsoon current over the south of the Bay was

much weaker, and that, instead of recurving and blowing strongly on

the Madras coast, it was continued over the centre of the Bay as light and

variable winds. This supposition is, it will be seen, confirmed by

the accounts of the weather contained in the logs of the vessels navi-

pating the Bay to the west of the Andamans at that time. The cyclone

did not commence to form until the 9th of November, but the meteoro-

_ logy of the Bay on the 7th and 8th is given to shew the character of the

_ weather prior to the storm.

7th November.—The barometer was oscillating at the time slowly

over the whole of India, and the distribution of pressure was almost

identical with that which had obtained for the previous three or four days,

and differed very slightly from the normal. A slightrise of the barome-

ter occurred during the previous 24 hours at the great majority of stations.

The barometric changes were, however, of no importance. The barometer

was highest in Scind and Rajputana, where the readings averaged 30°05”,

_ and was lowest over the south of the Bay, where, as shown by the returns

of Negapatam, Trincomalee, Port Blair, and Nancowry, it was slightly

below 29°95”. The differences of pressure were hence comparatively

_ small over the whole area.

The following table gives the 10a. M. readings of the barometer,

—_

132 - J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

reduced to sea level and for temperature, at the more important meteoro-

logical stations around the Bay :—

Barometer Barometer

at 10 a. M. at 10 a. M.

ciahal «3 reduced to Sipiaecs. reduced to

sea level. sea level.

Saugor Island ............ 30°028 | Chittagong ............ 29°994

Palse: Pomt® 3.02.6.0.s00 fe) BO O28 | Bcvaly ooo .sc cash cossenee | eee

Gopaulpore ...............| 80°016 | Diamond Island ...... 29°970

ViSRCaPAtaAM ....ic5.....03. wg Old Port Blair. v. .:....2<.5) | eee

EGR cho cee ese caches eceses |g OLS "| WaNCOWTY..20.¢.reaecec] ae

Negapatam ...,........... | 29°948 | Moulmein ............... | 29°958

Trincomalee .....4..0.060+0) | 4 29 90) | Rangoon ......).0.0.».. | oo Cee

Met OT 3. 6. vces sce tno ost) ae

The gradients over the Bay were normal in character, pressure de-

creasing from north to south. The total barometric difference was

slightly less than nine-hundreths of an inch. The average barometric

difference between the north and south of the Bay in the middle of

November is ‘(075”. The distribution of pressure over the Bay on the 7th

was very approximately normal.

Over the greater part of India, including the whole of Northern and

Central India and the North Deccan, the weather was fine and skies

clear. These were clouded in Southern India, more especially on the

Coromandel coast, where they were generally overcast. Over the

whole of the Indian land area, winds were normal in direction. North-

westerly to westerly winds prevailed over the greater part of the Gangetic

plain, and northerly winds in the Gangetic Delta. Along and near

the Coromandel coast, north-easterly humid winds were giving mode-

rate showers of rain. In Burmah, winds varying between east and

north-east prevailed. The weather in every part of the Indian area, so

far as can be judged from the land observations, was of the usual No-

vember, or cold weather, type. There were no signs of the existence of

any atmospheric disturbance either in the land or adjacent sea area.

The only indications of the probable early occurrence of stormy

weather in the Bay were the lghtness and variability of the winds

over the centre and south of the Bay, and the rapid and steady decrease

in the rainfall of the Madras Presidency.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 133

‘The following table gives the chief observations taken during the day

ai the stations subsequently affected by the cyclone :—

(ean On nO @w » si a

: * 3 _| = — | Wind direction. |S ‘o 5 Be hd

a 350 | 25 goF I8 Io

wee l| ae aie |8 Jos

Stations. g sien aa ae ~ |§ 3/29 | Weather.

ee Soa lOa.u. 4p. wl32 a by 1g 8

B42] 85 28 Bb ala ms

69 S fe IS lag

acts 29°943 | + 041 Ss 8.S.W 4 6 | 0°62

Sess 29°945 | +003 | S. E. S. E. 4 7

29°970 | + 083 |E.N.E.| &. 5 5 | O11 | Thunder.

Sy ee 29°975 | + 027 |E.N.E.| W. 2 irae. ) bine,

29:994 | + °027 | N.N.E.| KE. 2 1 oa. Sane,

Peer 29°969 ; + 081 | N. W. | N.W. P 10} ... | Threaten-

ing weather

eats fi 20°977 | + 037 EK. S. E. 4, 10 | 0°02 | Gloomy.

ae 30°004?} + ‘068 | E.N. E.|E.N.E. 3 10 | 0°28 | Cloudy.

Te 29°958 | + °073 E. NW 2 9 Cloudy.

1 6 Cloudy.

» Mergui ......... 29°956 | + ‘015 NN; Calm

The information relating to the state of the weather in the Bay on

the 7th of November, contained in the logs of vessels navigating the Bay

this period, is given in the following statement :—

Vessel. Ss Ey ‘ba |S eg REMARKS.

; $ a a ae

H S ii#é

: 2

Mount Stu-

Noon {11° 50’ |91° 50° |29°925 Passing clouds towards

noon, heavy rain clouds

d 4 P.M. all round, but cleared

_" away towards sunset.

i . 8 P.M. Weather unsettled-

looking.

. Midnt.

KwangTung/4 A. M. 29°851

bo 8 A. M. ‘909 Fine weather through-

* out.

Noon |12° 33’| 93° 6’ | 943

z 4 P.M. "921 Sea smooth.

; 8 P.M. ‘909

by Midnt. ‘906

134 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

Wind.

REMARKS.

Probable

reduced

barometer.

Dir, Force.

©,

Hour

Latitude.

Longitude

Pere aks. 4A.M. Ny a Fine weather and

smooth sea.

Noon |19° 43’ |88° 15’ |29°980| N. 4

Midnt. N. 4

Parthenope | Noon |20° 10’ |89° 51’ |29°975 N. [Moderate] a. m. Light unsteady

breeze, fine, and clear.

Midnt. N. W. | Light. | Noon. Wind very un-

steady. Current per-

ceptible, setting to the

S. W.4 p.m. Moderate

breeze. 8 P.M. Light 7)

breeze and clear, with

frequent lightning.

Breadalbane| Noon |20° 55’ | 88° 8’ |29°975 |N. N. E.| Otol | Calm and variable airs

throughout, current to

Ss. W.

4p. M. NE by N| 2 to3 | Sea moderate. No rain.

The information respecting the weather in the Bay is very limited,

and confined to extracts from the logs of five vessels, and to the observa-

tions at Port Blair, Nancowry, the coast stations, and on board the light

vessels near the entrance to the Hooghly.

Three vessels, the Frank Stafford, Parthenope, and Breadalbane, were

near the Head of the Bay. The weather was fine, the sea smooth,

and winds light and unsteady. These varied between N. H. and N. W.

in direction, and did not exceed force 4 at any time during the day.

At Port Blair, the sky, which had been almost clear on the 4th, 5th,

and 6th, was clouding over. The air was unusually clear in the

morning, but the weather became cloudy and gloomy in the afternoon.

No rain fell on this day, nor had any fallen since the 4th. The winds

also were extremely light. Only 100°6 miles were registered for the

24 hours preceding 4 p. M., the smallest amount in 24 hours recorded

during the month.

The sky had been densely clouded at Nancowry for some days past,

and rain in moderate amounts had been recorded on every day. On

the 6th 62 inch fell with 8. S. W. winds. During the first three days —

of the month, the winds were from south-east, the normal direction —

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 135

in November, when the south-west monsoon is recurving over the centre

of the Bay, and giving north-easterly monsoon winds and rain to the

Coromandel coast. The amount of wind registered at Nancowry on each

day of the first week of the month, is given in the following table :—

Total wind! Rainfall at

amount of the! 6 Pp. m. of the | Wind direction

24 hours previ-} preceding 24 10 a. M.

ous to 4 P. M. | hours.

ee 46'7 0°47 S. E.

Me i fcc casera vay sncns 38:2 0:21 S. EH.

Peace iG. conics. deuces tue 440 2°86 E.S. E.

Rs eee 19°5 0-41 S. W.

ER ae 18°8 0°96 S. W.

EE viinio xi ciesnd vans onneey iy 0°62 S. W.

Nk vos cv wi sion ps vive tine 125°4 1:14 S. 8S. W.

Average October ...... 149°7 | S. 50° W.

| » November ... 1172 | S, 29° H.

This shows that, in consequences of atmospheric actions, the nature

of which can only be conjectured, the air motion over the south of the

Bay was unusually and remarkably feeble during the first week of the

month. The moist current advancing northward, instead of curving

through south-east and east and arriving as north-east winds charged

with vapour on the Coromandel coast, was exceedingly weak for some

days in the neighbourhood of the Nicobars. It had also shifted in direc-

_ tion on the 4th, and was proceeding from the south-west directly into the

Martaban Gulf. Rain also began to fall in increasing amounts over

- this and the adjacent parts of the Bay.

_ The ship Mount Stuart was advancing northwards, a little distance

to the west of the Andamans. She was in Lat. 11° 50’ N. and Long. 91° 50’

' at noon, and during the day had very variable winds commencing

from N. E. by N. and ending at S. The weather was fine, but the

air was charged with moisture. This is shown by the fact, noted by the

Captain, that, during the hotter part of the day, when there is undoubted-

‘ ly much upward movement of the air, heavy rain clouds formed all

i around, but cleared away again towards sunset.

* The Kwang Tung, on the other hand, was to the east of the Andamans

in Lat. 12° 33’ N. and Long. 93° 6’ E. She had fine weather throughout,

with light and variable winds during the day of force 2. The wind

shifted from S. E. to N. E. and thence to 8. W. during the day,

136 J. Hhiot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2, |

Hence, so far as can be judged from the various meteorological re- |

turns, ight winds and fine weather prevailed over the greater part of the

Bay. The usual change in the direction or recurvature of the south- —

west monsoon current (which gives a feeble cyclonic circulation to the —

air over the centre and south of the Bay) was not only much weaker

than usual, but was suspended over a part of the area in the neighbour-

hood of the Nicobars and Andamans, where very light unsteady winds

had prevailed for the previous two or three days. There is, however, no —

evidence in the meteorology of this day of the existence of any local

cyclonic circulation, such as might form the initial stage in the develop-

ment of a cyclonic disturbance or storm.

The observations at Moulmein and Mergui confirm the previous

statements, and prove the existence of light variable winds, chiefly from

the east and north, on the east coast of the Martaban Sea.

8th November.—During the preceding 24 hours, a rapid fall of the

barometer had taken place in the Punjab. The amount of the fall was

26” at Mooltan, :13” at Quetta, and’ :12” at Dera Ismail Khan and Lahore.

It will be seen from the meteorology of the 9th and 10th that this

fall was the first indication of the occurrence of a cold weather or north-

east monsoon storm in Upper India. It is during these storms that a

large portion of the snowfall of the higher Himalayas takes place. In

consequence of this rapid fall, pressure was lowest over the Punjab.

Sudden and large changes of pressure are a frequent feature of the cold

weather in the Punjab. It is not yet quite certain whether the forma-

tion of these Punjab areas of low pressure commences simultaneously

over the Western Punjab and the adjacent districts of Afghanistan or

Belochistan. This appears to be the most probable explanation, but it is

not unlikely that some may occasionally form much further to the west,

and pass through Afghanistan or Belochistan into the Punjab or Sind.

It will, however, presently be seen that this considerable disturbance in

the Punjab exercised no appreciable action on the atmospheric circulation

in the Bay of Bengal.

The distribution of pressure was somewhat complicated over India

itself. Pressure was lowest in the Indus Valley. A broad band of high

pressure stretched down the middle of India from Ajmere to Secunder-

abad, whilst pressure was approximately uniform over the Bay.

The changes of pressure were not accompanied by any immediate

marked change in the wind or weather. Skies were clear, and weather fine

and dry over all parts of India, except South Burmah and Southern

India (more especially the Coromandel Coast), where skies were overcast

and occasional showers continued to be received. The amounts which fell

at the various rainfall registering stations were very small.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 137

The only alteration in the wind directions that deserves notice

occurred at Diamond Island and Akyab, where the wind had shifted

round to south-east. This of course indicated the further northward

ex ension of the south-west monsoon current which had commenced on

the 4th at Nancowry.

The following table gives the 10 A. m. reduced barometric readings

of the recording stations on the coast of the Bay :—

Stations on west coast of the Bay. || Stations on east coast of the Bay.

INEEROOWEY= bynictacde sos.) BOOS

Barometer Barometer

é 10 a. M. : 10 A. M.

Stations. reduced to Stations. reduced to

sea level. sea level.

ie Saugor Island............| 29°977 || Chittagong ............] 29°953

See Point...............| 29°983 || Akyab .............se0. | 29°930

ie Vizagapatam ............ 29°976 Diamond Island ...... 29°930

| UMTS. 5 ccs veesve cee ces 29°983 PLOULMNGIN , cs osc eomeches 29°928

| Negapatam ............... 29°978 Port Blair ¢.i3.44..4% 29°936

The differences of pressure along the west coast were much smaller

than on the 7th, and pressure was very approximately uniform. It was

slightly lower at the east coast stations, but, even there, the differences

were extremely small.

The following table gives the 10 a.m. observations at stations in

the neighbourhood of the area in which the storm was generated :—

3 |os dua ie loud

22 |22 || winadirection. (7 22 S18 |S 5

wae [PSS pe iejeee:

Stations. [fF .5 |, 7° 8 go 3\@ “\3 S| Weather.

| p< 3'o/m~ 314 c SB Poel |e wp

} QE 5|go¢ [04M 4m ee eee ele a2

| S S fea ale “ia

- ie) ie)

™ Nancowry...... 29°922 |— 021) S. W. 7 10 | 1:14

= ort Blair...... 29°936 |— ‘009/W. S. W./W. S 5 9 | 018

; Diamond Island| 29°930 |— ‘040| EH. 8. E. 8 13 10 | 2°35 | Thunder.

Me Akyab ......... 29°930 |—-045| 8.8. B.| ? 2 6 | 016

- Chittagong ...| 29°953 |— ‘041; N. |E.S. EH. 1 vo ea

) oungoo ...... 29°980 |+ 011) S.W..| S.E. | ? pe

a) Bassein ......... 29°941 |— ‘036, §S. EH. |8.S.E. 4 10 |} 0°10

= ‘Rangoon ....... 29°965 |— 039} KH. S.S. K. 2 10 | 0°41 | Showery.

io Moulmein ...... 29°928 |— 080} S. HK. N. W. 2 7 ... | Thunder.

> Mergui ......... 29965 |+ -009| EE. S. 2 |10| 0-25

138 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

The information relating to the meteorology of the Bay on the 8th |

is given in the following table :—

s |% . 5 Winds.

Vessels. |Hour.| %,- ‘be [os & REMARKS.

2A FE is oo :

= 5 |23%| Dir. | Force.

J — ne oA

Mount Stuart/4 A.M. S. to W.| 2to3 | Sea smooth. Passing

showers during day.

Noon |12° 17/92° 00’|29°925 1 to 2 Heavy black clouds

all round, with mo-

4P.M. W toSE. 1 mentary puffs from

N. W., and smart

Midnt. W toNW| 2 to4 showers towards mid-

night. There was

lightning in the N. W.

during the morning.

Midnight. Weather

was a little squally.

Scottish Hill | Noon |12° 31°/89° 25/29°920| E. to W. 1 | Light airs and calms.

4P.M. O | Wind very variable.

8 P.M. 0 | Sky dull lead colour.

Midnt. 29°900 1

Kwang Tung /|4A.M. 29°901| N. W. 2

8 A.M. 19926) N. W. 2

Noon [15° 11/] 92° 6’| °893) N. W. 2 | Smooth sea.

4P.M ‘901| N. W. | 4 tod

8 P.M. °871| N. W. do

Midnt "903; N. W. do

Frank Staf- |44.M. NW by N 2 | Fine weather, smooth

ford. sea.

8 A.M. North. 2 | Very sharp lightning

Noon |20° 16’/90° 28’|29'975 IN. N. W. 2 in the S. E. during

8 P.M. oN, W. 1 the night.

Midnt. N. N. W. 0

Breadalbane | Noon |21° 00’/88° 18’|29°975| N. Sunrise. Moderate

, breeze from N., dying

away in the afternoon

to a calm.

Parthenope | Noon | 21° 2’ |88° 52/29:975| N.W. | gentle. | a. m. Light breeze,

Midnt.

N. by E.

fine and clear. 8 A. M.

Moderate breeze and

hazy. Noon. Less

wind, current setting

west. 4 Pp. M. Light

airs. 8 p. M. Calm.

Midnight. Gentle

breeze and clear.

a wd By Oca ‘ i

; Sane : »

« * .

all * y

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 139

The Nancowry returns prove that the south-west winds in the neigh-

-bouring part of the Bay began to increase in strength. The sky was

overcast during the day, and 1:14 inches of rain were registered for the

24 hours preceding 1 p.m. The wind during the previous night had

shifted round to W. 8S. W. at Port Blair, and blew steadily during the day,

_and somewhat more strongly than on either of the previous two days. The

_ sky had clouded over, and rain in small amounts began to fall. 18 inch

_ was recorded at 4 Pp. M.

The weather was slightly disturbed in South Burmah. Passing

_ showers fell during the day, and thunderstorms occurred in one or two

cases. LEast-south-east winds set in at Diamond Island and at Rangoon.

In the interior of Burmah, winds were not so steady as they had been

previously. The sky was overcast at Mergui, winds were light and

variable, and veered from east to south during the day.

The prevalence of S. W. winds at Port Blair and Nancowry, and of

_ K.and §S. E. winds at the Burmah stations, shews that there was on this

day no well-defined cyclonic circulation, or centre of large disturbance, in

the Martaban Gulf.

The logs of the vessels in the Bay for the day indicate that similar

conditions obtained to those of the preceding day.

The Frank Stafford, Parthenope, and Breadalbane were at the Head

_ of the Bay near the entrance to the Hooghly. They experienced fine

weather, light winds and calms, and a smooth sea. The Kwang Tung

had steamed to the north-west during the previous 24 hours, and was

in Lat. 15° 11’ N. and Long. 92° 6’ E. at noon. Her log shows that

there was no perceptible current in this part of the Bay at this time,

an almost conclusive proof of the absence of any strong atmospheric

cyclonic circulation in the neighbourhood. The ships Mount Stuart and

_ Scottish Hill were a little to the west of the Andamans. The former

was in Lat. 12° 17’ N. and Long. 92° H. Her log states that the sea

was smooth, but that the weather was becoming unsettled. She began

to experience puffs or slight squalls from the north-west. The sky

_ during the day was covered with dense black clouds, and occasional

showers fell, which became heavier and “smarter” as the day advanced.

The winds were very variable, veering from 8. through W. thence to S. H.

and back to W. and N. W. The log of the Scottish Hill, which was

about 180 miles to the west of the Mount Stuart, gives similar informa-

tion. The winds were very light and variable, veering round the

compass, the sky was heavily clouded, and the weather dull and gloomy.

Hence the various observations indicate the continuance and slight

. development of the conditions which, according to our experience of the

meteorology of the Bay, precede the formation of cyclonic storms. On

the other hand, they give no evidence of the existence at this time of a

140 J. Ehiot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2, —

cyclonic circulation in the Martaban Gulf. South-westerly winds were

increasing in force over the south-east of the Bay, and were being con-

tinued much further north than is usual in the month of November. To

the west of the Andamans, winds were exceedingly light and variable,

and such as to show that the south-west winds advancing north-

wards were not being continued in that direction near the earth’s surface.

The clouding over of the sky, the commencement of showers increasing

in intensity and accompanied with slight squalls, indicate clearly that

ascensional movement on a large scale was commencing over that area,

and giving rise to its usual result when it is partly fed and maintained

by a moist current, namely, rainfall increasing in intensity, which, by a

known law of rainfall, tends to become concentrated over a limited area.

9th November.—There are no new features of interest in the mete-

orology of the Indian land area. Pressure continued to give way in all

parts of India. The decrease was greatest in Sind, Rajputana, and the

Punjab. The area of barometric depression over the Indus valley was

now very distinctly marked. It had as yet exercised no marked

influence in the weather of Upper India. The winds were, however,

drawing round in the Punjab and neighbouring districts, and indicated

a feeble cyclonic air circulation over Upper India. The ascensional

movement which necessarily accompanied it, had not given rise to the

formation of cloud, except over the North-Western Himalayas.

Over the whole of Bengal and the North-Western and Central Pro-

vinces, the air motion was very slight, averaging only 1 to 2 miles per hour.

In Southern India the weather conditions were unchanged. Cloudy

skies continued in the Madras Presidency, and a few occasional showers

of no importance were received.

The observations at the coast stations of the Bay of Bengal present

the same features as hitherto. The baric gradients were apparently

normal in direction, but somewhat smaller than usual, and the differences

of pressure comparatively small. The most important feature was the

weakness of the north-easterly winds on the Coromandel coast. This is

shown by the following statement :—

Amount of wind Average daily

in miles per hour, amount of wind

Rinisone. since 10 a. M. | (miles per hour)

previous day. | in November.

Vizagapatam .....0.cscsncerecsersoveseses ses 2 2°5

Masilipatam ......2nnwdaa spain chan tenets te 2 6°0

MBATAS ” oca..nn cov nus sectteseheeanat teens ane nan 5) 6°38

Negapatam sa AOE 3 5°6

Prichinepoly ... ..021..04. silenanenee Oe enen 1 46

Madduri... . i203. 3 4°]

GM AAs ieee ee: C4 Se Lee — _

Meee fw ee ‘ .

he | ,

: :

f 1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 141

; The information respecting the weather in the Bay is as hitherto

‘meagre.

The following are the observations taken at the land observatories in

_ the neighbourhood of the cyclonic disturbance :—

ar F. 7

aig 5 Wind direction. 8 ve =| a

Sig | ee. | —____|bys alg |

Stations. [4$ as od > Bates Weather

a 4o4 a<¢7 10 a.m.| 4P. mM SS Selon

2268) £28 Pa Ese

oa a a) oO

Nancowry ...... 29°897 | —°025 | S. W. S. W. 8

Port Blair...... 29°894 | —-042 W. = |W.S. W. 7 Gloomy.

Diamond Island| 29°900 | —:‘030 | E.S.E.|E.S. E. 10 Fine.

Chittagong ...| 29°921 | — ‘032 | E.N.EH.|N. N. W. 1 Fine.

Tounghoo ...... 29°873?| —:107?| N. W. | N. W. ? Thunder

3 storm

Bassein ......... 29°924 | —‘017 |E.S8.H.| S.E. 5 Gloomy

Rangoon ...... 29°942 | —‘023 | E.8. E./S. 8. EH. dt: Showery

Moulmein ...... 29:898 | —'030 | N. KE. |E.S. E. 2 Showery

Srereui ........3 29:995?} + -030?/S. S. H./S.S. EH. 2 Gloomy

The Nancowry returns shew that a fall of ‘03’ had occurred in the

barometer. The winds were slightly stronger, but were only blowing

with an average velocity of 8 miles per hour, the normal rate at that

station in November. The sky was overcast, and rain continued to fall

in moderate amounts. 2°02 inches were registered for the 24 hours pre-

ceding 10 a. m.

Heavy rain was apparently falling at this time to the north-east of

the Nicobars and to the east of the Andamans. There is no direct evidence

of this statement. The first indications, however, of cyclonic motion are

presented by the Port Blair observations of this day. The barometer was

falling at that station, the sky was, as on the 8th, densely clouded, and

heavy rain began to fall in the afternoon and evening. The wind shifted

- round to west at 104. m.andto W.S. W.at4 p.m. On the opposite

7 coast of the Martaban Gulf, the sky was overcast, but little rain fell. In

, South Burmah, the weather was fine with passing clouds, which gave

occasional showers. The sea was slight at Diamond Island. Hence the

evidence is fairly complete that there was, as on the 8th, no definite cyclonic

circulation, although there were slight indications of its commencement.

The shift of wind at Port Blair, and the occurrence of rainfall with

squalls to the west of it, render it almost certain that the usual actions,

which initiate the formation of an atmospheric whirl on a large scale,

were now commencing. The meteorology of the 10th will show that

the formation probably proceeded slowly during the afternoon and night

ef the 9th, but afterwards with increasing rapidity.

142 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2, |

The meteorological information relating to the weather in the Bay

of Bengal on the 9th, extracted from the logs of vessels, is tabulated

below :—

3 < i E Winds.

Vessel. Hour. z tic = ro 8 REMARKS.

3 5 |£36!. Dir Force

4 | Bro Ff

—

Scottish Hill | Noon | 18° 1’ !89° 42’29°920| N. W. 1 | Light airs and calms.

4.P.M. . 0 | Very sultry, clouds in

light masses.

8 P.M. NN. W: O | Sky dull lead colour.

Midnt. “B90; ~~“ W. 2

Mount Stuart} Noon | 18° 8’ | 92° 2’ |29°875 O |Sky overcast with

heavy clouds all

8 P.M. N.E. | 1t03 round. Weather un-

settled. There was —

Midnt. HK. 8. E.; 1 to 2 a good deal of light-

ning in the sky this

morning and towards

midnight, mostly in

the N. W. Midnight.

Weather showery.

Kwang Tung /4 A. M. 29°924| N. EH. 5

8 A.M. O41). OT. Hi. 5 | Current during the 24

Noon |17° 37/190° 20'| -936| N. E. 5 | hours, 8.12°E.15 miles,

4P.M. *883| N. E. 5 | Sea smooth.

8 P.M. -856| N. 5

Midnt. 891] N. HE. 5

Satara ...... Noon | Anchojred [{29°950} E. by N. 2 | Light breeze and fine

at Go}paul- clear weather.

4P.M.| pore|Roads.| °840 1 | Light airs and fine.

8 P.M. *880 avd 1

Midnt. ‘870 |N Eby E 3 | Gentle breeze and fine. —

Frank Staf- |4A.M. 2 2

ford. 8 A.M. i 2 | Fine and smooth sea.

Noon |21° 03’|90° 10’|29°935 0

4P.M. ri 2

Parthenope | Noon| Nearjthe |29°930;} N. |Moderate| a. m. Light breeze

Sand) heads. and clear. Noon.

Moderate breeze and |

hazy.

Breadalbane | Noon | Near|the |29°935 N. Calms and light airs ©

Sand) heads. from north through-

out.

4PM. N. 1 | Sea smooth and smart

showers in the latter

8 P.M. Calm. 0 part of the day.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 143

_ The Parthenope and Breadalbane, near the Sand Heads, had light

airs and calms during the day. The ship Frank Stafford (in Lat. 21° 3’ N.

Long. 90° 10’ E.) experienced gentle northerly winds with fine weather

and a smooth sea.

The 8. 8. Kwang Tung had advanced 200 miles to the N. W., and

_ was at noon in Lat. 17° 37’ N. and Long. 90° 20’ E. She experienced

steady north-east winds of moderate force (5) during the day. The

ships Mount Stuart and Scottish Hill were proceeding very slowly up

the Bay, and had only made about 50 miles during the 24 hours preceding

noon. The former was in Lat. 13° 8’ N. and Long. 92° 2’ E., and ex-

_perienced similar weather to that of the preceding day. The sea was

smooth as hitherto. The sky was covered with dense clouds, and heavy

_ showers fell, more especially in the afternoon. The Scottish Hill was in

_ the same latitude, but 160 miles further to the west. She had calms during

the greater part of the day. The weather was very sultry. The air was

apparently almost saturated with moisture. The sky was covered with

clouds, and had an ominous appearance suggestive of bad weather.

| The observations of the 9th shew that no atmospheric whirl had

been initiated as yet in the Gulf of Martaban. Several of the con-

ditions necessary for the formation of a cyclonic disturbance were pre-

sent. Winds were light and variable over a considerable portion of the

Bay. A strong humid current was advancing over the south of the Bay

into the Gulf of Martaban, and was giving moderately heavy rain in

the neighbourhood of the Andamans and Nicobars. The rainfall had

hitherto been too diffused to initiate a large cyclonic disturbance. It

_ was, however, increasing in amount, and becoming more concentrated in

character, the one additional condition now apparently required for the

establishment of a large atmospheric whirl.

-—«:10th November.—During the previous 24 hours, a further barome-

trie fall occurred throughout the greater part of India. The fall was not

so general ason the 8th and 9th, and was much smaller in amount.

_ Pressure was very considerably below the normal over the whole coun-

try. The distribution of pressure was generally similar to that which

~ obtained on the morning of the 9th. The area of lowest pressure in-

- eluded the south-western districts of the Punjab and Rajputana, over

which there was a distinctly marked cyclonic circulation of the air. In

the south of the Punjab, cloud had formed toa considerable extent, whilst,

in the north-western Himalayas, thunder-storms with rain had oceur-

red over the lower ranges, and snow had fallen on the higher ranges.

In the North West Provinces, Bengal, the Central Provinces, Central

India, Bombay, and the northern districts of Madras, the sky was, as

it had been for some time, clear, and the weather fine and settled, but un-

aide

144 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

usually dry for the season. The sky was clouded on the Madras coast,

but rain had now ceased to fall, as is shewn by the data given in the table

on p. 130. The winds on the Madras coast were approximately normal

in direction, varying between N. and N. N. W., but were unusually weak.

Hence the effect of the deflexion of the south-west monsoon cur-

rent from its usual course at this time, which had been previously indi-

cated by the light winds experienced by the Mount Stuart and Scottish

Hill to the west of the Andamans, had now extended across the centre of

the Bay to the Coromandel coast, over the whole of which area light

unsteady winds were blowing. Pressure was very uniform round the

north and west coasts of the Bay, as is shown by the following :—

Saugor Island ............ 29°929 | Vizagapatam = ..:.............. 29°957

PAINS POG vesaccesccce.ses0e 2 EO OOL | MBOTAR "5... cee... cote

The following table gives the observations at the land stations for

the day -— :

fe = 8 Wind direction. [6 O-3 |@ |B 2

a3 | 86 Bae |2 [8

eee Lee a! et chm Pi Bias

Stations. be he Abas Ss] & 3] Weather.

on Oo oc ia + Bic aaa

Say | =e] 1lOam.| 4pm. [5 , * alo AIS a4

oom Bike Soy S2OB|BO|z x

Rda| S40 gas Olomld aa

—Q (@) > >) fom

Nancowtry ...... 29°856 | —°041 | S. W. S. W. 8 9 | 1:16 | Showery.

Port Blair...... 29°850 | —°044 |N.N.W.|W. N. W. sy, 8 | 0°30 Gloomy.

Diamond Island 29°917 + ‘017 | E.S.E.| E.S.E. 12 10 | 0°65 | Gloomy.

Chittagong ...| 29:915|—-006| ON. | N. Ww. T4'@ Fine,

Tounghoo...... 29°'905?| + °032?| N. W. | N. W. ? 10 | 0°22 | Gloomy.

Bassein ......... 29°917 | —°007 | N.E. | S8.S. 4, 10 | 0°18 | Overcast.

Rangoon ...... 29'920 | —-022| N.E. | B.S. E. 4 8 | 0°85 | Showery.

Moulmein...... 29°871 | —°027 |E.N.E.| S., E. 2 8 ... |Showery

Mergui, ...+-,.-: 29°868?} —°127?|H. S. E. E. 1 10 | 0°65 | Gloomy.

The preceding observations establish that a considerable fall of

the barometer had taken place during the previous 24 hours. The fall —

amounted to ‘04’ at Nancowry and Port Blair, ‘03’ at Moulmein, and ~

02" at Rangoon, and was greatest at Port Blair. Westerly winds

of the same average strength as on the 9th had prevailed during the

—-:1884.] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 145

‘previous 24 hours at Nancowry. The sky was densely clouded and mode-

rate rain was falling. 1:16 inches of rain were registered at 10 a.m. At

Port Blair, the wind had shifted round to north-west, but was not as yet

blowing strongly. Rain was falling, but the amount registered up to

10 4.m. of the 10th was small. In South Burmah; the sky had become

overcast, and the weather gloomy and threatening, more especially at

Diamond Island and Toungoo. less rain, however, fell on the Burmah

coast than had been received on the previous day. It thus again appears

probable, if not certain, that the rainfall was becoming more concentrated

over a smaller area than hitherto, a favourable, if not a necessary, condi-

tion, according to the condensation theory, for the development of an

atmospheric whirl.

These observations also show that cyclonic circulation had been

initiated, and was now established over the centre and north of the Gulf

of Martaban, and the adjacent part of the Bay; and that the central de-

pression or centre of disturbance, as determined by the fall of the baro-

meter, the amount of rain, and the velocity of the wind, was nearest to

Port Blair, and to the east of it.

Hence it is evident that, although the conditions for the formation

of a whirl had been present for some days, it was only on the 10th that

the meteorological observations at the nearest land stations gave clear

indications of its existence.

The information contained in the meteorological abstracts from the

logs of vessels is tabulated below :—

Ca eae Winds

Vessel. |Hour.| eo | ej Sue REMARKS.

+ of ao 0

3 & |28%!| pir. | Force

Se) |e &

Scottish Hill | 4 a.m. N. 1 | Light airs and calms.

i A.M. N. EK. 1 | Winds very variable.

s. Noon !13° 31'\89° 40’,29°910| N. W. 1 | Light airs and calms.

S 4 P.M. WNW 2 | Squally and dirty.

z 8 P.M. NN. Bi 3 | Arched rain squalls.

7 Midnt. ‘890| N. W. 3

Mount Stuart} 4. M. N. E. | ltoO |Sea moderate with

light westerly swell.

8 A.M. ios 3 to 4 Light fleecy clouds.

Lightning in the N.W.

¢ Noon |13° 55’191° 81’|29°865!__... is Towards the after-

noon, weather began

4 P.M. sei 4 to be squally. At

sunset, sharp squalls

8 P.M. ‘805 vee bee and squally -looking

all round. Midnight.

Midnt. K.byN.|__... Showery.

146 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

: © 2

Vessel. = o REMARKS.

Satara ...... _M. 29'870|N. N. E. Fresh breeze and fine.

940) BH. N.E. Moderate breeze & fine.

17° 56/\88° 45’) °890 |NE by E. Fresh breeze and fine

throughout. Current

during previous 24

hours, north 4 miles.

4 | Moderate breeze and

fine.

2 | Light breeze and fine

clear weather.

2 |Same wind and weather,

Kwang Tung 5

8 A.M *899) oN 4

Noon |20° 00’\88° 49’ °920| N. 38 |Current S. 32° EK.

24 miles.

4P.M. “GD. |..-.2N= 3 | Sea smooth.

8 P.M. 904} Calm.

Midnt. °934| Calm.

Frank Staf- |4 a.m. NaN. W, 2 |

ford. Noon |21° 16189° 20'}29°915 2 | Fine, and smooth sea. |

Midnt 2 | Lightning during the |

night.

Chanda ...... Noon | HughllyRiver|29°910 | E.N. E. 2 |

4P.M. *830| EH. N. EH. 4,

8 P.M. *870| Calm.

Midnt. ‘910| E. 2 ;

Mahratta ... |4 P.M. | Passing Sau-|29°820 E. 2 | Fine weather. ;

gor {Island

8 P.M. “900 0 | Clear sky but slightly

Midnt. "920 | N. N.E. 2 hazy.

Parthenope | Noon 29°915 N. A.M. Light breeze and

hazy weather.

4p.M.|Passin'g Sau- Calm. Pp. M. Wind unsteady

gor |Island. with gusts and calms.

Midnight. Wind .

north and light.

1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 147

The observations given in the ships’ logs, although not numerous,

confirm the information of the land observations given above.

The Frank Stafford and Kwang Tung, north of Lat. 20° N. and near

the Head of the Bay, met with light northerly winds or calms and a smooth

sea. The Mount Stuart and Scottish Hill were passing very slowly up

the Bay at this time. The former was in Lat. 13° 56’ N. and Long 91°

31’ E., and observed several of the evidences of cyclonic formation in

its neighbourhood. The area of heavy rainfall, as already noticed, had

contracted. This explains the fact mentioned in her log that in the

morning there were only a few light clouds in the sky. The weather,

however, rapidly changed during the day, and became squally in the after-

noon. Sharp squalls were experienced at sunset. The barometer was also

falling rather rapidly. Winds were from north, and increased in strength

from 1 to 4 during the day, indicating the rapid increase of indraught.

The Scottish Hill was 120 miles further to the west, and had winds

ranging between N. KH. and N. W. during the day. They were very

light and variable during the earlier part of the day, but the weather be-

came squally towards the evening, and arched rain squalls passed over

the ship at 8 ep. M. The Satara, which was passing from Gopalpore

to Rangoon, was in Lat. 17° 56’ N. and Long. 88° 45’ E. at noon. The

winds varied during the day between N. N. HE. and E. N. E., but

decreased in strength during the afternoon. She experienced light

breezes and fine clear weather throughout the day. The Chanda and

Marhatta left Saugor in the evening, and had fine weather and a clear

sky.

Hence, except in the neighbourhood of the Andamans, weather was

fine. A definite cyclonic circulation had been established to the east of

the Andamans between 10 a. mu. of the 9th and 10 a. m. of the 10th.

The area of rainfall had for some time contracted, and the rainfall had

intensified over the diminished area. Winds of indraught had hence

been established, and were increasing in force. This proceeded slowly at

first, but, during the evening of the 10th and morning of the 11th, it went

on more rapidly, and there was a perfectly well-defined cyclonic circulation,

or large atmospheric whirl, established in that part of the Bay on the

morning of the 11th November.

11th November.—During the previous 24 hours the barometer had

risen rapidly over Northern and Central India. The increase of pressure

was due to the filling up of the depression in the Punjab and neigh-

bouring districts. The rise of the barometer at Peshawar and Rawal

Pindi was ‘2”. The depression had given a large amount of rain over

the Punjab, and stormy weather over the north-west Himalayas, on the

higher parts of which much snow had fallen. Amongst the heaviest rain-

148 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

falls during the previous 24 hours were the following :—Simla 2°15

inches, Peshawar 1°22 inches, and Rawal Pindi 1°20 inches.

The sky was overcast, and the weather unusually cold, in Upper

India. The winds over a large part of Northern India continued to in«

dicate feeble cyclonic circulation about a centre in the north-eastern dis-

tricts of Sind. Over the whole of Bombay (excluding Sind), Bengal,

the Central Provinces, and Central India, the weather was fine, skies

cloudless, and the winds blowing from the usual quarter.

Round the coast of the Bay, from Saugor Island to Madras, the

differences of pressure were unusually small. The following statement

gives the 10 a. m. reduced readings at the more important stations :—

RSBGOr LSLATIG Oo pe spas qe nes ons pve enandncennarsneresss eee

Tia 0. OUD © x ce Naei xn pee olson highaiant-oee ate cae oh Sony, eee

WW UES DAL, 5 cn ates Hoc chop cn bin'tin's ne vip siein esse ba ee a

WI PIEER TS &, « ocxs 10s iets hase nipsenp ene vedenceaacys amet ee eee

The winds at the Bengal stations near the Head of the Bay blew

from directions between north and north-east, the easterly component

being probably due to the cyclonic circulation in the middle of the Bay.

They were very light. On the Madras coast, the winds were not only

more northerly than usual, but were unusually feeble. The data are

given in the following table :—

Amount of wind! Daily average

in miles per |amountof wind

Stations. hour since 10 |(miles per hour)

A. M. previous | of November.

day.

Vizagapatam.....ccccscsssssesseeeeseeeeesenns 1 2°5

Masulipatam ......cccessseeeeecesesenssconans 3 6:0

Madras ...ssscsccccceccscevecsvars ses seecanoes 4) 6°8

Negapatam cicccscssesecceeesereceeeeeeneees 2 56

Salem 2 3°6

Madura 2 Ar

Over the Coromandel coast, the weather was fine with passing

clouds, and rain had entirely ceased.

1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 149

. The following table gives the observations taken at the recording

='9 = 8 Wind direction. | 9 ot a ote

2 os Fe AO |x as,

ase | ge Be Bein ho 1B

ok eas

Stations. 8 ao | ae we 5 am g is RE Weather.

a e oO. iar 'O er — n °

g = oe | lam.) 4PM. (8, ~ alg tS ad

B48 | gic Bee Bese as

= 2) > DS |

29°8386 | —‘020 | S. W. S. W. 12 7 | 2°90 | Fine.

29°760 | — ‘090 iW. N. W.|W. S. W. 8 9 | 3:90 | Overcast

and rain.

Diamond Island| 29°848 ; — ‘069 | EH. N. H.|H. N. 4H. 12 19 |, dria

Chittagong ...| 29918 | + ‘003 | N.E. |W.N.W. 1 3 Fine.

Toungoo ...... 29'860 | —°045 | N.W. | N.w. [| ? | 10 Gloomy.

Bassein ......... 29°861 | — ‘056 | N.N.E.| N.N.E. 5 | 10] 1:24 | Overcast.

Rangoon ...... 29°913 | —‘007 | N. EH. | N.E. 5 9 | 0°04 | Showery.

Moulmein ...... 29855 | —016| N. |E.S.E. 2 | 8! 0°03 | Fine.

CEE .....0... 29°884 | + 016 | E.S. H. K. 3 | 10] 1°30 | Overcast.

These observations show that the barometer had fallen considerably

at Port Blair, and to a less extent at Nancowry and Diamond Island.

The cause of this is also evident from the observations. Heavy rain had

fallen at Port Blair and the neighbourhood. Port Blair registered 3-9

inches at 10 a.m., Nancowry 2°90 inches, and Diamond Island 1:12 inches.

The rainfall on the Burmese coast was smaller than on the previous

day. Hence the evidence indicates that the rainfall was more concen-

trated than hitherto, and was falling mainly over an area near to and

including Port Blair. This is confirmed by the fact that cyclonic cir-

culation of the air was now fully established. Winds were 8. W. at Nan-

cowry, HE. 8S. H.at Mergui, EH. N. H. at Diamond Island, and W. N. W. at

Port Blair. They were increasing in force rapidly, but were as yet of

moderate strength. The wind directions indicate that the centre of the

cyclonic circulation was to the east-north-east of Port Blair. It is not

possible to infer its position with any approach to exactness from the

_ observations, but we are probably not far from the truth in placing it in

Lat. 13° 30’ N. and Long. 94° 15’ K.

As the vessels which have contributed meteorological data were all

to the west and north of the Andamans, they only furnish information

——

150 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

of the weather in the outer portion of the north-west quadrant of the

cyclonic circulation.

The following table gives the whole of the information contained

in their logs respecting the weather in the Bay on the 11th :—

5 Oe j

= 3 | Winds.

3 ao) o2 .

Vessel. |Hour.| #2 | ‘ha re) oH REMARKS.

3 § |e S | Dir Force

4 A gS =|

Scottish Hill |4 a.m. Dirty rain squalls.

8 A.M. N. E. 4 | No sea.

Noon {14° 08'/90° 33’\29°850| 4 ae rain squalls and

hail.

4P.M. N.W. 5 |Cloudy, gloomy sky.

6P.M. Heavy swell

from N. E.

8P.M NN. W 2 |Scud from N. KE. and

N.N. E.

Midnt °870| N 5 | Wind shifting in squalls.

Mount Stuart] 4 a.m. E.N.E. | 2to3 |A.M. Moderate in the

' first part of the day

8 A.M. HE. by N. Towards night, a

heavy swell from EK.

Noon |15° 30’/91° 06’|29°820 |NNEtoE| 3 to 5 by N. Thick heavy

rain most of the day.

Overcast heavy sky

all round, and dark

gloomy weather.

Bent storm sails at

2 Pp. M. and kept

Midnt. N. by W.|Squally.| away south, as wea-

ther was looking very

bad. Heavy swell

from EH. N. E. at

midnight.

Byculla ...... 4A.M. 29°880| N. EH. Lk Moderate

breeze and squally.

8 A. M. Overcast and

squally with heavy |

rain.

| Noon. Moderatebreeze

and overcast, with

threatening appear-

ance and rising

sea. 4 P. M. Strong

breeze and overcast,

Midnt. “740 nS with frequent hard

squalls. 8p.m. Strong

freshening _ breeze,

with hard squalls and

rising sea. Midnight.

Moderate gale and

heavy squalls.

8a.M. ‘890 | E. N. E.

as a

Noon |16° 00’\91° 10’| *840

42. M. “770

8 P.M. ‘770

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883.

151

Se | Brats & Winds.

Hour.| 84 Foe] Bie es REMARKS.

Solin a8 3 Dir Fore

eT re = ie F - e.

4A.M 29°800| N.E 4. |4A.M. Moderate breeze

and overcast sky,

8A.M °850| N.E 5 with passing squalls

. of wind. 8 A. M.

Noon |16° 35’|92° 09’| *800/H.N. B. 6 Fresh breeze, sky

cloudy and overcast.

4P.M ‘740 | E.N. E. 6 Squally appearance.

Black bank of clouds

8P.M ~ *800 K. 6 rising to the Kast.

; 104.m A gale of

Midnt "780 | E. by N. 6 wind from N. KE.

11.4. mM. Wind moder-

ating. Noon. Strong

head. wind and moun-

tainous sea. Shipping

large quantities of

water, vessel pitching

and rolling. 4 P.M.

Strong breeze and

heavy sea, with severe

squalis of wind, and

‘ incessant rain. 8 P.M.

to midnight. Same

weather continued.

ae Noon. |16°30’?/92° 0’? N..E. | 4to5 | Weather overcast.

Bancoora ... | 44. M. 29:902| KH. 2

8 A. M.. "929; N. E 3

Noon |17° 19’\85° 44") -887| N.E 4 |Moderate wind and

fine..

4 P.M. 838) N. N. E. 4.

8 P.M ‘867 |NE.byN. a

Midnt.. °840|N.N.E.. 4

Chanda ...... 4.A4.M. 29°830| N. E. 2 | Hazy..

8 A.M. "920 |N.N. E. 4

Noon |18° 56’/90° 30’| -920' N.N, E. 4 |Current N. 23° EK.

0°5 mile per hour.

N. E. to

4:P.M. 750| S. E. 2

8 P.M. ‘770 Variable. 4 |At short intervals,

heavy squalls from

! S.E

| S. E. to

Midnt. ‘770 | E. by 8. 5 | Heavy squalls from the

eastward.

152 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

s |g |F& Winds

A ne he te OP

Vessel. |Hour.| 27 | Hiei [So § REMARKS.

E 8 Bs q Dir Force

A a

Aviat (2380)! Noon /18° 53’|84° 39° N. E. Moderate wind, clear

weather.

Mahratta ... |4A.M. 29:860| N.N. EH. 4

8 A.M. "920 4

Noon 21° 16’90° 35’, °940 4, | Fine weather, smooth

sea, and clear sky

4P.M "800. N. 3 throughout.

8P.M. ‘870 3

Midnt. ‘900 2

The Satara, Byculla, Mount Stuart, and Scottish Hill were now in

directions varying between N. N. W. and W.N. W. from the centre and at

approximately the same distance, 250 miles. The Satara was in Lat. 16°

35’ N. Long. 92° 9’ E. by account at noon, and proceeding eastwards to

Rangoon, LHarly in the morning, the weather was fine with moderate

breezes. Occasional squalls of wind passed over the vessel. The

weather became rapidly worse after 8 a.m. A heavy and dark bank of

clouds appeared in the east, and at 10 a. m.a gale of wind blew from

north-east. The sea rose very rapidly. During the afternoon and

evening, the vessel experienced strong easterly winds with frequent heavy

squalls, incessant rain, and a heavy sea. The Satara was not only

approaching the centre, but was crossing its line of motion in front.

Hence the very rapid change of weather which she experienced during

the afternoon.

The Byculla was about 70 miles to the W. 8S. W. of the Satara at

noon in Lat. 16’ N. and Long. 91° 10’ EK. Her positions, as obtained by

observation and dead reckoning, agree so closely as to show that there was,

no strong current in the northern and western quadrants of the cyclone,

and hence that the position assigned to the Satara by account is probably

approximately correct. The Byculla was advancing in almost the same

track as the Satara, and gives a similar account of the weather. The

morning began with moderate breezes and occasional squalls. The sky

clouded over about 8 a. m., and heavy rain fell. The winds increased in

force, and frequent hard squalls passed over the ship.

1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 153

The Log of the ship Mount Stuart, which was in Lat. 15° 30’ N. and

Long. 91° 6’ E. at noon, states that the sky was overcast, weather dark

and gloomy, and so threatening at 2 p. mM. that the Captain changed her

course and kept away south. The Scottish Hill was 100 miles to the south-

south-west in Lat. 14° 8’ N. and Long. 90° 33’ E. at noon. The sky was

overcast, and frequent heavy rain squalls passed over the ship. A heavy

swell from the north-east came up during the day. The weather over

the north-east of the Bay is described in the logs of the Chanda, Bancoora,

and Mahratta. The Bancoora, in Lat. 17° 19' N. and Long. 85° 44! E. at

noon, had fine weather and moderate north-easterly winds of force vary-

ing from 2 to 4 during the day. The Chanda, in Lat. 18° 56’ N.

and Long. 90° 30’ KH. at noon, had fine weather with a hazy at-

mosphere, and light to moderate north-east winds. She was proceeding

to Rangoon, and steaming directly towards the northern quadrant of the

cyclone. Late in the evening, she began to experience squally weather

and variable winds. Frequent heavy rain squalls came up from south-

east and east after 8 p.m. The Mahratta proceeding from Chittagong to

Calcutta, and the light vessels at the entrance to the Hooghly, had fine

weather, clear skies, and a smooth sea throughout the whole day.

The meteorological data hence shew conclusively that, during the

24: hours preceding 10 a. m. of the 11th, a definite cyclonic circulation of

considerable intensity had been established to the west of the Andamans,

the centre of which at noon of the 11th was probably in Lat. 13° 30’ N.

and Long. 94° 15’ KE. Heavy rain was falling over and near the centre,

winds increased considerably in force during the day, the sea rose rapidly,

and gave rise to a heavy swell extending to a distance of three or four

hundred miles from the centre. The very rapid changes which had been

initiated by the cyclonic motion are indicated very clearly by the weather

experienced by the Satara.,

12th November.—The barometric changes of the preceding 24 hours

were irregular. This was in part due to the continuance of unsettled

weather in Upper India. The depression which had formed on the 9th

| and 10th was filling up, and its existence was chiefly shewn on the

_ morning of the 12th by cyclonic circulation of the air in Sind, and the

_ adjacent districts of Rajputana. A smaller depression had, however,

formed in the south-eastern districts of the Punjab, the centre of which.

was at or near Lahore. This was shown by a slight fall of the barome-

ter at Lahore and the neighbouring stations. The barometer had con-

tinued to rise rapidly over the greater part of the Punjab, Rajputana,

and the Central Provinces, and over the whole of Central and Southern

India. A rapid fall had occurred in Burmah, and a slight one in Bengal,

due to the development and extension of the atmospheric whirl in the

neighbourhood of the Andamans.

154 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

In Upper India, skies were more or less clouded in the area of the

small depression, and rain fell during the day over nearly the whole of

the Punjab, and the western distriets of the North Western Provinees. In

Bengal, the Central Provinces, Bombay, and Madras, skies were generally

clear, weather fine, and winds light. Skies were overcast in Southern

Burmah, and rain was generally falling.

Over the west coast of the Bay, pressure was remarkably uniform,

the isobar of 29°95 being, in fact, almost identical with the coast line.

The winds on the Coromandel coast were stronger than they were on the

previous day, but were below their normal force. This is shown by the

following statement :—

Amount of wind

in miles per | Daily average

Stations. hour since 10 |amount of wind

A. M. previous per hour.

day.

Wika Ga pabate ei. ote. fo. Vales thee sae 2 2°5

Cacomadal Als emaeett e365. ead 6 9°0

Masalipatare -.. gud. veneer s<ide te obs on owe 2 6°0

PU is 05 05/8, sae eatilen «<p PMR EEG > n+ = oe see 5) 6°8

Negapatam 4) 56

oo) eit ie RR, Se aa 2 3°6

pu). ee eee, ae 4, Ar}

The following are the observations taken at the stations affected by

the cyclonic depression :—

oO oO @B no # a) sw

= a - 5 Wind direction. | 8 2 ne

es) @ oF Sn z | oO

ao = ei &

: nies ie ort Sy 5 © S58

Stations. 2S o. |) fs “3 | s|e73 .| Weather.

on Fl Gung Pos ia .ja op

Ss .9 | ws |10a.M.] 4PM. PS Glo AIS 8H

SA 8 a. 38 SH RIBOLE & S

fa? Saieee > iO |-4

Nancowry ...... 29°884 | + 048 | S. W. | S. W. Z 7 |} 1:91 | Fine.

Port, Blair’. ;.... 29°834 | +°074 | W.S.WIW.S.W.| 18 8 | 0°41 | Overcast

Diamond Island} 29°659 | —°189 | H.S.E./8. 8. E. 25 10 | 4°58 | Severe

gale.

Aleve: «acc .2eh 29°887 P N.N.E.|E.N. E. P 10.4... 4S.

Chittagong . 29°899 | —°019 | Calm. |N.N. W. 1 6 a) Wiaa,

Toungoo ...... 29°885 | + ‘025 | N. W. | N. W. ? 10; ... | Gloomy

‘ weather.

Bassein ......... 29°762 | —°099 |E. N. E.|E.S. E. 12 10 | 5°97 | Overcast

Rangoon ...... 29°870 | — 043 |E. N. E.| S. E. 6 10 | 0°84 | Showery

Moulmein ...... 29°869 | +014 | S. EH. S. E. 3 6 | 0°04 | Clouds

low with

scud.

Mergui ......... | 29936 | + 052 |E. 8. H.)S8. 8. E. 4 |10° 0°50 | Overcast

IS A re Ory ee ke

1884.] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883.

155

The following information relating to the meteorology of the Bay

for the 12th is taken from the logs of the vessels named :—

Wiuds.

Vessel. Hour.

duced baro-

Latitude

Longitude.

Probable re-

meter.

eee

Mount Stuart) 4.4. M. 29°700\N. N. W. 5

Noon |14° 19’'91° 41’| *750/\W. N. W.| 5 to 6

4P.M. N. W. 5

Midnt. N. W. 5

Scottish Hill | 44. . 29-770 IN. N. W. 5

8 A.M. "790 |N. N. W. 4,

N. W. to

Noon |14° 36’92° 17’. °720|\W.N. W. 10

4P.M. °630 |W. S. W. 10

5 P.M. “660 |W. S. W.

Midnt. ‘720 SW by W 8

Byculla ...... 2 A.M. 29.730 | E. N.E.

4A.M. *660

6 A.M. ‘570

8 A.M. 480) N.E.

10 A.M. ‘480

Noon |16° 03’\92° 36’| 410 NE.byN.

2P.M. ‘380, N.N.E.

4 P.M. *380 | N. by E.

6 P.M. 370 | N. by W.

REMARKS.

A number of small

land birds at about

sunset. T'hemoon has

had alarge ring round

it the last few nights.

4a.M. Cloudy and rain

squalls. Heavy sea

from N.E.

8 a. M. Heavy rain

squalls, sky thick and

gloomy, heavy sea

from N.N. KE. Noon.

Shift of wind to N. W.

with heavy, fierce

squalls. Sky one

mass of heavy black

clouds, and rain like a

black wall to W.N.W.

2p.M. Fierce squalls.

Heavy bank of clouds

to the N. W. and N.

5 P. M. Weather clear-

er, and squalls lighter.

Heavy confused sea.

Scud in dark masses

from N. W. Midnight.

Fresh squalls and

heavy rain.

A.M. Freshening gale

with very heavy

squalls, blinding rain,

and high head sea.

Ship labouring hea-

vily. 8 A.M. Strong

gale with heavy

squalls, and high N.E.

sea. Shipping water

fore and aft.

Noon. Wind and sea

increasing. Heavy

gale, with overcast

sky, and _ continual

heavy squalls. Ship

labouring _heavily,

and shipping heavy

seas fore and aft.

156 J. Ehot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

® = E E Winds.

e.: |S. (oe

Vessel. |Hour.} 82 | ‘ha feo REMARKS.

8 S 2 2 3 Dir Force.

4 fit A

Byculla ...... 8 P.M. 29°370 |N. N. W. 8 P. M. Heavy gale

(Contd.) N. W. to with terrific squalls

10 P.M. °390 |W. N.W. from the North.

Midnt. '400| West. Midnight. | Weather

moderating.

Satara ...... 4Aa.M. 29°710 |NE.by E. A.M. Strong gale from

N. E. with heavy sea,

‘660| N. EK. 9 accompanied with

heavy squalls of wind,

8 A.M. ‘650 9 and incessant rain.

8 A. M. Hard gale,

Noon |16° 30’/93° 30’| °610! E. by N. 9 violent squalls, heavy

rain, very thick wea-

4.P.M. 530 9 ther. Noon. Wind

and sea continued

8 P.M. 540 9 the same ; heavy rain

squalls. 4 Pp. mM. to

E.S.E midnight. Strong

Midnt. °520| S. HE. 9 gale from H. by N.,

| Same wind and wea-

| ther.

Chanda ...... 4 A.M. 29°710 |K. to NE. Morning. Heavy squalls

from E.N. E. Sea ris-

E.N.E.to ing fast; S. HE. swell

8 A.M. 7 SO! Nk increasing rapidly.

Noon. Strong gale

Noon /16° 31/|93 °09’| °640| N. E. with high cross sea.

Weather having all

the appearance of a

cyclone.

4P.M. °560| N. EH. Afternoon. Fierce gale

and high sea, with

hard squalls and

heavy rain. Barome-

ter falling slowly.

8 P.M. 610 | N.N.E. Evening. Terrific

squalls and high sea.

10P.M. "490

Midnt. 560} N.N. W. Cleared up a little, less

rain and sea.

Bancoora ... |4A.M. 29°798| N. 4 |6 a. mM. Squally ap-

pearance to north-

8 A.M. "849 N. 5 ward.

Noon |16° 40’\89° 11’| °805 N. 5 |2 Pp. M. Fresh breeze

4P.M. Pain, aie Pee 4 and squally with light

8 P.M. ‘DBLo Po. WM, 4 rain. Heavy sea from

Midnt. 849 IN. N. W. 4 EK. and H.N. E.

1884.] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883: 157

go |g |FEg Winds

= ee 5 («, | 22

Vessel. |Hour.| £7 | Ha |ScH REMARKS.

E 8 28 3 Dir Force

we ae TEs &

Loanda ...... Noon |16°45'?'91°46’?| 29°700) HE. N. E. 6 | Heavy rain and sky

overcast.

ae 4A.M. N.E. |Moderate! Clear weather.

8 A.M. N. EH. | Fresh.

Noon |17° 42’,87° 42’ edi ee es Cloudy and confused

swell.

4P.M. N. EH. FA Cloudy and heavy S.H.

swell.

8 P.M. N. EK. Cloudy and heavy S.E.

swell.

Midnt. N. H. | Strong. | Overcast and heavy

easterly swell.

The observations at the land observatories indicate that the depres-

sion was to the north of the Andamans on the morning of the 12th.

The centre had thus moved in a north-north-west direction since noon

of the 1lth. The barometer had risen considerably at Port Blair and

Nancowry, and on the east coast of the Martaban Gulf. Strong winds

continued at Nancowry and Port Blair, more especially at the latter

station. The sky was cloudy at Nancowry, and was still very dark and

gloomy at Port Blair. Moderate rain had fallen during the preceding

24 hours at these stations.

A very considerable fall of the barometer had occurred in South

West Burmah, more especially at Diamond Island and at Bassein.

The winds were unusually strong at Diamond Island. The observer

at that station reported a severe gale at 10 a.m. Very heavy rain was

also falling in South Burmah. Diamond Island registered 4°58 inches

at 10 a.m., and Bassein, 5°97 inches. On the Arakan coast, the weather

at 10 a. mM. was fine with passing clouds, and light N. N. E. winds.

The position of the centre can only be roughly approximated

from the land observations. It was evidently to the W. 8S. W. of

Diamond Island and at no great distance. The information extracted

from the ships’ logs enables us to determine it with approximate

accuracy. An examination of the positions of the vessels, as deter-

mined by observation and dead reckoning on the 12th and 13th,

indicates, that the positions assigned to all the vessels, except the

Satara, at noon of the 12th, may be accepted as approximately true.

There appears to have been very little current in the western and

158 J. Ehot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

northern quadrants of the cyclonic area. The only marked current

at this time in the Bay was in the eastern quadrant of the storm

area, where the winds were strongest. This current was continued

northwards along the west coast of Burmah. The Satara, which was

nearest the coast, experienced a very strong northerly current, which

carried her 171 miles to the northward and westward (N. 13° W.) between

noon of the 11th and noon of the 14th. Her probable position at noon

of the 12th, so far as can be determined from the wind direction and

height of her barometer, was in Lat. 16° 30’ N. and Long. 93° 30’ E.

The Byculla, Satara, Loanda, and Chanda were all in the northern

quadrant. The Byculla was nearest the centre, which apparently passed

a short distance to the east of that steamer, late in the evening (about

8 P.M.) Harly in the morning, she had a gale with very heavy squalls,

blinding rain, and a high sea. The weather grew worse as she advanced

southwards. At noon, she experienced a heavy gale with continual

heavy squalls. The weather was at its worst about 8 p. M., when a

heavy gale was blowing with terrific squalls. Her barometer (cor-

rected) stood at that hour at 29°37, the lowest reading taken during the

storm. The weather began to moderate at midnight, when she had

westerly winds, and the storm was passing to the northward.

The Chanda also passed to the westward of the storm. She was at

least 150 miles from the centre early in the morning of the 12th. At that

time, heavy squalls from the H. N. EH. passed over the vessel, and a swell

came up from the south-east which increased rapidly. At noon, she had

a fierce gale with hard squalls, and heavy rain. The barometer fell slow-

ly, and the Captain at 4 p. M. judiciously changed the course of the vessel

to the south-west, and thus kept clear of the storm centre. At 8 P. M.,

the squalls were terrific in force, and the sea very high. The barometer

was at its lowest at 10 p. m., when the corrected reading was 29°49. The

wind at that hour was hauling from N. N. H. to N.N. W. Shortly after-

wards, the weather began to moderate.

The Satara was to the north of the centre during the day, and cross-

ed from the western to the eastern quadrant. She, consequently, not

only experienced the full force of the hurricane, but was carried a con-

siderable distance to the northward by the current, and thus involved

in it for a much longer time than either of the preceding vessels. arly

in the morning, she had a strong gale from the N. H. with heavy squalls,

incessant rain, and a high sea. She continued to experience similar

weather during the day. The wind, which was from N. H. at 44. M.,,

shifted to E. by N. at noon, and to 8. E. at midnight. She was, judging

from the unusually small rise of her barometer between 4 Pp. M.and 8 P. M.,

probably nearest to the centre between 8 P.M. and midnight. Her low-

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883: 159

est reading is not given, but when corrected, it probably slightly exceed-

ed 29°5. She was about the same distance as the Chanda from the centre

The Mount Stuart and Scottish Hill were in the south-west quadrant, but

at considerable distances from the centre. The former, which was in

Lat. 14° 19' N. and Long. 91° 41’ E. at noon, had winds of force 5 to 6

during the day. The Scottish Hill was nearer to the centre. During the

morning, she had cloudy weather with rain squalls, and a heavy sea:

Occasional shifts of wind occurred in heavy squalls, which passed over the

vessel from the N. W. She was just on the margin of the storm area.

The force of the wind varied from 4 to 5. The Captain describes the

appearance of the cyclone area crossing to the N. W. in front of his ship

as a mass of heavy black cloud and rain. During the remainder of the

afternoon, fierce squalls passed over the vessel. The wind was of force

10, and hauled to W.S. W.at4 2: m. The weather moderated a little

afterwards, but she continued to have fresh squalls, heavy rain, and’ a

high confused sea, during the remainder of the night.

The Asia was about 400 miles to the W. N. W. in Lat. 17° 42! and

Long. 87° 42’ HE. at noon. She had fresh to strong N. HE. winds during

the day, and a heavy swell from the S: HK. The Bancoora was 260: miles

to the W. N. W. in Lat. 16°40! N. and Long. 89° 11' FE. She had

northerly winds of force 5 until noon, and N. N. W. winds of force 4

during the remainder of the day. The weather had a squally appearance

in the morning.. As.she advanced eastward, a heavy swell set in from

the HE. and HE. N. E., which increased during the day. The logs of the

Bhandara and of the light vessels near the mouth of the Hooghly show

that light northerly winds were blowing at the Head of the Bay, and

that the weather was fine, sky clear, and sea smooth.

A comparison of the position of the vessels at noon with respect to

the storm. indicates that the centre was approximately in Lat. 15° 30’ N.

and Long. 93° E. at noon.

On this supposition, the following were the distances and bearings

of the vessels from the storm centre at noon :—

Bearing of Distance of

eértre of Gentia of Barometer

storm. storm. at noon.

Se re i a) 90 39°64

BVA. 66 inn tes nbcnstase vie csanseceostesenlf NON. We 45 29°41

MEE cctv bevecete sass vdcovascs dh ous avs N. 79 29°64

BAMATE, Vue cio becwvydseccrsvs cee svesceeve ccs N. KE 75 29°61

PMRIIIN TAL Uh. cs vices bvavch cee see aus ons S. W 85 29°72

Mount Stuart .......cccceccsscecescnses S. Vi 120 29°75

SOMES acs LeeMM cei iiinse chs vende nsscce.) | Wi Ns Wh 260 29°81

ES eM ew tes edi veo ses | Wee Ne WV. 400 P

160 J. Hliot—The South-West. Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

13th November.—The chief feature in the meteorology of India on

the 13th was the cyclonic disturbance off the Burmese coast. A rapid

rise of the barometer during the preceding 24 hours over the Punjab

and Sind, completely obliterated the barometric depression in that area.

Pressure was highest over the Indus valley, where it slightly exceeded

30°15". The barometer had also risen in the Central Provinces, Bombay,

and Madras, but had decreased in Bengal and Arakan. Hence pressure

diminished from west to east, and was lowest at Diamond Island, where

it was 29°826”.

The large depression off the Burmese coast was very distinctly marked-

Winds were blowing a southerly gale in the Gulf of Martaban. They

were easterly at Akyab, northerly in Bengal and on the Ganjam and

Madras coasts, thus establishing general cyclonic circulation over the

Bay. Elsewhere the winds were generally from the eastward, except in

the Indus valley, where they were northerly.

The sky was dull and cloudy in the Punjab, and moderate rain had

fallen during the previous 24 hours. The sky, however, rapidly cleared

during the day, and was almost free of cloud by 4 Pp. Mm. Over the remainder

of the Indian land area, excepting Burmah, the sky was clear and the

weather fine. The following table gives the more important meteorolo-

gical observations taken at the land stations :—

(=) On no m » SO &

= ae le & | Wind direction. |S 3 |S |7.5

we ro o . Lie}

ee i836 Ree I8 lee

6B oem & =

Stations, [S3G\2 > Age |g si é “| Weather.

QHEIos PE. 18" eg

A 2/0" -)loami| 4pm ead lo dey e

Saal .a On PAlsolga

a4 ala ~™ CRdol2"la 4a

3 Oo > Oo |fa

Nancowry ...... |29°940] + ‘056 S.W. | S, W. 3 7 | 0°83 | Fine.

Port Blair...... 29°896/ + ‘062;W.S. W.|W.S.W.}| 10 5 | 0°15 | Fine.

Diamond Island] 29°826] + 167} 8. 8. 29 10 | 1:47 | Severe gale.

PVA hives os 29°863|— °024| HE. N. E.| N,N. E. 5 10 | 0°59 | Showery.

Chittagong ... |29°855|\~— 044) + N, Calm. 1 24 .../opmltry.

Tounghoo ...... 29°881|— :004) N. W. | N. W. p 10 | 0°42 | Threatening

weather.

BRAGG 00) .ss05 29°830/ + 068) HE. S. H.| 8.8. E. 18 10 | .5°90 | Overcast.

Rangoon wie. 29°887| + ‘017| EH. 8S. E.| 8.S. EH. 9 8 | 2°42 | Constant

rain.

Moulmein ,..... 29°902) + °033| S.S. H.| S.S. EH. 3 3 | 1:11 | Constant

rain.

Mergul ccjiess 29°943|+ °007| S. EH. | Calm. 2 5 | 0°30

1884.] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 161

The information extracted from the logs of vessels affectedt 1>

cyclonic disturbance off the Burmese coast is given in the ensuing state-

ment :—

S o> :

4 3 z a 3 Winds.

Vessel. Hour. 2 "Epa ~ 3 H REMARKS.

3 a onl. Sate

Be ° os 2} Dir Force.

4 irs =|

Shazada...... 8 a.M. |18° 14’/94° 00’ 29°836 | S. by E. Strong.

Noon |18° 51'/93° 57’ Cloudy and overcast.

4P.M. “714 s.

Mount Stuart 4 4.M. N. W. 5 |Sea heavy from N. E.

by N. It was more

8 A. M. 29°870 ae 5 northerly towards.

noon. 2P.M. Showery.

Noon |14° 47’191° 20’ W.N. W. 5 4p.m. Heavy detached

clouds. 5 P.M. Dull

4 P.M. C10) er 5 to 6 heavy sky, with

bright pink colour

8 P.M. oe 5 at sunset.

Midnt. ‘800 |vble.toW 5

PA secccv eee 4A.M. N. E. | Mode- | Cloudy, heavy easterly

rate. swell, and squally.

8 A.M. N. Fresh. | Overcast and heavy

N. E. swell.

Noon /15° 54’ 90° 58’ ox .. |Squally, overcast, heavy

N. E. swell.

4P.M. N. W. | Mode- | Overcast, N. E. swell

rate. going down.

8 P.M. IDA W. a Moderate breeze and

overcast. Swell gone

down.

Midnt. SW by W| Steady. | Moderate breeze and

cloudy.

_ Loanda ...... Noon |16° 16’,92° 54’|29°500| N. E. 10 | Gale increasing.

Midnt. A hurricane.

: Scottish Hill |8 a.m. 29°750 Noon. Heavy rain

: ' squalls.

Noon |15° 56/,92° 10’| *720|W. byS. 9 |6 Pp. Mm. Scud flying

fast from N. W.

4P.M. ‘700 Severe squalls and

| heavy sea. 10 P. M.

} 6 P.M. ‘680 Weather clearer, sea

lighter, squalls less

; 8 P.M. W. byS. 10 violent.

Midnt. ‘790

162

Vessel.

Byculla

Satara

see eee

ee eee

J. Khot—The South-West Monsoon Storms

3 ee

Hour. E Z, 3 . H

3 g |S88| 7p;

J S F: E - Dir.

NNW. to

4A.M. 29°610 |W. N. W.

WNW. to} °

8 A.M. *650|) S. W.

Noon |16° 02/'93° 11’ °670|S.S. W.

4P.M *690/S. S. W.

8 P.M 790} 8.8.

Midnt “770 |SE. by S.

2A.M 29°440|} W.

4 A.M 450) S. W.

6a. “460

8a.M °510|S. S. W.

10A.M 020

Noon |16° 10’198° 11’, *560

2P.M 580} 8. W.

4P.M “660

6 P.M “720

8 P.M “7BON) si0

10P.M B10} | ees

Midnt "B30 ) wie

4A.M 29°520| S. EH.

8 A.M *630

Noon |16° 20’/93° 30, -680| S. E.

4P.M 670; S..E.

ae a eee OO

[No. 2,

REMARKS.

‘Wind and sea going

down. At short inter-

vals, terrific squalls at-

tended by heavy rain.

Strong wind and heavy

rain squalls. .

Strong breeze and

cloudy. Occasional

heavy squalls.

Strong increasing

breeze, and cloudy

weather.

Heavy gale with dark

overcast sky. Wind

veered to S. W., in-

creased and blew with

great violence in

terrific squalls with

rain. High confused

sea.

8 A. M. Heavy gale

with terrific squalls

from 8S. W. toS. 8. W.

High confused sea.

Shipping heavy water

fore and aft. 11a. m.

Weather moderating,

but sea very confused..

Noon. Wind and sea

moderating. Squalls

less frequent and not

so hard.

8 P.M. Strong breeze

and overcast, with

sharp squalls and

heavy rain, high sea

still running. Mid-

night. Fresh breeze

with passing squalls.

Sea going down.

4. A.M. Fresh gale, vio-

lent squalls of wind

and rain, heavy head

sea. 8 A. M. Strong

gale, violent squalls,

heavy rain. 10-45 A.M.

Wind shifted to 8. by

E. Noon. Strong gale

Vessel. Hour. Remarks.

Latitude

Longitude.

Probable re-

duced baro-

meter.

from S. E. Violent

squalls of wind and

rain. 4P.M. Fresh

gale, violent squalls

of wind and rain.

Sea moderating. Wa-

ter had a greenish

tint. 6-30 P.M. Fresh

gale, thick weather,

with violent squalls.

(Contd.)

6-15 a. M. Tremendous

heavy sea from N. E.

10 a.m. Lulls andvery

heavy squalls and

4a.M. a

Noon |16° 31/\91° 55’| °770 |W. N. W. 6 rain. 7 p. M. Clearing

Bancoora ...

8A.M.

somewhat, wind and

sea moderating, ves-

sel at times rolling

fearfully.

4P.M.

8 P.M.

Midnt. 30°049

Mahratta ... | Noon |22° 00/|91° 44’ 29°910| S. E. 1 |4p.m. Slight swell

from 8.E. To east-

E. 2 wards, dense heavy

. clouds ; to westwards,

-780| N. E. 3 sky clear near the

horizon; to north-

H.N.E.to wards, light fleecy

N. KH. 5 looking clouds, ap-

parently motionless.

Midnight. Sky com-

pletely overcast, with

occasional rain and

heavy swell.

The observations taken at the land stations show that the barome-

ter had risen rapidly at Diamond Island, moderately at Bassein, Port

Blair, and Nancowry, and very slightly at Mergui and Rangoon. It was

falling slowly at Akyab and Chittagong, in front of the storm area.

a eS eres

164 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

Winds were much lighter at Nancowry and Port Blair, but were un-

altered in direction, and continued to give moderate rain. They had

veered to S. S. HE, in Burmah, except at Diamond Island, where they were

from the south. A severe gale of wind had prevailed at that station

during the previous 24 hours, but was beginning to moderate. Heavy

rain had been brought up by the southerly winds into South Burmah.

Bassein received 5°9 inches, Rangoon 2°4, and Diamond Island 1°47 during

the previous 24 hours.

The land observations are not sufficient to enable the position of

the centre of the storm at this time to be inferred. The slight shift of

wind at Diamond Island, the considerable rise of the barometer at that

station, and the very small fall at Akyab, indicate that the storm was

being largely influenced and retarded by the action of the Burmese and

Arakan hills. The southerly winds in the easterly quadrant, instead of

passing mainly over a water surface, were now blowing partly over South

Burmah. The friction between the winds and the earth’s surface, and

the action of the hills in breaking up and disintegrating the rotatory or

vorticose motion of the air, evidently account for the change which was

taking place, and which is more clearly shown by the ships’ observations.

The Satara was in the north-east quadrant. Her position at noon

was probably about Lat. 16° 20’ N. and Long. 94° E. She was between

the storm centre and the Burmese coast, and received the full weight of

the southerly winds during the day. She had strong gales with violent

squalls and heavy rain during the whole day, and the weather only began

to moderate about 8 Pp. m., after which she had a fresh gale with thick

weather and heavy squalls.

The position of the Loanda is slightly doubtful. She was almost in

front of the cyclonic centre, probably a few miles only to the west. She

had north-easterly winds of force 10 at midday. The storm increased,

and at midnight was blowing a hurricane. Her barometer at midday

(corrected) was 29°5.

The Byculla was in the south-east quadrant. She had crossed the

path of the centre on the previous evening at about 11 Pp. m., and steamed.

away to the east during thé day. Larly in the morning, she was near

the centre, and received the full weight of the south-westerly winds.

The wind veered to south-west shortly after midnight, and blew with

great violence ; terrific squalls of wind and rain passing over the ship

at intervals. At 8 A. m., the wind blew a heavy gale with terrific squalls

from S.S. W.and S. W., bringing up a high confused sea. Weather began

to moderate after 11 A. M., and in the afternoon, when the vessel was pro-

bably 200 miles away from the storm centre, she experienced fresh

breezes with passing squalls. The barometer rose rapidly and continu-

ously during the day from 29°44 at 2 a. mM. to 29°83 at midnight.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 165

, The Chanda and Bancoora were passing early in the morning

through the south-west and south quadrants of the depression. The

Chanda experienced terrific squalls with heavy rain. The winds com-

menced at W. N. W., and hauled round to 8S. W. at 8 a. m. As she

advanced south-eastwards during the afternoon, the weather improved,

and wind shifted round to 8. E., when strong breezes with occasional

squalls and cloudy weather prevailed.

The Bancoora was further to the westward, and hence did not en-

eounter such strong winds as the Chanda. During the day, the winds

gradually shifted from north-west to west, and were of average strength

_%. Very heavy squalls of wind and rain passed over the vessel, and a

_ tremendous heavy sea came up from north-east early in the morning.

As the storm centre passed to the northwards, and the vessel proceeded

eastwards, the wind and sea moderated.

The remaining vessels were at greater distances away. The Scottish

Hill to the W. S. W. of the centre (in Lat. 15° 56’ N. and Long. 92° 10!

i.) had very heavy rain squalls (force 9 to 10) during the day. The

weather began to clear at about 10 P. m.

The Asia, in Lat. 15° 54’ N. and Long. 90° 58’ E. at noon, was pro-

ceeding south-eastward to Port Blair, and passed through the outer part

of the south-westerly quadrant. She had squally overcast weather with

a heavy N. EH. swell during the day. At midnight, she had steady, mo-

derate S. W. breezes with cloudy weather. The Mount Stuart was in the

west and south-west. quadrants, and experienced moderate winds of

force 5, with occasional squalls.

The Mahratta, between Chittagong and Akyab, had light variable

winds, and fine weather, during the early part of the day. The sky

clouded over and was overcast at night, when rain began to fall, and a

heavy swell to come up. The Bhundara, off Gopaulpore, had light

- airs or calms, and a clear sky.

Assuming the position for the storm centre at noon to have been

in Lat. 16° 10’ N. and Long. 93° EH., the following table gives its position

with respect to the vessels near it :—

Position. Direction of | Distance of

Names of Vessels. Longitude.|Latitude.| storm centre | storm centre pia ‘

KE. from vessel. | from vessel. b-.

NN dig. Sars coy G0 ob ulakst 16° 16’ | 92° 54/ N. N. W. 9 29°50 P

RE OE oan acca ca viens, 16° 02’ O87 114 K. 15 29°69 P

BOE N cu hs «od shies oor ges 16° 10’ 93° 11’ HK. 12 29°56

a ae eee 16° 20’ | 93° 30’ EK. N. E. 86 29°68

ge 0) 15° 56’ 92° 10’ W. 56 29°72

MMMMEDOOPS, Hive is scnccnisiss- 16 Oi" | G065" W. 74, 29°77

mount Stugrt. ©...... ive. 14° 47’ 91° 20’ S. 8. W. 140 29°85

ne ae 15° 54/ 90° 58’ W. 130 29°85

Tn 21° 59’ 91° 44/ N. N. W. 400 29°91

URES sos es ss cece Off Gopa ulpore. W. 29°89

ee —

166 J. Hliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

14¢h November.—The only feature of importance in the meteorology

of India was the depression off the Arakan and Burmese coasts. Pres-

sure was again giving way quickly over the Punjab, and to a less extent

in all other parts of the country, except at a few stations in Bombay,

South Madras, and in Arakan. The highest pressure (30°1) was over

Sind, and the lowest (29°69) in Arakan at Akyab. Gradients were not

steep, except in and near the cyclonic disturbance. The storm centre

in the Bay was approaching Akyab at 10 4. m. The weather was

overcast with heavy rain in Burmah and Arakan. A considerable in-

crease of cloud had taken place in Lower Bengal. The sky had cleared

in the Punjab and North-west Himalaya, and weather was fine over the

whole of India, except in the immediate neighbourhood of the cyclonic

disturbance. The winds were more northerly than usual in Northern

India. In Bengal and on the Madras coast, winds were blowing chiefly

from the north west. They were, however, as during the previous week,

light in the neighbourhood. of the Madras coast.

The following tables give the observations relating to the weather

of the 14th taken at the land stations in the neighbourhood of the cyclo-

nic disturbance, and the meteorological information extracted from the

logs of vessels :—

ots |O2 AO | |O a

“3 ("6 | Wind direction. |S 2—& | |e

S¥oe|oO i = ‘D> H q eS

a for 5 a

4 - e Aa! ew ee a as} 4 =

Stations. ate D ~ ae ab - S| & | Weather.

g = 2 | G0 | 10 a.m. 4 P.M By sale igs

R48 dd gaa olSala aa

3 Oo > Oo |m

Nancowry ...... 29°921 : 019} 8. W. | S. W. 2 8 | 0°63 | Cloudy.

Port Blair’...... 29°924 | + ‘028)W. N. W.| S. S. E. 6 6 | 0°61 | Cloudy.

Diamond Island|29°898 + ‘072| 8. S. 17 7 | O64.

TAD La siien oes 29°692|—" 171, N. W. 8 10 | 2°44 | Raining,

Chittagong ... |29°772|— 083) N. W. W. 1 8 Gloomy.

Toungoo ..... 29°866 |—" 015) N. W. | S. W. ? 10 | 0°15 | Showery.

Bassein .......6 29°922|+°092)W.S. W.) SS. 14 10 | 1°42 | Overcast.

Rangoon... 29°921;+°034, 8S. |8.S. W. 8 10 | 0°83 | Drizzling.

Moulmein ...... 29'913/+°011| S. H. W. 4 1 | 0°33 | Fine.

Mergui .......+ 29°948|+°005) N. HE. N. 1 8 | 1°55 | Cloudy.

a a CE Ee

1884.)

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883.

167

a |g (#3

Bie | fo. ja

Vessel. |Hour.| 8&4 Ba lou x REMARKS,

s | 8 (88s! pir

sr H jg e

Asia ........./4A.M. S WbyS. Moderate breeze and

8 A.M. S85. W. fine weather during

Noon ;13° 26'/98° 27’ ze the day.

4P.M. 8. Light breeze.

Shazada...... |8 A.M. 29°841 |W. N. W

Noom. |14° 05’190° 50’

4P.M. | °758|N.N.W

Chanda ...... | 4.4. m. |15° 27/95° 15/|29°860 | S.S. W. Clear weather.

8 A.M. 860/58. 8. W.

Bancoora ... | 44. M. 29°927 |W. S. W. 44.M. Heavy norther-

8 A.M. ed ey eA ly sea. Ship rolling

Noon |15° 51’/93° 50’, 899] S. H. heavily. 6 a. mM. Mo-

4P.M. "812 8. derate breeze, heavy

8 P.M. °907 | EH. 8S. EH. confused sea, ship

Midnt, 897| S. EH. rolling violently.

Noon. Pleasant breeze

and cloudy.

Varies to

Mount Stuart) 4. m. W. Heavy cross N. N. W. to

Noon /15° 51’/91° 30’/29°890

4P.M.

8P.M.

Midnt.

Byculla...... | 2A.M.

4 A.M.

6A. M.

8 A.M.

10A.M.

Noon |15° 58//93° 58’

4P.M.

8 P.M.

Midnt.

N.N.E. sea which gra-

dually abated. A flash

of lightning ahead

at 3 A. M. Passing

clouds, weather gradu-

ally getting finer look-

ing. Passed through

lots of bamboo roots

to-day. Fine moon-

light night.

29°780| S. W. 2 A. M. Fresh breeze

“760 and cloudy.

*820 4 A.M. Moderate breeze

and cloudy, with pass-

°860| S. ing squalls. 7 A. M.

Water very much dis-

890 coloured, muddy ap-

pearance, bottom 28

‘890 fathoms. Moderate

breeze and cloudy,

°880; 8S. W. light passing squalls.

0-40 p. M. Sighted

"920/)S.S. W. Alguada Light House

toS. E. 1-30 p. m.

‘950| 8.8. HE. Light breeze and fine

with smooth water.

168 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

Vessel. Hour. REMARKS.

Latitude

Longitude.

KE.

duced baro-

meter

re)

{>}

—

ET oo

je)

ee ee

Satara ......;4A.M. 29°730| S. 8. E. 7 | Moderate gale accom-

panied with heavy

6 squalls of wind and

rain. 4A4.M. Strong

8 A.M. *850|S. 8. W. 6 breeze with heavy

squalls. 5 A.M. Very

Noon /16° 45/\94° 3’ 880 = 2 dirty weather, wind

* moderating, very

2 heavy squalls, and

sharp rain. 6-304.M.

4 Sighted land. 8 A.M.

Strong breeze and

2 thick dirty weather.

10 a.m. Fresh breeze,

weather clearing up

generally, occasional

heavy squalls. Noon.

Light breeze and fine.

Sea smooth. 4 P.M.

Light breeze and fine,

8p. M. Sighted Al-

quada Reef Light.

Moderate breeze and

fine. Sea smooth.

Midnight. Light

breeze and fine.

4P.M. 730

8 P.M. “900

Midnt. ‘900; S. W.

Scottish Hill |4 a.m. 29°820| W. Sky clearing. Sea

lighter, though much

8 A.M. PFO bs confused. Heavy sea

from N. N. W. and

Noon |17° 00’|92° 25’; -880 a N. Weather fine,

but heavy bank of

8 P.M. W...N. W. clouds to N. N. W.

and N. N. EH. Sea

Midnt. °890; N. W. going down fast.

Clouds clearing off.

Loanda ...... |4A.M. Wind hauled round

through N.

Noon {17° 34//92° 46’ W. 7to8 | Weather overcast with

light rain.

Midnt. Weather improving.

Mahratta ... |4A.M. 29°590|N.N.E. 9 Thick continual rain,

8 a.m.|Entere|d Aky-| °740|N.N.W. 8 with heavy sea

ab.

* A current set the ship from noon of 11th instant to noon of 14th instant

N. 13° W. 171 miles.

The barometer had risen at Diamond Island and all the stations to

the south and east, except Nancowry, where a slight fall was observed.

SS Pwr aaa = eT

1884. ] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 169

The rise was nowhere large, and was less than a tenth of an inch at all

stations in that part of the Bay. A considerable (-17”) fall had occurred

at Akyab, and smaller changes of the same character at Chittagong

and Toungoo. Judging from the barometric movements, the centre at

10 a. M. was in the immediate neighbourhood of Akyab.

The wind observations, however, are anomalous and almost unintelli-

gible on the supposition of a well defined cyclonic circulation. The

winds at Nancowry were steady from south-west, but were very feeble.

At Port Blair, the wind was very unsteady, shifting from W. N. W. at

10 a.m.to 8.8. H.at4 p.m. Moderately strong S. W. winds continued

at Diamond Island. The winds at 10 a. mM. at Akyab were from N. and

at Chittagong and Toungoo from N. W. They shifted at 4 Pp. mu. to

west at Akyab and Chittagong, and to 8S. W. at Toungoo. They were,

however, very feeble at all these stations. The wind velocity averaged

8 miles per hour at Akyab, and only 1 mile per hour at Chittagong,

where the air motion was actually less than the average in November,

which is 2 miles per hour. The only inference from these observations

is, that the cyclonic or vorticose motion had been broken up to a large

extent by the action of the hills and the friction of the land, and that it

was no longer a well-defined cyclonic circulation. This is also indicated

by the character of the rainfall at the land stations. It was more widely

distributed than before, and was smaller in amount, the largest quantity

registered being 2°44 inches at Akyab.

The vessels which have contributed logs were all on the southern and

western quadrants at some distance from the centre. They give in-

formation which is less valuable and conclusive than that of the preced-

ing days. The whole of the meteorological observations, when charted,

indicate that the centre of the barometric depression at 10 A. M. was to

the east of Akyab in Lat. 20° N. and Long. 933° E., and that the

cyclonic circulation was very irregular and fast breaking up. The

Mahratta, from Chittagong, entered Akyab harbour at 8 A. mM. She had

thick continued rain during the night with northerly winds of force 9.

The Scottish Hill, in Lat. 17° N. Long. 92° 25’ E., was to the south of the

centre at noon. She had winds from west to north-west. During the

day, the sky cleared, and the sea went down. At noon, weather was

fine, although a heavy bank of clouds was still to be seen to the N. N. W.

and N. N. H., but it cleared off during the night.

The Loanda, in Lat. 17° 34’ N. and Long. 92° 46’ K. by account,

had westerly winds, and overcast.skies with slight rain.

The Satara found herself at noon in Lat. 16° 45’ N. and Long. 94°

3’ EH. She experienced moderate winds of force 7 from 8. 8. EH. early in

the morning, and continued to have sharp squalls and heavy rain until

170 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

6 A. M., after which the weather rapidly improved. A fresh breeze was

blowing at 10 a. M. with occasional heavy squalls. At noon, the storm

was completely over, and she had light breezes of force 2 from the 8.8. W.,

fine weather, and a smooth sea.

The Mount Stuart, in Lat. 15° 51’ N. Long. 91° 30’ EK. at noon, had

westerly winds of force 5 early in the morning, with a heavy cross sea.

The weather improved rapidly, and was quite settled in appearance at

night, with fine clear skies and light winds of force 1 to 2. The Byculla,

Bancoora, and Chanda were steaming along the south coast of Burmah

towards Rangoon. They had fine weather with south-westerly winds

of average force 3.

It thus appears that the first action of the Burmese hills, which are

comparatively low, had been to retard the advance of the centre very con-

siderably between noon of the 12th and of the 13th. During the next

24 hours, it advanced rapidly almost due northwards with a very slight

easterly tendency. It then approached the coast to the east of Akyab

on the morning of the 14th. The depression was, however, very much

smaller than hitherto, and the cyclonic motion very considerably broken

‘up. The winds were irregular in direction near the centre. The rainfall

was evidently much less in amount, and more widely distributed. The

observations taken at Akyab and Chittagong at 4 p.m. shew that the

disturbance was then almost completely disintegrated. There was at

that hour an irregular, but very feeble, cyclonic circulation, which passed

away before the following morning.

15th November.—The meteorology of the 15th is given to show how

completely the cyclonic disturbance had broken up.

The barometric changes of the previous 24 hours were exceedingly

irregular. The only important change was in Arakan, where the baro-

meter had risen very rapidly with the disappearance of the cyclonic

disturbance. The winds show very little alteration generally. In the

North-West Provinces and Punjab, they were very variable. In Bengal

and Orissa, they had a much stronger northerly component than is usual

in November. The weather was fine, and skies were clear over nearly the

whole country, except Burmah and Arakan, where they were still more or

less clouded, and moderate rain was falling. In the Punjab, though the

sky was generally clear and humidity decreasing, the weather still

appeared unsettled. The exceptional character of the weather in the

Punjab during the previous week, is illustrated by the fact that the average

rainfall of the hill stations at Simla and Chakrata for the month of

November is nil, whilst, during the previous fifteen days, four inches had

fallen at the former station, and 33 inches at the latter.

of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 171

The following tables give the observations of the same stations as

hitherto, and the meteorological information from the logs of several

vessels in the Bay for the 15th November :—

og |o2 mo. [2 lo

se Shee He Be tigen pas

S93 9/85 EAE 5 x

a) *| Oo

Stations. 8 fea ra ee a & = 3/8 5 | Weather.

os : ' - (ea

BH | 5) 10 aa. 4pm. |B, 4 mle 41a 8 8

R<dSleds SBS S68 a8

aa Oo > Oo |m

Nancowry ...... 032} BL 2 8 | 1°47 | Cloudy.

Port Blair...... 29°932|+ 008) N.N.E.| EH. S. E. 5 3 | 0°13 | Fine.

Diamond Island |29°937 |+ °039) E. S. EH. | H. 8. E. 7 6 | 016 | Fine.

Bead. ...:...... 29°937|+ °245) 4H. S.S. EH. 5 9 | 0°33 | Gloomy.

Chittagong .., |29°925|+ °153| 8.8. H.|S. 8. W. 2 6 Gloomy.

Tounghoo ...... |29°913 |+ ‘047; N. W. | N. W. p 6 | 0°04 | Drizzling.

Bassein ......... 29°952 |+ °030; 8.8. E.| W. 3 10 | 0°04 | Cloudy.

Rangoon ...... 29:952|+ -031| §.E. |S.S8.E.| 5 | 9] 0-74 | Cloudy.

Moulmein ...... 29°899 |— 014; N. W.H. 2 0 Fine.

Mergui ......... 29°920 |— °028) Calm. aN; 1 10 | 1°50 | Overcast.

g§ |g [FE Winds.

Vessel. Hour. 27 ‘ee = 3 H | REMARKS.

4 S S 3 3 Dir. | Force.

Shazada...... 4.A.M. 29'911|N.N.E.| Light. | Weather fine with light

8 A.M. winds.

Noon |12° 47’87° 14’

4p. M. ‘781|N.N.E.| Light.

8P.M

Satara ...... 4A.M. 29°870| S.E. 2 | Light breeze and fine

clear weather.

8 A.M. "940 ee 4 | Moderate breeze and

fine weather,

Noon |15° 50/\95° 50’) *980|_ ... 4 |Current during the

previous 24 hours, W.

65 miles.

4P.M. *810! N. E. 2 | Light breeze and fine

weather.

172 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

Vessel. Hour. REMARKS,

duced baro-

ere

ae) B

5 Re]

a4] ap

- a

3 °

—— | OOOO - | | | |

Probable re-

ASG TT ranae 4A.M. Variable| Light | Light and variable airs,

fine weather.

Noon | Port /Blair. 5 Ste

4 P.M. E.N.E.| Light | Light breeze and fine

clear weather.

8 P.M. PAs Fresh.

Mount Stuart) 4. M. N.N. W. 1 /1 Pe. mM. Smooth with

light N. swell. 4P.M.

8 A.M. N. by E.| 1 to 2 Heavy clouds all

round the _ horizon.

Noon |16° 24’ 92° 00/|29°890|N. N. BE.) ... 5 p.M. Weather set-

4P.M. NE by N 2 tled looking.

NNE to

Midnt. NE by N 2 | Midnight. Clear fine

weather.

Scottish Hill |8 a.m. N. W. Light winds and swell

from N. N. W.

Noon |18° 03//92° 48’/29°900 ;

8 P.M. NNW to Light winds and clear

sky.

Loanda ...... Noon /18° 38//92° 30’|29°800 | W by N. 5

The observations call for little remark. The rapid recovery of

pressure at Akyab, and the lightness and irregularity of the winds in

Arakan and Burmah, indicate the complete disappearance of the cyclonic

vortex. The land observations show that the winds were very unsteady

during the day. For instance, at Nancowry, they were from east at

10 a. mM. and south at 4p. mu. Similarly, at Port Blair, they shifted

from N. N. H. at 10 a. wm. to S. S. H. at 4 p.m. It is probable that

these were light local winds, for the logs of the vessels prove that, over

the greater part of the Bay, north-easterly winds were again established.

The Clan Macpherson, at the entrance to the Bay, in Lat. 6° N., had

moderate north-easterly winds.

Hence the cyclonic circulation had not only broken up, but the south-

westerly winds which had, as shown by the Nancowry registers, prevailed

steadily up to the afternoon of the 14th, although they had decreased in

strength considerably during the 12th, 13th, and 14th, had given way so

;

{

——

1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 173

rapidly and entirely on the afternoon of the 14th, that light north-easterly

winds were again established over nearly the whole of the Bay on the

morning of the 15th. This speedy restoration of the normal circulation

of the air after. the disappearance of the disturbance, is perhaps less

remarkable than it might seem to be, but is nevertheless noteworthy.

CHAPTER IV.

DiIscussioN OF THE CHIEF FEATURES OF THE StoRM OF

NovemsBer lOru tro 1ld5ruH.

The following gives a brief connected narrative of the more im-

portant features of the storm.

After the termination of the south-west monsoon in Bengal in the

last week of September 1883, the winds shifted round to north over

the Head of the Bay, and the lower air current of the south-west monsoon

recurved over the middle of the Bay. The north-east monsoon hence

commenced on the Madras coast during the first week of October. Un-

usually heavy rain fell over Southern India, more especially over the

eastern districts of the Madras Presidency, during the month of October

and the first week of November. During the whole of this interval, the

period of the year when the most severe and extensive cyclones are known

to occur, the Bay was entirely free from storms. In the beginning of the

second week of November, the rainfall rapidly decreased in amount in

Madras, and ceased entirely on the 9th and 10th. The logs of vessels

shew that winds were, at that time, as they had been for some days

previously, very light and variable in the neighbourhood of the Anda-

mans and Nicobars. South-westerly winds were re-established at Nan-

cowry on the 4th, and south-easterly winds at Port Blair on the 7th, but

they were at first very weak.

The wind observations taken on board the ships Mount Stuart and

Scottish Hill prove that, at the same time, winds were unusually light over

the centre of the Bay, in the neighbourhood and to the west of the Nicobars

and the Andamans. This condition of excessively feeble air motion was

very marked on the 7th and 8th. On the 9th, there were indications for

the first time of the occurrence of moderately heavy and localized rainfall

to the north-east of the Nicobars, and to the east of Port Blair, and also

of a shift of wind, significant of the commencement and establishment of

cyclonic circulation. On the morning of the 10th, there was a well-defined

atmospheric whirl to the east of Port Blair. Weather was at that time

cloudy, with very light breezes, and occasional passing showers ; and the

sea was smooth, and free from any considerable current over the greater

part of the Martaban Gulf, and the north and centre of the Bay.

174 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

The ship Kwang Tung, it may be remarked, passed, on the 7th

and 8th, over the area in which the disturbance was generated ; and

there is not the slightest indication in her log, or in the observations of

the neighbouring land stations, of the existence of any atmospheric whirl,

large or small, at that time, or previous to the 10th. The central

depression at noon on the 10th was very small, probably less than a tenth

of an inch, and the atmospheric whirl, although clearly established, was as

yet in an initial state. It, however, rapidly acquired increased energy

during the afternoon of the 10th, and the morning of the llth. At noon

of the 11th, there was a well-defined cyclonic disturbance with its centre

in Lat. 134° N. and Long. 942° E., the barometric depression at which

certainly exceeded 3". Strong winds were now blowing into it from

the south, and bringing up much vapour. During the succeeding 24 hours,

the centre moved to the north-westward through the channel separating

Diamond Island and Cape Negrais from the Andaman Islands, and

probably over the Coco Islands. Its centre, at noon on the 12th, was in

Lat. 152°. N. Long. 93° E. The disturbance was of small extent, as vessels

at distances of only 150 miles had light to moderate winds of force 3 to 5.

The Satara, Byculla, and Loanda, all of which were near the centre,

on the other hand, experienced squalls of terrific and hurricane force.

Henee it was at that time a small but well-defined atmospheric

whirl or eyclonie disturbance. The winds and squalls near the centre

were of the most violent character, the sea excessively high and

dangerous, and the currents in the eastern quadrant considerable.

During the next 24 hours, it retained the same characteristics, but

moved very slowly to the north, so that, at noon, its centre was in

Lat. 16° 10' N. and Long. 93° E. The retardation of its motion was

evidently due to the resistance of the land and hills in the eastern

quadrant. The centre passed a few miles to the east of the Loanda

and the Byculla on the evening of the 12th and morning of the 13th.

The decrease in the indraught from the eastern quadrant due to the

action of the Burmese and Arakan coasts continued. The whirl began

to diminish in intensity, and also recurved slightly after noon of the 13th,

and passed to the north-north-eastward, thus approaching the Burmese

and Arakan coasts. On the morning of the 14th, it was much enfeebled.

The barometric depression was smaller in amount, the winds weaker,

the rainfall more diffuse and less localised, and the sea less violent.

Moreover, the directions of the winds were so irregular over the area of

barometric depression as to suggest the existence of several imperfect

and feeble vortices, rather than of’ one large and well-defined whirl.

The centre of the depression was in the neighbourhood of Akyab on the

morning of the 14th. The land observations at 4 Pp. mM. of that day

1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 175

indicate that the cyclonic circulation was completely broken up, and that

fine weather, with moderate winds, and aslight sea, obtained at that hour

in the north-east of the Bay, over which the cyclone had previously

advanced. The disturbance passed so completely away on the 14th that

normal north-easterly winds were re-established over the greater part,

if not the whole, of the Bay, on the morning of the 15th. The storm

hence was generated and dispersed between the morning of the 10th

and the evening of the 14th.

The following are a few of the more important points in connection

with this cyclone,

One of the more remarkable features, which has already been dis-

cussed, but which deserves special mention, was the change which

occurred when the cyclone approached the Burmese coast. Whatever the

explanation may be, there can be no doubt of the facts.

The following table gives approximately the position of the centre at

noon on the various days, and the distance passed over by it in the

preceding 24 hours :—

Position of Centre. | Distance passed

over in pre-

ceding 24

Latitude. | Longitude.| hours.

nn ee en? eS 1 1s? By eae EB

ly Hae. elscemieed.... 115° 801 98° 0% | 160 miles,

ecg ie ae | lee Lit 98" 0) AG

Seen Benoit hy dla De aha) ogge yy Wmgge sor oT Saye»

It will thus be seen that, between noon of the 12th and 13th, the

storm centre began to recurve, and only advanced a distance of about

50 miles, as compared with 160 miles during the previous 24 hours, and

275 during the succeeding 24 hours. The only apparent explanation

depends on what I have already suggested as probable, namely, that the

cyclonic action extends through very different heights in different

storms. In the storms of the rains proper, it is almost certain that the

condensation, and therefore the seat of the disturbance, is at a much

greater elevation than it is in storms formed during the October Tran-

sition period. In the latter case, the storms appear to be generated

176 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

near the northern limit of the retreating south-west monsoon current,

which is at that period diminishing in strength. It is probably much

shallower at its northern limits than elsewhere. Many of the pheno-

mena of the cyclones of the Bay appear to be intelligible and explicable

only on this supposition.

If it be granted that the October and November storms of the Bay

of Bengal are formed near the northern edge of a diminishing and

retreating current, it is hence almost certain that the vapour condensa-

tion, in the case of the November cyclone under discussion, occurred at

a comparatively small height in the atmosphere, and that the resulting

motion was mainly confined to the lower strata. Hence the effects due

to friction with land, and to the destructive or disintegrating action of the

hill barriers of Burmah and Arakan cutting almost radially across the

cyclonic area, would be large and marked. This was undoubtedly the case.

So long as the cyclone was to the south of the Burmah coast, the cyclone

increased in intensity. When the centre was in a line with the coast,

and at a short distance from it, retardation was at once shown, and the

cyclonic or vorticose motion began to diminish. And as the centre

advanced northwards, so that the Arakan hills (of greater height than

the west Burmese hills) were included within the area of disturbance,

the disintegrating action became rapidly more marked, and caused a

speedy disruption of the vortex.

A feature which deserves special notice in the smaller cyclonic

storms of the Bay is the behaviour of the barometer. The barometer

affords practically no indication of the approach of a small cyclonic

storm in the Bay, and should not be trusted by the mariner to give due

warning. The reason of this is simple. A favourable condition ante-

cedent to the formation of a storm is approximate uniformity of pressure

over the whole or a large portion of the Bay. If a small atmospheric

whirl be set up in an almost, quiescent mass of air, which is therefore

under nearly identical and uniform conditions, it produces a small de-

pression at and near the centre, which extends slowly outwards. The

fall of the barometer at distances of 80 or 100 miles from the centre

is generally small in amount, and is frequently less than the changes due

to general actions common to the whole of India. The depression at

the centre rarely exceeds half an inch, and steep baric gradients are

confined to its immediate neighbourhood. Over the rest of the Bay,

the pressure is slightly affected by the indranght, but frequently not

to such an extent as to obscure the changes going on over the whole

of India. In other words, during the formation and existence of a

small storm, the barometer immediately outside of the storm area pro-

per oscillates in obedience to the larger atmospheric movements com-

1884.) of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 177

mon to the whole of India, as well as to the distant storm, and hence, if

used as a guide to the weather, it should be remembered that its indica-

tion may refer mainly to these general movements, and not to the whirl

in the neighbourhood. Hence it cannot be used as a reliable guide to

the existence of small storms in the Bay of Bengal.

A few examples from the present cyclone will not only indicate

that the barometer gives no certain and marked warning of the approach

of a smaller cyclone in the Bay, but suggest that the mariner in the Bay

of Bengal should rely mainly on the appearance of the sky, the strength

and changes of the wind, the amount of the swell, and the direction from

which it travels, as indications of an approaching storm.

The Mount Stuart passed through the western quadrant. The fol-

lowing table gives her barometric readings, her position with respect

to the storm centre, strength of wind, and amount of swell :—

Distance

Barometer.|} Wind. Swell. [of storm Weather.

centre.

PER oie .ce 29°90 2to3 | None sles Unsettled.

tht uc... 92 lto4! None tae Unsettled.

1 ere 87 0to3 | None — Unsettiled.

20th: . 86 0 to 4 None a Unsettled.

ae 82 2 to 5 None 250 | Weather looking

very bad.

12th . 75 5 to 6 4 100 =| Squally.

13th . 87 5 to 6 | Heavy sea.} 125 | Squally.

14th . 89 5 tol | Heavy. 280 | Fine.

The preceding table shows that, although she was within 100 miles

of the centre of a storm between the 10th and 14th, the range of the

barometer at noon during the whole interval was only ‘14”, or very little

more than the diurnal range of the barometer in the Bay.

The Bancoora may be taken for another example :—

Barometer.| Dist- | Wind. Swell. Weather.

ance.

llth ...| 29°887 | 550 2 to 4 None. Fine.

12th ... 805 | 250 4to5 | Heavy N. E. sea. | Squally.

13th ... ‘770 70 3 to 7 | Tremendous sea in| Very squally

the morning. Heavy

sea during the after-

noon.

14th ... 839 | 280 2 to 3 Heavy sea. Improving.

178 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms ‘[No. 2,

The above shows that the Bancoora, which left the River Hooghly on

the llth, approached within 70 miles of the centre of the cyclone at

noon of the 13th. She had heavy squalls and a tremendous sea, and

yet the total range of her barometer, as determined by the noon observa-

tions, was only ‘117’, or actually less than the diurnal range of the

barometer in the Bay.

The Satara furnishes equally strong evidence. She was for a con-

siderable time in the eastern quadrant of the cyclone at no great distance

from the centre, and hence felt the full foree of the storm.

Barometer. | Dist- | Wind. Swell. Weather.

ance.

10th ... 29°89 2to5 | None. | Fine.

llth ss. *80 | 250 4 to 6 | Heavy és. Gale. Heavy squalls.

ach... ‘61 90 9 | Heavy sea.) Hard gale.

13th ... 68 39 8 to 9 | Heavy sea.| Strong gale.

The preceding observations show that on the 11th, when the state

of the sea and the strength of the wind indicated the existence of a

cyclonic storm, her barometer had not fallen a tenth of an inch. It

was only on the 12th, when she was ‘in the midst of the storm, and the

wind had increased to force 9, and was blowing a hard gale, that the

barometer began to fall to any considerable extent. |

These examples appear to establish that the barometric movements

are very small in the outer portion of the smaller cyclonic disturbances of

the Bay, and are generally smaller than those due to the regular changes

common to the whole of India. Hence the barometer gives little or no

practical warning of the approach of a small cyclone in the Bay, and

mariners should therefore rely mainly on other indications.

The path of the cyclone was contrary to all recorded experience

of storms in the Martaban Gulf. The following is the list of storms

that have been known to occur in that portion of the Bay, taken

from Mr. Blanford’s Catalogue of the recorded Cyclones in the Bay of

Bengal, up to the end of 1876, in Journ. As. Soc., Bengal, 1876,

Vol. XDVI, Pt. If :— al

1840—November 21st. To the N. E. of the Andamans.

1844—November 9th—14th. Hast of the Andamans. Encountered by

1884. ] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 179

the Briton and Runnymede troop ships. Both vessels were dismasted

and thrown on the Andamans.

1850—November 17th—19th. In the Andaman Sea. Passed east of

Port Blair and travelled N. N. W.

1854—A pril 21st—23rd. A violent hurricane in the Gulf of Martaban

~ and Rangoon.

1858—April 9th—10th. A storm from the Andamans to Cape Negrais.

Much destruction of property occurred at Henzada and Rangoon,

between which the centre passed.

There is no direct evidence in this list that any of these storms

passed from the Martaban Gulf into the Bay of Bengal. It is, however,

probable that the third storm in the list did so. It appears to be parallel

in time of occurrence, and line of advance, with the storm under discussion.

There is no apparent theoretical reason in support of the opinion that

a storm generated in the Gulf of Martaban should not pass into the Bay.

Experience certainly appears to indicate that such a line of motion is

very rare. The great majority of the cyclonic storms in the Gulf of

Martaban are generated to the east of the Andamans and north-east of

the Nicobars, and advance in a general northerly direction across the

south coast of Burmah, when they rapidly break up.

Hence, although experience is doubtless valuable in indicating the

probabilities of the occurrence of cyclones, and their line of motion, it

should be most carefully borne in mind, that they are mere probabilities

based, at the present time, on very limited experience, and that it

would almost certainly be misleading and dangerous to dogmatize our

limited experience into rules or laws, which might fail on their first

application.

Another feature deserving notice was the short period of its exist-

ence. Favourable conditions, according to the condensation theory, were

present for some days previous to the 10th. The log of the Kwang Tung

for the 7th proves that there was no cyclonic vortex in existence in the

Andaman Sea on that day. The various observations of the 8th and 9th

indicate that cyclonic motion on a considerable scale had not commenced

on either of these days. The observations of the 10th, on the other

hand, establish the existence of a small depression on that day which

rapidly developed into a large atmospheric whirl. Hence the existence

of the cyclonic vortex dates from the evening of the 9th, or morning of

the 10th. The circulation intensified and developed rapidly on the

evening of the 10th and morning of the 11th, so that there was a large

barometric depression and cyclonic circulation on that day, to the north-

east of the Andamans. The cyclone was then moving north-westwards.

180 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

It continued to accumulate energy until the morning of the 12th, when

the action of the land on the atmospheric motion in the eastern and

north-eastern portions of the cyclone retarded the advance of the vortex,

and began to influence the cyclonic motion considerably. This proceeded

at first slowly, but, as the storm moved northwards, the destructive effect

of the Burmese and Arakan hills increased, so that the rotatory motion

was gradually and completely broken up and disintegrated before the

afternoon of the 14th, in the neighbourhood of Akyab. There was thus

a period of about 48 hours, from the morning of the 10th to that of

the 12th, during which the storm accumulated energy. During the next

24 hours, the rotatory motion continued almost undiminished, whilst the

motion of translation was largely decreased. During the remaining 36

hours of its existence, the vorticose or rotatory motion was gradually

diminished.

The force of the winds at and near the centre (which might perhaps

be used to measure the intensity of the storm) depends mainly upon the

strength of the atmospheric disturbance producing the cyclonic motion,

that is, upon the rate at which aqueous vapour is condensed into rain

and upon the character and distribution of the rainfall (7. e., whether it is

localized and concentrated over a comparatively small area or diffused).

On the other hand, the extent of area over which the cyclonic dis-

turbance extends appears to depend mainly, if not entirely, upon the

length of time that has elapsed from its formation, and during which it

has advanced over the sea area uninfluenced by the land. Hence it is

that the most extensive cyclones have been generated in the centre of the

Bay, near the Andamans, and have advanced northwards to the Bengal

coast. This is not due to any meteorological peculiarity of the Bay in

the neighbourhood of the Andamans, but to the fact that a cyclone

generated there, and advancing northwards, takes a longer time to reach

the land than if it were formed in any other part of the Bay, and has

therefore a longer period during which its energy can increase.

CHAPTER V.

ConcLupING REMARKS ON THE CONDENSATION THEORY.

In the preceding pages, all the observations throwing light on the

two largest and most severe storms in the Bay of Bengal during the

year 1883 have been given, together with a discussion of their more im-

portant features. It remains to explain the chief features of the two

storms as physical phenomena, and hence also to suggest the theory of

cyclonic generation and motion which appears to be applicable to them,

and is consistent with our knowledge of the physics of the atmosphere.

—_ i i Be

1884.] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 181

In both examples, the greater portion of the mass of air that was thrown

into a state of violent motion during the storm was for some days ante-

cedent to the disturbances almost at rest, and in a state of approximate

equilibrium. There was a break in the rains immediately preceding the

formation of the first storm, which is well-known to be a period of light

and unsteady winds in Bengal, and over the Head of the Bay. The second

storm occurred very shortly after the first break in the north-east mon-

soon rains on the Coromandel coast, and when, as the various observations

prove, winds were very light and variable over the greater portion of the

Bay. Hence the first and most striking feature of these cyclones was,

that a vast amount of kinetic energy, or motion, was rapidly given to a

large mass of air which, previously to that action, was in an almost quies-

cent state. The gradual increase of the motion was in those two examples

proved from observations taken by vessels passing through the areas of

disturbance. The transformation from the state of approximate quiescence

to that of violent cyclonic motion in the Bay is consequently a continu-

ous process, the successive stages of which can be fully traced. And the

entire development of these, and of all storms in the Bay of Bengal,

appears to be due to actions occurring over the Bay itself, and not to

atmospheric conditions at a considerable distance from the area of

cyclonic disturbance.

The question of cyclone generation is therefore essentially one of

transfer of energy. Viewed in this light there are two subjects for

enquiry :—

lst. The source and character of the energy which is transferred

to the atmosphere, and transformed into the kinetic energy of a mass of

alr.

2nd. The conditions necessary for the transfer of energy under

consideration.

If these two questions are fully answered, a satisfactory explanation

will be given of cyclonic generation as a meteorological problem. The

complete mathematical treatment of this subject as a dynamical question

is beyond the scope of the present article.

The energy which is transformed during the generation and exis-

tence of a cyclone, and which maintains the cyclonic circulation against

the various resistances opposing it, and therefore tending to disinte-

grate it, is undoubtedly the latent heat energy given out during the

condensation of aqueous vapour contained in the atmosphere. In all

cyclones of the Bay of Bengal that have hitherto been investigated,

heavy and, in the majority of cases, torrential rain is the most pro-

minent feature. It increases in amount during the generation of the

cyclone, is excessive during the existence of the cyclone in its complete

182 J. Eliot—The South- West Monsoon Storms [No. 2,

form, and rapidly decreases during the disintegration of the cyclone,

ceasing with the disappearance of the cyclonic vortex. It is thus a

phenomenon parallel in character and duration with the cyclonic motion

or disturbance.

It is also equally certain that when aqueous vapour is condensed

into rain, practically the whole of the solar thermal energy utilized to

perform the work of evaporation is given out by the mass of vapour

during condensation, and is transferred to the adjacent mass of air.

Major Cunningham’s Hydraulic Experiments at Roorkee appear to

establish that the sun’s heat under the most favourable conditions, that

is, dry weather and high air temperature, does not evaporate more than

one-tenth of an inch per diem from the surface of slowly moving water.

The inverse process of condensation, in consequence of certain features

of air motion dependent on rainfall, usually proceeds much more

rapidly, and frequently restores the aqueous vapour in the form of

rain to the earth’s surface at the rate of one to two inches per hour.

Prolonged rainfall at the rate of 10 to 30 inches per diem for periods

varying from 24 to 72 hours are by no means uncommon during the

passage of the larger cyclones of the Bay of Bengal across the Bengal

sailors to describe the rainfall during cyclones in the Bay, that it is more

intense and prolonged than on land.

If we therefore compare the rates at which evaporation and condensa-

tion can occur, it is certain that the energy released during the act of con-

densation is transferred to the atmosphere with very great rapidity during

heavy rainfall and probably at a rate occasionally amounting to 100, 200,

or even 400 times that at which it was absorbed during the process

of evaporation. The effect of a continuous fall of 20 or 30 inches of

rain over any portion of the earth’s surface would, on the assumption

of Major Cunningham’s results, be equivalent to that of a sun 250 times

as powerful as our present luminary acting directly on the mass of

the atmosphere above the area of rainfall, instead of indirectly by means

of convection currents due to the heating of the earth’s land surface.

The action is also usually continuous, and is not interrupted, as in the

case of the direct solar action, by the succession of night and day.

There is therefore the strongest probability that so powerful a disturbing

action can produce very large and rapidly accumulating effects on the

mass of the earth’s atmosphere affected and influenced by it im a com-

paratively short space of time.

There hence appears to be no doubt that the energy transferred to

the atmosphere during heavy rainfall is very large, and that the source

of the energy thus indicated is adequate from every point of view to

account for the production of the largest and most intense cyclonic cir-

1884. ] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 183

culations. Other causes of the origin of cyclones have been assigned,

as, for instance, differences of pressure, friction between parallel winds

blowing from opposite directions, &c., but the slightest consideration seems

to show that none of these is sufficient to account for the enormous and

continuous transfer of energy that occurs during the prolonged existence

of a large cyclone. The strongest argument against these theories, in the

case of cyclones of the Bay of Bengal, is, that experience has established

that the larger the cyclone, the smaller are the antecedent differences of

pressure, and the feebler are the winds blowing from opposite directions,

immediately before the formation of the cyclonic vortex.

The following statements based on the preceding remarks hence give

the answer to the first part of the required explanation. When water is

converted into aqueous vapour on the large scale at the earth’s surface,

thermal energy, derived from the sun, performs the work of evaporation,

and is hence transformed. The aqueous vapour thus produced possesses an

equivalent amount of energy, the greater part, if not the whole, of which

it retains, so long as it continues in the vaporous condition. When it is

reconverted into water, or condensed as rain, this portion of its total

energy is given out, and transferred to the air. The modus operands

of this transfer is a matter of no importance in the present enquiry.

Also, in all cases when the rainfall is heavy, and prolonged for a con-

siderable time, the energy is given out at a much more rapid rate

than that at which it was absorbed during the process of evaporation.

Hence heavy and prolonged rainfall may give rise to a powerful, persis-

tent, and continuously accumulating disturbance on the adjacent atmos-

phere, and, therefore, produce violent and extensive air motion. In virtue

of the constitution of the atmosphere, the motion will be rotatory. Pro-

longed heavy local rainfall is hence an adequate and sufficient cause. It

is, moreover, the only known cause which is equal or similar in amount

to the effect, and hence there are strong reasons for assuming that it is the

motive power which produces the peculiar motion of the atmosphere called

cyclonic circulation on the large scale. It is, in fact, the most powerful

disturbing action to which the air is subject, and the consequent motion

of the air is, when the rainfall and consequent disturbance are excessive,

the most violent in its character with which we are acquainted.

The history of the two cyclones has shewn most fully that heavy

rainfall over the area of cyclonic motion or disturbance was a charac-

teristic feature, and that in this respect they confirm previous experience.

Hence the source of the energy of these two cyclones was almost cer-

tainly that which we have indicated in the previous statement, that is,

the latent heat energy of the aqueous vapour derived previously from

the sun, and transferred to the atmosphere during the process of con-

densation.

184 J. Eliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms [ No. 2,

As rainfall does not always appear to produce cyclonic motion, it is

clear that, although rainfall may be the source of energy, it is only when.

the rainfall occurs under special conditions that the accompanying air

motion increases and accumulates in the peculiar manner necessary

to give rise to a large and intense cyclonic circulation. Experience

has shown that the following conditions, which can be proved to have

a direct bearing on the formation of cyclones, are always present before

and during the generation of cyclones in the Bay of Bengal :—

1st. The establishment and prevalence of a humid current over the

extreme south of the Bay, which brings up large quantities of aqueous

vapour into the centre or north of the Bay.

2nd. The occurrence of approximate uniformity of meteorological

conditions, more especially of pressure, over the coasts of the Bay, and

frequently over a considerable portion of the Bay.

3rd. The prevalence of light and variable winds over Bengal and

the coasts of the Bay, and over a considerable portion of the Bay extend-

ing from the Bengal coast southwards. This condition is practically

identical with the previous, as both are due to, and accompany, the same

general atmospheric conditions.

4th. The absence of rainfall, and the prevalence of clear skies with

fine weather, over the north and centre of the Bay, and in Bengal.

The relative importance of these conditions will be evident on very

brief consideration. The first is evidently necessary to supply the aque-

ous vapour in sufficiently large amounts to give rise to continuous heavy

rainfall over such a large area as is covered by a considerable cyclonic

disturbance. The Bay of Bengal is not a large enough evaporating area

to afford such a supply. Hence cyclonic storms are only formed in the

Bay of Bengal when there is a humid current blowing into it from

the Indian Ocean. This occurs only during the south-west mon-

soon period, when the south-west winds blowing at the entrance of

the Bay are the northward continuation beyond the Equator of the south-

east Trade Winds of the Southern Tropics. That such is the case is

sufficiently proved by the fact that cyclonic storms on the large scale

are entirely restricted to that portion of the year when south-west mon-

soon winds are blowing over a part or the whole of the Bay, that is, from

the beginning of May to the end of December. It is also shown by the

fact that, at the commencement and termination of the south-west mon-

soon period, any cyclones that are generated, form in the south of the

Bay, whilst in the months of July and August, or during the height of

the south-west monsoon, they form near the Head of the Bay. In short,

the area of cyclonic generation in the Bay of Bengal depends mainly

upon the season, and travels northwards or southwards, according as the

south-west monsoon is advancing or retreating over the Bay.

1884. ] of the Bay of Bengal in 1883. 185

The remaining conditions appear to be necessary in order that the

rainfall may occur in such a manner as to give rise to and produce an

atmospheric whirl. It is evident that if rainfall tends to set up rotatory

motion in the air, it is absolutely necessary for rotatory motion on the

large scale that there should not be several separate centres of rainfall

and disturbance, each producing its own rotatory or cyclonic action, and

_ therefore interfering with the others. It is essential that the rainfall

— be localized and concentrated, that it should continue for some

_ time over a comparatively small area, and be confined to that area. The

- more perfectly this is realized, and the longer this continues, the greater

_ will be the accumulated disturbance. In order that the rainfall may

occur over the same area for such a considerable period as to permit of

_ the continuous accumulation of action, it is evident that ascensional

_ motion should mainly occur there, and hence that, previously, there should

be little horizontal motion of the air, and therefore very slight differences

of pressure at the sea level. The necessity for the further conditions

is hence also evident.

It will be seen that these conditions were fulfilled in the case of

both storms, more completely (as might have been anticipated) in the

case of the second storm, when the south-west monsoon current was

weaker than it was at the time of the first storm. The history and

discussion thus fully bear out the existence of the conditions immediately

antecedent to the two storms which the condensation theory asserts to be

necessary for the initiation and generation of a cyclonic storm in the

Bay.

The preceding remarks hence indicate that the energy given out

during the process of aqueous vapour condensation on the large scale is

the motive power of cyclones, and that the rainfall must be localized and

concentrated over a considerable area, for a period of one or more

days, in order to produce the continuous and rapid accumulation of

energy which characterizes a large cyclonic disturbance. Experience has

also shown that the conditions which the condensation theory suggests

as being essential for the occurrence of continuous and prolonged local

rainfall over a portion of the Bay are exactly those which are present

before and during all cyclonic storms in the Bay of Bengal, and that they

are more fully marked before the occurrence of the larger than of the

smaller cyclones of the Bay. It is, moreover, these antecedent conditions

which form the only test or indication of the possible or probable early

formation of cyclones in the Bay, and which are utilized in the preparation

of the daily weather Reports issued by the India and Bengal Meteorolo-

gical Departments.

186 J. Hliot—The South-West Monsoon Storms of the Bay of Bengal.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES II—X.

The plates give the weather charts for each day during the whole period

covered by the two storms of 1883 described in the preceding pages. The curved

lines or isobars indicate the distribution of pressure. Along any one of these lines,

the estimated air pressure at the sea-level (as determined from the reading of the

barometer) is the same. Hence no change of pressure occurs along these lines, and

the change of pressure is greatest perpendicularly across these lines. The rate of

change is most rapid where the lines are nearest together. As the difference of air

pressure between consecutive lines is the same, the rate of increase or decrease of

pressure is inversely proportional to the distance between consecutive lines. The

isobars form closed curves about the centre of a cyclonic disturbance. Hence the

position of the cyclonic vortex on any day is at once determined by an inspection of

the charts. The probable path is determined by joining these positions by lines.

The direction of the air motion near the earth’s surface is determined by the winds,

which are shown by arrows flying with the wind, or pointing to the direction

towards which the moving air is advancing. Small circles ( 0 ) indicate a calm at

the hour of observation.

The charts give the distribution of pressure and wind directions at 10 A. M. of

each day. They are based on the 10 A. M. observations taken at the land meteoro-

logical stations, and on the 8 A. M. or noon observations taken on board the ships

which have furnished logs of the weather experienced by them in the Bay during

either storm, allowance being made, wherever at is possible, for the difference of time

between the two sets of observations.

BOLI O00 OO OO OIE OOOO

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—

Part I1—NATURAL SCIENCE.

No. III.—1884.

eee

IV.—Some Rough Notes for the Construction of a Chapter in the History

of the Harth—By R. D. Otpuam, A. R.S. M., Assistant-Superinten-

dent, Geological Survey of India.

[Received Aug. 30th ;—Read Sept. 3rd, 1884. ]

To the coal-miner, or to the mere geological surveyor, the exact corre-

lation of the rocks in different parts of the world is of little importance.

Little does the mine-owner reck of whether his coal does or does not be-

long to the carboniferous era so long as it is saleable at a profit, nor need

the geologist, asked to survey and report on a coalfield, trouble his head

about this; but, to one who would unravel the physics or the history of

the earth, the solution of this problem may well be of paramount impor-

tance, though unfortunately often impossible of attainment; generally,

one might almost say always, he has to depend on fossils, but the answers

these give are often contradictory or Delphic in their obscurity; at no

time should they be too literally interpreted, but, like the cutcherry

gong in an Indian station, must be made the most of as the only

available substitute for a more accurate timepiece. But just as in

this city where there are many thousand timepieces of various descrip-

tions, of which probably no two keep identical time, every day the time-

ball falls and the signal gun is fired to let all who may be concerned

know that it is one o’clock; so in the past time-signals have been given

throughout the earth, by which we can determine the contemporaneity

of the strata in which their records have been preserved. Of this nature

would be a wide spread glacial epoch comparable to that which in the

188 R. D. Oldham—Some Rough Notes for the [No. 3,

recent past has affected both hemispheres of the globe, but, as there is

reason to believe that such have occurred at various periods in the

history of the earth, we are dependent on the otherwise less accurate

paleontological evidence for determining whether the strata shewing

signs of glacial action can have been deposited at the same period or

must belong to widely separated geological epochs.

There can be no doubt that of all forms of paleontological evidence

the most trustworthy is that afforded by the marine mollusca. Inha-

biting as they do an element of more uniform temperature, and of

which every part is in continuous if circuitous connection with the rest,

it is but natural that they should be more uniform in character than the

fauna of the land, while the simplicity of their structure, greater than

that found among vertebrates or higher invertebrates, renders them less

lable to change through alteration of the conditions under which they

live. On the other hand, this very stability of organism renders them

useless for the exact correlation of strata far separated from each other ;

for mere determination of homotaxy, even did this exist in the sense in

which the term was originally intended to bear, would be but of little value

to the physical geologist, to whom the terms ‘Jurassic’ or ‘ Carbonifer-

ous,’ if determined merely on paleontological grounds, are as meaningless,

for determination of dates in the history of the earth, as the analogous

terms ‘Stone Age’ and ‘ Bronze Age’ are for determining periods in

the history of the human race.

But, if the evidence afforded by marine mollusca is not sufficiently

accurate and trustworthy, how much more is this true of that afforded

by the terrestrial fauna and flora. True, the duration of the existence of

a species Of cycad, conifer, and, possibly, even a fern may be shorter on

the average than that of a species of mollusc, and to this extent it may

be a more accurate index of contemporaneity ; but it is comparatively

seldom that identical species are found in far separated deposits, and

paleontologists have consequently to depend mainly on what are called

‘allied species.” Now the hard parts of animals, which in almost every

case are all that are preserved to us, give, for the most part, a very

true and real indication of the affinity of the animal to which they

belonged, while, from the leaf of a tree or the frond—generally barren

or with the fructification obliterated in fossilization—of a fern, little or

nothing can be gleaned of the relationship of the plant to which it origi-

nally belonged ; thus no one would doubt that two specimens of Terebra-

tula or Ammonite, declared by a competent paleontologist to belong to

the same species, would, if we could recover their soft parts, still prove to

belong to the same or very closely allied species, while, on the other hand,

we have lately been informed, by a paleeobotanist whose competence none

1844.] Construction of a Chapter in the History of the Earth. 189

can doubt, that the Indian and Australian forms of the celebrated

Glossopteris browniana, long believed to belong to the same species,

differ so widely in their fructification that it is doubtful whether they

2 can be included in the same family, and that they must certainly belong

to different genera.*

: As an instance of uncertainty of paleontological evidence, I need only

quote the well-known case of the Umia and Katrol beds of Kutch, where

beds containing a flora with a well-marked Lower Oolite facies overlie

other beds in which the fauna is equally distinctly Upper Oolite in type ;

another case that might be quoted is that of the Rajmahal and Damuda

floras ; in the Rajmahal flora, there are, out of 47 speciesf in all, 26 which

are identical with or allied tof European species: of these, fifteen are

represented in the Rhetic beds of Hurope, one species being hardly

distinguishable from the European form: seven are represented by

Paleozoic species, two belonging to an exclusively Paleozoic genus

(EZremopteris), while another (Macroteniopteris lata) is, on Dr. Feistman-

tel’s own admission, so like the Permian Teniopteris abnormis as to be

almost undistinguishable : two species only are allied to Liassic forms,

and of these one is also represented in the Rheetic: five species are re-

presented in the Lower Oolite of Europe, two by identical forms, while, of

the other three, one is also related to a Carboniferous, and the other

two to Rheetic, species. From this, an impartial observer would be in-

clined to place the flora as certainly not later than Rheetic, but, as on this

point the talented paleontologist of the Geological Survey has expressed

a very positive opinion that the flora is Liassic in facies, I must perforce

* Paleontologia Indica, Fossil Flora of the Lower Gondwanas, Vol. III, p. 103

In this connection, I may quote Dr. Feistmantel as follows :—after noting the difference

in the fructification of the two forms, he adds ‘so that I would be quite justified in

placing these in a separate genus altogether and thus disposing of the difficulty in

determining the age of our Damuda series owing to the correlation of the Indian

Australian species.” An easy way of ‘ disposing of the difficulty’ forsooth, but my

colleague can hardly have perceived the full force of these words when he penned

them, for, carried to their legitimate conclusion, they cut away the ground on which

alone palzobotanists can base their claim for the acceptance of fossil plants as a

means of correlating distant deposits. The lesson to be learnt is rather that the

conclusions of even the ablest paleobotanists must, owing to the nature of the

material they have to work with, be received with caution, and that generic and specifio

names of fossil plants do not necessarily represent any real affinity, and that in some

cases the latter and in most cases the former are names merely and nothing more.

+ Here and elsewhere, except where the reverse is distinctly stated, I owe my

palzontological facts to Dr. O. Feistmantel’s writings in the publications of the

Geological Survey of India.

t I use this term in the same sense as it is used by paleobotanists ; it may

well be that some of these ‘ allied species’ have no real connection with each other,

190 R. D. Oldham—Some Rough Notes for the — [No B

bow to his opinion, a feat I can the more easily perform that the exact

determination of the age of the Rajmahal series is irrelevant to my

present purpose, this being merely to point out that the flora, judged by

European standards, is of an extremely heterogeneous character.

Turning now to the Damudas, we find that, out of a total 63 species,

only twenty shew any affinity to Huropean forms : of these, six are repre-

sented by Rheetic species, two of which are identical in Europe and in

India: eight are represented in Jurassic beds, one being identical with a

species from the Yorkshire Oolite, and two have their nearest allies among

living forms: while, of those which are related to species older than the

Rhetic, two are represented in the Permian, and two only are repre-

sented by allied species in the Trias. The flora of the Damudas is thus

seen to be as heterogeneous in its character as that of the Rajmahals and,

like that of the latter, would naturally be attributed to a Rheetic age, yet

the two series are not merely separated by a break in the stratification, but

the two floras are so contrasted in their characters that, whereas the

Damuda flora is almost exclusively composed of ferns, that of the Raj-

mahals is markedly the preponderance of cycads, and, of all the Rajma-

hal species, three only are represented in the Damudas and those by

“allied species.”’ These beds have been classed by Dr. Feistmantel as

Triassic, and the probabilities in favour of their bemg contemporaneous

in the Trias of Europe are about the same as those in favour of a Liassic

age for the Rajmahals or a Rheetic age for either of the two, but this

is all that can safely be said.

Turning now to the Kach flora, which, whether we judge from the

associated marine fauna or from the flora itself, is of Oolitic age, we

find, out of a total of 27 (excluding Alge) species, 18 are represented by

identical or allied species in Hurope, four are identical with Huropean

Oolitic species, of which, however, one ranges down to the Rheetic, nine

more forms are related to Huropean Oolitic species, while four only are

related to species older than the Oolite and in two cases at least the re-

lationship is not very close; we have here, then, a much closer relation

with a definite Huropean flora than is the case with the Damuda and

Rajmahal beds, and this, as I shall presently shew, is of considerable im-

portance in unravelling the history of the Gondwana age.

In Australia, there is a series of plant-bearing beds whose flora shews

many affinities with that of the Indian Gondwanas, but which range over

a more extensive period of time, and are marked, both at their upper and

at their lower limits, by the association of the plants with marine fossils.*

* Conf. principally Rev. W. B. Clarke, Remarks on the Sedimentary forma-

tions of New South Wales, 4th edition, and Dr. O. Feistmantel in Palwontographica,

1878 (Appendix).

= ted

oe Pee ee eee ee

Sethe Oe

| 1884.) Construction of a Chapter in the History of the Earth. 191

;. ’

At the base of the series, are beds whose marine fauna indicates a

_ Devonian age; above these, come beds which contain a flora consisting

_ principally of such genera as Lepidodendron, Rhacopteris, and Calamites,

~ among which occurs a single species of Glossopteris.* Above these, but

_ still below beds in which a marine fauna of Carboniferous type is found,

there is a flora which, judged by Huropean standards, is Mezozoic in

facies. At the top of the Newcastle series, to which the beds just men-

tioned belong, a more abundant flora is found, which presents many re-

lationships to that of our Indian Damudas: in both, Gilossopteris is a do-

minant type, both contain the Gilossopteris browniana and two other

species allied to Damuda forms: Sphenopteris, which in the New-

castle beds is represented by six species, is only represented in the

Damudas by one (S. polymorpha, Fstm.), which, however, is said to be

more closely allied to the Australian 8. alata than to any Huropean

form: the only species of Phyllotheca is allied to the Damuda P. indica,

and the common occurrence of Vertebraria in both is another link. That

this relationship is not so close as was at one time believed, I readily

admit, but nevertheless the relationship is real, and, though it may be

presumptuous to express an opinion at variance with that of the

talented paleontologist of the Geological Survey of India, I must say

that to me the relationship seems far closer than that which unites

the Damudas to the Trias of Kurope.

Above the Newcastle beds, come the Hawskbury beds, which have

yielded but two species of ferns, one of which (Sphenopteris alata, Bgt.),

however, is allied toa Damuda species. Above the Hawksbury, come

the Wianamatta beds, which have yielded six species of plants, no

less than three of which are allied to Damuda forms.

It is thus evidently impossible to correlate, on paleontological

grounds alone, these beds directly with any of our Indian horizons, but,

like the Indian Talchirs, the Hawksbury beds contain certain beds of fine

clay through which boulders of all sizes are scattered promiscuously in

a manner that can only be attributed to the agency of floating ice. In

Victoria, there are beds which similarly indicate the existence of a severe

climate at the time of their deposition, and these—the Bacchus Marsh beds

—have yielded three species of Gangamopteris, of which one is identical

with, and the other two are closely allied to, Talchir species. The Bacchus

Marsh beds have not yielded a single species common to themselves and

to the Hawksbury beds, but this is of little importance, as it is impossible

to suppose that the entire flora of the Bacchus Marsh period consisted

* There is some doubt attaching to the correctness of this statement. The

Glossopteris was obtained from a different locality and possibly from a newer series

of beds than the others.

192 R. D. Oldham—Some Rough Notes for the [No. 3,

of three species of Gangamopteris, or that of the Hawksbury period to

have been limited to two species of ferns. But, if not directly referable

to the same epoch by their contained fossils, there can be no doubt that

they are on the same horizon, for, in the uppermost beds of the Newcastle

series, two species of Gangamopteris are found, one identical with, and the

other allied to, species from the Bacchus Marsh sandstones of Victoria,

while the beds above the Hawksbury series in New South Wales can be

correlated with those which overlie the Bacchus Marsh beds in Victoria

by the occurrence of Pecopteris australis, Morr. and Tenopteris daintreet,

McCoy in both. The presence of beds indicating glacial action in

both and the absence of similar beds in the associated strata further

prove their absolute contemporaneity ; and by an extension of the same

reasoning we may assign the Talchirs of India to the same glacial epoch.

The paleontological relations of the Gondwanas with the Karoo and

Uitenhage series of South Africa are much simpler than with the Austra-

lian formations. From the upper part of the Karoo beds, which uncon-

formably overlie strata containing an Upper Paleozoic fauna, a limited flora

of but five species has been obtained. Of these five, one is Glossopteris brow-

niana, another, Dictyopteris ? simplex, Tate, 1s, according to Dr. Feist-

mantel, allied to Glossopteris damudica, Fstm., and Rubidgea mackayi is,

on the same authority, probably a Gangamopteris ; in addition to these, Tate

gives a species of Phyllotheca, but the identification is doubted by Dr.

Feistmantel.* Associated with these, there is an abundant and peculiar

Reptilian fauna with Dicynodon as a dominant type, a genus not known

elsewhere, except from the Panchet subdivision of the Damuda in India.

In the overlying Uitenhage series, there is a flora consisting of eleven

determinable species ; of these one species of ferns is also found in the

Rajmahals, while two, and possibly three, species of ferns and one conifer

are closely allied to Rajmahal forms.+ These Uitenhage plants are

associated with beds containing an Oolitic marine fauna. The paleonto-

logy of these beds sufficiently indicates a parallelism with the Gond-

wanas, and, in confirmation of this, we find, at the base of the Karoo

series, an undisputably glacial boulder bed,f which we shall be justified

in assigning to the same epoch as those of the Talchirs in India and of

the Hawksbury and Bacchus Marsh beds in Australia.

Viewing these circumstances, there can, I think, be no doubt that

these glacial boulder clays of Africa, India, and Australia represent one

and the same epoch in the history of the earth and are, as strictly as the

word can be applied, of contemporaneous, if not absolutely coeval, origin.

Q. J. G. S., XXIII, 140, Palwontographica, 1878, p. 114,

+ Q. J. G.8., XXIII, p. 140.

t Q.J.G.S., XXVII, 58 and 535.

1884.] Construction of a Chapter in the History of the Earth. 193

And further, as in every case the paleontological evidence indicates that

_ these glacial beds are of late Paleozoic or early Secondary age, I think

- itis probable that, as has been suggested by Mr. H. F. Blanford, they

are of the same age as the Permian boulder clays of Hurope.*

Having thus obtained a common era in the geological history of

these three countries (India, Africa, and Australia), we are able to examine

their history in an intelligent manner. The first thing noticeable is that,

in Australia, at a period corresponding fairly to the Devonian, both the

fauna and the flora were, judged by European standards, of a Paleozoic

type. Later on, probably in Lower Carboniferous times, there appears,

among species of Lepidodendron, Rhacopteris, and Calamites, which, in

Kurope, are found in rocks of Carboniferous age, a single species of

Glossopteris, the forerunner of a newer flora destined to supplant the

olderforms. In the Newcastle (Upper Carboniferous) beds, this flora has

completely eusted the older forms, and, as I have already noticed, shews

considerable relationship to that of the Damudas in India. Yet, if the

Talchirs and the Bacchus Marsh beds are really of contemporaneous

origin as was first suggested by Dr. Feistmantel, and if the Bacchus

Marsh and Hawskbury beds are also contemporaneous (and the presence

of traces of glacial action in all three is at least presumptive evidence

in favour of this conclusion), the Damudas must be of very much later

date than the Newcastle beds, and we have to explain why it is that

the Newcastle flora left Australia when it did, and why it or its descen-

dants lingered on in India, and, as I propose to shew, spread over what

is now the Old World producing important modifications in its flora.

It is possible to suppose that the Newcastle flora required a warm

—though from internal evidence one would rather look upon it as indi-

cating a cool temperate—climate ; that, on the advent of more severe con-

ditions, it migrated towards the Equator and remained there, not merely

through a period of extreme severity, but through a further period, when

the climate was cooler than it had been during the deposition of the

Newcastle beds, and during which a flora more suited to the latitude

flourished in Australia. But there are so many objections to this hypo-

thesis that it can hardly ‘be tenable, and, however wild my alternative

hypothesis may be thought, I hope to prove that it is really the more

probable of the two.

In the first place, we have to account for the prevalence of glacial

conditions at a low level in India even within the tropics. This was not

paralleled during the last glacial period, for even the erratics of the

Petwar are 10 degrees beyond the tropics and 2,000 feet above the level

* This correlation of the Indian, African, and European boulder beds has been

suggested by Mr. H. F. Blanford, Q. J. G.8., XXI, p. 519.

194 R. D. Oldham—Some Rough Notes for the [No. 3,

of the sea, while the Petwar was certainly not less elevated during the

glacial period than it is now. Further, the glacial deposits in India are

far better developed, and, to judge from the descriptions, must be far

thicker and represent a much longer period of time during which the

climate was severe than those in Australia. Yet the glacial deposits of

New South Wales are 10° further from the Equator than the Indian, so

that, if we might shift the Equator some 10° further south between India

and Australia, observed facts would be more in accordance with what

one would expect than can be the case if we are compelled to assume

the Equator fixed throughout all time.

But, if we try to compare the facts observed in Australia and beta

we are landed in astill greater difficulty, for, lying as they do on about the

same parallel of South Latitude, the glacial beds are more strongly de-

veloped in Africa even than in India ;. and, as we can hardly suppose the

greater severity of climate to be due to altitude, it must have been due to

latitude, to obtain which we must suppose that that portion of the Karth’s

crust which now forms South Africa then lay in a higher latitude than that

which is now Australia ; in other words, the comparison of the Permian (?)

glacial beds of Africa and Australia, as in the case of Australia and India,

points to the conclusion, either that there has been a change in the position

of the axis of revolution of the earth, or, what is more probable, that the

crust of the earth then occupied a position relative to the central nucleus

different from that which it now does. An experiment with a globe will

shew that the relations of India, Australia, and Africa indicated above, viz.,

that Central India was in a higher latitude than New South Wales and

South Africa in a higher latitude than either, are best satisfied by taking

the Equator between India and Australia, but nearer the latter than is now

the case, and thence through a point lying between the Cape of Good Hope

and the South Pole in not less than 70° of South Latitude; a disposition

which would bring some point in Central Africa over one of the poles.

Turning now from these physical and climatic arguments to those

derivable from palzontology, I hope to shew that they lead to the same

conclusions.

I have already referred to the fact that the Damuda and Rajmahal

floras of India shew affinities with those of almost every division of the

Mezozoic era in Hurope, and I would now draw attention to the fact that

those species which are related to upper Secondary forms in Europe

belong very largely to types which first appear in the Palzozoic beds

of Australia. Foremost among these, of course, are Glossopteris, Phyllo-

theca, and Vertebraria ; not known in Europe before Jurassic times, these

were certainly living in Australia at the commencement of the Carboni-

ferous epoch. Pecopteris, Thinnfeldia, Gangamopteris, Neggerathiopsis

1884.] Construction of a Chapter in the History of the Earth. 195

_ likewise are found in the Newcastle series of New South Wales, but in

_ Europe only in Secondary beds. Allowing that some of these genera

are purely artificial, and that the species grouped under them may not

really be allied in every case, it is on the other hand probable that

_ some forms placed under distinct genera should properly be united with

some of those grouped under the genera above mentioned, and, making

the most liberal deduction for the value or want of value of negative

evidence, I think that there is still a very considerable weight of pro-

bability, on this count alone, in favour of a newer type of vegetation

haying originated in Australia in Paleozoic times and im the Permian

period commenced to spread over the rest of the world.

The explanation seems to be that, on the advent of the Glacial

period, the flora, which had supplanted the older types in Australia, was

driven towards the Equator. As the climate ameliorated, it did not

again retreat towards Australia, either because its place was taken by

newer species, or, more probably, because, owing to changes in the distri-

bution of land and water, it could no longer do so, but to the north—or

what for convenience we may provisionally call the north,—of the

Equator it lived on in what is now India and, gradually spreading over

the hemisphere, produced a profound modification in the pre-existing

floras of what we now know as the Old World.

The flora of the Wianamatta beds, as I have explained, shews a

certain relationship with that of the Damudas, but none with that of the

Newcastle beds as far as species go; of the genera, however, three out of

the six, or, if we include the Hawksbury beds, four out of seven are also

found in the Newcastle beds. The beds newer than the Wianamattas

have yielded a flora consisting of nine species belonging to seven genera,

of which, if we except the Phyllotheca australis, only one species is allied

to an Indian form, viz., Pecopteris australis, Morr. allied to P. indica,

Oldh. and Morr. from the Rajmahals. We have here a distinct decline in

_ the closeness of relationship between the Indian and Australian floras,

and, though, of course, this might be due to the imperfection of the

record, the probabilities are against its being entirely due to that cause,

and we may safely conclude that some barrier separated the two areas,

by which the floras of India and Australia were kept apart and followed

separate and consequently diverging lines of descent.

Turning now fora while to South Africa, I must commence by declar-

ing it as my opinion that the relationships between the Indian and African

floras of the periods I am discussing are with difficulty explicable, unless

it is granted that there was in those days a continent, or at any rate a conti-

nuous chain of islands, stretching from South Africa towards India. I

am aware that Mr. A. R. Wallace has declared such to be uncalled for and

196 R. D. Oldham—Some Rough Notes for the [No. 3,

impossible to grant,* and I am ready to admit that the facts of distri-

bution of animals as detailed by him are conclusive against the possibi-

lity of such a distribution of land and water, at any rate since the Miocene

period. But there is no reason to suppose that the present distribution of

plants or animals can throw any light on the distribution of land and water

in late Paleozoic and early Secondary times. On the other hand, in favour -

of the land connection, I claim, firstly, that the relationship between the

fauna and flora of the Damudas on the one hand and the Karoo beds on

the other is far more real and close than the mere ‘ similarity of animal and

vegetable productions’ to which Mr. Wallace seems to have considered

it to be confined ; secondly, that this relationship of the two floras con-

tinued into the Uitenhage and Rajmahal series, which could hardly have

been the case had the two areas been as separated then as now; and,

thirdly, that the very peculiar relationships and differences between the

cretaceous faunas of Central and Southern India on the one hand and

Arabia and South Africa on the other are such as imperatively to de-

mand the existence of a continuous barrier of dry land stretching be-

tween India and Africa. It is needless to expatiate further on this point,

for, if such a barrier existed during the Cretaceous period, any argument

against its possibility derived from the doctrine of the permanence of

continents must fall to the ground, and there remains no reason why, if

on independant grounds its existence is shewn to be probable, such a

modification as I require may not have existed at the commencement of

the Secondary period. That, during the deposition of the Damudas, there

was continuous land communication with South Africa I do not suppose,

for the very remarkable reptilian fauna, which, like the recent marsupial

fauna of Australia, mimicked many of the higher mammalia, points

rather to some isolated continental island which was connected with

India, as Australia now is with Asia, by a chain of large islands separated

by narrow straits, across which the spores of ferns and the seeds of

plants could be wafted, but which were impassable to terrestrial reptiles.

But even a land connection of this sort would probably be inade-

quate by itself to account for the close relationship which the small frag-

ment preserved to us of the flora of the Uitenhage period shews to that of

the Rajmahals. For it is at least highly probable that the heat of the

Equator would be as effectual a barrier as a broad sea, and, if the floras of

India and Africa had pursued independent courses of development for a

period sufficient for the dying out of every species and almost every

genus, and for a change in the facies of the flora from one composed

mainly of ferns to one composed mainly of cycads, it is inconceivable that

the floras of the Uitenhage and Rajmahal series should exhibit the close

* Island Life, p. 398.

~ ee

1884.] Construction of a Chapter in the History of the Earth. 197

relationships they do. But this difficulty would not exist could we

suppose that what are now South Africa and India then lay on the same

side of the Equator; and thus the paleontology of these beds, as well as

_ their petrology, points towards the conclusion that in early Secondary

times the crust of the earth did not occupy the same position with respect

to the axis of rotation as it now does.

That none of these arguments are conclusive by themselves I ad-

mit; I willingly admit that the floras preserved to us represent but a

fraction of the species that lived when the beds that have yielded our

fossils were being deposited, but the probability is vastly against only

those species which were related to each other in the two countries

being preserved, and we may, I think, safely argue from the small sample

preserved to the larger bulk which is lost. In the same manner, I freely

admit that the differences in the severity of climate may have been due

to other causes besides difference of latitude, but on the average a colder

climate indicates a higher latitude, and, when we find that, from whatever

point we approach this matter, we are led towards the same conclusion,

it seems to me that there is a very strong presumption in favour of its

truth.

I fear this paper has already extended to too great a length for

me to examine the arguments that have been put forward to prove that

any change of latitude is physically impossible, but I cannot conclude

without pointing out that what has been proved is that no conceivable

elevation or depression of the earth’s surface could produce an appreci-

able alteration in the axis of rotation of the earth asa whole. But, though

the mathematical reasoning on which this conclusion is based may be

unassailable, it has no bearing on the question of whether changes of

latitude may not have taken place in the past, except on the assumption

that the earth is rigid throughout, and that the crust has no power of

sliding over the heated if solid core, an hypothesis which has been ably

combated by the Rev. O. Fisher,* and which I hold to be inconsistent

with the known facts of stratigraphical geology. While, if the views

put forward in this paper are true,—and there seems to me a very strong

presumption in their favour,—the crust of the earth must in Mezozoic

times have occupied a very different position with reference to the axis of

rotation from that which it does at the present day.

As yet the only fact which has in any material degree attracted the

attention of English geologists is the prevalence during the past of mild

climates within what are now the Arctic regions; and hypotheses have been

broached to account for this independent of an alteration of the position

* Physics of the Earth’s Crust passim ; see particularly p. 184,

198 R. D. Oldham—Some Rough Notes, &c. [No. 3,

of the crust relative to the central core of the earth; but the more com-

pletely such an hypothesis may explain the absence of any trace of glacia-

tion in the Paleozoic, Secondary, or Tertiray rocks of the Arctic regions,

to which Baron Nordenskj6ld has drawn our attention, the more irrecon-

cileable is it with the repeated traces of glacial action that are met

with almost within the tropics. Yet the latter as urgently requires

explanation as the former, and I have put these suggestions forward not

from any conviction of their intrinsic truth, but because I feel that the

rigid bonds within which mathematicians have sought to confine geo-

logists must be largely and materially relaxed, because I feel that every

addition to the growing pressure against these bonds is of some—even if

but small—importance, but chiefly because I trust that I may be instru-

mental in drawing the attention of others with greater opportunities

and greater abilities to the solution of this problem.

P. S.—Just a week before this paper was read Mr. W. T. Blanford,

addressing the geological section of the British Association at Montreal,

devoted the greater part of his address to the consideration of a

subject to which he has before now referred, more particularly in the

Records of the Geological Survey of India, and on which I have cursorily

touched in the introductory part of this paper; I mean the uncertainty

of paleontological evidence in determining the exact correlation of

widely separated beds. He also refers to a report on the Stormberg

coal-fields by Mr. E. J. Dunne, which I have strangely overlooked :

Mr. Dunne mentions the existence of three species of plants in the

Stormberg beds identical with Australian species, an identification which,

if correct, greatly diminishes, if it does not altogether annihilate, the

value of my argument from the relationships between the African and

Indian early Secondary floras, but this is of the less importance, as, owing

to the known value or want of value of negative evidence in palsonto-

logy, little value would in any case attach to an argument of this kind.

)J. WOOD-MASON, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1884, Vol.LIL,Pt IL. PL. XIIL.

Sax 2. 4a x 2,

BLD. del. J -W-M.dir Mintern. Bros imp . Parker & Coward. hth

Genus HESTIAS.

Autor del. ’ Mintern. Bros imp . Parker & Coward hth

SIMULIUM INDICUM.

1884.] HE. Becher—4A new Species of Simulium from Assam. 199

V.—A new Species of Simulium from Assam.—By Dr. Epwarp Bacuer,

Vienna. Communicated and translated by the Natura History

SECRETARY.

[Received October 13th ;—Read November 5th, 1884. |

(With Pl. XIV.)

SIMULIUM INDICUM, nov. spec.

9. Caput et thorax brunneo-nigra; thorax convexus, scutellum

migrum ; palpi 4-articulati, fusci ; antennae 10-articulatae, fuscae ; alae

magnae, latae, nervi costales crassiores quam reliqui ; pedes varti : femora

et tibiae in basi flavae, in apice fuscae, tarsi fusct ; abdomen breve, seg-

mentum primum latissimum; hoc et triwm sequentium pars ventralis

flavicans, cetera subfusca. Longitudo 3 mm.

Head free, standing pretty low; brown-black; forehead broad,

clypeus short, nearly vertical ; eyes kidney-shaped, with a moderate notch

for the reception of the first antennal joint. Ocelli wanting. Antenne

dark brown-black, 10-jointed; the second joint distinctly constricted

off from, and equal in length to, the first, and longer than the rest;

the three succeeding joints broader than long, telescoped into one an-

other ; the four next equally long and broad, each tapering to the apex,

the last joint pointed at the apex, somewhat longer than the preceding.

Proboscis salient, dark; mouth-parts differing in matters of detail

only from those of the typical form ; palpi dark, 4-jointed, the basal joints

lighter ; the first joint short, the palp-scale resembling it and thus appa-

rently representing a fifth joint, the second and the third joints almost

of the same length, the fourth 13 times as long as the third, all the

joints pretty equally broad and moderately bristly.

Thorax brown-black, high-arched, without transverse suture, tergum

and scutellum velvet-black, somewhat shining, sides of the thorax lighter,

especially near the coxz of the first pair of Jegs.

Wings* large and broad, the marginal vein thick, terminating before

the apex of the wing, the anterior branch of the first longitudinal vein

clature of the veins of the wings is retained in the following description. According

to Adolf’s theory, the veins should, in consideration of Brauer’s work on this subject,

be named as follows:—the anterior branch of the first longitudinal vein = the

auxiliary vein (Hilfsader) ; the principal branch of the first longitudinal vein =

the first longitudinal vein; the small transverse vein = the trunk of the third

longitudinal vein’; the third and the fourth longitudinal veins = the third longitn-

dinal vein ; the succeeding fold= the fourth longitudinal vein; the fifth and the

sixth longitudinal veins = the fifth longitudinal vein ; the fold = the anal vein (Conf.

Brauer, Denkschr. d. Kais. Akad. d. Wissen. Wien, Math. Nat. Cl. Bd. xliv, 1882,

p. 90, and Wiener Hut. Zeitschr. ii, 1883, Heft 2, p. 27).

; * In order to facilitate comparison with other descriptions, the usual nomen-

}

————— eee

200 E. Becher—A new Species of Simulium from Assam. [No. 3,

short, scarcely reaching the middle of the wing, the principal branch

longer, running out near the third longitudinal vein; the second longi-

tudinal vein wanting; the third branching off from the first before the

middle, running into the marginal vein far before the apex of the wing ;

the three first veins thick and distinct ; the succeeding ones very weak ;

the fourth longitudinal vein forked at the so-called small transverse

vein, the prongs of the fork hence much longer than the handle, the

upper prong slightly bisinuous, the lower almost straight; the fifth

vein straight, a little bent outwards ; the sixth strongly bisinuous ; the

axillary vein not reaching the hinder margin, slightly sinuous; between

the fourth and the fifth veins a straight, very distinct fold; a similar

though weaker fold behind the sixth vein. Halteres uncovered, dazzling

white.

Legs: coxe dark, trochanter long, yellowish; femora and tibie

throughout black-brown, metatarsus lighter at the base, a little shorter

than the tibia ; all the tibiee with spurs, metatarsus of the third pair of

legs notched at the apex (figs. 5, 6), those of the two first pairs trun-

cate, spurred; the fourth tarsal joint expanded into a heart-shaped

figure; the fifth longish clavate, with long divergent curved bristles,

which in the first pair of legs are seated on the third tarsal joint; legs

thickly covered with hairs, particularly on the tarsus, ungues small,

pulvilli rudimentary.

Abdomen short, of eight segments ; the first segment is the broadest

and, like the sternal parts of the three succeeding segments, yellowish ;

the genital parts a little projecting.

The above-described species of Simuliuwm is the first that has yet

been made known from Asia, as only a few non-European forms have

hitherto been described, whereas the number of European species is not

inconsiderable.

The larve and the pupe (figs. 11, 12, 13) of the European species

live in water; the latter in conical (tuétenartigen) cocoons attached to

stones, stalks of grass, confervee, and the like.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

Fig. 1. Simulium indicum, 9, x 8. Fig. 2. Wing x 8. 3a. A leg of the first

pair x 15. Fig. 3b. Tarsus of the same leg x 60. Fig. 4a. A leg of the second pair x

15. Fig. 4b. Tarsus of the same x 60. Fig. 5a. A leg of the third pair x 15. Fig. 5b.

Tarsus of the same x 60. Fig. 6. Head from in front x 30. Fig. 7. Antenna x 90.

8. Mandible x 90. Fig. 9. Hypopharynx x 90. Fig. 10. Maxilla and palp x 90.

Fig. 11. Larva of Simulium ornatum, Mg. x 6. Fig. 12. Pupa of Simuliwm sp. in

its conical cocoon.

ne mht MM Hit ieamnite

SAIURAND GG. °UCHRTEY”cHTNGOAITON

rete if

| SA NEAEPSOHVG:AVGQV UA SUORSOMIODASUUE

} “ST MPT aT aL

me ELUTE TTT

MAU EAPSVOMEREADOEDSSUEN) UHEUORTEE PATE

LOOK apt

gseee

| |

ra)

®@

ong

% 1884.] A. N. Pearson—Variations of Rainfall in Northern Indtz. 201

A Vi—Variations of Rainfall in Northern India during the Sunspot

4 : Period.— By A. N. Pearson, Esq., Officiating Meteorological Reporter

a for Western India. Communicated by the PRESIDENT.

[Received October 6th ;—Read November 5th, 1884. }

(With rl, XI.)

Mr. S. A. Hill, in his paper on the “ Variations of Rainfall in

Northern India,” published in the Indian Meteorological Memoirs, Vol. I,

showed very clearly the opposition that exists between the variations of

the winter and of the summer rainfall in Northern India during the

sunspot period. For the purpose of bringing forward with greater

clearness the main points of his investigation, he put the actual rain-

fall totals—which, as they stood, showed considerable apparent irregu-

larities—through a simple process of smoothing such as is frequently

adopted in dealing with statistical tables; and, by so doing, eliminated

the apparent irregularities. But it appears to me that the unsmoothed

results present points of interest over and above those that are presented

by the smoothed results ; that, in fact, the apparently irregular variations

are regulated in a very definite manner.

In the table here given, I reproduce the general means of Mr. Hill’s

Tables II and IV, together with the smoothed results as he gave them

in the text.

Variations of the Rainfall for each Year of the Hleven Year Cycle

in Percentages of the Local Means.

Winter Rainfall. Summer Rainfall.

- ie aetna Eitchaen eked

Year of the a cd 9 A = od

Seed yy

Cycle. S a 5 5 r-| 3

» - | Be) es q ° Re

n eo) tt n (e)

| d eo =| A S =|

‘ ss Se a 2 A =) a) A

Ist —176 |—171 |— O57] + 08) + 36] — 2:8

2nd = 46 )—136 | + 90) +107) 4+ 74) + +53

3rd —256 | —188 |— 68] + 33) + 98] — 65

4th —195 | —204 | + 09] +4 19°38) + 12°6 + 72

5th —170 |— 78 |— 92+ 74) + 78) — O4

6th 1291 | +231 |— Tr0Ol— 35 |— 56 + 21

7th + 654 | +356 | + 29°38 | —22°7 |} —108/ —11°9

Sth —104 | +157 ; —2611+ 56)— 8l + 13°7

9th +183 | +102 | + 81]—210, —100| —110

| 10th +149 | + 49 | +100]— 36|]— 70| + 34

—149 |—1371+4+ 02|— 06 + 08

11th — 28°6

)

202 A. N. Pearson—Variations of Rainfall in Northern [No. 3,

The smoothed numbers of the above table are curved in the accom-

panying diagram (Pl. XT) in thick continuous lines, under the names

‘“* Winter Rainfall, A” and “ Summer Rainfall, B.’”’ The figures so pro-

duced are identical with the curves given by Mr. Hill in his paper. The

unsmoothed numbers of the above table are in the diagram superposed in

dotted lines upon the smoothed curves. At the bottom of the diagram,

T have reproduced the sunspot curve as given by Mr. Hill.

On inspecting the smoothed rainfall curves, it will be seen that the

winter and the summer curve both agree in showing a single oscillation

during the eleven years of the sunspot period; but they differ in the

character of that oscillation, for, while the winter rainfall is at its maxi-

mum during the year of sunspot minimum, the summer rainfall on the

contrary is then ata minimum. This is the main fact pointed out in

the paper above quoted.

On inspecting the actual figures, however,—the unsmoothed num-

bers in the above table and the dotted curves A and B of the dia-

gram—it will be seen that, besides this eleven yearly oscillation, both

the winter and the summer rainfall show several variations of minor

period such as one might naturally suppose to be accidental ; thus the

winter rainfall shows three distinct maxima, one in the 2nd year of

the sunspot cycle, one in the 7th year, and one in the 9th and 10th, and

shows marked minima in the 3rd, 8th, and 11th years ; while the summer

rainfall has maxima in the 2nd, 4th, and 8th years and minima in the 8rd,

7th, and 9th.

It is to these minor period oscillations that I wish in this short

paper to call attention. And, in order that they may present themselves

in a more convenient form for study, I have separated them from the

eleven yearly oscillation by the simple method of subtracting the

smoothed numbers in the above table from the unsmoothed. The

differences are curved in the diagram under the name “ Minor Oscilla-

tions of A and B,” the winter oscillations being given in dot-and-dash

lines, and the summer in simple dotted lines.

Confining attention to these ‘‘ minor oscillations ”’ curves, it will be

noticed that, in those years which at the foot of the diagram are marked

+, and which are years of maximum sunspot, the short period oscilla-

tions in the winter and the summer rainfall are of the same character,

that is to say, that when there is more winter rain there is more summer

rain, and when there is less of the one there is less of the other also.

But it will be seen that, in those years which at the foot of the diagram

are marked —, and which are years of minimum sunspot, the short

period oscillations in the winter rainfall are of opposite character to those

in the summer rainfall, that when there is more rain in the winter there

1884.) India during the Sunspot Period. 203

is less during the summer, and vice versd. Again, in those years which

_ in the diagram are marked +, and which immediately precede the

_ years of sunspot maximum and minimum, the order above pointed out

obtains only in a slight degree ; in other words, these are years of transi-

tion. ‘

That these facts are purely the result of accident seems very un-

likely, for they are supported by three other series of concurrent facts ;

which are as follow :—

lst. The plus years begin immediately after the sunspot maxima, and

the minus years begin immediately at the sunspot minimum.

2nd. There are more transition years during the slow descent of the

sunspot curve than during its rapid ascent.

3rd. The oscillations of both the winter and the summer rainfall are

of greater amplitude during the negative years than during the positive.

With reference to the first of the above series of facts, it might be

supposed that, as the minus years begin immediately at the sunspot mini-

- mum, so for perfect analogy the plus years should begin immediately at

the sunspot maximum. But this is by no means necessary, for the slight

delay in the coming in of the positive years agrees very well with the

slow descent of the sunspot curve as compared with its rapid ascent.

The main fact which I have pointed out in this paper,—namely,

that the smaller variations of the winter rainfall are the same in character

as those of the summer rainfall during years of maximum sunspot; and

opposite in character during years of minimum sunspot,—if it can

be established as a general rule, will be an important one; for it will

indicate that, whatever be the cause which produces the general opposi-

tion in character between the eleven yearly variations of the winter and

of the summer rainfalls, that cause operates chiefly during the years of

minimum sunspot, and during three years of maximum sunspot it operates

only in a very minor degree, and in two of those years (namely, the 1st

and 2nd) it probably does not operate at all. By thus limiting the period

during which the cause operates, a valuable point is gained, and a clue to

a knowledge of the cause possibly afforded.

It is also interesting to notice that not only do the rules above in-

dicated obtain qualitatively, but that there is also a near approach to a

quantitative relation between the short period oscillations of the summer

and the winter rainfall respectively. The nature of this relation in the

years which I have denoted as positive, namely, in the lst, 2nd, and 3rd

years of the sunspot cycle, will be seen at once on inspecting the “ minor

oscillations” curve of the diagram. It will be observed that the oscil-

lation which takes place in the two curves during those three years is

not only the same in phase, but is nearly the same in amplitude. The

LS a PR OS gO ee ee her ae SO ae

eS Me at Ve,

204 <A. N. Pearson—Variations of Rainfall in Northern, &e. [No. 3,

fact can be expressed numerically by taking the percentage rainfall as

given in the “ Difference ” columns of the above table ; when it will be

seen that the winter rainfall of the 2nd year was 16°3 heavier than during

the Ist and 3rd years taken together; while the summer rainfall was

14°6 heavier. The numbers, 16°3 and 146, which according to this me-

thod are a measure of the excess of the winter and the summer rainfall

respectively during the 2nd year, approach each other sufficiently to be

noticeable.

The nature of the quantitative relation during the negative years,

namely, the 7th, 8th, and 9th, will be best seen by an examination of the

actual rainfall of those years. This, obtained from Mr. Hiil’s Tables I (A

and B) and III (A and B), is as follows :—

Winter Rainfall. Summer Rainfall.

Year of the

Cycle.

Hills. | Plains. Mean. | Hills. | Plains. Mean.

inches. | inches. | inches. | inches. | inches. inches.

Ist 17°95 6°30 T212 41°81] 26°36 3408

2nd 9°58 32a 6°40 5401 34°63 44°32

3rd 16°55 4r5Y 10°57 47°13 27°03 37°08

Average of

the three | 9°70 38°49

years.

Dealing only with the mean results, the variations in each year

from the three years’ average are in the case of the summer and the

winter rainfalls respectively as follows :—

7th year. 8th year. 9th year.

Winter + 2°42 — 330 + 0°87

Summer — 4°41 + 5°83 — 1°41

Now the poiut to be noticed is that

2°42: 441 :: 3:30: 5°83 :: 0°87: 1:41,

or very nearly so; the winter figures to be in exact proportion should be

2°53, 3°34, and 0°81; but the approach to exactness is sufficiently near

to be striking, and to make one suspect that there has been something

more than chance at work in its production. If this proportion can be

established as a general rule, it will signify that, during the three years

F. Moore—On a new Moth from Mergqui. | 205

at, and immediately succeeding, the sunspot minimum, an excess of | inch

in the winter rainfall is accompanied by a defect of about 1°74 inches in

the summer rainfall, and a defect of 1 inch during winter is accompanied

_ by an excess of 1°74 inch during summer.

It is not my intention, for the present at least, to seek out the full

meaning of these facts ; indeed, it is scarcely within my province to do

_ so, as the investigation is already in more experienced hands than mine.

But the facts forced themselves on my notice, and they seemed of

_ sufficient importance to justify their publication.

Vil.—Description of a new Lepidopterous Insect belonging to the Hetero-

cerous Genus Trabala.—By F. Moors, F. Z. 8., A. L. S. Com-

municated by the NaturaL History SECRETARY.

(Received August 26th ;— Read December 3rd, 1884.)

TRABALA IRRORATA, 0. Sp.

@. Upperside dark olivaceous ochreous-yellow, sparsely speckled

with dark purple-brown scales, which are most numerously disposed

on the exterior border, and sinuously across the inner disc of both

wings and also subbasally across the forewing, as well as on the pos-

terior border of the forewing. Both wings with a discal transverse

zigzag series of large lilacine-grey spots, which are also thickly speckled

with the dark brown scales; forewing also with the posterior border

blotched with lilacine-gray, and with a prominent lilacine-gray spot,

with dark brown speckled border, in the middle of the cell. Cilia en-

tirely yellow.

Underside slightly paler than the upperside; both wings with

the discal zigzag spots as above, the exterior borders less sparsely

speckled with brown scales; a slight brown-speckled sinuous discal band

also on the hindwing; cell-spot indistinct.

Body brighter yellow, and tuft lilacine-white.

Expanse 37 inches.

Haz. Mergui. Collected by Dr. J. Anderson, F. R. 8.

206 J. Wood-Mason—On the Genus Phyllothelys. [No. 3,

VIII.—Phyllothelys, a remarkable Genus of Mantodea from the Oriental

Region.—By J. Woov-Mason, Deputy Superintendent, Indian Mu-

seum, Calcutta.

(With Plate XII.)

Genus Puy.tiotHetys, W.-M.

P. A. 8. B. 1876, p. 176.—A. & M. N. H. 1876, 4th ser. vol. xviii, p. 507.—P. E.

Soc. 1877, p. xviii.

&. 2. Vertex directed forwards and slightly upwards, strongly

protuberant between the juxtocular lobes; the protuberance flat and

triangular in front, behind convex and trefoil-shaped, being divided

into three lobes, one large and median and two small, equal, and lateral ;

the former produced at the apex into a long, narrow, and very gradually

tapering horn, which is expanded, together with the lobes themselves,

in the middle line posteriorly and at the sides, into sharp foliaceous

crests, and which may be rudimentary in the male; facial shield pen-

tagonal, about as long as broad, marked with two blunt longitudinal

ridges, and with its basal angle slightly projecting. Hyes oval, tolerably

prominent, not narrowed as in Phyllocramia. Pronotum long and

slender, nearly five times as long as its parallel-sided anterior lobe,

very gradually widening from its narrowest part just behind the

dilatation, and equally gradually increasing in height, to its base, close

to which it bears a prominent smooth tubercle, and where it is nearly as

wide as at the distinct dilatation; prosternum slightly and decreasingly

roof-shaped from the insertion of the forelegs backwards. Anterior coxe,

long and slender, when laid back not reaching to the base of prothorax,

their apical lobes not divergent, but close together; tibie half the

length of the femora, with only the basal 5 or 6 of the spines of the outer

edge curved towards the margin; femora with 3 spines on the outer

edge and 4 on the disc; four posterior legs short; femora with geni-

cular spines and with foliaceous lobes on the lower crest; tibiw with

their apical half inflated latero-superiorly. Axillary and anal veins

of tegmina running one immediately after the other into the internal

ulnar vein, first ulnar vein branched ; ulnar vein of wings 2-branched.

Abdomen depressed, widening more ( ¢ ) or less ( ¢ ) from base to end of

5th somite, the remaining somites forming a triangular figure with more

or less serrated sides; the dorsal arc of its 10th somite roof-shaped,

broader than long, subtriangular.

This interesting and curious form may be provisionally placed be-

tween the African genus Phyllocrania and the Oriental genus Anazarcha.

B.L.D.et J.W-M. del. Mintern Bros. mp Parker & Coward lith

1-2.Phyllothelys westwoodi, & &.

5. Phyllothelys paradoxum, o nymph.

J. Wood-Mason—On the Genus Ph yllothelys. 207

1. PHYLLOTHELYS wESsTwoop!, W.-M., Pl. XII, Figs. 1—2.

loc. supra cit.

' @.2. Rich dark or light umber-brown of the colour of bark and

dead and rotten leaves.

?. Vertex greatly protuberant; the protuberance divided into

three lobes, two small and hemispherical, lateral and basal, and one large,

the median lobe of the vertex, flat, smooth, and triangular in front, but

- convex in every direction behind, and rounded at the apex, from which it

suddenly gives off a long, slender, and very gradually tapering almost

_ linear horn ; the protuberance is marked off in front from the rest of the

head by a transverse groove which corresponds to an imaginary straight

line drawn tangentially to the upper surface of the eyes, and the sides

of its median lobe and of the horn into which this is prolonged are ex-

panded into foliaceous crests, which are turned up or rather back at

their outer edges and, being longitudinally wrinkled on their anterior

_ surface, are hence sharply marked off from the perfectly smooth primitive

horn ; this is raised, in the middle line of its posterior face, into a thin,

sharp, and prominent crest, which is continued a short distance on to the

protuberance itself, and, owing to the forward curvature of the horn, as

well as to its own decrease in height from the base upwards, hence has

its free edge distinctly arched. In the male, the horn and its parts are

reduced to a quite rudimentary condition and are folded up into a

soft, flexible, and slightly asymmetrical conical process only about

1 millim. in length. Facial shield pentagonal, fully as long as broad,

with two distant and incomplete longitudinal ridges on its disc and a

blunt spiniform tubercle projecting from its basal angle. Hyes rather

prominent ; not nearly so narrow as in Phyllocrania.

Prothorax greatly elongated and slender, devoid of all traces of

foliaceous expansions; prosternum roof-shaped decreasingly from the

setting-on of the forelegs backwards and thickly speckled with darker ;

pronotum narrowing behind the dilatation and then widening again,

- concomitantly increasing in height, to the base, where it is as broad

as at the dilatation, and where it bears in the middle line an elongate

and slightly bilobed smooth tubercle; with its lateral margins finely

denticulate and with a well-developed supracoxal dilatation ; its anterior

lobe parallel-sided, with a median dorsal ridge lodged in a shallow

depression ; its posterior lobe provided with a raised median longitudinal

ridge decreasing from the base forwards and becoming stronger again

at the dilatation, where, like the ridge on the anterior lobe with which

it is in unbroken coutinuity, it is lodged in a shallow depression.

208 J. Wood-Mason— On the Genus Phyllothelys. _ [No. 3,

The forelegs are long and slender. The coxe are triquetrous and

when laid back do not reach to the base of the prothorax; their inner

face is coloured red-violet surmounted on the upper crest by yellowish

marked with 10—13 minute elongate black spots lying at the bases of as

many minute black spinules, between which are some very much more

minute yellowish ones. The femora are very slightly sinuous above, but

arched below ; their outer face bears one distinct oblique bar and a minute

mottling of a darker shade of brown than the ground-colour ; their inner

face is black, with the apex, a complete transverse bar nearer to the ungual

groove than to the apex, and an oblong mark nearly midway between

the ungual groove and the base on the upper half, all yellow; tibie

jet-black internally and below, armed on the inner edge with 14—15 and

on the outer edge with 16 teeth, the basal five only of which are more

recumbent than the rest and even they do not nearly touch the margin,

or even one another ;. the intermediate and posterior legs are short ;

they are ridged as in Phyllocrania ; the posterior of their lower crests

bears a foliaceous lobe divided by an emargination into a very small

proximal and a much larger distal portion with a rounded and nearly

entire margin ; the tibie have no foliaceous crests, but, in lieu thereof,

the proximal half swollen and thickened club-like laterodorsally, as

in one or both of the same pairs of legs in the species of the tropical

American genus Acanthops and its allies.

Organs of flight extending very little beyond the extremity of the

abdomen, coloured. Tegmina coriaceous, opaque umber-brown anteriorly,

posteriorly membranous and hyaline covered irregularly with brown-

smoky spots, which tend in places to coalesce so as to form a coarse

mottling ; anal gusset reticulate, with the membranous meshes smoky

and the net-work obsoletely lined with hyaline; the stigma elongate,

polished. Wings with the anterior margin semiopaque umber-brown,

the apex of the anterior area distinctly brown-spotted like the corres-

ponding part of the tegmina; all the rest of the organs brown smoky-

quartz-coloured, gradually increasing in intensity from the base to the

outer margin, and tolerably distinctly lined with hyaline on both sides

of the transverse veinlets.

Abdomen broad and depressed, gradually widening from its base

to the end of the 4th somite, whence it widens with greater rapidity to

the end of the 5th, the posterior angles of which are produced outwards ;

the rest of the abdomen forming a triangular mass the sides of which

are slightly jagged owing to the production of the posterior angles of the

dorsal arcs of the 6th and 7th somites ; the terminal dorsal are is crescent-

shaped, longitudinally roof-shaped, and more than twice as broad as long.

1884.) J. Wood-Mason—On the Genus Phyllothelys. 209

The cerci are of the ordinary slender conical form and do not reach so

_ far as the end of the ovipositor.

é. Smaller and slenderer with the cephalic horn and its crests,

as has been already stated, reduced to a rudimentary condition and

all folded or shrivelled up together soas to form a soft and flexible

projection no more than about a millimetre in length.

Organs of flight almost wholly membranous and hyaline. Tegmina

with the marginal field semiopaque brown resolved into spots at the

apex, with a few scattered groups of areolets in the discoidal area

and the meshes of the anal gusset faintly smoky, and with some dark

brown linear dashes on the longitudinal veins. Wings with their

anterior margin pale brown spotted at the apex, the rest of these organs

being very faintly iridescent-smoky, with obsolete double hyaline edgings

to the transverse violets, from the base nearly to the outer margin,

along which the smokiness and the longitudinal veins are alike darker,

especially in the anterior area.

In the Tenasserim specimen of this sex the cephalic protuberance

is more broadly rounded at the top and less produced, and the horn

is more rudimentary ( ? in consequence of the specimen being a dried

one), but there is no other apparent difference between it and the spirit-

specimen from Assam described above, except perhaps in the tint

(exaggerated in fig. 1) of the wings, which is slightly deeper in the

latter. }

Total length, 2 51, $40; height of head, from free margin of

labrum to apex of horn, 2 14, ¢ 4:5, breadth of head between the eyes,

? 4:5, g 3°75, length of horn, from a straight line drawn tangentially

to the upper surface of the eyes, ¢ 10, ¢ 15; length of antennae, 9

22, g 22; length of pronotum, ? 22, ¢ 14:5, of its anterior lobe, ? 5,

$ 3:3, of its posterior lobe, 2.17, g¢ 11:2, breadth of pronotum at supra-

coxal dilatation, 2 3°5, g¢ 2°75; length of fore-coxa 2 13, g 9, femur,

9 145, 3 10, tibia, 2 8, ¢o 5°5, intermediate femur, 9 5°5, ¢ 4:5, tibia,

? 5, 6 4, posterior femur 2 7'5, g 6, tibia 2 7, $ 5:5; length of teg-

mina 9 27, o 27, breadth across middle 2 6°5, ¢ 6 millims.

Has.—2 2 and 1 9 nymph, Sibsagar, Assam (8. H. Peal), 1 6,

Buxa, Bhutan (Dr. Lewis Cameron), and 1 do Moolai, Upper Tenasserim

(Moti Ram) in Indian Museum, Calcutta. A fine female is preserved

in the British (Natural History) Museum, South Kengsington, London.

2. PHYLLOTHELYS PARADOXUM, n.sp., Pl. XII, Fig. 3.

¢@ nymph. Nearly allied to the preceding, which it closely resem-

bles in the relative proportions of its parts and in every detail of colour

and ornamentation, but from the same sex of which it differs in the

possession of a fully developed cephalic horn and from the opposite sex

210 K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

in the form of this horn, which is slenderer, much more thinly folia-

ceous, and jagged, instead of entire, on the edges, so as to resemble a

very narrow pinnately-cleft leaf, the mid and lateral ribs of which are

represented by the thick and hence opaque axes of the horn and its

lateral processes. The fore tibize have 16 teeth on the outer edge and

14 on the inner.

The only measurements of this immature insect that can usefully

be given are :—length of pronotum 11, of fore femur 7, height of head,

from free edge of labrum to top of horn, 7 millims.

Has. Burmah.

This interesting animal was presented to me many years ago by my

friend Mr. William Theobald of the Geological Survey of India.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII.

Fig. 1. Phyllothelys westwoodi, W.-M., 6, with wings extended, nat. size ;

1 a. the head, viewed from in front, x 2; 1 0b. the left fore-leg, from the inside,

we?

Fig. 2. Phyllothelys westwoodi, 9, with wings extended, nat. size; 2 a. the

head, from behind, x 2; 2 b. the same, from in front, x 2; 2c. the end of the

abdomen, from above, x 2; 2d. the posterior leg of right side, from in front, x 2.

Fig. 8. Phyllothelys paradowwm, n. sp., g nymph, the head, from in front,

x 3.

2032 OOOO YY OS™

1X.—Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No. 1.—By E. T. Arxinson, B. A.

Unless where expressly stated to be descriptions, the notes attached

to each species are merely intended as aids to identification ; and the

measurements of specimens not in the Indian Museum have been con-

verted into millimetres from the measurements of the severa] authors.

HOMOPTERA.

Family Crcapipa, Westwood, Introd. Mod. Class. Ins. ii, 420 (1840).

Stridulantia, Stal, Hem. Afric. iv, p. 1 (1866).

Ocelli three, placed on the disc of the vertex. Pronotum and

mesonotum very large. Anterior coxe prismatic, oblong, inserted in the

anterior angles of the prostethium: intermediate and posterior coxe

briefly subconical, somewhat contiguous, remote from the sides of the

body. Anterior femora incrassated, very often spinose, tibiae smooth.

Tarsi 2—3 jointed. Abdomen in the males with an organ of sound on

each side at the base.

1884.] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 211

Genus Ponynrura, Westwood.

Westwood, Arc. Ent. i, p. 92 (1842): Am. et Serv., Hist. Nat. Hém. p. 460

(1843) : Stal, Hem Afric. iv, p. 3 (1866).

1. POLYNEURA DUCALIS.

Polyneura ducalis, Westwood, Arc. Ent. i, p. 92, t. 24, f. 2 (1842); Jardine,

Nat. Lib. t. 18, f. 1 (1843); Am. et Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 460 (1843) ;

Walker, List. Hom. B. M., i, p. 2 (1850).

Easily recognised by its rich golden brown colour and the apical

half of the tegmina being finely reticulated with hexagonal cells. Body

long 35; exp. teg. 102 millims.

Reported from Assam, Sikkim, Nepal.

The Indian Museum pos-

sesses specimens from Sikkim and Assam.

Genus Pecttopsatrera, Stal.

Hem. Afric, iv, p. 2, (1866) ; Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. p. 168 (1866).

Allied to Tettigades, Am. et Serv. Thorax angulated on each side,

anterior femora not spinose, metasternum elevated, the elevated part

sulcate, produced and subsinuato-truncated in front.

2. PC@CILOPSALTRIA AFFINIS.

Tettigonia affinis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyn. p. 37 (1808).

Cicada affinis, Germar in Thon’s Archiv. Ent. ii, fasc. 2, p. 1, 6, (1830); in

Silbermann’s Rev. Ent. ii, p. 79 (1834) ; Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 3 (1850).

Pecilopsaltria afinis, Stal, Hem. Fabric. ii, p. 4 (1869).

Body long 23 ; exp. teg. 77 millims.

Reported from India, but no specimens appear in the British Mu-

seum list, and it would be well again to identify the locality of the spe-

cimen noted in Mus. Lund.

Genus PuiatypLevra, Amyot & Serville.

Amyot et Serville, Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 465 (1843): Stal, Hem. Afric. iv, p. 2

(1866) : Butler, Cist. Ent. i, p. 184 (1874).

(a.) Species with yellow or tawny wings.

3. PLATYPLEURA PHALENOIDES.

Platyplewra phalenoides, Walker, List Hom. B. M.i, p. 4 (1850): Butler, Cist.

Ent. p. 185 (1874).

Platyplewra interna, Walker, 1. c. iv, p. 1119 (1852), which differs in having

the anal angle only (instead of the whole flap) of the wings black.

Platyplewra congrex, Stal, MS., is also possibly only a variety of this species.

Reported from Bengal, Assam, Silhat, N. India. A somewhat com-

mon species in Sikkim. The Indian Museum possesses specimens from

Sibsagar, Sikkim, and Darjiling.

212 HK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

An examination of some fifty males shows some variations in indi-

viduals, even amongst those collected in the same locality. In the hya-

line apical portion of the tegmina, the brown band is sometimes connec"

ted with the marginal row of spots, sometimes with the brown band

across the middle part of the tegmina, and sometimes with neither. The

hyaline spots in the radial and 3—4 ulnar areas vary much in size, and

the metathoracic markings vary in size and distinctness. The venation,

too, is not altogether uniform, and the colour of the thorax varies from

green to brown.

?. Body sordidly luteous above and below. Face moderately con-

vex, transversely sulcated, with a longitudinal groove, luteous, vertex

and pronotum furrowed, luteous. The mesonotal marks are represented

by two almost obsolete short black lines on fore border and two faint

black dots on hinder border. Abdomen black above, first three segments

marginally luteous-pubescent ; below, central portion tawny, thickly

pubescent. Opercula small, somewhat rounded, wide apart. Legs con-

colorous with body: posterior tibiz spinose, tarsi and claws piceous.

Tegmina, markings as in ¢, but basal half suffused with deep fulvous.

Wings as in @, but apical third alone brown, limbus hyaline, flaps

fulvous. Length body, 223; exp. tegm. 70; of one tegmen 34; breadth

of pronotum 13 millims.

Has. Sikkim, one specimen only in the Indian Museum.

4, PLATYPLEURA ASSAMENSIS, 0. sp.

Sordid green, face very slightly convex, transversely sulcated, with

a longitudinal groove: a fascia extending from eye to eye through the

base of the antennz, black. Rostrum extends to third abdominal seg-

ment, tip piceous. Markings above as in P. phalcenoides, Walker. Ab-

domen piceous, each abdominal segment with a slight marginal fulvous

pubescence. Opercula very small, wide apart piceous in the g ; close

together, piceous and margined with’ slight tawny in the g. Basal

half of tegmina, brown, with irregular pale markings: a hyaline spot in

the third quarter of the radial area, a pale spot at the base of the radial

area and the 4—5 ulnar areas. Apical half of the tegmina pale hyaline ;

a brown patch extending through the apical anastomoses of the 1—3

ulnar areas: an inner apical row of six brown spots, first two and last

broadest, first two confluent, middle sagittate, last confluent with the dot

on the limbus: apical veins ending in six small oblong brown spots,

beyond which in the limbus are six minute dots. Wings marked as in

P. phalenoides with which it is closely allied, but the body is much less

robust, and smaller; and there is a difference in the markings and colour

of the tegmina. Length body, 235; exp. tegm., 69; of single tegmen,

30; breadth of the pronotum 12, millims.

1884.] E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 213

é is slightly smaller, tezmen, 27 millims.

Has. Sibsagar and Naga Hills: ¢ and ? in Indian Museum.

5. PLATYPLEURA NICOBARICA, n. sp.

Light ochraceous, shining. Face moderately convex, transversely

sulcated, with a median longitudinal groove, an interrupted fascia ex-

tending from eye to eye, and a patch on each side of the base of the

rostrum and along the first joint thereof, black. The rostrum extends

well beyond the posterior coxe, tip black. LHyes dull castaneous, pilose

behind. Vertex deeply grooved, the hollows, a small triangular patch

below the ocelli, a narrow fascia from eye to eye through the ocelli,

and a narrow short longitudinal line between the ocelli and eyes, black.

Pronotum furrowed, with a single, longitudinal, narrow, short, black line

in the middle of the anterior margin, lateral processes subtriangular and

their external margins brown. The mesonotum with two triangular

black spots, their bases resting on the anterior margin, and on each side

a large distinct V- shaped mark, slightly interrupted on the inner side, and

two small round spots near the posterior margin. Segments of abdomen

black, margined with yellow, above and below, slightly pubescent. Legs

ochraceous, extremities of tibie and claws brown-black, posterior tibize

spinose. Opercula ochraceous, small, rounded, contiguous, having a black

patch near the base of posterior coxe. Tegmina, basal half tawny with

irregular brown markings in the radial and 1—4 ulnar areas and one in

the costal membrane. The upper third of the third ulnar area and the

apical areas hyaline, with an almost obsolete series of minute dots at the

end of each vein : wings ochraceous, apical third brown, with veins och-

raceous, a discal streak to anal angle and two lines confluent at the inner

angle, brown. Length body, 24: exp. tegmina, 755 of single tegmen 33 :

breadth of the pronotum, 145 millims.

Has. Nicobar Islands : in Indian Museum.

6. PLATYPLEURA SPHINX.

_ Platyplewra sphina, Walker, List. Hom. B. M. i, p. 13 (1850): Butler, Cist.

Ent. p. 188 (1874).

Tegmina whitish, brownish-tawny towards the base and having else-

where some irregular pale-brown marks which here and there include

white spots. Body long 18; exp. teg. 43 millims.

Reported from N. Bengal, N. India.

7. PLATYPLEURA CALEBS.

Platyplewra celebs, Stal, Trans. Ent. Soc. 3rd Ser. i, p. 573 (1863): Butler,

Cist. Ent. p. 188 (1874).

214 BH. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

Allied to Pecilopsaltria capitata, Olivier, (Enc. Méth. v, p. 754)

in regard to size, broadness of apical limbus, tegmina and wings. Body

long 23: exp. teg. 68 millims. Reported from N. India.

8. PLATYPLEURA ANDAMANA.

Platyplewra andamana, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 174 (1878).

This species was described from a specimen procured from the An-

daman islands. Body long 22: exp. teg. 84 millims.

9. PULATYPLEURA ROEPSTORFFII, n. sp.

$.9%. Brownish tawny. Face gamboge colour, moderately convex,

transversely sulcated, with a brown longitudinal groove. Rostrum ex-

tending almost to the posterior margin of the first abdominal segment, tip

brown. Legs brown above, tawny below; tibiz setose, posterior pair spinose.

Hyes bright castaneous, moderately prominent, pilose behind. Second

joint of antennse pale tawny. A fascia from eye to eye, through the

base of the antenne and frons, and another through the ocelli, black.

Pronotum grooved, with an obtuse-angled black mark on middle of pos-

terior border; lateral processes subtriangular, anterior margin slightly

brown. Mesonotum with two obconical spots extending backwards from

anterior border and having between them a variable sagittate mark, two

dots wide apart, near posterior border, and a very obscure mark situate

on the outer side of each of the obconical spots, black. Abdominal

sutures black, margined with luteous, pubescent; anal segment below,

luteous. Opercula very small, subelliptical, wide apart in the & ; conti-

guous, semi-rounded, in the 9. Tegmina brown, opaque: basal third

tinged with tawny, very apparent when stretched out; two spots in the

radial area (the basal extending into the costal membrane) and one in the

fourth ulnar area, black. A patch in the middle of the first ulnar area,

extending into the third, and one near the base of the third ulnar area,

extending into the fourth, pale brown. Apical area pale brown; veins

adorned with oval marks, brown, with a centre of pale brown. External

margin with a row of six subquadrangular brown spots, divided by oval

pale brown spots. Wings fulvous tawny, disc and a band along the fore

and external borders brown. Length of body, 245; exp. tegm. 763 ;

of one tegmen, 34; breadth of pronotum, 12 millims.

Closely allied to P. andamana, Distant.

Has. Andaman Islands. Several specimens are in the Indian Mu-

seum.

(b.) With black and white wings.

10. PLATYPLEURA BASIALBA.

Oxypleura basialba, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 26, (1850).

Platypleura basialba, Butler, Cist. Ent. i, p. 191 (1874).

Body long 19, exp. teg. 61 millims. Reported from N. Bengal.

i 2 el

K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 215

i - ll. PLATYPLEURA NOBILIS.

Cicada nobilis, Germar in Thon’s Archiv. ii, fasc. 2, p. 9 (1830); in Silber-

_mann’s Rev. Ent. ii, pt. 2, p. 82, (1834).

Cicada hemiptera, Guérin, Voyage Bélanger Ind. Orient. p. 500 (1834).

Platyplewra semilucida, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i. p. 20 (1850).

Platyplewra nobilis, Butler, Cist. Ent. i, p. 191 (1874) ; Distant, J. A. S. B. xlviii,

(2), p. 38 (1879).

Reported from Java, Singapore, and Tenasserim : there is a specimen

in the Indian Museum from Tenasserim. As this is a typical species of

the smaller members of this genus, I re-describe it, the original de-

scription being practically unobtainable.

; Tawny. Face tawny, moderately convex, transversely sulcated with

_ the furrows brown and a longitudinal groove broadly black. Rostrum

extending to the fourth abdominal segment, tip piceous. LHyes dull

castaneous, with a narrow black fascia, extending from anterior margin

around the base of the antenne. Vertex with a bright tawny fascia on

anterior margin and two minute obconical black marks, extending from

posterior margin on each side of the ocelli, obsolete in some. Prono-

tum tawny, furrowed, furrows black; a line from the middle of the

anterior border to the posterior border, black and quadrangularly expanded

on the disc. Mesonotum fulvous brown, with two moderate obconical

black spots, extending backward from the fore border, midway between

which there is a discal line connected with a fascia on the hinder border

also black. On the outer side of both the moderate obconical spots is

a large obconical patch, black, and extending from the fore border almost

to the hind border. The metanotum is bright tawny. The abdominal

sutures are black, edged with fulvous, slightly pubescent. Below, the

fulvous margins of the abdominal segments alone appear. Opercula

tawny, brown at the base, rounded, small, wide apart. Legs tawny,

anterior and middle femora spotted brown, posterior tibiw spinose. Teg-

mina, basal third tawny, with some irregular lighter markings: a hyaline

spot, at the apex of the radial area, just above a dark brown spot which

extends into the costal membrane: a black spot in the ulnar space.

Apical two-thirds of tegmina hyaline, with three minute brown spots

on the apical anastomoses of the first and second ulnar areas, also a very

minute brown spot on each side of the middle of the vein separating the

second from the third apical area and the third from the fourth; six

minute brown spots on the limbus. Basal two-thirds of the wings brown,

with a discal streak extending to the anal angle, tawny; apical third,

hyaline ; flaps tawny with a brown line on the suture. Length body 16;

exp. teg. 46; length of one tegmen 24; breadth of pronotum 8 millims.

216 K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. 3,

Variety, a.—Markings on face and pronotum more distinctly black.

The markings on the basal third of the tegmina are more distinctly pale

forming a band of five spots extending from the costal membrane through

the ulnar areas. The brown spots in the hyaline apical portion broader,

the internal apical row produced through the apical areas and the ex-

ternal apical row of dots duplicated. The tawny discal streak of the

wings wanting, flaps grey hyaline. From Munipur, in Indian Museum,

Allied to Platypleura insignis, Distant.

12. PLATYPLEURA INSIGNIS.

Platyplewra insignis, Distant, J. A. S. B. xlviii (2), p. 39, t. 2, f., 2 (1879).

Allied to the preceding, but tegmina and wings very distinct, the

opaque portion being much less than in that species. Body long 15;

exp. teg. 45 millims. Reported from Tenasserim and Hindustan: a

specimen from the former locality is in the Indian Museum.

(c.) With black, white, and red wings.

13. PLATYPLEURA OCTOGUTTATA.

Tettigonia octoguttata, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 515 (1798) ; Syst. Rhyng.

p. 89 (1803) ; Coquebert, Ill. Ins. i, p. 34, t. 9, f., 1 (1790).

Oxypleura sanguiflua, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i. p. 24 (1850) ; Ins. Saund.

Hom. p. 2 (1858).

Pecilopsaltria octoguttata, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 168 (1866) (re-described).

Platypleura octoguttata, Butler, Cist. Ent. i, p. 192 (1874).

Body long 27: exp. teg. 80 millims. Reported from the Panjab, N.

- India, N. Bengal, S. India. The Indian Museum possesses specimens

from Bengal, Calcutta, and Sambhalpur in the Central Provinces.

14. PLATYPLEURA SUBRUFA.

Oxypleura subrufa, Walker, List. Hom. B. M. i, p. 25 (1850).

Pecilopsaltria capitata, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 169 (1866), who joins

together ‘ subrufa’ and ‘ capitata’ Olivier (Enc. Méth. v, p. 754, t. 112, f. 10), the

former an Indian and the latter a Ceylon species. They have been separated again

by Butler (Cist. Ent. i, p. 192) and should remain separate.

Platyplewra subrufa, Butler, Cist. Ent. i, p. 192 (1874).

Body long 27: exp. teg. 75 millims. Reported from Coromandel

and India.

(d.) With black, white, and brown wings.

15. PLATYPLEURA BUFO.

Oxyplewra bufo, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i. p. 27 (1850).

Platyplewra bufo, Butler, Cist. Ent. i, p. 195 (1874).

Body long 25: exp. teg. 81 millims. Reported from India.

iets eee Syn eee Py

‘ + *

‘ i

_E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 217

16. PLATYPLEURA CERVINA.

Platyplewra cervina, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 16 (1850) 2 ; Butler, Cist.

Ent. i, p. 198 (1874).

Platyplewra straminea, Walker, 1. c. p. 17, 3.

Body long 17: exp. teg. 50 millims. Reported from N. Bengal.

Genus Tacua, Amyot & Serville.

Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 461 (1843): Stal, Hem. Afric. iv, p. 3.

(1866).

17. TacvUA SPECIOSA.

‘Tettigonia speciosa, Illiger in Wied. Zool. Arch. ii, 145, t. 2; Fabricius, Syst.

Rhyn. p. 33 (1803).

Cicada indica, Donovan, Ins. Ind. Hem., t. 2, f. 3, (1800).

Cicada speciosa, Blanchard, Hist. Nat. Ins. iii, 165; Hém. t. 9 (1840-41).

Tacua speciosa, Am. et Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 462 (1843); Walker, List.

Hom. B. M. i, p. 46 (1850). J. A. S. Zool. i. p. 141 (1857).

Body long 55 millims. Reported from Java, Bengal (Donovan).

Genus Tosrena, Amyot & Serville.

Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 462 (1843): Stal, Hem. Afric. iv. p. 3.

(1866).

18. TosENA MELANOPTERA.

Tosena melanoptera, White, A. & M.N. H. xvii, p. 331 (1846) ; Walker, List Hom.

B. M. i, p. 46 (1850).

Body long 60 : exp. tee. 142 millims. Reported from Silhat, N. India.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Sibsagar and Sikkim.

19. ToseNA MEARESIANA.

Cicada mearesiana, Westwood, Arc. Ent. i, p. 98, t. 25, f. 1 (1842).

Tosena mearesiana, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 463 (1843) ; Walker,

List Hom. B. M. i, p. 46 (1850).

Body long 44: exp. teg. 130 millims. Reported from N. India. The

Indian Museum possesses specimens from Sikkim.

20. TOSENA ALBATA.

Tosena albata, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1878, p. 175.

Body long 59: exp. teg. 132 millims. Reported from N. India.

21. TosENA SPLENDIDA.

Tosena splendida, Distant, Ent. Month. Mag. xv, p. 76 (1878).

g. Body long 47: exp. teg. 124 millims. 9. Body long 49; exp. teg.

127. ‘Reported from Assam, Naga Hills, Khasiya Hills. The Indian

Museum possesses ¢ and ¢ from the Lushai country.

218 BE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

Genus Hvuncuys, Amyot & Serville.

Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 464 (1843) : Stal, Hem. Afric. iv, p. 4 (1866).

22. HUECHYS PHILEMATA.

Tettigonia philemata, Fabricius, Syst. Rhyn. p. 42 (1803); Stoll, Cig. p. 53,

t. 13, f. 62 (1788).

Cicada philemata, Germar in Thon’s Archiv. ii, fasc. 2, p. 26 (1830) ; in Silber-

mann’s Rev. Ent. ii, p. 75, n. 52 (1834) ; Burmeister, Handb. Ent. ii, (i) p. 180 (1835).

Cicada sanguinea, Guérin, Voyage La Favorite, v, p. 155 (1839); Mag. Zool.

p. 75 (1839).

Huechys philemata, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 465 (1843) ; Walker,

List Hom. B. M. i. p. 251 (1850).

Guérin (1. c.) unites this species with the following and keeps

H. sanguinolenta, Fabr., which he had not seen, distinct, but he is not

followed in this arrangement by later writers.

Body above black with the frons, two quadrate patches on mesothorax,

and abdomen sanguineous: tegmina brown, wings cindery-grey and

subhyaline. Body long 22 millims.

Reported from Philippine Islands, N. Bengal, and Silhat. The

Indian Museum possesses specimens from the Naga Hills, N. India, and

Tenasserim.

23. HUECHYS SANGUINBA.

Cicada sanguinea, De Géer, Ins. iii, 221, t. 33, f. 17 (1773) ; Gmelin Ed. Syst.

Nat. i, 3, 2098 (1782) ; Westwood in Donovan’s Ins. China, t. 16, f. 1 (1842).

Tettigonia sanguinolenta, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 681 (1775) ; Spec. Ins. ii, p.

321 (1781) ; Mant. Ins. ii, p. 267 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 25 (1794); Syst. Rhyn.

p. 42 (1803).

Cicada sanguinolenta, Olivier, Enc. Méth. v, p. 756 (1790) ; Germar in Thon’s

Archiv, ii, fasc. 2, p. 3 (1830), in Silbermann’s Rev. Ent. ii, p. 75 (1834) ; Blanchard,

Hist. Nat. Ins. iii, p. 165 (1840-41) ; Guérin, Voyage La Favorite, v, p, 155, t. 45, f. 1

(1839) ; Mag. Zool. p. 76, t. 237, f. 1 (1839).

Huechys sanguinea, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 465 (1843); Walker,

List Hom. B. M. i, p. 251 (1850); J. L. 8. Zool. i, p. 84 (1856) ; ibid., x, p. 95

(1867) : Distant, J. A. 8. B. xlviii, (2) p. 38 (1879).

Guérin separates ‘ sanguinolenta, Fabricius’ and unites ‘ philemata’ with

‘sanguinea’. H. incarnata, Germar, Silb. Rev. Ent. ii, p. 75, (1834), and Brullé

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. ii, t. 3. f. 2, is probably only a variety of H. sangwinea.

Head, thorax, and feet black: frons, two great spots on the meso-

thorax, and abdomen sanguineous: tegmina black: wingsfuscous. Body

long 18; exp. teg. 41; millims.

Reported from India, Singapore, China, and the Eastern Archipe-

lago. Specimens exist in the Indian Museum from Sikkim, Sibsdgar,

Calcutta, and Tenasserim.

— 1884 ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 219

24, HUECHYS TESTACEA.

Tettigonia testacea, Fabricius, Mant. Ins. ii p. 267 (1787); Ent. Syst. iv, p. 24

(1794) ; Syst. Rhyn. p. 42 (1803) : Stoll, Cig. p. 41, t. 8, f. 41 (1788).

Cicada testacea, Gmelin Ed. Syst. Nat. i, pt. 4, p. 2098 (1782) ; Olivier, Enc.

Méth. v, p. 756, t. 113, f. 5 (1790); Germar in Thon’s Archiv. ii, fasc. 2, p. 3,

(1830) ; Guérin, Voyage La Favorite, v, p. 155 (1839) ; Mag. Zool. p. 78 (1839).

Huechys testacea, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 252 (1850).

The upper surface of the body without red marks: tegmina brown,

only partly transparent: wings concolorous, veins black: abdomen san-

guineous.

Reported from Coromandel.

25. HUECHYS PHZNICURA.

Cicada phenicura, Germar in Silbermann’s Rev. Ent. ii, p. 76 (1834) ; Guérin,

Icon. du Régne Animal, p. 78 (1830-34).

Huechys phenicura, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 252 (1850).

Black, entire frons, mesothorax, and abdomen sanguineous; tegmina

and wings black; sometimes frons black in the middle and thorax with a

black basal spot or band running through it, sides and small median spot

red.

Reported from India, Sikkim.

26. HUECHYS TRANSVERSA.

Huechys transversa, Walker, List Hom. B. M. Suppt. p. 40 (1858).

Black: tegmina with costa and transverse veins red and a testa-

ceous band. Body long 23: exp. teg. 62 millims.

Reported from Hindustan.

27. HUECHYS THORACICA.

Huechys thoracia, Distant, J. A. S. B. xlviii, (2), p. 39, t. II, f. 3 (1879).

Known by the red hour-glass-shaped fascia on pronotum. Body long

19: exp. teg. 43 millims.

Reported from Tenasserim and Hindustan.

28. HUECHYS TRABEATA.

Cicada trabeata, Germar in Thon’s Archiv, ii, fasc. 2, p. 3 (1830) : Guérin, Mag.

Zool. p. 78 (1839).

Huechys trabeata, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 252 (1850).

Body ferruginous, tegmina and wings fuscous with ferruginous veins,

Body long, 20; millims ; tegmina broken at the ends.

Reported from Java.

There is a specimen in the Indian Museum, locality unknown.

220 K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. 3,

Genus Screroprera, Stal.

Hem. Afric. iv, p. 4 (1866).

Allied to Gaana : ulnar veins contiguous at the base or united for a

short distance; head scarcely narrower than the base of the thorax ;

anterior femora incrassated, spinose beneath.

29. ScIEROPTERA CROCEA.

Cicada crocea, Guérin in Voyage La Favorite, v, p. 159, t. 45, f. 3 (1829) ; Mag.

Zool. p. 79, cl. ix, t. 287, f. 3 (1839); in Voyage La Coquille, Zool. ii (2), p. 182

(1830).

Huechys crocea, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 252 (1850).

Scieroptera crocea, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 169 (1866).

Yellow: thorax above with four reddish brown spots: abdomen

saffron-red, more obsolete below. Feet yellow, tibie and tarsi black.

Tegmina and wings hyaline with yellow veins.

Reported from Bengal.

30. ScIEROPTERA SPLENDIDULA.

Tettigonia splendidula, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 681 (1774); Spec. Ins. ii, p.

321 (1781) ; Mant. Ins. ii, p. 267 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 25 (1794) ; Syst. Rhyn.

p. 42 (1803).

Cicada splendidula, Gmelin Ed. Syst. Nat. i, pt. 4, p. 2098 (1782) : Olivier, Enc.

Méth., v, p. 756 (1790) : Germar in Thon’s Archiv, ii, fase. 2, p. 45 (1830) : Guérin, in

Voyage La Favorite, v, p. 159 (1839) ; Mag. Zool. p. 79 (1839) : Westwood in Dono-

van’s Insects China, t. 16, f. 4 (1842).

Huechys splendidula, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 252 (1850).

Scieroptera splendidula, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 169 (1866): Distant,

J. A. 8. B. xlviii (2), p. 38 (1879).

Yellow; thorax above with four large blackish rounded spots.

Tegmina golden brown : anterior tibise red, femora black : posterior femora

red: abdomen sanguineous. Body long 17: length of one teg. 193 millims.

Reported from N. India, Silhat, Tenasserim. The Indian Museum

possesses specimens from Tenasserim, Arakan, and the Khasiya Hills.

31. ScIEROPTERA FUMIGATA.

Huechys fumigata, Stal, Ofvers. Kong. Vet. Akad. Férh. p. 244 (1854) ; Walker,

List Hom. B. M. Suppt. p. 314 (1858).

Scieroptera fumigata, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 169 (1866).

Head, thorax, and scutellum black ; their lateral margins, a median

patch on the thorax, and spot on the scutellum yellow: tegmina fusco-

vinaceous, costa and veins weakly yellow testaceous; wings weakly

vinaceous hyaline, abdomen and femora testaceous, the former above

blackish. Body long 12: exp. teg. 28 millims.

Reported from India.

KE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 221

Genus GRAPTOTETTIX, Stal.

Hem. Afric. iv, p. 4 (1866).

Allied to Geana: tegmina with ten apical cells: vertex twice as

wide as the eyes: anterior femora spinose beneath; tibiee longer than

femora.

32. GRAPTOTETTIX GUTTATUS.

Graptotettic guttatus, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 170 (1866).

Blackish with the frons, four oval spots on the thorax, two large

spots on the scutellum, and the abdomen sordidly yellow: tegmina and

wings fuscous. Body long 25: exp. teg. 67 millims.

Reported from the Himalaya. The Indian Museum has a specimen

from Sikkim. :

Genus Gmana, Amyot & Serville.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 463 (1848).

33. GANA OOCTONOTATA.

Cicada octonotata, Westwood, Arc. Ent. ii, p. 34, t. 57, £. 2, Q (1843).

Huechys octonotata, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 253 (1850).

Kasily recognised by the tegmina brown with four yellowish spots

and the wings roseate. Body long 37: exp. teg. 61 millims.

Reported from Assam. The Indian Museum possesses specimens

from Sikkim.

34. GANA DIVES.

Tosena dives, Westwood, Arc. Ent. i, p. 98, t. 25, f. 2 (1842): Am. et Serv. Hist.

Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 464 (1843) : Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 46 (1850).

Black : tegmina with reddish veins and a median transverse, nar-

row whitish band: wings testaceous, apical part black. Body long 25:

exp. teg. 75 millims.

Reported from Silhat. The Indian Museum possesses specimens

from Sikkim.

35. GANA CONSORS.

Gwana consors, White, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1850; Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p.

253 (1850).

Close to G. festiva, but differing in the markings on the tegmina.

Body long 29: exp. teg. 84 millims.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from the Naga Hills and

Samaguting in Assam. One specimen has the body above and below

black without a single spot or mark except a testaceous tinge on the

lower part of the face ; and the markings on the tegmina are dark green.

222 K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

36. GANA FESTIVA.

Tettigonia festiva, Fabricius, Syst. Rhyn. p. 41 (1808). ;

Cicada thalassina, Percheron, Gen. Ins, (Hém.), t. 2 (1834): Guérin, Voyage La

Coquille, Ins. p. 183 (1888).

Cicada percheronii, Guérin, Icon. Régne Animal, p. 355 (1838).

Gaana consobrina, White, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1850; Walker, List Hom. B. M. i,

p. 254 (1850).

Goeana festiva, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 170 (1866) ; Hem. Fabr. ii, p. 5

(1869).

Black: a testaceous band across the face from eye to eye and around

each eye: four narrow longitudinal yellow lines on the thorax. Tegmina

bluish green or greenish yellow, the radial area with a small and larger

spot below, a median band, three confluent apical patches, and a broad

apical limbus, black: wings white or bluish, apical part black with a

white or bluish spot on the disc. Body long 33: exp. teg. 80 millims.

Reported from Assam, Bengal.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Darjiling and Sikkim.

Some of these have the tegmina green, others greenish yellow, and,

in some, the wings have the basal portion and a discal spot bright testa-

ceous not white or pale, the size and arrangement of the markings on

the body and tegmina remaining exactly the same.

37. GANA MACULATA.

Tettigonia maculata, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. App. p. 831 (1775) ; Spec. Ins. ii, p.

319 (1781) ; Mant. Ins. ii, p. 266 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 20 (1794); Syst. Rhyn.

p. 37 (1803).

Cicada maculata, Drury, Ill. Nat. Hist. ii, p. 69, t. 37, f. 1 (1773) ; Gmelin, ed.

Syst. Nat. i, pt. 4, p. 2100 (1782) : Olivier, Enc. Méth. v, p. 750, t. 112, £.4 (1790) :

Germar in Thon’s Archiv. ii, fasc. 2, p. 12 (1830); in Silbermann’s Rev. Ent. ii,

p. 74 (1834).

Geana maculata, Am. et Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 464 (1843) ; Walker,

List Hom. B. M. i, p. 253 (1850).

?. Black shining: two yellow spots on vertex between the eyes, one

below each eye: six on mesonotum, four in front, two behind. Tegmina

black, with five spots, two basal (of which one within radial area is

minute) and three larger subequal median spots, whitish yellow: a white

dot in 1—3 ulnar and im all the apical areas except the last. Wings

black, basal part sordidly white and a sub-apical row of five white dots.

A form of the ¢ has, instead of the dots or spots in the ulnar and apical

areas, broad smears of dirty white, and is also larger than the ordinary

2. Body long 32: exp. teg. 52 millims, ?: body long 40 exp. teg.

97 millims. , form last mentioned.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Sikkim, Khasiya

Hills, Samaguting, and the Dhansiri Valley.

1884.] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 2233

38. GANA SULPHUREA.

Cicada sulphwrea, Hope, in Royle’s Ill. Bot. Him., Introd., p. liv, t. 10, f. 2

(1839).

Cicada pulchella, Westwood, Arc. Ent. ii, p. 34, t. 57, f. 1. (1843).

Geana sulphurea, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 254 (1850).

Black; head, pronotum, and mesonotum spotted sulphureous: teg-

mina and wings sulphureous for the basal two-thirds ; apical third black-

ish-fuscous: tegmina with a blackish-fuscous median band: abdomen

beneath and on each side at the tip, spotted yellow. Body long 38: exp.

teg. 90 millims.

Reported from Nepal and N. India.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Sikkim and N. India.

Genus Dunpvusra, Am. & Serv.

Am. et Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 470 (1843): Stal, Hem. Afric. iv. p. 5

(1866).

Head triangular: frons large, very convex, transversely sulcated,

with a longitudinal groove in the middle: pronotum not ampliated on the

lateral margins: cheeks without a tubercle: rostrum not or barely reach-

ing the base of the posterior cox : opercula long, extending beyond the

middle of the venter, very often to the last segment.

This and the remaining genera of this group have been so imper-

fectly worked out, and the synonymy is so defective, that it is impossible

for any one in this country to do more than indicate the recorded species.

Walker’s work here is particularly untrustworthy, and his descriptions

quite unintelligible.

39. DUNDUBIA MANNIFERA.

Cicada mannifera, Linnzeus, Mus. Ad. Fried. p. 84 (1754), excluding synonymy.

Tettigonia vaginata, Fabricius, Mant. Ins. ii, p. 266 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 18

(1794) ; Syst. Rhyn., p. 35 (1803).

Cicada vaginata, Gmélin Ed. Syst. Nat. i, pt. 4, p. 2099 (1782) ; Olivier, Enc.

Méth. v, p. 748 (1790) ; Stoll, Cig. p. 38, t. 7, £. 35 (1788).

Cicada virescens, Olivier, Enc. Méth. v, p. 747 (1790) t. 110, f. 2; Walker, List

Hom. B. M. i, p. 64 (1850).

Dundubia vaginata, Am. et Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 471 (1843) ; Walker,

List Hom. B. M. i., p. 47, 1120, (1850) ; J. L. S. Zool. x, p. 84 (1867).

Dundubia mannifera, 8tal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 170 (1866) : Distant, J. A. 8.

B. xlviii, (2), p. 88 (1879) ; Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 634 (1881).

Body pale yellow-olive or virescent, spotless; tegmina and wings

hyaline, spotless, costa of the former black or brown; opercula almost as

long as the abdomen, narrowed near the base, thence oval, rounded at

the tip, testaceous or pale green. co. Body long 43: exp. teg. 110

millims.

994 B.T, 'Atkitison-i Notes:on’ Tidian Riynéhota, [No. 3).

Reported from Morty, Sumatra, Tenasserim, Assam.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Java, Tenasserim, and

Sikkim.

40. DUNDUBIA MICRODON.

Dundubia microdon, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 55 (1850).

Body long, 34: exp. teg. 88 millims. Reported from N. India.

41. DUNDUBIA LATERALIS.

Dundubia lateralis, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 61 (1850).

Body long, 29: exp. teg. 87 millims. Reported from Silhat.

42. DUNDUBIA INTEMERATA.

Dundubia intemerata, Walker, J. L. S. Zool. i, p. 84 (1856).

Pale testaceous: tegmina and wings hyaline, spotless, the costa of

the former tawny, veins green. Opercula acute, triangular, narrow, ex-

tending to fifth ventral segment. Body long 21: exp. teg. 72 millims.

Reported from Singapore.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Tenasserim, Dhansiri-

valley, Sibsagar, Naga Hills, Samaguting.

43. DUNDUBIA VIBRANS.

Dundubdia vibrans, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 54 (1850): J. L. 8. Zool. x,

p. 84 (1867).

Body pale tawny, wings colourless, pale tawny at the base ; apex

of tegmen slightly clouded with brown. Body long 36: exp. teg. 92

millims. |

Reported from Silhat.

44, DUNDUBIA NICOMACHE.

Dundubia nicomache, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 67 (1850).

Body long 22: exp. teg. 85 millims. Reported from N. India.

45, DUNDUBIA TIGRINA.

Dundubia tigrina, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, 69 (1850).

Body long 23: exp. teg. 69 millims. Reported from Malabar.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Assam ?

46. DUNDUBIA MACULIPES.

Dnndubia maculipes, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 70 (1850).

Body long 25: exp. teg. 71 millims. Reported from N. Bengal.

1884] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 995

47. DUNDUBIA SAMIA.

Dundubia samia, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 77 (1850).

Body long 28: exp. teg. 71 millims. Reported from N. India.

. 48. DUNDUBIA SINGULARIS.

Dundubia singularis, Walker, List Hom. B. M. Suppt. p. 7 (1858).

Body long 19: exp. teg. 62 millims. Reported from India.

49. DUNDUBIA RADHA.

Dundubia radha, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 634 (1881).

Allied to D. mannifera, Linn., from which it differs by the much

broader head, attenuated apices of the opercula, and its much larger size-

In superficial appearance, it bears a strong resemblance to the genus

Cosmopsaltria. (Distant). Body long 53: exp. teg. 124 millims.

Reported from Madras Presidency and Mussooree.

50. DUNDUBIA TRIPURASURA.

Dundubia tripwrasura, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 635 (1881).

This species is allied to D. vibrans, Walker, from which it structu-

rally differs by the long and subtriangular opercula. The abdomen is

also broader, the tegmina unspotted, and the sanguineous colour of the

abdomen and opercula are also somewhat peculiar and distinct. (Disa

tant). Body long 33: exp. teg. 85 millims.

Reported from Assam.

D1. DUNDUBIA NAGARASINGNA.

Dundubia nagarasingna, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 635 (1881).

Distant writes:—‘I am somewhat at a loss for a closely allied

species with which to compare it, but its distinct colour and markings

and shape and the length of the opercula should sufficiently distinguish

it.’ Body long 39: exp. teg. 95 millims.

Reported from N. W. Burma.

52. DuNDUBIA IMMACULA.

Dundubia immacula, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 50 (1850).

Body fawn colour, wings whitish. Body long 40: exp. teg. 102

millims. Reported from Tenasserim.

Genus Mertampsaura, Kol.

Melet. Ent. vii. p. 27 (1857).

226 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

53. MEerLAMPSALTA VARIANS.

Cicada varians, Germar in Silbermann’s Rev. Ent. ii, p. 59 (1834).

Dundubia varians, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 48 (1850) ; iv, p. 1120 (1852) :

Suppt. ‘p. 6 (1858).

Dundubia chlorogaster, Walker (nec Boisduval), 1. c. p. 47, 9.

Melampsalta varians, Stal, A. S. E. F. (4 Sér.) i. p. 619 (1862).

Reported from Silhat.

Genus CosmopsatTriA, Stal.

Hem. Afric. iv, p. 5 (1866).

In Ofvers. Kong. Vet. Aka. Foérh. p. 708 (1870), Stal distributes

this genus amongst three subgenera :—Platylomia to which C. flavida,

Guérin, belongs ; Cosmopsaltria to which C. spinosa, Fabr., belongs; and

Diceropygia to which C. obtecta, Fabr., belongs. Cosmopsaltria is closely

allied to Dundubia ; cheeks without a tubercle; rostrum reaching the

base or most often the apex of the posterior coxe ; opercula long, ex-

tending beyond the middle of the venter.

54. COSMOPSALTRIA OBTECTA.

Tettigonia obtecta, Fabricius, Syst. Rhyn. p. 35 (1808).

Cicada obtecta, Germar, in Thon’s Archiv, ii, fasc. 2, p. 5 (1830).

Dundubia obtecta, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 47 (1850).

Cosmopsaltria obtecta, Stal, Hem. Fabr. 2, p. 4 (1869).

Reported from N. India, N. Bengal, Nepal and Assam. Body long

25: exp. teg. 85 millims.

Specimens in the Indian Museum are from Sikkim and Assam.

55. COoOsMOPSALTRIA SITA.

Cosmopsaltria sita, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 636 (1881).

It is difficult to separate this and the two following species from the

genus Dundubia except by the length of the rostrum. They also resemble

the ‘vibrans’ group of that genus. Body long 24: exp. teg. 73 millims.

Reported from 8. India or Bombay. (Distant).

56. COSMOPSALTRIA DURGA.

Cosmopsaltria durga, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 637 (1881).

This species in size and markings (excluding the spotted tegmina)

much resembles Dundubia tripurasura, Distant; the less produced

frontal portion of the head and the length of the rostrum, however, place

it in this genus (Distant). Body long 33: exp. teg. 98 millims.

Reported from Assam.

57. COSMOPSALTRIA ABDULLA.

Cosmopsaltria abdulla, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 639 (1881).

This is a large and distinct species, near C. doryca, Boisd., from

1884] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 227

which it differs by its large size, more spotted tegmina, and different size

and structure of the opercula. Body long 46: exp. teg. 116—122 millims.

_ Reported from Penang and Singapore.

58. COSMOPSALTRIA OOPAGA.

Cosmopsaltria oopaga, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 641 (1881).

_ This species is also allied to C. doryca, Boisd., but the body is much

broader, the tegmina are unspotted, and the shape of the opercula more

like those of C. abdulla, Distant. Body long 39: exp. teg. 96 millims.

Reported from Burma.

59. COSMOPSALTRIA SPINOSA.

Tettigonia spinosa, Fabricius, Mant. Ins. ii, p. 266 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 17

(1794) ; Syst. Rhyn. p. 34 (1803).

Cicada spinosa, Olivier, Enc. Méth. v, p. 748 (1790).

Dundubia spinosa, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 47 (1850).

Cosmopsaltria spinosa, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitsch. x, p. 171 (1866) ; Ofvers. Kong.

Vet. Aka. Férh. p. 708 (1870).

Varies much in size and coloration. Tegmina towards the apex of

the veins sometimes immaculate and sometimes with fuscous spots.

Reported from India.

60. COSMOPSALTRIA FLAVIDA.

Cicada flavida, Guérin, Voyage Belanger in Ind. Orient. p. 498, t. 3, f. 1, (1834) ;

_ Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 118 (1850).

Dundubia saturata, Walker, List Hom. B. M. Suppt. p. 6 (1858).

Cosmopsaltria flavida, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 171 (1866).

Body long 45: exp. teg. 140 millims. Reported from Java and

Sikkim.

Genus LepropsatTria, Stal.

Hem. Afric. iv, p. 5 (1866).

Allied to Dundubia, Am. et Sery.; cheeks with a tubercle near the

apex ; rostrum extending a little beyond the posterior cox; opercula

short: second and third segments of the abdomen in the ¢ witha

lateral tubercle.

61. LEPTOPSALTRIA GUTTULARIS.

Cicada guttularis, Walker, List Hom. B. M. Suppt. p. 29 (1858), 9.

Leptopsaltria guttularis, Stal, Hem. Ins. Philip. in Ofvers. Kong. Vet. Akak. Férh.

p. 710 (1870), ¢.

Very like L. tuberosa, Sign., but differs in the opercula being more

‘obtuse, apex much less obliquely truncated, exterior apical part more

obtuse, less produced, ventral tubercles of the ¢ larger, black. Body

long 13: exp. teg..46 millims.

Reported from Burma.

228 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

There are several unnamed species of this genus in the Indian

Museum.

Genus Pomponta, Stal.

Hem. Afric. iv, p. 6 (1866).

Allied to Cosmopsaltria: opercula short, somewhat transverse :

rostrum reaching at least to the base but most often to the apex of the

posterior coxee. Stal (Ofvers. K. V.-A. Foérh. p. 710, 1870) separates

the subgenera Pomponia and Oncotympana.

62. POoMPONIA URANIA.

Dundubdia wrania, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 64 (1850).

~ Pomponia urania, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 171 (1866).

Hind-scutcheon bright green; abdomen green. Body long 34: exp.

teg. 83 millims.

Reported from Hindustan.

63. POMPONIA BINDUSARA.

Pomponia bindusara, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 642 (1881).

This species, above, resembles Dundubia vibrans, Walker, and Cos-

mopsaltria sita, Distant. Many of these Indian species belonging to

the genera Dundubia, Cosmopsaltria, and Pomponia have a common facies

in colour and markings which Distant thinks is probably due to mimetic

resemblance, and which, in practice, renders their identification exceed-

ingly difficult. Body long, 30: exp. teg. 87 millims.

Reported from Tenasserim.

64. PoMPONIA LINEARIS.

Dundubia linearis, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 48 (1850). Var., 1. c. iv, p. 1120

(1852).

Dundubia ramifera, Walker, var., 1. c. p. 53 (1850) : J. L. S. Zool. x, p. 84 (1867).

Dundubia cinctimanus, Walker, List 1. c., p. 49 and Suppt. p. 6 (1858): J. L.

S, Zool. x, p. 84 (1867).

Pomponia linearis, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 171 (1866).

Body tawny. Body long 46: exp. teg. 118 millims.

Reported from Silhat.

The Indian Museum possesses a specimen from Assam.

65. PoMpoNnrA KAMA.

Pomponia kama, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 643 (1881).

Allied to P. transversa, Walker, but much smaller, abdomen nar-

rowed and more linear, head broader in comparison with pronotum and

colour different. Body long 18: exp. teg. 66 millims.

Reported from N. India, Darjiling.

1884.) —_-E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 229°

66.. PoMPONIA MADHAVA,.

Pomponia madhava, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 644 (1881).

; Allied to P. tigroides, Walker, from which it differs by its being

_ pale greenish and unicolorous, the tegmina broader, with the costal mar-

gin irregularly curved and not deflexed at the termination of the radial

veins, and also in having both the second and third abdominal segments

beneath rounded, produced and pointed anteriorly. Body long 22: exp.

teg. 55 millims.

Reported from Assam.

67. PompoNniIA IMPERATORIA.

Cicada imperatoria, Westwood, Arc. Ent. ii, p. 14, t. 51, (1843): Walker, List

Hom. B. M. i, p. 47: J. L. S. Zool. i, p. 83 (1856) : ibid. x, p. 84 (1867).

Pomponia imperatoria, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 171 (1866).

A very large species, yellow luteous, body long 88, exp. teg. 209

millims.

Reported from Nepal.

68. PoMPONIA TIGROIDES.

Pomponia tigroides, Distant, J. A. S. B. xlviii (2), p. 38 (1879).

The Indian Museum possesses a specimen from Tenasserim.

Genus Emaruta, Stal.

Hem. Afric. iv, p. 8 (1866).

Inner ulnar area of tegmina not widened towards the apex ; apical

cells one and two extending equally far forward ; thorax widened at the

base : tympana chiefly exposed ; opercula short : anterior femora spinose.

69. EMATHIA ZGROTA.

Emathia egrota, Stal, Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 172 (1866).

Body long 20: exp. teg. 50 millims. Reported from Bombay.

Genus Cicapa, Linn.

Linnaeus, Syst. Nat. i, p. 704 (1766): Stal, Rio. Jan. Hem. ii, p. 19 (1862)

Ofvers K. V. A. Férh. p. 714 (1870).

70. CICADA SUBTINCTA.

Cicada subtincta, Walker, List B. M. i, p. 147 (1850).

Body long 32: exp. teg. 105 millims. Reported from Silhat.

71. CICADA ANMA.

Cicada anea, Walker, 1. c., p. 207 (1850).

Body long 13: exp. teg. 40 millims. Reported from N. Bengal.

230 K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

72. CICADA AURATA.

Cicada awrata, Walker, 1. c., p. 215 (1850).

Body long 17: exp. teg. 42 millims. Reported from Assam.

73. CICADA SUBVITTA.

Cicada subvitta, Walker, 1. ¢., p. 222 (1850).

Body long 16: exp. teg. 38 millims. Reported from N. India.

74. CICADA FERRUGINEA.

Cicada ferruginea, Olivier, Enc. Méth. v, p. 750, t. 112, f. 1 (1790); Stoll, Cig,

p. 65, t. 16, f. 86 (1788) ; Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 117 (1850).

Reported from India.

75. CICADA XANTES.

Cicada wantes, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 198 (1850).

Body, drums, and legs tawny : wings colourless, veins yellow. Body

long 17: exp. teg. 48 millims.

Reported from N. India.

76. CICADA MACULICOLLIS.

Cicada maculicollis, Guérin, Voyage La Coquille, Zool., p. 183 (1830) ; Walker

List Hom. B. M. Suppt., p. 28 (1858).

Body long 24: exp. teg. 65 millims. Reported from Bengal.

Genus CRYPTOTYMPANA, Stal.

A. S. E. F. (4 Sér.), i, p. 613 (1862).—Hem. Afric. iv, p. 6 (1866).

77. ORYPTOTYMPANA RECTA.

Fidicina recta, Walker, List Hom. B. M.i, p. 79 (1850) 9.

Cryptotympana recta, Distant, J. A. 8. B. xlviii (2), p. 40, t. ii, f. 4 (1879), g.

Body long 32: exp. teg. 95 millims. Reported from Silhat and

Tenasserim.

The Indian Museum possesses a specimen from Tenasserim.

78. CRYPTOTYMPANA VICINA.

Cicada vicina, Signoret, Rev. Mag. Zool., p. 410, t. 10, f. 4 (1849).

Fidicina vicina, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 90 (1850).

Cryptotympana vicina, Stal, A. S. E. F. (4 Sér.) i. p. 613 (1862).

Reported from Silhat.

The Indian Museum possesses specimens from the Bhutan Duars.

K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 231

79. CRYPTOTYMPANA IMMACULATA.

Cicada immaculata, Olivier, Enc. Méth. v, p. 749, t. 112, f. 7 (1790): Stoll, Cig.

p. 40, t. viii, f. 39 (1788) : Signoret, Rev. Mag. Zool. p. 410 (1849).

Fidicina immaculata, Walker, List Hom. B. M.i, p. 90 (1850) ; iv, p. 1121 (1852).

Cryptotympana immaculata, Stal, A. 8. HE. F. 4 Sér. i. p. 613 (1862).

Reported from N. Bengal.

80. CRYPTOTYMPANA INTERMEDIA.

Cicada intermedia, Signoret, Mag. Rev. Zool. p. 406, t. 10, f. 2 (1849).

Fidicina intermedia, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 90 (1850).

Cryptotympana intermedia, Stal, A. S. E. F. 4 Sér. i. p. 613 (1862).

Abdomen reddish yellow with a blackish band on each segment :

allied to C. atrata, Fabr.

Reported from Tenasserim.

Genus Fipictna, Amyot & Serville.

Amyot et Serville, Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 472 (1843): Stal, Rio. Jan. Hem. ii,

p. 18 (1862); Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. (4 sér) i, p. 614 (1861); Hem. Afric. iv, p. 7

(1866) ; Distant, Biol. Cen. Amer. p. 16 (1881).

8l. FIDICINA OPERCULATA.

Cicada operculata, Carreno.

Fidicina operculata, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 90 (1850).

Reported from N. India.

The Indian Museum possesses a specimen.

82. FIDICINA CORVUS.

Fidicina corvus, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 86 (1850).

Reported from Silhat. Body long 29: exp. teg. 113 millims.

The Indian Museum possesses a specimen of the ¢ from Silhat.

Genus Trpicen, Latreille.

Latreille, Fam. Nat. p. 426 (1825): Stal, Hem. Afric. iv, p. 25 (1866).

83. TIBICEN AURENGZEBE.

F Tibicen awrengzebe, Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc., p. 646 (1881).

Body long 18: exp. teg. 48 millims. Reported from Bombay

Presidency.

84. TrIBICEN APICALIS.

Cicada apicalis, Germar in Thon’s Archiv, ii, fasc. 2, p. 8 (1830) ; in Silber-

mann’s Rey. Ent. ii, p. 63 (1834) ; Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 161 (1850).

Tibicen apicalis, Stal, A. S. HE. F. 4 Sér., i, p. 618 (1862).

Body long 18: exp. teg. 48 millims., 2. Reported from N. India,

The Indian Museum possesses a specimen from Calcutta.

232 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 3,

Genus Mocannia, Amyot & Serville.

Amyot et Serville, Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém, p. 467 (1843): Stal, Hem. Afric. iv. p. 5

(1866).

85. MOoGANNIA ILLUSTRATA.

Mogannia illustrata, Am. et Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 467, t. 9. f. 4 (1848) ;

Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 248 (1850).

Body uniform ferruginous brown : basal half of tegmina and a small

semicircular patch on the tips, transparent yellow, a brown transverse

band across the middle. Body long, 12 millims.

Reported from N. India.

86. MoGANNIA RECTA.

Mogannia recta, Walker, List Hom. B. M. Suppt. p. 39 (1858).

Abdomen with a red band on the posterior border of each segment.

Body long, 12 millims.

Reported from Hindustan.

87. MOoGANNIA OBLIQUA.

Mogannia obliqua, Walker, List Hom. B. M. Suppt. p. 39 (1858).

?. green mostly reddish beneath : abdomen reddish with a spot on

each side near the base. Pronotum and mesonotum with some testaceous

marks. Body long, 14: exp. teg. 41 millims.

Reported from Hindustan.

88. MoGANNIA VENUSTISSIMA.

Mogannia venustissima, Stal, Ofvers. Kong. Vet. Aka. Férh. p. 154 (1865).

Cerulean or metallic black. Tegmina with the veins at the base

pale sanguineous, before the middle black, thence sordid straw-colour:

wings with the veins at the base sanguineous and thence piceous. Body

long, 16: exp. teg. 37—41 millims.

Reported from H. India.

89. MOGANNIA FUNEBRIS.

Mogannia funebris, Stal, Ofvers. Kong, Vet. Aka. Forh. p. 155 (1865).

Aeneous black. Tegmina, before the middle, black with the basal

areola and a band towards the apex of the black part sordid lutescent. 2

Body long, 19: exp. teg. 46 millims.

Reported from Silhat.

90. MOGANNIA INDICANS.

Mogannia indicans, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i p. 249 (1850).

& bright or dark red, ¢ black. Tegmina with a broad basal brown

band, veins yellow. Body long 12—16: exp. teg. 35—40 millims.

‘)

E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchoia,

2 Reported from China.

_ The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Sikkim.

‘—-

a 91. MoGannia Locusta.

ry F Gahotonse locusta, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 236 (1850).

Body ferruginous beneath and abdomen pale tawny. Body long 50;

exp. teg. 85 millims.

_ Reported from E. India.

92. MOoOGANNIA LACTEIPENNIS.

Cephaloxys lacteipennis, Walker, List Hom. B. M. i, p. 237 (1850).

Body luteous : abdomen black with the hind borders of the segments

tawny : tegmina and flaps white, opaque, luteous at the base. Body long

36: exp. teg. 97 millims (?).

Reported from N. India.

93. MoGANNIA QUADRIMACULA.

Cephalozys quadrimacula, Walker, List Hom. B. M. p. 238 (1850).

Body bright tawny: hind margins of abdomen having the borders

of the segments with slender interrupted reddish bands, a broad pale

tawny band near the tip and beneath, piceous. Body long 30: exp. teg.

53 millims.

Reported from N. India.

94. M. TERPSICHORE.

Cephalowys terpsichore, Walker, List Hom. B. M. p. 239 (1850).

Body apple-green: abdomen with two last segments pitchy above;

tegmina colourless, tinged with brown towards the tips, costa green,

Body long 25: exp. teg. 74 millims.

Reported from HE. India,

CoRRECTION AND ADDITION.

Page 213, 4 lines from top of page, for “ NicoBaRica,” read “ pisTINcTA,” the

former of these names being praeoccupied ; and, between the 10th

and 11th lines from bottom of page, insert

““5* PLATYPLEURA NICOBARICA.

Platypleura nicobarica, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat, Hist, April, 1877,

Reported from the Nicobars.”

234 F. Moore—Inst of Moths from Cachar. [No. 3,

X.—Inst of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar, by Mr. J.

Woop-Mason, Part I,—Hurerocura.—By F. Moors, F. Z. S.,

A. L. 8. Communicated by the Narurat History Secretary.

[Received August 26th ;—Read December 3rd, 1884. |

SPHINGES.

1. MacroGiossa BELIS, Cram., Pap. Exot. 1. pl. 94, fig. C.

2. Macroerossa tureata, Butler, P. Z. S. 1875, p. 241, pl. 37,

fig. 5.

3. Macroctossa eiLia, H. Scheeff., Samml. Exot. Schmett. pl. 23,

fig. 107.

4. Macroaiossa eyrans, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. Brit. Mus. viii,

Dp. ke

5. Lopuura pusitua, Butler, P. Z. S. 1875, p. 244.

6. Hamaris uynas, Linn. (Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 148, fig. B.).

7. CALYMNIA PANOPUS, Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 224, fig. A, B.

BoMBYCES.

8. Menirria rurytion, Westw., Cab. Orient. Ent. pl. 30, fig. 5.

9. Husrmia communis, Butler, Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1875, p. 140,

pl. 13, fig. 1.

10. Husum1a BELLaTRix, Westw., Cab. Orient. Ent. pl. 33, fig. 2.

11. Nyctatumon zampa, Butler, Ent. Monthly Mag. v. p. 273.

12. SyNrToMIs ATKINSONI, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1871, p. 245, pl. 18, fig. 2.

13. Hucnromia potymena, Linn. (Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 31, fig. D.

14. Muitionia zongA, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 569.

15. NyormMera LACTICINIA, Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 128, fig. E.

16, Prrasina varians, Walker (Butler, Types Lep. Het. B. M. v.

pl. 88, fig. 4).

*17, TRYPHHROMERA PLAGIFERA, Walk. (Butler, 1. c., pl. 88, fig. 3).

18. Hvuscuema minitaris, Linn. (Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 29, fig. B).

19. Hisria paprnionariA, Guérin, Mag. de Zool. 1831, p. 12.

20. CycnLosts PAPILIONARIS, Drury, Exot. Ins. pl. 11, fig. 4.

21. Cycnosta pANTHONA, Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 322, fig. C.

22, CuHatcosia ARGENTATA, Moore, Desc. Lep. Coll. Atkinson, p. 17.

23. Piporus GLaucoris, Drury, Exot. Ins. pl. 6, fig. 4.

24. Hurnrusia MAGNIFICA, Butler, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1879, p. 5.

25. Hurerusta npocna, Dbleday, Zoologist, ii, p. 469.

F. Moore—List of Moths from Cachar. 235

| 26. Dervanica Bicotor, Moore, n. sp.

| Female: forewing black, crossed by a yellow outwardly oblique

_ medial band ; veins indistinctly lined with blue: hindwing yellow, with

a black marginal band, which is broad and truncated at the apical end

and very narrow at anal end; base of wing also slightly black. Body,

legs, and antenne bluish-black. Hxpanse 13 inch.

This species is nearest allied to D. risa (Hterusia risa, Dbleday).

27. Punta FeRREA, Walk. (Butler, Types Lep. Het. B. M. pl. 83,

fig. 7.

28. TRYPANOPHORA HUMERALIS, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. vii,

p- 1593.

29. Hypsa aucrpHRON, Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 133, fig. HE.

*30.

Hypsa pLAcinota, Butler, Types Lep. Het. B. M. pl. 87, fig. 7.

31. Hypsa wexiconia, Linn. (Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. ii,

p- 452.

32. Hypsa cxiavata, Butler, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1875, p. 317.

33. Hypsa marmorga, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. p. 1674.

34. Puizona inors, Walk. (Butler, Types Lep. Het. B. M. pl. 87,

fig. 6).

35. Bizone Bianca, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. vii, p. 1684.

36.

Barstne Gratiosa, Guerin, Delessert’s Voy. pl. 26, fig. 1.

BaxsINE conJunotana, Walk. (tessellata, Butler, Types Lep.

_M. pl. 86, f. 12).

ALope ocntiirera, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. iti, p. 620.

ALOA SANGUINOLENTA, Fabr., Hnt. Syst. iii, 1, p. 473.

Creatonotus piminura, Walk. (Butler, Types Lep. Het. B. M.

pl. 85, fig. 5).

RHopOGASTRIA AsTREA, Drury, Ins. ii, pl. 28, fig. 4.

42. Oreyia aupirascia, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. Suppl. p. 325.

43. ARTAXA SUBFASCIATA, Walk., 1. c. Suppl. p. 332.

44, RepDOA suBMARGINATA, Walk. (Butler, Types Lep. Het. B. M.

pl. 89, fig. 3).

45.

46.

47.

48.

49,

PrrtNa BASALIS, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. iv, p. 966.

Numenes insignis, Moore, Catal, Lep. E. I. C. ii, pl. 10, fio. 6.

LymantriA oBsoLeTA, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. iv, p. 880.

TRABALA VISHNU, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ. iii, p. 207.

Dreata testacua, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. iv, p. 905.

50. CRICULA TRIFENESTRATA, Helfer, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 1878,

p. 405.

51. APHENDALA DivARIcATA, Moore, n. sp.

Female.

Upperside pale purplish brownish ochreous: forewing

with a slender dark ochreous-brown band curving upward from poste-

236 F.. Moore—List of Moths from Cachar. [No. 3,

rior margin at one-third from the base to one-third before the apex, and

from which a straight erect similar band extends from its costal end to

the posterior angle. Body dark ochreous-brown. Expanse 12 inch.

Taken at Sileuri.

52. Narapa rugosa, Walk. Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. v. p. 1109.

[53. Zevuzura, sp. The larve, pups, and perfect insects observed

by J. Wood-Mason. The ‘borer’ of tea-planters. ].

NoctTvugs.

54. PRODENIA CILIGERA, Guén., Noct. i, p. 164.

55. AMYNA SELENAMPHA, Guén., Noct. i, p. 406.

56. ALAMIS UMBRINA, Guén., Noct. iti, p. 4.

57. XANTHODES TRANSVERSA, Guén., Noct. ii, p. 211.

58. Varnia ieniTa, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. xxxiii, p. 825.

59. ANOPHIA OLIVESCENS, Guén., Noct. iii, p. 48.

60. ATHYRMA, sp. ?P

61. CaLesiA HaMORRHODA, Guén., Noct. iii, p. 258.

62. Remicia FRUGALIS, Fabr. (Walker, Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. xiv,

63. Remicta ArcHESIA, Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 273, fig. F. G.

64. Cantyna sacuaRiA, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. xiii, p.

65. SERICEA SUBSTRUENS, Walk., |. c. xiv, p. 1276.

66. Lyanioprs HYPpoLEUCA, Guén., Noct. iui, p. 125.

67. ArGiva HIEROGLYPHICA, Drury, Exot. Ins. ii, pl. 2, fig. 1.

68. NycTIPaAo CREPUSCULARIS, Cram. (Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B, M.

xiv, p. 1304).

69. NycTIPAO OBLITERANS, Walk., 1. c. xiv, p. 1307.

70. Hunoprs caranna, Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 269, fig. HE. F.

71. Lacoprrera HoNESTA, Hubn. (Walk. Catal. Lep. Het. B. M.

xiv, p. 1352).

*72. OPHIDERES SALAMINIA, Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 174, fig. A.

73. OPHIDERES FULLONICA,

74. SprrAMA COHHZRENS, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. xiv, p.

1321. |

(75. Eumera cRAMERI. The larvee observed by J. Wood-Mason.

The ‘leaf-insect’ of planters. |

(76. Evumeta, sp. The larvee observed by J. Wood-Mason. The

‘ stick-insect ’ of planters. |

GEOMETRES.

77. Lacyra TaLaca, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. xx, p. 59.

78. URAPTERYX CROCOPTERATA, Kollar, Hiigel’s Kasch. ix, p. 483.

F. Moore—List of Moths from Cachar. 237

Buzura MULTIPUNCTARIA, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. xxvi,

Expos scotopaica, Drury, Exot. Ins. ii, pl. 22, fig. 1.

Macaria nora, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. xxiii, p. 934.

Naxa textinis, Walk., 1. c. vii, p. 1743.

Micronia CASEATA, Guén., Phal. ii, p. 27.

. Micronta acuLuata, Guén., 1. c. ii, pl. 13, fig. 8.

85. Arayris ocELLATaA, H. Sch. (Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M.

xxii, p. 807.

. 86. AcIDALIA, sp. ?

87. ABRAXAS MARTARIA, Guén, Phal. ui, p. 205.

PYRALES.

88. ASTURA PUNCTIFERALIS, Guen., Delt. et Pyral. p. 320.

89. EvcLypHis PROcOPIALIS, Cram., Pap. Exot. pl. 368, fig. E.

CRAMBICES.

90. APURIMA XANTHOGASTRELLA, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M.

xxvii, p. 194.

TINEINES.

*91. NosyMNA REPLETELLA, Walk., Catal. Lep. Het. B. M. xxix,

p. 851. :

92. SaGoRA RUTILELLA, Walk., Characters of Und. Lep. Het. p. 101

(1869).

[The insects before whose names an asterisk (*) is prefixed were

captured on Nemotha, a peak of the North Cachar Hills about 3300 feet

high. All the rest were taken at Silcuri, Borakhai, Silduby, Dharmkhal,

Durgakuna, Doarbun, Irangmara, Doloo, Subong, and other tea-gardens

in the plains. The only species of any interest to tea-planters are the

Zeuzera and the two case-bearers belonging to the genus Humeta, descrip-

_ tions of which will be published hereafter elsewhere. J. W-M.]

238 J. Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis. [No. 3,

XI.—Revised Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis, a remarkable Genus

of Mantodea common to India and Tropical America.—By J. Woov-

Mason, Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Musewm, and Pro-

fessor of Comparative Anatomy in the Medical College, Calcutta.

(With 15 Woodcuts.)

Since the former version of this Synopsis was published, some

additional material has fallen into my hands, by the aid of which I have

been enabled to establish the existence of two distinct Indian species,

and to identify with certainty a larva which I had previously assigned

with hesitation to Ch. rhombicollis.

Two Indian species have been described, one by Fabricius under

the name of Mantis cancellata, and the other by De Saussure as Ch.

squilla from a perfect male insect and a larva. The recent discovery of

the true female of the latter proves that the insects I had previously

considered to be females and abnormal males of it represent a different

species, to which I have the less hesitation in applying the Fabrician

name that Prof. Westwood has named a female from Saugor in the

Oxford Museum Ch. cancellata.

De Saussure has described and figured one of the remarkable larve

of the genus—that of his Ch. squilia—, and pointed out the close resem-

blance it bears to that of an American species; De Borre has recently

figured a larva of Oh. rhombicollis which is nearly intermediate in age

between my figures 3 and 4; a larva of Ch. rhomboidea is preserved in

the British Museum ; and I give figures of the larve of three additional

species and also of an earlier stage of Ch. squilla; so that, counting the

larva of Ch. strumaria figured by Mérian, larve of no less than 7 out of

the 9 species recognized by me are now known.

Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. Fig. 4.

Cheradodis cancellata. Ch. brunneri. Ch. servillet. Ch. squilla.

Q nymph. d nymph. é nymph. @ nymph.

The close similarity of these larve to one another furnishes a

remarkable confirmation of the view that the adults are congeneric.

ee eee

i. vy +4 . .

1884.] J. Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis. 239

Genus Cuq@raponis, Serville.

ee A. Fore femora without a black blotch on the inner side.

1. CH@RADODIS STRUMARIA.

Madame Mérian, Ins. de Surinam, 1726, tab. 27, Q et nymph.

Roesel von Rosenhof, Der monatlich-herausgegebenen Insecten Belustigung, 2ter

Theil, 1749, Locust tab. iii, fig. 1 et 2, 9 et nymph (copied from Mérian).

Mantis strumaria, Linn., Syst. Nat. Ins. t. i, pt. ii, 1767, p. 691, no. 18, Q.

Fabr., Ent. Syst. ii, 1793, p. 18, no. 21, 9.

—— cancellata, Stoll, Spectres et Mantes, pl. xi, fig. 42, 2 (non Fabr.).

Cheradodis cancellata, Serville, Hist. nat. des Orthopt. 1839, p. 206, 92 (non

Fabr.).

] cancellata, Saussure, Mant. Americ. p. 19, 4, @.

strumaria, Wood-Mason, J. A. S. B. xlix, pt. ii, p. 82, 1880, 9.

4 Madame Mérian was the first to figure a species of this genus.

Her figures were named and described by Linneus, whose description

applies to the perfect female insect, his name having obviously been

suggested by a fanciful resemblance of the swellings on the sides of the

pronotum in the supposed nymph to series of scrofulous tumours

(strume).

Fig. 5, 2.

The accompanying outline drawing of the pronotum of a specimen

when superposed upon the same part of Mérian’s figure, accurately coin-

cides therewith.

Stoll’s figure 42 without doubt represents a specimen of the same

species.

Has Cayenne (9, Serville) ; Surinam (?, Mérian, Stoll; d¢ ¢, De

Saussure).

B. Fore femora with a black blotch on the inner side.

(a.) The blotch on the lower half of the joint (American).

In the females of the following two species, the posterior angles of

the pronotal expansions are broadly rounded and are not produced back-

| wards beyond the level of the hinder end of the primitive pronotum.

a 32

240 J: Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis. [No. 3, 1

2. CH@RADODIS RHOMBICOLLIS.

Mantis rhombicollis, Latr. in Voy. de Humb., Zool., Ins. p. 103, pl. 39, figs. 2, 3, g.

Cheradodis peruviana, Serville, Hist. nat. des Orthopt. 1839, p. 207, @.

———— strumaria, Stal, Syst. Mant., 1877, p.15, g Q.

———_—— rhombicollis, Wood-Mason, 1. c. p. 82¢ 9.—De Borre, Liste des

Mant. Mus. Roy. de Belg. 1883, p. 5; et Comptes-rendus Soc. Ent. Belg. Nov. 1883,

Q et nymph fig.

The blotch commences, in both sexes, near the base of the femur,

extends through the ungual groove nearly to the middle of the joint, and

is there succeeded by a marginal row of black points in contact with the

bases of alternate spines.

Pasi Toy (ay oe : Fig. 6, ¢.

Has. ¢& ?, Guayaquil, in the collection of the British Museum ;

New Granada (& ¢, Stal) ; 9 et nymph, Ecuador, in Mus. Roy. Belg.

3. CH@RADODIS SERVILLEI.

Wood-Mason, 1. c. p. 83, 2 et nymph.

?. Closely allied to the preceding, from which it differs in having

the marginal field of the tegmina proportionately narrower, and in the

smaller size, as well as in the different shape, of the femoral blotch, which

is small and oval, commences just beyond the ungual groove, and is fol-

lowed by a marginal row of small black points.

Has. 2 2, Cache, Costa Rica, in the collection of Messrs. Godman

and Salvin and of the Indian Museum; nymph (Fig. 3), Chiriqui, in the

collection of the Indian Museum, Calcutta.

son—S ync vis of the. sy of Choma f

as (a BRUNNERI.

Ww a ot J. A.S. B., 1882, xli, p. 21, ? et nymph.

. Closely allied to Ch. rhombicollis, Latr., and Ch. Servillet, W.-M., : f ,

es ng from both in the size, shape, and position of the femoral blotch, | .

which is nearly thrice as long as broad, extends rather further in front

: f the ungual groove than it does behind it, and is followed by four black

pee arranged along the lower margin of the joint at the bases of alter-

ly convex instead of concave ; from the former in its much narrower and *

_ from the latter in its rather broader tegmina ; and from the latter in the

‘upper margin of its fore femora being coarsely granulated, and sinuous

instead of straight, in which latter respect it approaches the former.

ray ; ois. ? and nymph (Fig. 2), Santa Fé de Bogota, New Granada, in

| coll. |. Ind. Mus. Calcutta.

In the females of the next two species, and, in all probability, in those

of Ch. rhomboidea also, the posterior angles of the pronotal lamelle are

rounded angulate and produced backwards, so that the hinder end of the

primitive pronotum projects in the bottom of an angular emargination.

vias 3. CH@RADODIS LATICOLLIS.

Cheradodis laticollis, Serville, Revue, p. 24; Hist. nat. des Orthopt. 1839, p.

208, pl. iv, fig. 2, 9.

. — Saussure, Mantes Americ. p. 20, ?.

_ strumaria, Id, ibid. p. 18, 3.

laticollis, Stal, Syst. Mant. 1877, 17, @.

— Wood-Mason, J. A. 8. B. 1880, vol. xlix, pt. il, p. 83, gf Q.

oan

The blotch is situated, in both sexes, just beyond the ungual groove,

is oblong-rhomboidal in shape, and is followed by two black points on the

bases of alternate spines ; there is a fuscous speck at the end of the stig-

242 J. Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis. [No. 3

Pig, Si. Big. 10,40

matal spot of the tegmina ; and the antero-lateral margins of the prono-

tal lamelle are arcuate or convex, especially in the female.

Has. 5 6,5 2, Ecuador, in the collection of the Indian Museum,

Calcutta; Peru (9%, Stal); Cayenne (2, Serville et Stal); Surinam

(¢, Saussure).

6. CHGRADODIS STALII.

Wood-Mason, I. c. p. 83, d 9.

Differs from the preceding in the shape of the blotch (which is

pointed at both ends and commences in the ungual groove, and on either

side of whichthe femur is pale luteous-yellow instead of heing clouded with

fuscous) ; in being without a fuscous speck at the distal end of the

Fig. 13, @. Fig. 12, ¢.

stigma; in its shorter and differently shaped facial shield ; and in having

the antero-lateral margins sinuous-concave and the lateral angles of the

pronotal expansions more broadly rounded off.

Has. 1 6,4 2, Ecuador, in the Museums of Calcutta and Oxford.

7, CH@RADODIS RHOMBOIDEA.

Mantis rhomboidea, Stoll, Spectres et Mantes, pl. xi, fig. 45, ¢.

Cheradodis rhomboidea, Wood-Mason, l. c. p. 84, ¢.

A male insect from Para, in the British Museum, agrees neither with

Saussure’s description (loc, supra cit. p. 18), nor with any of the speci-

1884.) J. Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Cheeradodis. 243

mens in the Indian Museum; it more nearly approaches Stoll’s figure,

- agreeing therewith in the points in which it differs from the former.

The blotch commences in the ungual groove, thence extending as far

along the femur as in the preceding four species, but it is not followed

by a marginal row of black points. The pronotal lamelle have no poste-

rior angles, their postero-lateral margins dwindling away to nothing

posteriorly.

Has. ¢, Para, in the collection of the British Museum. A nymph,

from Kga, in the same collection, probably also belongs to this species.

This species is nearest allied to Ch. laticollis.

(B.) The blotch on the upper half of the joint (Indian).

8. CH@RADODIS CANCELLATA.

Mantis cancellata, Fabr., Ent. Syst. ii, 1793, p. 18.

Cheradodis squilla, Lucas, Ann. Ent. Soc. Fr. 5 sér. ii, 1872, p. 32, 9.

Wood-Mason, 1. c. p. 48 (ex parte).

Pronotum dissimilar in the sexes, being much less dilated in the

male than in the female; its antero-lateral and postero-lateral margins

not forming an angle at their junction in the female.

Femoral blotch narrower, confined to the foliaceous crest of the

joint, and bordered below by a band of enamel-like bright emerald-green.

In the shape and extent of the pronotal expansions, the male of this

species much resembles the same sex of Cheradodis rhomboidea, differing,

however, strikingly therefrom in its much shorter pronotum. The female

approaches and differs from those of Cheradodis rhombicollis and its

allies in the same respects.

Has. India (Fabricius) generally, from Ceylon, through Madras and

Central India (2 in coll. Hop. Oxon.), to the banks of the Killing River

on the N. H. Frontier (nymph [ Fig. 1] in coll. Ind. Mus. Calc.)

Obs. A specimen of this species in the British Museum is errone-

ously labelled ‘‘ Brazil.”

9. CH@RADODIS SQUILLA.

Cheradodis squilla, Saussure, Mél. Orthopt. t. i, 3me fasc. p. 161, pl. iv, fig. 3,

3a, go et nymph.

? — —— Lucas, Ann. Entom. Soc. Fr. 5 sér. t. ii, 1872, p. 82, 9.

oe Wood-Mason, l. c. p. 84 (ex parte).

Pronotum similar in the sexes, its postero-lateral forming with its

antero-lateral margin a distinct angle in both; that of the male differing

from that of the female only in being rather less expanded, and conse-

quently less convex, postero-laterally.

Femoral blotch broader, extending on to the primitive femur up to

the inner end of the unequal groove and not bordered with green.

CORRE Ts ied Nes 88 MTS AT eee ae ee

244 J. Wood-Mason—Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis.

Fig. 14, ou :

It is much more probable that the insect obtained by M. Jansen in

the neighbourhood of Madras and described by Lucas as the opposite sex

of De Saussure’s species is a female of the preceding than of this species.

Has. Ceylon, ¢ et nymph in Geneva Museum, 8 2’and larve in

Museums of Calcutta and Colombo.

I am indebted to the courtesy and liberality of the Trustees of the

Colombo Museum for perfect insects and nymphs, and to Mr. F. M.

Mackwood for a nymph of this species. :

In Fig: 14, the left lateral angle has been much too rounded off by

the engraver ; it should be like the right.

OO lg GOO Ne tl a LN

Abraxas martaria, 237

Acanthops, 208

*Acesina, 41

» paraganesa, 1v., 42

Acidalia, 237

Alamis umbrina, 236

Aloa sanguinolenta, 235

Alope ocellifera, 7b.

Amblypodia, 43

- absens, 41

a agaba, 38

Ss alea, ib., 39

* Ae andersonii, 43

A anthelus, 39

* apidanus, 41

a areste, 39, ib.

a aroa, 42

ws atkinsoni, 38

“ atrax, 39

se bazalus, ib.

» bupola, 38

a ceca, 41

es diardi, ib.

a erylus, 30

- fulgida, 41

_ ganesa, 42

: jangala, 37

‘a paraganesa, 42

* perimuta, ib.

> selta, 38

< taooana, 43

* vidura, 36

zeta, 41

Amyna selenampha, 236

Anaxarcha, 206

Anophia olivescens, 236

*A phendala divaricata, 235

Aphnzous, 25, 27

» concanus, 27

5 himalayanus, 26

¢ lazularius, 27

* “i lilacinus, 28

_ lohita, 26, 27

- lunulifer, 28, 251

* lunulifera, 251

» nipalicus, 27

& orissanus, 7b.

< peguanus, 26, ib.

» khurdanns, ib., 27

INDEX.

Ras Names of New Genera and Species have an asterisk (*) prefixed.

*Aphneous tigrinus, 25

” trifurcatus, 26, 27

fas vulcanus, 25

+ ‘ zebrinus, 28

zoilus, ib.

Appias, 46

» amboides, ib.

*Apporasa, 38

Ae atkinsoni, ib.

Apurima xanthogastrella, 237

Argiva hieroglyphica, 236

Argyris ocellata, 237

Arhopala chinensis, 41

Artaxa subfasciata, 235

Astura punctiferalis, 237

Athyrma, 236

Barsine conjunctana, 235

» gratiosa, ib.

» tessellata, ib.

Bizone bianca, ib.

Bombyces, 234

Buzura multipunctaria, 237

Calamites, 191, 193

Calesia hemorrhoda, 236

Callyna jaguaria, ib.

Calymnia panopns, 234

Catophaga, 43

ps neombo, 7b.

pA paulina, 44

% An roepstorfiii, ib.

* is wardii, 43

Cephaloxys lacteipennis, 233

r locusta, ib.

+ quadrimacula, ib.

terpsichore, ib.

Chalcosia argentata, 234

*Chliaria, 32

ai cachara, 33

+ chandrana, 2b.

x eltola, ib.

a kina, ib.

- nilgirica, 7b.

othona, ib.

Chosradodis, 238, 239

Bs brunneri, 238, 241

” cancellata, 238, 239, 243

a laticollis, 241, 243

is peruviana, 240 [243

ag rhombicollis, 238, ib., 241,

246

Choeradodis rhomboidea, 238, 241, 242,

243

s servillei, 238, 240, 241

xs squilla, 238, 243

” stalii, 242

strumaria, 238, 239, 240, 241

,Chrysophanus, 25

is baralacha, 7b.

» phleeas, ib.

” stygianus, ib,

Cicada, 229 phage.

» affinis, 211

» anea, 229

» apicalis, 231

» aurata, 230

» crocea, 220

” ferruginea, 230

» flavida, 226, 227

» guttularis, 227

» hemiptera, 215

» immaculata, 231

» imperatoria, 229

» indica, 217

» intermedia, 231

» maculata, 222

» maculicollis, 230

» mannifera, 223

» mearesiana, 217

» nobilis, 215

» obtecta, 226

» octonotata, 221

» oOperculata, 231

» percheronii, 222

», pheenicura, 219

» philemata, 218

», pulchella, 223

», Sanguinea, 218

» sanguinoleta, ib.

» Speciosa, 217

» spinosa, 227

” splendidula, 220

» subtincta, 229

» subvitta, 230

» sulphurea, 223

» testacea, 219

» thalassina, 222

» trabeata, 219

» vacina, 231

» . vaginata, 223

» Varians, 226

» vicina, 230

» virescens, 223

xantes, 230

Cicadides, 210

Cirrhochroa, 19

= abnormis, 1b.

*Cophanta, 35

i illurgis, ib., 36

maculata, 36

Cosmopsaltria, 225, 226, 228

abdulla, 226, 227

+E)

*Cupitha, 47

Index.

Cosmopsaltria doryca, 226, 227

os durga, 226

ne flavida, 227

- obtecta, 226

e oopaga, 227

os sita, 226, 228

spinosa, 226, 227

Crambices, 237

Creatonotus diminuta, 235

Cricula trifenestrata, ib.

Cryptotympana, 230

atrata, 231

Ps immaculata, 1b.

* intermedia, 7b.

of recta, 230

vicina, 1b.

purreea, 48

mes tympanifera, ib.

Cyclosia panthona, 234

9 papilionaris, 1b.

*Dacalana, 36

* burmana, ib.

a cotys, vb.

a vidura, ib.

*Darasana, 42

+ newara, 1b.

= perimuta, ib.

Deudorix nasaka, 34

*Devanica bicolor, 235

is risa, 1b.

Diceropygia, 226

Dictyopteris P simplex, 192

Dicynodon, 1b.

Dipsas malika, 34

Dreata testacea, 235

EE ee, 31

‘ boisduvalii, <b.

i fabricii, 32

= lisias, 1b.

ravindra, 31

Dundubia, 223, 226, 227, 228

4 chlorogaster, 226

cinctimanus, 288

immacula, 225

= intemerata, 224

“ lateralis, ib.

s linearis, 228

maculipes, 224

mannifera, 223, 225

microdon, 224

nagarasingna, 225.

nicomache, 224

a obtecta, 226

= radha, 225

es ramifera, 228

a samia, 225

saturata, 227

singularis, 225

spinosa, 227

> tigrina, 224

Dundubia tripurasura, 225, 226

Fes urania, 228

Ad vaginata, 223

s varians, 226

° vibrans, 224, 225, ib., 228

Elphos scolopaica, 237

Emathia, 229

“A zegrota, ib.

Eremopteris, 189

Ergolis, 19

» ariadne, 20

mi y5- indica, 4b.

» merione, 19, ib.

* , tapestrina, 19

Erynnis, 51

as alces, ib.

Eterusia risa, 235

*Euaspa, 29

» miliona, 1b.

Euchromia polymena, 234

Euglyphis procopialis, 237

Eumeta, 236, ib.

» crameri, 236

Euschema militaris, 234

Eusemia bellatrix, ib.

communis, 1b.

Euthalia, 18

oe andersonii, 1b.

a cocytus, 19

= lepidea, 7b.

4 # macnairii, ib.

a Fidicina, 231

” corvus, 2b.

* immaculata, 1b.

« intermedia, ib.

* operculata, ib.

a recta, 230

vicina, ib.

Geana, 220, 221

oe consobrina, 222

»» consors, 221

» Gives, ib.

» tfestiva, ib., 222

» maculata, 222

» octonotata, 221

sulphurea, 223

Gangamopteris, 191, 192, 194

Geometres, 236

Glossopteris, 189, 191, 193, 194

»” browniana, 189, 191, 192

s% damudica, 192

Graptotettix, 221

guttatus, ib.

Heemaris hylas, 234

Hesperia sala, 49

Hesperiidze, 47

Heterocera, 234

Heterusia edocla, ib.

” magnifica, 1b.

Hiposcritia, 46

® 2 imbecilis, 1b.

Index.

Hiposcritia indra, 46

mahana, ib.

Histia papilionaria, 234

Homoptera, 210

Huechys, 218

<i crocea, 220

” fumigata, ib.

Pe incarnata, 218

as octonotata, 221

os pheenicura, 219

a philemata, 218

Pe sanguinea, 1b.

” sanguinolenta, ib.

ra splendidula, 220

a testacea, 219

ms thoracia, ib.

a thoracica, ib.

Ps trabeata, ib.

transversa, 1b.

Hulodes caranea, 236

Hypolyceena, 29, 31

- andamana, 31

oy astyla, ib.

ae cachara, 33

» chandrana, 1b.

ae eltola, 1b.

a erylus, 30

me grotei, 34

a kina, 33

a3 nilgirica, 1b.

= othona, ib.

9s sipylus, 30

e sisyphus, 7b.

a tharrytas, 1b.

Pa thecloides, 31

tmolus, 30

Hypsa alciphron, 235

» Clavata, 4b.

» heliconia, ib.

»» Warmorea, ib.

», plaginota, ib.

Idmais, 45

9» +oriens, 4b.

», surya, 2b.

Tolaus, 34, 35, 36

» cotys, 36

» helius, 35, 1b.

» illurgis, 36

» maculatus, 2b.

Ixias, 44

* ,, ganduca, ib.

»» moulmeinensis, 45

Lagoptera honesta, 236

Lagyra talaca, ib.

Lepidodendron, 191, 193

Lepidoptera, 16

Leptopsaltria, 227

= guttularis, 1b.

a tuberosa, 1b.

*Lobocla, 51

fia ty casyapa, 52

247

248

Lobocla liliana, 51, 52

Seaes 22

oS andersonii, ib.

be marmorata, 7b.

‘A substigosa, 1.

Lophura pusilla, 234

Lyceena, 23

s bilucha, 24

es bracteala, 1b., 251

- bracteata, 251

es Pe chamanica, 23

a fugitiva, 25

s malaya, 22

* * *

* nadira, 24

Lycemesthes, 23

x. bengalensis, ib.

ag lyceena, ib., 251

Pr lyceenina, ib., 251

z - lycambes, 23

ae merguiana, ab.

orissica, ib.

Lyceenide, 20, 251

Lygniodes hypoleuea, 236

Lymantria obsoleta, 235

Macaria nora, 237

Macroglossa belis, 234

ss gilia, ib.

ok gyrans, ib.

a luteata, ib.

Macrotceniopteris lata, 189

Sc saebtal pa 45

naganum, ib.

Mantis cancellata, 238, 239, 243

», rhombicollis, 240

» rhomboidea, 242

» strumaria, 239

Mantodea, 206, 238

Pg aie 21

“ sikkima, ib.

¥ thwaitesii, ab.

Melampsalta, 225

varians, 226

Melittia eurytion, 234

Micronia aculeata, 237

7 caseata, ib.

Milionia zonea, 234

Mogannia, 232

“ funebris, 2b.

- illustrata, 7b.

+ indicans, ib.

a lacteipennis, 233

i locusta, ib.

as obliqua, 232

a quadrimacula, 233

ss recta, 232

mc terpsichore, 233

venustissima, 232

Myrina lisias, 31

» malika, 34

» Mmilionia, 29

» Yravindra, 3l

Index.

Myrina sipylus, 30

os thecloides, 31

» travana, 37

Neggerathiopsis, 194

Narathura, 42

* aroa, ib.

eS roona, ib.

Natada rugosa, 236

Naxa textilis, 237

Noctues, 236

Nosymna repletella, 237

Numenes insignis, 235

Nyctalemon zampa, 234

Nyctemera lacticinia, ib.

Nyctipao crepuscularis, 236

2 obliterans, ib.

Nymphalide, 16

Nymphalina, 18

Oncotympana, 228

Ophideres fullonica, 236

salaminia, 1b.

Orgyia albifascia, 235

Oxypleura basialba, 214

Pk bufo, 216

~* sanguifiua, ib.

Be subrufa, ib.

Pamphila purreea, 48

Panchala, 38

- paraganesa, 42

Papilio, 46

» apidanus, 41

» asiaticus, 46, 47

» Jadakensis, 46

» lisias, 32

* ,, sikkimensis, 47

Papilionide, 43

Papilionineg, 46

Peta 20

gaura, ib.

et, 21

3 albidisca, ib.

i malaya, 22

Pecopteris, 192, 194

Rs australis, 192, 195

ee indica, 195

Perina basalis, 235

Philona inops, 1b.

Phyllocrania, 206, 207, 208

Phyllotheca, 191, 192, 194

a australis, 195

indica, 191

_Phyllothelys, 206

” paradoxum, 209, 210

” westwoodi, 207, 210

Pidorus glaucopis, 234

Pierinz, 43

Pintia ferrea, 235

Pitasila varians, 234

Platylomia, 226

Platypleura, 211

- andamana, 214

Index.

*Platypleura assamensis, 212 Satadra atrax, 38, 39

= basialba, 214 9 bazalus, 39

a bufo, 216 Z. bupola, 38

a celebs, 213 om ceca, 41

a cervina, 217 der canaraica, 39

a congrex, 211 $s chinensis, 41

if distincta, 233 2 ys chola, 39, 40

* insignis, 216 c= diardi, ib.

a interna, 211 5 fulgida, ib.

* a nicobarica, 213, 233 ae lazula, 40

a nobilis, 215 WY as patuna, ib.

# octoguttata, 216 as Selta, 38

“6 phalzenoides, 211, 212 sa zeta, 41

sl 8 roepstorffii, 214

Satarupa, 50

a semilucida, 215 os bhagava, 1b.

< sphinx, 213 ar narada, ib.

straminea, 217 eee phisara, ib.

subrufa, 216 “ sambara, ib.

Plesioneura, 48

Satyrinez, 16

es leucocera, 1b. Scieroptera, 220

. liliana, 52 5) crocea, 1b.

* munda, 48 a fumigata, ib.

Peecilopsaltria, 211 ¥ splendula, ib.

= affinis, ib. Sericea substruens, 236

- capitata, 214, 216 en, 199, 200

octoguttata, 216 ee indicum, ab.

Polyneura, 211 ce ornatum, 200

Ea ducalis, ib.

Polyommatus erylus, 30

*Sinthusa, 33

“A grotei, 34

Pomponia, 228 +s malika, 1b.

x bindusara, 7b. Be nasaka, 1b.

oy imperatoria, 229 Sphenopteris, 191

es kama, 228 alata, ib.

- linearis, ib. polymorpha, 7b.

9 madhava, 229

= tigroides, 1b.

as transversa, 228

urania, ib,

Pratapa, 37

ogee bhotea, 7b.

Prodenia ciligera, 236

Pyrales, 237

Sphinges, 234

Spirama coherens, 236

Stridulantia, 210

Suastus, 49

» aditus, +b.

» mollerii, ib.

» Sala, 2b.

Syntomis atkinsonii, 234

Redoa submarginata, 235 Tacua, 217

*Remelana, 37 ‘s speciosa, ib.

- jangala, ib. Tzniopteris abnormis, 189

a travana, ib. Tzenopteris daintreci, 192.

Remigia archesia, 236 i maa 51

a frugalis, ib. 7 khasiana, ab.

Rhacopteris, 191, 193 a ravi, ib.

Rhodogastria astrea, 235

Rhynchota, 210

Rubidgea mackayi, 192

Sagora rutilella, 237

*Satadra, 38

Tajuria, 37

» longinus, 1b.

Terebratula, 188

Tettigades, 211

Tettigonia affinis, 7b.

oe absens, 41, 251 a festiva, 222

me abseus, 251 ms maculata, ib.

” agaba, 38 9 obtecta, 226

os alea, ib., 39 » octoguttata, 216

9 anthelus, 39 Pe philamata, 218°

a apidanus, 40, 41 + sanguinolenta, tb.

9 areste, 39, 40, 41

by speciosa, 217

250 Index.

Tettigonia spinosa, 227 Trypanophora humeralis, 235

4s splendidula, 220 Tryphzromera plagifera, 234

7 testacea, 219 Urapteryx crocopterata, 236

* vaginata, 223 Varnia ignita, ib.

Thaduka, 38 Vertebraria, 191, 194

Thecla malika, 34 Xanthodes transversa, 236

» nasaka, ib. Ypthima, 16

Thinnfeldia, 194 mp ee apicalis, 17

Tibicen, 231 7 ariaspa, 1b.

» apicalis, 1b. * 2 horsfieldii, 18

»» aurengzebe, ib. * oe howra, 17

Tineines, 237 a hiibneri, 18

Toseua, 217 * o kasmira, 17

» albata, ib. * “ mahratta, 16

» dives, 221 * newara, 1b.

»» mearesiana, 217 _- norma, 17

»» melanoptera, 1b. ” pandocus, 18

» Ssplendida, 2b. ” philomela, ib.

Trabala, 205 s rara, 251

* , irrorata, ib. rura, 17, ib.

» Vishnu, 235 Zeuzera, 236, 237

Errata. 251

ERRATA,

Page 17, sixth line from top, for “ rura” read “ rara.”

»» ») Sixth line from bottom, for “ tripupilled”’ read ‘‘ bipupilled.”

», 19, ten lines from bottom, omit the word “and” after ‘‘ conspicuous.”

», 23, thirteen lines from top, for “‘ subbasal” read “‘ subanal.”

3» » five lines from bottom, for ‘‘ lycena” read “ lycenina.”

7 », 24, fourteen lines from top, for ‘‘ bracteala” read ‘‘ bracteata.”

» 25, fourteen lines from bottom, for “ near’”’ read “ nearer.”

» 27, eleven lines from top, for “ black”? read “ band.”

», 28, eleven lines from top, for ‘ lunulifer” read lunulifera.”

» 388, ten lines from top, for “ Catal. Lyc, Brit. Mus. p. 8. pl. 8, fig. 92, 93

aes" read “Illus. Diurn. Lep., Lycenide, p. 14g, pl. 30, figs. 48, 49

Bo}?

» 40, twelve lines from bottom, substitute a hyphen for the comma between

the words “‘ cell” and ‘ streak.”

», 41, fifteen and fourteen lines from bottom, for ‘ aBsENS” and “ absens"

read ‘‘ ABSEUS”’ and “ abseus.”

», 48, twelve lines from top, for “564” read ‘‘ 594,”

» 2, two lines from top, for “ xxii’’ read “ xii.”

NEW SERIES. VOL. LIII, CCLVIII.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. LIII, Part EFS No. I.—1884.

EDITED BY

JHE NaTuURAL ftIsTORY SECRETARY.

eae =

= =e oz

a S|

» _ “The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

a” within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

< man or produced by nature.”’—S1r WILLIAM JONES,

. #,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

‘ to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

don, care of Messrs. 5 apa and Co., 57 & 59, Ludgate Hill,

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED BY J, W, JHOMAS, AT THE PaApTisT Mission PREsS,

| AND PUBLISHED BY THE

PSIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

1884.

Sw ewe.

- Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.—To Non-Subscribers Bs, 2

Price in England, 4 Shillings.

Issued June 5Oth, 1884.

_ GONTENTS.

1—The Theory of the Winter rine of Northern India. os, Henry —

-F. Branrorp, F. BR. S., President, Asiatic Society of Bengal,

Meteorological Reporter to the Government of India, ............

Il —Descriptions of some new Asiatic Diurnal Lepidoptera ; chiefly

from specimens contained in the Indian Musewm, Caleutta.—

By Freperic Moors, F.Z.8., A. L.S. Communicated by

the Natura HIstTory Salenraky. 1 itd OPIN s Budi hoe

oes eee Oe

CONTEN Ts

OF “THE NATURAL ‘HISTORY PART, (PT. 11.) OF THE

- JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1883.

Be? No. 1; igacd October 24th, 1883). Description of a new species of

o the Rhopalocerous Genus Cyrestis from the Great Nicobar. (With Pl. 1.)

poeey —By Lionet pe Nice’vittn. On the measurement of Solar Radiation

by means of the black-bulb Thermometer in vacuo.—By 8. A. Hitt,

_-B.Se., Metl. Rep. to N. W. P. and Oudh. Communicated by H. F.

ies ei LouS. F.R. 8. Notes of a Trip up the Dihing Basin to Dopha

— ——~Pani, &e., January and February, 1882. (With Pls. II to VI. )—By

y S$. EH. Pat. On the recent ewistence of Rhinoceros indicus in the North

a Wester nm Provinces, and a description of a tracing of an archaic rock

inting from Mirzapur representing the hunting’ of this aminal. (With

Pils. gi and VIII.)—By Joun Cockburn.

ae Nos. 2, 3 & 4, (issued March 6th, 1884). On new and little-known

Pa ~ Bhopalocora from the Indian region. (With Pls. I, IX & X. )—By

Laongen pp Nice’vinte. Third List of Butterflies taken in Sikkim in

October, 1883, with notes on habits §c.—By Lionen pe Nicn’vitxe.

g's ’ Ate

S ee

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

-ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

RS. AS.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XXI (18438

to 1851); Vols. XXVI, XXVII (1857, 1858), and Vols.

xXxXxX, XXXITI to XLVITI, (1861, 1864 to 1881).

Asiatic Researches, from Vols. VIL to XI, XIII, XVII, XTX and

ME ha MG a yicce cuic’nvs ond Chen wea vo Ce eae PR Ceiay ties SUE T Cael aat ance

Ditto ditto, TNA BRe AS ech ik ceo oes aA ies Ste

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in rabies Pocsian® Guat Gia sed

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translated into English, with notes

and indexes, by BL, Bloc hsagprn lees hoot oi ecest see 12

The Tabaqat-i-Nagiri. Translated by Major H. G. Raverty,

LU BSG.) 755 tcpitecn ss Pes eben eget

Aborigines of India, by B. H. Hodgson, ‘Esq., B. 6. s., bes yonten seen

THE BUTTERFLIES OF INDIA, BURMAH, AND CEYLON.

| BY -

Masor G. F. L. MARSHALL, R. E.,

: AND |

LIONEL pz NICE’VILLE.

A descriptive handbook of all the known species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera

inhabiting that region, with notices of allied species occurring in the neighbouring

countries along the border: with numerous illustrations.

Vol. -I, Part I, is now available at the Publishers, containing Glossary of Tech-

nical Terms, Notes on Collecting and Preserving, Synopsis of the Families and Sub-

families, and detailed descriptions of all the Danaine, with one coloured plate, nine

autotype plates, and four wood engravings. Price, Ks. 6.

Part ii, which completes Vol. I, is also now available; and contains the detailed

descriptions of all the Satyrine, Hlymnune, Morphine, and Acreine, with eight

autotype plates, and eleven wood engravings. Price, Rs. 8.

The book will be completed in four or five volumes, the remaining volumes to be

issued as prepared. The exact period of publication cannot be guaranteed, nor the

precise cost of the total work, but every effort will be made to complete the publica-

tion within three years at the outside, and to keep the cost within Rs. 60 for the

entire work.

PUBLISHED BY THE

CALCUTTA CENTRAL PRESS COMPANY, LIMITED,

5, Counciz House STREET,

GO £ ooo.

» — : .

NEW SERIES. NOL. Litt, ne SY CCL.

JOURNAL

OF THE

| ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. LIII, Part II, No. II.—1884.

EDITED BY

ire NATURAL fiISTORY PECRETARY.

sm PLS

—v~

FA Ree

£5 MBS PB UA Ba i ee

OO ES eee ee eee cee eee eeeeeeSs< 0 0 Oo I OOOO oO

*f yhe bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

. ae

*,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, nee Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 S§° 59, Ludgate Hill.

OR en NR ee eee

CALCUTTA:

| Prone BY j. yW. J HOMAS, AT THE PAPTIST Mission PRESS, )

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 5j, PARK STREET,

Cn ee a ee ae a ae eee — e

Prise (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.——To Non-Subscribers Rg, 2

Price in England, 4 Shillings.

a Issued September 17th, 1884.

CONTENTS.

111.—Account of the South-West Monsoon Storms of the 26th June

to Ath July and of 10th to 15th November 1883.—Bi y JOHN

Exior, M. A., Meteorological Reporter to the Government of

Bengal ia Pg. Piso sess ine puso debs apaah nny voegnten stam e ee aes eee

see

Plate I, illustrative of Mr. H. F.. Blanford’s article on ‘The Theory ae.

of the Winter Rains of Northern India,’ is issued herewith. .

The Title-page, Index, &c. and the Plates wanting to. Secale

Vol. LI, Pt. IT for 1883, will be issued in a separate wrapper as soon as

they are ready. |

LL ——eaeaeEEeEEeeeeY SS

CONTENTS

ae OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (Pr. I.) OF THE

a - souema OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1883,

er 0. 1 pate Guéabes 24th, 1883). Bandits of a new Species of

the Rhopalocer ous Genus Cyrestis from the Great Nicobar. (With Pl. I.)

—By Lionent pe Nice’vitre. On the Measurement of Solar Radiation

z means of the Black-bulb Thermometer in vacuo.—By 8. A. Hitt,

‘B. Se., Metl. Rep. to N. W. P.and Oudh. Notes of a Trip up the Dihing g

P. Basin to Dopha Pam, §c., January and February, 1882. (With Pls. If

3 VI .)—By 8. E. Puan. On the recent Existence of Rhinoceros indicus

n the North Western Provinces, and a Description of a Tracing of an

Bar chaic Rock Painting from Mirzapur representing the Hunting of this

Animal. (With Pls. VII and Vu. )—By Joun Cocxzurn.

3 ze “Nos. 2,36 4, (issued March 6th, 1884). On new and little-known

B hopalocera from the Indian Region. (With Pls. I, IX, & X.)—By

al LIonen pe Nice’vitun. Third List of Butterflies taken in Sikkim in

October, 1883, with Notes on Habits, §c. —By Lionnt pe Nicp’vitxe.

ou. x

me vag

a: %

’ sa me

an . ’

o® < é

a.) i -

S +

¢ h ‘ e,

: ve ¥, ge. PAAR oOo Oe =

Sn <a

a rs se

bat

as °

pag >

4 -

, “

: -

”

‘ ‘

- > *)

‘ ti

PUBLICATIONS | cos:

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Caicutta.

RS. AS.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Heceal: from Vols. XII to XXI (1843 a_i

to 1851); Vols. XXVI, XXVITI (1857, 1858), and Vols.

XXX, XXXIIT to XLVIU, (1861, 1864 to 1881). a.

Asiatic Researches, from gee VII to XI, XIII, XV, XIX and — #

BRP OBOU AE sayy avis (VEIN Rao oe Riss ater ees oodeyedeSs . earUe, ae

Ditto ditto, Index,...... ig mente aa th aieeois meee i igt ye

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in | Arabic, Persian, and Urdu, sii od

and indexes, by H. Blochmann, M. A., 12 45%

The Tabaqat-i- ay: Translated. by Major HG. Raverty, ae

hE 21 Ge ae 10 Go

Aborigines of India, by B. H. Hodgson, “Esq., B.C. Ss, Sh PME a 3 7

THE BUTTERFLIES OF INDIA, BURMAN, AND CEYLON.

Mason G. F. L. MARSHALL, R. E.,

AND

LIONEL vz NICHVILLE. q

A descriptive handbook of all the known species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera 4

inhabiting that region, with notices of allied species occurring in the neighbouring —

countries along the border: with numerous illustrations. 3

Vol. I, Part I, is now available at the Publishers, Baméatuing Glossary of Tech- —

nical Terms, Notes on Collecting and Preserving, Synopsis of the Families and Sub- |

families, and detailed descriptions of all the Danaine, with one coloured plate, nine —

antotype plates, and four wood engravings. Price, Rs. 6. 4

Part ii, which completes Vol. I, is also now available ; and contains the detailed 4

descriptions of all the Satyrine, Elymniine, Morphine, and Acreinw, with eight @

autotype plates, and eleven wood engravings. Price, Rs. 8. 4

The book will be completed in four or five volumes, the remaining volumes tobe ¥

issued as prepared. The exact period of publication cannot be guaranteed, nor the —

precise cost of the total work, bat every effort will be made to complete the publica- —

tion within three years at the outside, and to keep the cost within Re. 60 for the —

entire work. ‘

PUBLISHED BY THE

CALCUTTA CENTRAL PRESS COMPANY, LIMITED,

5, CounciL House STReEeEr.

aa NEW SERIES. VOL. LIII, CCLXII.

ee JOURNAL

-ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. LIII, Part II, No. III.—1884.

EDITED BY

que Natura. flIsTORY PECRETARY.

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

man, or produced by nature.”—Sir WILLIAM JONES.

‘S

ae “The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

*,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-

af don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 ¥ 59, Ludgate Hill.

eee in

LON ee ee

CALCUTTA:

Pears BY }. y. J HOMAS, AT THE PAPTIST Mission PRESS,

Th AND PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET, | |

} 1884. e

’

' S 2 ESS AER SCO

am: ee

ee eee ow

a Prise Gictaitee of postage) to Subscribers, Rs. 1-8.——To Non-Subscriters Bs, 2

- ; Price in England, 4 Shillings

-_ Issued April 22nd, 1885.

CONTENTS.

TV .—Some Rough Notes for the Construction of a Chapter in the

History of the Earth—By R. D. Otpnam, A. R. S. M.,,

Assistant Superintendent, Geological Survey of India, .orss.cveses

V.—A new Species of Simulium from Assam.—By Dr. Epwarp

Becuer, Vienna. Communicated and translated by the Na-

TURAL History Secretary (With Plate XIV), .........c..c05

V1I—Variations of Rainfall in Northern India during the Sinipok

Period—By A. N. Prarson, Esq., Officiating Meteorological

Reporter for Western India. stints mieten the PRESIDENT

(With Plate XI), .........ss00. th ssacvoane

~ Page |

187

199

201

Heterocerous Genus Trabala.—By F. Moors, F. Z. §., A. L. S.

Communicated by the NatuRAL History SECRETARY, .......005

VIII.—Phyllothelys, a remarkable Genus of Mantodea Som the

Oriental Region.—By J. Woop-Mason, Deputy ouparetn ions,

Indian Museum, Calcutta (With Plate XIT), .......... cc ces eee ees

IX.—Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No. 1. ed KE. T, Reciane

+B. A, Au as peialine ss paaeek

X.—List ar ‘the Geskiopar oes Tikes Gilets 3 7) ‘Disses uy Mr. J.

Woop-Mason, Part I,—Herrrocera.—By F. Moors, F. Z. S.,

A.L. 8. Communicated by the Naturau History Sucerrany,

XI—Revised Synopsis of the Species of Choeradodis, a remarkable

Genus of Mantodea common to India and Tropical America.—

By J. Woov-Mason, Officiating Superintendent, Indian Museum

and Professor of Comparative Anatomy ¥ Zoology, Medical

College, Calcutta (With 15 Woodcuts), sssisiseserersersessces oes

LP LOI ae es PELL PAL

205

206

210

234 —

238

‘CONTENTS

Ve i 7.2

oo. gor “or THE ‘NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. Il.) OF THE

af,

ee to Denies aah) BO Paguary and Pobouary 1089! (With Pls. IJ

. ‘VI. )—By S.E. Peat. On the recent Existence of Rhinoceros indicus

3 in the North Western Provinces, and a Description of a Tracing of an :

" Archaic Rock Painting from Mirzapur representing the Hunting of this

~ Animal. (With Pls. VII and VIII.)—By Joun Cocxpurn.

4 een Nos. 2, 3 & 4, (issued March 6th, 1884). On new and little-known

Rhopalocera from the Indian Region. (With Pls. I, IX, & X. )—By

% LioneL pg Nicr’yitus. Third List of Butterflies taken in Sikkim in

_ October, 1 with Notes on oat &c.— By Lionet pe Nice’viLye.

LEEW PLO OOOO nr wee"

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE — : 7

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57%, Park Street, Caleutta.

Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XXI (1843

to 1851); Vols. XXVI, XXVII (1857, 1858), and Vols.

XXX, XXXIIT to XLVITI, (1861, 1864 to 1881). .

Asiatic Researches, from els. VIL to XI, XIII, XVII, XTX and

XX, each at......... i see a ey eae ests .-Rs. 10

Ditto ditto, Index,. Re

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in ‘Arabic, ‘Persian, and Urdu, 5 eee

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translated into na with notes

and indexes, by H. Blochmann, M. A., 12

The Tabaqat-i-Nacixi. Translated by. Major HG. Raverty,

TOMasOLr iat ih acecsa tee ets

Aborigines of India, by B. H. Hodgson, Esq. ‘: B.C. ‘S: ie dcl era meee

THE BUTTERFLIES OF INDIA, BURMAH, AND CEYLON.

7 BY RO i |

Masor G. F. L. MARSHALL, R: E.,

AND

LIONEL vz NICE’VILLE.

A descriptive handbook of alk the known species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera

inhabiting that region, with notices of allied species occurring in the neighbouring ~ |

countries along the border : with numerous illustrations.

Vol. I, Part I, is now available at the Publishers, containing Glossary of Tech-

nical Terms, Notes on Collecting and Preserving, Synopsis of the Families and Sub-

families, and detailed descriptions of all the Danaine, with one coloured plate, nine q

autotype plates, and four wood engravings. Price, Rs. 6.

Part ii, which completes Vol. I, is also now available; and contains the detailed -

descriptions of all the Satyrine, Elymniine, Morphine, and Acreine, with eight ;

autotype plates, and eleven wood engravings. Price, Rs. 8.

The book will be completed in four or five volumes, the remaining volufites tobe |

issued as prepared. The exact period of publication cannot be guaranteed, nor the —

precise cost of the total work, but every effort will be made.to complete the publica-

tion within three years at the outside, and to keep the cost within Rs. 60 for the —

entire work.

PUBLISHED BY THE .

CALCUTTA CENTRAL PRESS COMPANY, LIMITED,

5, Councin House STREET,

Qo. cies Se} a .

TT ae

Ce tee i ri

Set Dane OS et Liles Bras

Peake ast Ka

e SEW SERIES. VOL, Litt ~ CCLXXIII.

ee SOLIRNAT |

: i? & Brig OF THE

|) ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

ee evel mits Part I, No. [V.1884.

JHE NATURAL fiistorY PECRETARY,

see

eS Foy

Aa ey

iy $s bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is* performed by

( man or produced by nature.”’”—S1r WILuiam JoNEs.

*,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,

ae _ to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India 3 or, in Lon-

§ don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 & 59, Ludgate Hill,

LOO en se ee nen rn

ar owe Ke

lee Gey CALCUTTA:

a PRINTED BY j. W. J HOMaS, AT THE PAPTISF Mission PREss,

x AND PUBLISHED BY THE

, ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

} t ~ -e SES 2 ooo a»,

4 Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Rs 1-8.—To Non-Subscribers Rs. 2

2 Issued Feb. 3rd, 1887.

CONTENTS.

. v7 | Page

PNGSES y orssateeeties tects r Avs Syd avila eas duandgaet id iaase chit aaa

Title and List of Contributors.

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. Il.) OF THE

- AOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1883.

Exh BNO! E: dias’ Unione 24th, 1883). Description of a new Species of

"the Rhopalocerous Genus Cyrestis from the Great Nicobar. (With Pl. 1.)

: —By Lionet pe Nicn’yittz. On the Measurement of Solar Radiation

by means of the Black-buib Thermometer in vacuo.—By S. A. Hitt,

ae eB, Se., Metl. Rep. to N. W. P. and Oudh. Notes of a Trip up the Dihing

ren Basin to Dopha Pani, §c., January and February, 1882. (With Pls. II

; - ; ee VI.)—By S. E. Puat. On the recent Existence of Rhinoceros indicus

n the North Western Provinces, and a Description of a Tracing of an

a vidds Rock Painting from Mirzapur representing the Hunting of this

Animal. (With Pls. VII and VIII.)—By Joun Cocxsurn.

Nos. 2, 3 & 4, (issued March 6th, 1884). On new and little-known

Bao falcosrs from the Indian Region. (With Pls. I, IX, & X. )—By

_. Lionen ve Nice'vinue. Third List of Butterflies taken in Sikkim in

= biter 1883, with Notes on Habits, §c.—By Lionut pe Nicz'vinix.

PUBLICATIONS

FOR SALE AT THE

ASIATIG SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

No. 57, Park Street, Calcutta.

RS. AS.

Journal Asiatic Society, Bengal, from Vols. XII to XXI (1843

to 1851); Vols. XXVI, XXVII (1857, 1858), and Vols:

XXX, XXXIII to XLVIII, (1861, 1864 to 1881).

Asiatic Researches, from Vols. VII to XI, XIII, XVII, XIX and

Ty MUO Gs ha Gc» cn tis he EMEA Sogas Ost ea s eBRRAAR Mas Nok Na oo Rs. 10 0

Byer taper cic: Sh bala bop Op a CREE ta Unive ty gine COO 2 Sear 5 0

Catalogue of Books and MSS. in Arabic, Persian, and Urdu, ... | eae |

The Ain-i-Akbari, Vol. I. Translated into English, with notes

and: indexes, by: H. Blochmann, My A., s...5..00.08 0 ie ee, 1B 4

The Tabaqat-i-Naciri. Translated by Major H. G. Raverty, :

tA oh ck char VP ERT POPE RES. ic Setace ROPES TR Te es PME ane poe Tf

Aborigines of India, by B. H. Hodgson, Hsq., B.C. S., 0... 38 0

THE BUTTERFLIES OF INDIA, BURMAH, AND CEYLON.

Mason G. F. L. MARSHALL, R. E.

AND

LIONEL pvr NICEH’VILLE.

A descriptive handbook of all the known species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera

inhabiting that region, with notices of allied species occurring in the neighbouring

countries along the border: with numerous illustrations.

Vol. I, Part I, is now available at the Publishers, containing Glossary of Tech-

nical Terms, Notes on Collecting and Preserving, Synopsis of the Families and Sub-

families, and detailed descriptions of all the Danain@, with one coloured plate, nine

autotype plates, and four wood engravings. Price, Rs. 6.

Part ii, which completes Vol. I, is also now available ; and contains the detailed

descriptions of all the Satyrine, Elymniine, Morphine, and Acreine, with eight

autotype plates, and eleven wood engravings. Price, Rs. 8.

The book will be completed in four or five volumes, the remaining volumes to be

issued as prepared. The exact period of publication cannot be guaranteed, nor the

precise cost of the total work, but every effort will be made to complete the publica-

tion within three years at the outside, and to keep the cost within Rs. 60 for the

entire work.

PUBLISHED BY THE

CALCUTTA CENTRAL PRESS COMPANY, LIMITED,

5, Councit House STREET.

tS PERSE